Skoda Octavia 5E5

OWNER´S MANUAL
Vehicle and Infotainment

ŠKODA OCTAVIA
Documentation of vehicle delivery
Date of vehicle handovera)  

ŠKODA Partner
Stamp and signature of the vendor
I confirm that I have taken delivery of the vehicle in good condition, have
received information on how to operate it correctly, and have had the
terms of the warranty explained to me.
Signature of the customer
Has the vehicle an extended warranty? Yes  No 

Limitations of the ŠKODA extended warrantyb)
Years: or km:
or
miles:
a)
Due to the requirements of generally binding country-specific regulations, the
date of first registration can be specified instead of the date of the vehicle hand-
b)
over.
(Whichever comes first).

5E0012720AP
1. Vehicle owner 2. Vehicle owner
This vehicle with the official registration This vehicle with the official registration
number number
(filled in by the vendor) belongs to:
belongs to:
Title, Name / Company:
Title, Name / Company:
Address:
Address:
Telephone:
Telephone:
ŠKODA Partner
ŠKODA Partner
Service consultant:
Service consultant:
Telephone:
Telephone:

5E0012720AP
Useful links Lane Assist » page 244
Offroad mode » page 213
Before starting off Parking
Adjusting the seat » page 84 Parking the vehicle » page 204
Adjusting the steering wheel » page 21 Parking aid » page 215
Exterior mirrors » page 82 Reversing camera » page 221
Head / tail lights » page 72
Care and maintenance
Windscreen wipers and washers » page 80
Service intervals » page 56
Heating and ventilation » page 114
Tyre pressure » page 280
Heated windscreen » page 78
Washing the vehicle » page 262
Instrument cluster Folding the windscreen wiper arms securely » page 296
Warning lights » page 39
Inspecting and replenishing
Display operation » page 51
Refuelling » page 266
Set the time » page 50
AdBlue® » page 270
Unlocking and opening Engine oil » page 274
Key-free unlocking (KESSY) » page 60 Windscreen washer fluid » page 274
Luggage compartment lid » page 64
Emergencies
Power windows » page 67
Emergency call » page 16
Bonnet » page 273
Vehicle tool kit » page 285
Connectivity Lamp replacement » page 301
Online Services – ŠKODA Connect » page 13 Replacing fuses » page 297
SmartLink+ » page 171 Changing a wheel » page 285
Connecting Infotainment to the Internet » page 168 Jump-starting » page 291
Hotspot (WLAN) » page 169 Towing the vehicle » page 292
Making telephone calls » page 158
Interesting tips
Configuration wizard » page 129
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual » page 10
Driving Tutorial videos » page 11
Automatic gearbox » page 205 Digital instrument cluster » page 38
Braking and stabilizing systems » page 211
START-STOP system » page 201
Adaptive cruise control » page 234
Seat belts 22 Lights and visibility 72
Table of Contents
Using seat belts 22 Light 72
Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for Inertia reel and belt tensioners 24 Interior lighting 76
new cars 6 Visibility 78
Airbag system 25
Accident data recorder (Event Data Windscreen wipers and washers 79
Description of the airbag system 25
Recorder) 8 Rear view mirror 81
Airbag deactivation 27
Radio equipment - Information on Directive Seats and head restraints 84
Transporting children safely 29
2014/53/EU 9 Front seats 84
Child seat 29
Rear seats 87
Fastening systems 32
About the Owner's Manual Headrests 88
Introductory information 10 Operation Seat heaters 89
General 10 Heated steering wheel 89
Cockpit 35
Printed Owner's Manual 10 Overview 34 Practical features 90
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual 10 Passenger compartment features 90
Tutorial videos 11 Instruments and warning lights 36
Electrical sockets 98
Application MyŠKODA App 11 Instrument cluster 36
Ashtray and cigarette lighter 99
Notes 12 Digital instrument cluster 38
Tablet holder 100
Warning lights 39
Online Services Transport of cargo 102
Information system 49
Luggage compartment 102
ŠKODA Connect 13 Driver information system 49
Variable loading floor in the luggage
Service package“ŠKODA Connect” 13 Operation of the information system 51 compartment (Estate) 110
“ŠKODA Connect” website 13 Driving data (Multifunction display) 52 Net partition 112
User and vehicle registration, activation of Menus in the display of the instrument Transport on the roof rack 113
online services 13 cluster 54
Managing online services 15 Service intervals 56 Heating and ventilation 114
Emergency call 16 Personalization 57 Heating, manual air conditioning system,
“Care Connect” Services 16 Climatronic 114
Unlocking and opening 59 Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and
“Infotainment Online” services 17 Unlocking and locking 59 ventilation) 119
Anti-theft alarm system 63
Safety
Manually operated tailgate 64 Infotainment
Passive Safety 19 Electric boot lid 64
Introductory information 122
General information 19 Window operation 67
Important information 122
Correct and safe seating position 19 Panoramic tilt / slide sunroof 69
Infotainment Overview 122
Table of Contents 3
Infotainment operation 125 Telephone 158 Driving
Infotainment operation 125 Introductory information 158
Voice control 130 Pairing and connecting 159 Starting-off and Driving 199
Updating the Infotainment software 132 Use the SIM card in the external module 162 Starting and stopping the engine 199
Telephone functions 163 START-STOPsystem 201
Infotainment settings - Columbus, Amundsen,
Text messages (SMS) 166 Brakes and Parking 203
Bolero 133
Manual gear changing and pedals 204
Infotainment system settings 133 Data connection 168
Automatic transmission 205
Radio menu settings 136 Internet connection 168
Running in the engine and economical
Media menu settings 137 Connecting via the CarStick device 168 driving 207
Image menu settings 137 Establishing a connection using a SIM card in Avoiding damage to your vehicle 209
Video DVD menu settings 137 the external module 169
Settings 137 Establishing a connection using the Bluetooth Assist systems 210
SmartLink+ menu settings 138 ® rSAP profile 169 General information 210
Navigation menu settings 139 Connecting via WLAN 169 Braking and stabilisation systems 211
Offroadmode 213
Infotainment settings - Swing 141 SmartLink 171
Parking aid (ParkPilot) 215
Infotainment system settings 141 Introductory information 171
Rear traffic alert and wizard for “Blind
Radio menu settings 142 Android Auto 172
spot”Monitoring 218
Media menu settings 143 Apple CarPlay 173
Rear View Camera 221
Import contactsTelephone menu settings 143 MirrorLink® 174
Park Assist 225
SmartLink+ menu settings 143 Application“ŠKODA OneApp” 175
Trailer manoeuvring assistant (Trailer Assist) 229
Radio 144 Navigation 176 Cruise Control System 231
service 144 Introductory information 176 Speed limiter 232
Search for destination and enter 179 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 234
Media 147
Saved destinations 182 Front Assist 239
service 147
Import your own goals 184 Select the driving mode (Driving Mode
Audio sources 149
Map 186 Selection) 241
Images 153 Route guidance 189 Proactive passenger protection (Crew Protect
Image viewer 153 Route 192 Assist) 243
Waypoint mode 194 Spurhalteassistent (Lane Assist) 244
Video DVD 154
Traffic reports 196 Traffic sign recognition 246
video player 154
Fatigue detection system 248
Media Command 156 Vehicle systems 198
Tyre pressure monitoring 249
Operation 156 CAR - Vehicle settings 198
Towing device and trailer 250
Hitch 250
Using hitch 255
4 Table of Contents
General Maintenance Technical data
Care and maintenance 260 Technical data 306
Service work, adjustments and technical Basic vehicle data 306
alterations 260 Vehicle-specific details per engine type 313
Cleaning and care 261
Index
Inspecting and replenishing 266
Fuel 266
AdBlue® and its refilling 270
Engine compartment 272
Engine oil 274
Coolant 275
Brake fluid 276
Vehicle battery 277
Wheels 279
Wheels and tyres 279
Operating in winter conditions 282
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help 284
Emergency equipment 284
Changing a wheel 285
Puncture repair kit 288
Jump-starting 291
Towing the vehicle 292
Remote control and removable light -
changing the battery 294
Emergency unlocking / locking of doors 295
Replacing windscreen wiper blades 296
Fuses and light bulbs 297
Fuses 297
Bulbs 301
Table of Contents 5
One of the conditions for service from the ŠKODA warranty is that all service
Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for new cars work has been carried out in a timely and adequate manner and in accordance
with ŠKODA AUTO provisions. It must be proven that service work has been
Materials defect liability carried out properly and in accordance with the ŠKODA AUTO provisions
Your ŠKODA Partner, as a vendor, is liable to you for material damage to your when raising a claim from the ŠKODA warranty. In the event of a missed serv-
new ŠKODA car, ŠKODA Genuine Parts or ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in ac- ice or failure to carry out a service according to the ŠKODA AUTO provisions,
cordance with statutory regulations and the purchase agreement. you may still be entitled to warranty claims as long as you can prove that the
ŠKODA warranty for new cars missed service or the failure to carry out a service according to the ŠKODA
As well as the materials defect liability, ŠKODA AUTO a.s. grants you the AUTO provisions was not the cause of the defect.
ŠKODA warranty for new cars (hereinafter referred to as “ŠKODA warranty),” ŠKODA warranty excludes parts that are subject to natural wear such as tyres,
according to the conditions described below. spark plugs, wiper blades, brake pads and brake discs, clutch, bulbs, synchron-
As part of the ŠKODA warranty, ŠKODA AUTO will ensure the following serv- iser rings, batteries etc. The ŠKODA warranty also does not cover faults to
ices. bodywork, installations or conversions provided by third-parties, or vehicle
▶ Free repair of faulty components or vehicle defects that occur within two faults caused as a result. The same applies to accessories that are not factory
years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty. installed and/or delivered.
▶ Free repair of paintwork defects on your vehicle that occur within three In addition, this warranty does not apply if the defect was caused by one of the
years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty. following:
▶ Free repair of rust perforation to the bodywork of your vehicle that occurs ▶ Unauthorized use, improper handling (e.g. use in racing competitions or over-
within twelve years from the start of the warranty. Only rust perforation of loading), improper care and maintenance or unapproved modification to your
body panels from the inside to the outside is included in the definition of rust vehicle.
perforation on bodywork and covered by the ŠKODA warranty. ▶ Non-compliance with provisions in the Owner's Manual or other factory-sup-
The start of warranty is the date on which the first buyer purchases the new plied instructions.
▶ External causes or influences (e.g. accidents, hail, flooding etc.).
cars from the ŠKODA Partner1). The ŠKODA Partner must insert this date into
▶ Parts fitted or connected on or in the vehicle whose use has not been ap-
the manufacturer's systems accordingly for your car identified by the Vehicle
Identification Number. proved by ŠKODA AUTO, or modification of the vehicle in a manner not ap-
proved by ŠKODA AUTO (e.g. tuning).
Vehicle repairs may be carried out either by replacing the faulty part or by re- ▶ Damage caused by you that was not immediately seen to by a specialist ga-
pairing it. Replaced parts become the property of the ŠKODA Service Partner. rage or was not rectified properly.
There shall be no further claims arising from the ŠKODA warranty. In particu- It is the customer's responsibility to prove that it was not the cause.
lar, there shall be no claims for replacement, cancellation, provision of a cour-
tesy vehicle for the duration of repairs or compensation for damages. This ŠKODA warranty does not affect the purchaser's statutory rights from
materials defect liability from the vehicle vendor and other potential claims
The ŠKODA warranty is valid at any ŠKODA service partner. from product liability laws. 
1)
Due to the requirements of generally binding country-specific regulations,
the date of first registration can be specified instead of the date of the vehi-
cle handover.
6 Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for new cars

Mobility warranty
The mobility warranty provides a sense of security when travelling in your ve-
hicle.
As part of the mobility warranty, if your car breaks down as a result of an unex-
pected fault when you are on the move, you can access services to ensure
your continued mobility. These services include the following: Breakdown
service at the breakdown location and towing to the ŠKODA Service Partner,
technical assistance by phone or on-site operation.
If your vehicle is not repaired on the same day, the ŠKODA Service Partner
may provide further services as required, such as replacement transportation
(bus, train etc.) or a courtesy vehicle etc.
More information regarding terms and conditions for the provision of a mobili-
ty warranty for your vehicle can be obtained from your ŠKODA Partner. They
will also provide you with detailed terms and conditions for the mobility war-
ranty with respect to your vehicle. In the event that there is no mobility war-
ranty coverage available for your vehicle, you should check with any ŠKODA
Service Partner about the possibility of a subsequent agreement.
Optional ŠKODA extended warranty
If you opted for a ŠKODA extended warranty when purchasing your new car,
the two-year ŠKODA warranty with regards to all free warranty repairs is ex-
tended by the period you chose or until the chosen mileage limit has been
reached, whichever occurs first.
The previously mentioned paint warranty and the warranty against rust perfo-
ration are unaffected by the ŠKODA extended warranty.
The ŠKODA extended warranty does not apply to external and internal foils.
The information on the detailed conditions of the ŠKODA extended warranty is
provided by your ŠKODA partner.
Note
The ŠKODA extended warranty is only available in some countries.
Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for new cars 7

Reading out the EDR requires special equipment with specific access authori-
Accident data recorder (Event Data Recorder) zation and a legally prescribed diagnostic connection in the vehicle “on-board
The vehicle is equipped with a device that serves as an accident data recorder diagnostics”), and the ignition will need to be switched on.
(referred to solely as “EDR” from this point). The main purpose of the EDR is ŠKODA AUTO will not read or otherwise process any accident data from the
data recording during a traffic accident or other exceptional traffic conditions EDRwithout the approval of the vehicle owner or other person authorised for
(referred to solely as “accident” from this point), where the restraint systems use of the vehicle. Exceptions are specified in the contractual arrangements, or
are activated. these are subject to generally binding regulations.
The EDR records the accident in a short time (approximately 10 s), by showing Due to the legal requirements, ŠKODA AUTO is required to monitor the quality
the following information, for example: and safety of its products, meaning that it is only entitled to use data from the
▶ The function of certain vehicle systems, EDR for monitoring the product on the market, for further research and devel-
▶ The driver and passenger seat belt status, opment, and to improve the quality of the vehicle's safety systems. For the
▶ The actuation of the brake and accelerator pedal, purpose of research and development, ŠKODA AUTO will also make data avail-
▶ The speed of the vehicle at the time of the accident. able to third parties. This is done exclusively in anonymous form, i.e. without
any connection to the specific vehicle, the vehicle owner or other authorised
The recorded data helps with the analysis of how the vehicle systems were be- user.
having shortly before, during and shortly after the accident, thereby ensuring
better information regarding the circumstances under which the accident oc-
curred, which lead to material damage and possibly to personal injury.
The data relating to assist systems in the vehicle is then also recorded. In addi-
tion to the information on whether the affected systems were switched on or
off at the relevant time, whether these were only partially available or were in-
active, there is also the possibility of tracking whether these vehicle functions
controlled, accelerated or braked the vehicle during the accident. Depending
on the vehicle equipment, these functions may include, for example:
▶ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
▶ Lane Assist
▶ Park Assist
▶ Parking aid
▶ Emergency brake function (Front Assist)
EDR data is only recorded if an accident causes the restraint systems to be ac-
tivated. Under normal driving conditions there is no data recording and there is
no audio or video recording of the vehicle interior or the vehicle environment.
Personal data such as name, gender, age or place where the accident occurred
is also not stored in the EDR. However, third parties such as law enforcement
authorities may use certain resources to connect EDR content to other data
sources, and therefore deduce the identification of some of the people in-
volved in the accident when investigating the causes of the accident.
8 Accident data recorder (Event Data Recorder)

Radio equipment - Information on Directive 2014/53/EU
Fig. 1
ŠKODA websites
Your vehicle has various radio systems.

The manufacturers of these radio systems declare that these systems comply
with the requirements of Directive 2014/53/EU.
To display Information on Directive 2014/53 / EU and the Declaration of
Conformity proceed as follows.
1. Scan the QR code » Fig. 1 or enter the following address in your web
browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
2. Click on “Choose your manual”.
3. Select the desired model - a menu with the manuals is displayed.
4. Select the construction period as well as the language.
5. Select the Information on Directive 2014/53 / EU file in pdf format.
Radio equipment - Information on Directive 2014/53/EU 9

About the Owner's Manual Printed Owner's Manual
The printed Owner's Manual includes the most important information relating
Introductory information to vehicle operation. For complete information, see the electronic version of
the Owner's Manual.
General
Read this Owner's Manual carefully, because the operation in accordance with Electronic version of the Owner's Manual
these instructions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle.
When using the vehicle, the universally applicable country-specific legal re- Fig. 2
quirements (e.g. for transporting children, deactivating the airbag, tyre use, ŠKODA websites
road traffic etc.) must always be observed.
Always pay attention when driving! As the driver, you are fully responsible for
road safety.
The Owner's Manual applies to all body variants of the vehicle, all related
model versions as well as all equipment levels.
The Owner's Manual describes all possible equipment variants without identi-
The electronic version of the Owner's Manual includes full information regard-
fying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equip-
ing vehicle operation.
ment. Consequently, this vehicle does not contain all of the equipment com-
ponents described in the Owner's Manual. The electronic version of the Owner's Manual is available on the ŠKODA web-
site and in the MyŠKODA App mobile application.
The scope of equipment in your vehicle refers to your purchase contract for
the vehicle. For any questions regarding the scope of equipment, please con- Displaying the electronic version of the Owner's Manual
tact a ŠKODA Partner. › Scan the QR code » Fig. 2 or enter the following address in your web brows-
The pictures in the Owner's Manual are for illustrative purposes only. The illus- er.
trations can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended to http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
provide general information.
› Click on “Choose your manual”.
ŠKODA AUTO pursues a policy of ongoing product and model development › Select the desired model.
with all vehicles. Changes in terms of supply scope are possible at any time › Select the construction period as well as the language.
with regard to design, equipment and technology. The information listed in the › Select the desired Owner's Manual.
Owner's Manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going
to press.
Therefore legal claims cannot be made based on the technical data, illustra-
tions and information contained in the Owner's Manual.
We recommend that the web pages that are referred to in the Owner's Man-
ual are displayed using the classic view. If the web pages are displayed using
the mobile view, they may not contain all necessary information.
10 About the Owner's Manual

Tutorial videos The MyŠKODA App application contains, for example, the electronic version of
the Owner's Manual, quick tips regarding how to resolve certain situations in
relation to the vehicle or a description of the Simply Clever solutions.
Fig. 3
Tutorial videos You can use this application to get in touch with a ŠKODA partner and to use
its services or to access the breakdown service quickly.
The application can also be used as an RSS reader of favourite websites.
After entering the following address into the web browser, the website is
opened with information on the ŠKODA mobile applications.
http://go.skoda.eu/service-app
The operation of some vehicle functions can be displayed in the form of video Installing the MyŠKODA App application
instructions. › Scan the QR code » Fig. 4 .
Show menu with video instructions
› Scan the QR code » Fig. 3 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals-videos
Note
The video instructions are only available in some language versions.
Application MyŠKODA App
Fig. 4 The MyŠKODA App application is available for devices with the
Android (Google) or iOS (Apple) operating system.
Notes
Terms used
“Specialist” - Workshop - a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks
for ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist can be a ŠKODA Partner, a ŠKODA
Service Partner, or an independent workshop.
“ŠKODA Service Partner” - A workshop that has been contractually author-
ised by ŠKODA AUTO or its distribution partner to perform service work
on ŠKODA vehicles and to sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
“ŠKODA Partner” - A company that has been authorised by ŠKODA AUTO or
its distribution partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and, when applicable,
to service them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell ŠKODA Genuine
Parts.
Text notes
“Press” - Short press (e.g. a button) within 1 s
“Hold” - Long press (e.g. a button) for more than 1 s
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the for-
ward direction of travel of the vehicle.
Explanation of symbols
→ Marker to the next operation step
WARNING
Texts with this symbol draw attention to threats of a serious accident, in-
jury or loss of life.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible
inoperability of some systems.
Note
Texts with this symbol contain additional information.
12 About the Owner's Manual

The availability of the services is dependent on the type of vehicle and on the
Online Services type of Infotainment system installed in the vehicle. Some services are availa-
ble only in certain countries.
ŠKODA Connect
Note
Service package“ŠKODA Connect” The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
The “ŠKODA Connect” online services extend the vehicle and Infotainment the contract. During this period of validity, interim content changes to these
functions with the “Care Connect” and “Infotainment Online” service pack- services are possible.
ages.
“ŠKODA Connect” website
“ŠKODA Connect” online services are not included in the vehicle delivery. Their
order is made separately via the website “ŠKODA Connect Portal” » page 13,
Website “ŠKODA Connect Portal”. Rights and obligations of the Parties with
respect to the provision of these services are governed by a separate agree-
ment.
“Care Connect” online services
“Care Connect” services include the following features.
▶ Emergency, information and breakdown call. Fig. 5 Starting the ŠKODA Connect Portal website
▶ Proactive service offering to connect with your ŠKODA service partner.
▶ Remote access to the vehicle using the “ŠKODA Connect” application and The “ŠKODA Connect” website contains information about the online services
the “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website. and their functions, access to the “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website, as well as
the option to download the “ŠKODA Connect” application.
For the “Care Connect”Services to work, the vehicle must be within range of a
mobile network. The “ŠKODA Connect” website can be opened by scanning the QR code
» Fig. 5 or by entering the following address in your web browser.
“Infotainment Online” online services
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity
The “Infotainment Online” services extend the Infotainment functions, e.g.
with the following functions.
▶ Weather forecast.
User and vehicle registration, activation of online services
▶ Filling station search with information on fuel prices. Website “ŠKODA Connect Portal”
▶ Online traffic information.
▶ Online destination search.
The Infotainment must be connected to the Internet for the “Infotainment

Online” Services to work» page 168.
Terms of use and availability of services
Current “conditions for the use of the user account” incl. “declaration on the
protection of personal data” can be found on the “ŠKODA Connect Portal”
website » page 13, Website “ŠKODA Connect Portal”. Fig. 6 Starting the ŠKODA Connect Portal website 
ŠKODA Connect 13
The use of the “ŠKODA Connect” online services requires prior user and vehi- Electronic version of the instructions for registration and activation of
cle registration on the “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website as well as activation services
of online services in the Infotainment system. Current information on registration and activation of Online Services can be
found in the electronic version of the instructions for the Online Services on
The “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website can be opened by scanning the QR code
the “ŠKODA Connect” website.
» Fig. 6 or by entering the following address in your web browser.
The electronic version of the instructions can be opened by scanning the QR
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-portal
code » Fig. 8 or by entering the following address in the web browser.
Information on registering for and activating online services http://go.skoda.eu/connect-manual
Note
For help with registration, activation as well as the Internet connection, please
contact a ŠKODA service partner.
Activation in Infotainment
› Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Fig. 7 Instruction video on how to register for and activate services › Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → ŠKODA Connect
(Online Services) → Registration.
› Enter and confirm the registration PIN code received during user and vehicle
registration on the “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website.
› Wait until the message Registration complete. is displayed (can take several mi-
nutes)
› Confirm the message.
Note
Fig. 8 Electronic version of the instructions for registration and activa- ■ Availability of a GPS signal and a mobile network is required for activation.
tion of services ■ In vehicles that only have “Infotainment Online” Services, a GPS signal must
be available and the Infotainment must be connected to the Internet for acti-
Instruction video on how to register for and activate services vation.
■ The list of services can be displayed » page 15, Display of service manage-
Registration and activation are carried out in accordance with the instruction
video. ment.
The instruction video can be opened by scanning the QR code » Fig. 7 or enter- Deleting/switching the vehicle user
ing the following address into the web browser.
Deleting the user
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-video
› Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → ŠKODA Connect
(Online Services) → Registration.
› Tap the function surface Delete owner → Delete and confirm the delete process. 
14 Online Services
Changing the user Switching “Care Connect” services on/off
› Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment. By switching the “Care Connect” services off, the services relating to sending
› Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → ŠKODA Connect vehicle information and personal data, which are essential for the provision of
(Online Services) → Registration. services, are deactivated.
› Tap the function surface New owner → Transfer ownership. › Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → ŠKODA Connect (on-
› Enter and confirm the registration PIN code received during registration of line services) → Services Management → Care Connect.
the new user and during vehicle registration on the ŠKODA Connect Portal
website. Switching “Infotainment Online” services on/off
› If necessary, confirm the change of user by tapping the function surface › Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → ŠKODA Connect (on-
Change main users. line services) → Services Management → Infotainment Online.
Note Note
By deleting the registered vehicle in the user account on the “ŠKODA Connect The emergency call remains fully functional after activation of the Private mode
Portal” website, the user is also deleted in the Infotainment system. function or after deactivation of “Care Connect” services. The functions of the
information and breakdown call are limited.
Managing online services
Status Symbols of Online Services
Display of service management
Fig. 9
In Services Management, it is possible to display information about the online
Status symbols of online serv-
services, the validity of their license, or to switch the services on/off.
ices
› Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → ŠKODA Connect (on-
line services) → Services Management.
› To display the designations and the status of the services, select the de-
sired service.
› For detailed information about the service tap the function surface  .
› To switch the services on/off, tap the function surface with “Checkbox”. In the Infotainment » Fig. 9 status line, information on the status of the Online
Services is displayed.
Switching online services on/off in the Infotainment system
A The “ŠKODA Connect” online services are available. At the same time the
Switching Private mode function on/off symbol of the connected network type can be displayed.
By switching the Private mode function on, the services relating to sending vehi- B The connection to the “ŠKODA Connect” online services is being estab-
cle information and personal data, which are essential for the provision of serv- lished.
ices, are deactivated. C Localisation services are restricted or disabled. Detailed information about
› Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → ŠKODA Connect (on- online services can be displayed » page 15, Display of service management.
line services) → Services Management → Private mode. D Localisation services are enabled. Detailed information about online serv-
ices can be displayed » page 15, Display of service management. 
ŠKODA Connect 15
localisation services The system status is displayed after the ignition is switched on, by the illumi-
For the complete functionality of some online services, activated localisation nation of warning lamp A » Fig. 10.
services are required. ▶ Green - the system is functional.
Localisation services include, for example, information on the last parking posi- ▶ Red - there is a fault in the system.
tion, area notification or speed notification.
Note
When localisation services are active, one of the following symbols will be dis-
The emergency service is functional even without user registration and activa-
played in the status line in the Infotainment screen D » Fig. 9.
tion of services.
Emergency call
“Care Connect” Services
Proactive service
Fig. 10 Emergency call button
Serious accident
In the event of an accident with an air bag or belt tensioner release, a call to Fig. 11 Buttons and warning lights of the Care Connect services
the emergency call centre is automatically started. The emergency call centre
The proactive service provides an overview of the technical status of your ve-
simultaneously receives information on the accident, e.g. the location and se-
hicle and on any due service events. It is also possible to establish a connection
verity of the accident, the number of occupants with fastened seatbelts and
to the information or breakdown call centre.
the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Buttons and warning lights of “Care Connect”services » Fig. 11
Minor accident
The option for establishing a connection to the emergency call centre or to the A Warning light for system status.
breakdown service appears in the Infotainment screen. B Press this button to establish a call to the information number in the
event of problems with the online services or for information regarding
Manual start of a call with the emergency call centre the products and services of the ŠKODA brand.
› Press and hold the B » Fig. 10 button. C Press this button to establish a call to the breakdown number in the event
› In the Infotainment screen or on the instrument cluster display, confirm the of a breakdown.
connection setup.
The system status is displayed after the ignition is switched on, by the illumi-
The call can be started manually, for example, if you are reporting an accident
nation of warning lamp A » Fig. 11. 
in which you were not directly involved.
16 Online Services
▶ Green - the system is functional. Note
▶ Red - there is a fault in the system.
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this interim period of validity, content changes of these
Note
services are possible. Current information can be found on the “ŠKODA
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of Connect” website» page 13.
the contract. During this period of validity, interim content changes to these
Connect” website» page 13. “Infotainment Online” services
Main menu and overview of services

Remote access to the vehicle
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen.
Fig. 13
Main menu
Fig. 12 ŠKODA Connect application
With the remote access to the vehicle service, you can access some vehicle
functions via the “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website or the “ŠKODA Connect”
application installed on your mobile device. These services extend the functionality of the Internet-connected Infotain-
ment.
opened with information on the ŠKODA mobile applications. To display the main menu » Fig. 13, tap the  sensor field and then the func-
tion surface  .
 News from the RSS channels set in the user profile on the “ŠKODA
Installing the “ŠKODA Connect” mobile application Connect Portal” website
› Scan the QR code » Fig. 12 .  Online search for filling stations with information on fuel prices » page 181
Remote access to the vehicle includes, for example, the following services.  Online search for car parks with information on free parking spaces
▶ Driving data. » page 181
▶ Vehicle condition.
 Weather forecast near the vehicle position, the destination of the route or
▶ Last parking position.
in the vicinity of the selected location
▶ Vehicle unlocking and vehicle locking.
▶ Online operation of the auxiliary heater.
 Online destination search » page 179
 Import of the destinations created in the user profile on the “ŠKODA
Connect Portal” website » page 185
 Import of the routes created in the user profile on the “ŠKODA Connect
Portal” website » page 193 
ŠKODA Connect 17
 Online updating of the navigation data (valid for the infotainment Colum-
bus) and import of POI Categories » page 177
 Conditions for the use of online services
 Settings of Online Services » page 135
For more information on the available services, see the “ŠKODA Connect”
website» page 13.
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this interim period of validity, content changes of these
Connect” website» page 13.
18 Online Services
Safety Driving safety
Passive Safety In the interests of traffic safety, the following information must be observed.
▶ Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, (e.g.
General information by your passengers or mobile phone calls).
▶ Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, (e.g. due to medication, al-
 Introduction cohol or drugs).
▶ Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
This section of the manual includes important information on the subject of ▶ Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather conditions.
passive safety. We have combined everything here which you should be famili- ▶ Take regular breaks on long journeys (at least every two hours).
ar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, safety of children and any-
thing similar. Correct and safe seating position
Other important safety information can also be found in the following chap-
ters of this Owner´s Manual. The Owner´s Manual should therefore always be  Introduction
in the vehicle.
Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not
Before setting off change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt the
correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is moving.
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please The following list contains instructions for the Passenger which, if not ob-
pay attention to the following points before setting off. served, may cause serious injuries or death.
▶ Check the function of the lighting and turn signal systems. ▶ Do not lean against the dash panel.
▶ Check the function of the wipers and check the wiper blades for wear. ▶ Do not put your feet on the dash panel.
Check the windscreen washer fluid level.
▶ Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside.
The following list contains instructions for all Passengers which, if not ob-
▶ Adjust the rear-view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed. Ensure
served, may cause serious injuries or death.
▶ Do not sit only on the front part of the seat.
that the mirrors are not covered. ▶ Do not sit facing to the side.
▶ Check the tyre inflation pressure.
▶ Do not lean out of the window.
▶ Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level.
▶ Do not put your limbs out of the window.
▶ Secure all items of luggage.
▶ Do not put your feet on the seat cushion. 
▶ Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the
vehicle.
▶ Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid.
▶ Ensure that no parts and components are visibly loose in the vehicle.
▶ Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals.
▶ Protect children by using a suitable child seat» page 29, Transporting chil-
dren safely.
▶ Adopt the correct seated position. Instruct your passengers to assume the
correct seated position» page 19, Correct and safe seating position.
Passive Safety 19
WARNING  Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel
■ The adjustable seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match can be reached with your arms at a slight angle.
the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened proper-  Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel
ly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers. and your chest is at least 25 cm » Fig. 14 - A .
■ Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.  Adjust the headrest so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
Children must be fastened » page 29, Transporting children safely with a level as the upper part of your head (not for seats with integrated headr-
suitable restraint system. ests) » Fig. 14 - C .
■ The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving, as this  Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 22, Using seat belts.
will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system – risk of
injury! WARNING
■ Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel, and a dis-
WARNING tance of at least 6 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height of
By sitting incorrectly, the occupant is risking life-threatening injuries. the knee airbag. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the
airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
■ When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the out-
Driver’s correct seated position er edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position » Fig. 14. Never hold the
steering wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the
middle, inner edge of the steering wheel or similar). Otherwise, in the event
of airbag deployment, you could suffer serious injury to the arms, hands
and head.
■ Ensure that no objects are located in the driver's footwell, as they could
lodge in the pedal system whilst driving. You would then no longer be able
to operate the clutch, brake or acceleration pedals.
Fig. 14 Correct seated position for the driver/correct steering wheel

position
 Read and observe on page 20 first.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident,
the following instructions must be observed.
 Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals
can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs.
 For vehicles equipped with driver knee airbags, adjust the driver's seat in a
forward/back direction so that there is a gap of at least 6 cm between the
legs and the dashboard in the vicinity of the knee airbag » Fig. 14 - B .
20 Safety
Adjusting the steering wheel position Passenger’s correct seating position
For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the follow-
ing instructions must be observed.
 Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front pas-
senger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so
that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed.
 Adjust the headrests so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
level as the upper part of your head » Fig. 14 on page 20 - C (not for seats
with integrated headrests).
Fig. 15 Adjusting the steering wheel position
 Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 22, Using seat belts.
 Read and observe on page 20 first. WARNING
The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted. ■ Ensure a distance of at least 25 cm to the dashboard, otherwise the air-
bag system will not be able to protect you properly - risk of death!
› Swing the safety lever under the steering wheel in the direction of arrow 1 ■ Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven – nev-
» Fig. 15. er place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
› Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. The steering wheel can be surface of the seats! You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it be-
adjusted in direction of arrow 2 . comes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an air-
› Pull the holder in arrow direction 3 until the stop. bag is deployed, you could suffer fatal injuries by adopting an incorrect
WARNING seated position!
■ Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when
the vehicle is stationary! Passengers’ correct seating position on the rear seats
■ The safety lever must always be locked after adjusting so that the steer-
ing wheel cannot accidentally change position – risk of accident!  Read and observe on page 20 first.
For passenger safety on the rear seats and to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of an accident, the following information must be observed.
 Adjust the headrests so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
level as the upper part of the head » Fig. 14 on page 20 - C .
 Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 22, Using seat belts.
Passive Safety 21
WARNING (Continued)
Seat belts
■ Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jack-
Using seat belts et) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of
the seat belts.
 Introduction ■ Do not attach clamps or similar objects to the belt - the function of the
belt retractor could be restricted.
Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an ■ The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when
accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival the seat backrests are correctly locked into position » page 87.
in the event of a major accident.
WARNING
The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy considerably. They also prevent un-
controlled movements which, in turn, may well result in severe injuries. Information on the care and maintenance of safety belts
■ The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may im-
When transporting children, observe the following information» page 29, pair the proper operation of the inertia reel » page 265.
Transporting children safely. ■ The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not at-
tempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
WARNING
■ Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If parts of the
■ Put the seat belt on before starting any journey! This also applies to other belt system become damaged (e.g. the belt webbing, the belt connections,
passengers - there is a danger of injury! the inertia reel, the locking part etc.), the respective seat belt must be re-
■ Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seated
placed by a specialist garage immediately.
» page 19, Correct and safe seating position. ■ Seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident must be re-
■ The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
placed by a specialist garage. Also check the seat belt anchors.
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
WARNING Correct routing of seat belt

Information on dealing with the safety belts
■ The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twis-
ted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
■ Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it.
WARNING
Information on the proper use of safety belts
■ Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the
belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder - on no ac-
count across your neck.
■ No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt to- Fig. 16 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap
gether. belt/Routing of belt webbing for an expectant mother 
■ The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
22 Safety
WARNING
■ Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in
minor accidents.
■ A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
■ The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. specta-
cles, ball-point pens, keys, etc.). Such objects can cause injury.
Fig. 17 Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
Fastening and unfastening seat belts
It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the
maximum protection.
The shoulder part of the belt must run approximately over the middle of your
shoulder (never across your neck) and fit well against your upper body » Fig. 16
- .
The lap part of the belt must run lap part of the belt must run in front of the
pelvis (must never run across your stomach) and must always fit snugly
» Fig. 16 - .
Fig. 18 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt
In the case of pregnant women, the lap part of the belt must be positioned as
low as possible on the pelvis to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdo-  Read and observe on page 22 first.
men » Fig. 16 - .
Before fastening
Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
› Push the seat belt guide loop upwards in the direction of arrow» Fig. 17 - . › Adjust the headrest properly (does not apply to seats with integrated headr-
ests).
› or: push together the mechanism in the direction of arrows 1 and push the › Adjust the seat (applies to the front seats).
return pulley downwards in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 17 - .
› Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has › Adjust the belt height (applies to the front seats).
correctly locked in place and that the belt is blocked reliably » page 24, Iner- Fasten
tia reels. › Slowly pull the belt over the chest and pelvis.
› Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle for the seat » Fig. 18 -  until it
audibly clicks into place.
› Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
Release
› Hold the lock tongue and press the red button in the belt buckle » Fig. 18 - .
The lock tongue pops out. 
Seat belts 23
› Guide the belt back by hand so that the seat belt does not twist and the seat Note
belt strap rolls up fully. ■ The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened.
WARNING
■ Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an in-
dication of a fire in the vehicle.
The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked, otherwise the belt tongue
will not lock in place properly.
Inertia reel and belt tensioners
Inertia reels
Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel.
When pulling slowly on the seat belt, the belt can move freely. When pulling
sharply on the seat belt, the movement is locked by the inertia reel. The belts
also lock when full braking, when the car accelerates, when driving downhill
and when cornering.
WARNING
If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have the inertia reel
inspected immediately by a specialist garage.
Belt tensioners
Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced
by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three-point seat
belts.
If there is a collision with a certain severity the seat belts are tightened by the
belt tensioner so that unwanted body motion is prevented.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of a roll-over, minor collisions or
in accidents in which no major forces are produced.
WARNING
■ Any work on the belt tensioner system, including the removal and installa-
tion of system components because of other repair work, must only be car-
ried out by a specialist garage.
■ If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace
the entire system.
24 Safety
The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with
Airbag system the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the remaining body parts is
thus reduced.
Description of the airbag system ▶ Front airbags - head and upper body. The airbags can be identified by the
 Introduction lettering  featured on the steering wheel and on the dash panel on the
passenger side.
▶ Driver's knee airbag - Legs. The airbag features the lettering  on the
As a supplement to the seat belts, the airbag system provides additional pas-
dashboard on the driver's side.
senger protection in the event of severe frontal and side collisions. ▶ Side airbags - for the entire upper body (chest, stomach, pelvis) on the side
The best possible protective effect of the airbag can only be achieved if the next to the door. The side air bags are marked by a label with the letter-
seat belts are applied properly. The airbag is not a substitute for the seat ing on the front seat backrests. The rear side airbags are provided with
belts. the lettering  in between the entrance area and the rear seat backrest.
▶ Head airbags - head and neck. The airbags are provided with the lettering
The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the warning light 
in the instrument cluster » page 43.  marked on the B-pillar cladding.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the
System description following parts.
▶ Individual airbags.
▶ Warning light  in the instrument cluster » page 43.
▶ Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 28.
▶ Warning light for the front passenger airbag in the middle of the dash panel
» page 28.
Airbag deployment
Fig. 19 Airbag installation points
Airbag installation points » Fig. 19

A Front airbags
B Driver’s knee airbag
C Front side airbags
D Rear side airbags
Fig. 20 Inflated airbags
E Head airbags
The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on. 
Airbag system 25
When triggered, the airbag is filled with gas and unfolds. The inflation of the Safety instructions
airbag is carried out in a fraction of a second.
Upon inflation of the airbag, smoke is released. This is not an indication of a Fig. 21
fire in the vehicle. Safe distance from the steering
Triggering conditions wheel and the dashboard
It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to
the airbag system in every situation. Important here is the hardness of the ob-
ject on which the vehicle impacts, the impact angle, the vehicle speed, etc.
The deceleration during impact plays an important role in the deployment of
the airbags. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured remains
below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit, the airbags WARNING
are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the
General information
bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
■ The seat belts and the airbag system can only offer proper protection
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal if the driver and passengers are seated properly » page 19.
collision. ■ The airbag develops considerable forces when triggered, which can lead
▶ Driver’s front airbag. to serious injuries or even death if the correct seating position or seated
▶ Front passenger airbag. position is not observed. This applies in particular to children who are trans-
▶ Driver’s knee airbag. ported without using a suitable child safety seat » page 31.
■ If there is a fault, have the airbag system checked immediately by a spe-
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side
cialist garage. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in
collision.
▶ Front side airbag.
the event of an accident.
■ The airbag system must be replaced if it has been deployed.
▶ Rear side airbag.
■ In the area of the front airbag and the knee airbag, the surface of the
▶ Head airbag.
steering wheel and the dashboard should be cleaned using only a dry cloth
When an airbag is deployed, the following events occur. or one that has been dampened with water.
▶ The hazard warning lights are switched on.
▶ All doors are unlocked. WARNING
▶ The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.
Information about front airbags
▶ The interior light comes on (if the automatic operation of the interior light is
■ It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a minimum
switched on - switch ). distance of 25 cm from the steering wheel or the control panel » Fig. 21 -
When there is no air bag deployment? A , If you do not observe this distance, the airbag cannot protect you - risk
With minor frontal and side collisions, rear collision, overturning of the vehicle to life! The front seats and the head restraints must always be correctly ad-
or vehicle roll-over there is no airbag deployment. justed to match the body size of the occupant.
■ The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat » page 27, Airbag deactivation. If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal in-
juries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. 
26 Safety
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
■ No other persons, animals or objects may be positioned in front of the oc- ■ No excessive forces, such as knocks, kicks etc., should be exerted on the
cupants on the front seats in the deployment area of the front air bags. seat backrests - there is a risk of damage to the side air bags. The side air-
■ The steering wheel and the surface of the dashboard on the front passen- bags would not be deployed in such a case!
ger side must not have stickers attached, covered or modified in any other ■ Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passen-
way. No parts (e.g. cup holders, mobile phone mounts etc.( should be ger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by ŠKODA. In view
mounted in the vicinity of the airbag installation locations and in the airbag of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of
deployment area. non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the pro-
■ Never place objects on the surface of the dashboard on the front passen- tective function of the side airbag.
ger side. ■ Have any damage to the original seat covers or stitching at the installa-
tion point of the side airbags repaired immediately by a specialist garage.
WARNING
Information about knee airbags WARNING
■ Adjust the driver's seat in a forward/back direction so that there is a gap Information on the use of the airbag system
of at least 6 cm between the legs and the dashboard in the vicinity of the ■ Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
knee airbag » Fig. 21 - B . If it is not possible to meet this requirement due system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the seat)
to your body size, visit a specialist garage. must only be carried out by a specialist garage. Further information
■ The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel be- » page 261.
low the steering column not have stickers attached, be covered or modi- ■ No modifications should be made to parts of the airbag system, to the
fied in any other way. Nothing may be attached to the cover of the airbag front bumper or to the body.
module or located within the immediate vicinity. ■ Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might re-
■ Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects (bunch of keys etc.) to the ig- sult in the airbag being deployed.
nition key. These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and
can cause injuries.
Airbag deactivation
WARNING
Deactivating airbags
Information about for side and head airbags
■ No objects (e.g. sun visors turned towards the windows) should be loca- The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated switch
ted in the deployment area of the side and head airbags. No accessories » Fig. 22 on page 28 - .
(e.g. cup holders etc.) should be fitted to the doors - risk of injury! We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA service partner to deactivate any other
■ Hang only light clothing on clothes hooks in the vehicle. Do not leave any
airbags.
heavy or sharp objects in the pockets of the clothing. Do not use clothes
hangers to hang the clothing. The airbag deactivation is indicated by the warning light  » page 43. 
■ The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Further informa-
tion » page 261.
Airbag system 27
Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones › Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » .
below. › Carefully insert the key into the slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
▶ A child seat is mounted on the front passenger seat, in which the child is › Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position .
transported with its back to the direction of travel » page 29. › Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
▶ Despite correct adjustment of the driver's seat, the distance of at least › Close the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
25 cm between the middle of the steering wheel and chest cannot be main- › Check that the warning light   illuminates after the ignition is switched
tained. on.
▶ Additional controls for drivers with a physical disability are installed in the ve-
Switching on
hicle.
▶ Special seats (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags) are installed in the › Switch off the ignition.
vehicle. › Open the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
› Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » .
WARNING › Carefully insert the key into the slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
If an airbag is deactivated upon the sale of the vehicle, the buyer must be › Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position .
informed of this! › Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
› Close the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
› Check that the warning light   illuminates after the ignition is switched
Deactivating the front passenger airbag on.
WARNING
■ The key cannot be inserted into the key switch while driving. Shocks can
cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the airbag! The airbag could be
triggered unexpectedly in an accident - it may result in injury or death!
■ The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switch-
ed off.
■ Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag.
■ If the warning lights     flash, the front passenger airbag will not
be deployed in the event of an accident. Have the airbag system checked
Fig. 22 Key-operated switch for the front passenger airbag / warning by a specialist garage immediately.
light for front passenger airbag
CAUTION
Positions of the key switch » Fig. 22 - 
An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch!
 The front passenger airbag is deactivated - after the ignition is switched
on, the indicator light   » Fig. 22 illuminates 
 The front passenger airbag is activated - after the ignition is switched on,
the indicator light illuminates for 65 seconds  
Switch off
› Switch off the ignition.
› Open the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
28 Safety
WARNING (Continued)
Transporting children safely
■ Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
Child seat One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fit-
tings.
 Introduction ■ When installing the child seat on the back seat, the corresponding front
seat must be adjusted so that there is no contact between the front seat
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, children must be trans-
and the child seat or the child being transported in a child seat.
ported in child seats! ■ When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward, adjust the
head restraints so that they are as high as possible.
The information in this Owner´s Manual as well as the instructions of the child ■ If the head restraints still prevent the child seat from being installed, even
seat manufacturer must be observed when installing and using the child seat. in the highest position, you will need to remove them » page 88. After re-
For safety reasons, we recommend that you always transport child seats on moving the child seat, refit the head restraints.
the rear seats. Children should be transported on the front passenger seat only
in exceptional circumstances. Note
Child seats complying with the ECE-R 44 Economic Commission for Europe We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
standard must be used. These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODA vehicles.
They meet the ECE-R 44 standard.
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard are identified with a test
mark that cannot be removed: large E within a circle with the test number be-
low.
WARNING
■ One should never carry children - or indeed babies - on one's lap.
■ When leaving the vehicle, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Children might not be capable of leaving the vehicle or helping themselves
independently in the event of an emergency. Can be fatal at very high or
very low temperatures!
■ The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire journey! Other-
wise, the child would be thrown through the vehicle in the event of an acci-
dent, causing fatal injuries to both the child and other occupants.
■ Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe, or even fatal injuries
if the airbag system is deployed!
■ Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer
of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in mi-
nor accidents.

▶ Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible.
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat (variant 1)
▶ With child safety seats in groups 2 and 3, make sure that the loop-around fit-
Does not apply to Taiwan tings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the
same height as the loop-around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side.
Adjust the height of the front passenger seat belt so that the belt does not
“jam” in the return pulley. In the event of an accident, there is the risk of in-
jury to the neck of the child carried due to the seat belt!
WARNING
■ Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the pas-
senger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deploy-
ment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child se-
vere, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
■ As soon as the child seat, in which the child is transported with their back
in the direction of travel, is no longer used in the front passenger seat, the
front passenger airbag should be switched on again.
Fig. 23 Warning labels
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat (variant 2)
Applies to Taiwan
Never use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat which is pro-
tected by an active airbag. This could cause serious injury to the child, or Fig. 24
even death. Warning labels
This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the following positions.
▶ On the passenger sun visor» Fig. 23 - .
▶ On the B-pillar on the front passenger side » Fig. 23 – .
The following instructions must be followed when using a child seat on the
front passenger seat.
▶ The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing child
seat » .
▶ If possible, adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical, so
as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the No babies, infants or children are to be carried on the front passenger seat.
back of the child seat.
▶ If possible, move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no con- A label to this effect can also be found on the front passenger's sun visor
tact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it. » Fig. 24.
▶ Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible.
30 Safety
Child safety and the side airbag Classification of child seats
Fig. 25
Incorrect seated position of a Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
child who is not properly se-
cured – risk from the side air- Group Weight of the child
bag/Child properly protected by 0 up to 10 kg
safety seat 0+ up to 13 kg
1 9-18 kg
2 15-25 kg
 Read and observe on page 29 first. 3 22-36 kg
The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag
» Fig. 25 - .
There must be sufficient room between the child and the area into which the
side airbag will deploy to allow the airbag to provide as much protection as
possible » Fig. 25 - .
Use of child safety seats which are secured using a seat belt
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
Overview of the usability of child seats secured with a seat belt on seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Front passenger Rear seats Rear seat Front passenger Rear seats Rear seat
Group Group
seat Outside Centre seat Outside Centre
0 2
up to 10 U U U 15-25 U U U
kg kg
0+ 3
up to 13 U U U 22-36 U U U
kg kg
1 U Child seat category “Universal” - a child seat designed for fastening on
U U U
9-18 kg the seat with the seat belt.

Fastening systems First, remove the caps A in order to access the locking eyes» Fig. 26. After
removing the child seat, replace he caps.
attachment points of the  system
WARNING
■ Always refer to the instructions of the manufacturer of the child seat
Fig. 26
when installing and removing a child seat with the  system.
Labels of the system  ■ Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the attachment points
intended for the installation of a child seat with the  system – risk of
death!
Note
■ A child seat fitted with the  system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit-
ted with a  system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve-
 is a system for securing child seats quickly and safely. hicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner.
■ Child seats with the  system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Ac-
Two locking eyes are located between the seat backrest and the seat cushion cessories.
of the outer rear seats and front passenger seat for fixing the system child
seat in place.
Use of child safety seats with the  system

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
Overview of the usability of child seats fastened with the  system on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Size class of
Group Front passenger seatb) Rear seats outside Rear seat middle
the child seata)
0
E X IL-SU X
up to 10 kg
E
0+
D X IL-SU X
up to 13 kg
C
D
C
1 IL-SU
B X X
9-18 kg IUF
B1
A 
32 Safety
Size class of
Group Front passenger seatb) Rear seats outside Rear seat middle
the child seata)
2
- X IL-SU X
15-25 kg
3
- X IL-SU X
22-36 kg
a) The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat.
b) If the front passenger seat is fitted with  system attachment points, it is suitable for the installation of an  child seat with “Semi-Universal” approval.
IL-SU The seat is suitable for installation of a  child seat with the “Semi-Universal” approval. The “Semi-Universal” category means that the child seat with
the  system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the list of vehicles that comes with the child seat.
IUF The seat is suitable for the installation of a child seat with “Universal” approval and attachment with the  system attachment belt.
X The seat is not fitted with  system attachment points.
Attachment points of the   system WARNING

■ Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
Fig. 27 when installing and removing a child seat with the   system.
■ Only use child seats with the   system on the seats equipped with
Attachment points of the 
-system attachment points with the logo  .
■ Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye.
  is an attachment system that restricts the movement of the upper
part of the child seat.
The locking eyes A for attaching the belt of a child seat with the  
system are located on the rear side of the rear seat backrests » Fig. 27.
Some country-specific models can also be fitted with an attachment point
B » Fig. 27.

Fig. 28 Cockpit example for LHD
34 Operation
23 Storage compartment 91
Operation
24 Operating lever for adaptive cruise control 236
Cockpit 25 Steering wheel locking lever 21
26 Depending on equipment fitted:
Overview ▶ Ignition lock 200
▶ Starter button 200
1 Electric power windows 67
27 Handbrake lever 203
2 Electric exterior mirror adjustment 82
3 Door opening lever 62 ▶ Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) 204
4 Air outlet vents 118 ▶ Selector lever (automatic gearbox) 205
5 Parking ticket holder 91 29 Depending on equipment fitted:
6 Operating lever (depending on equipment): ▶ 12-Volt power socket 98
▶ Indicator light and high-beam headlight 73 ▶ Cigarette lighter 100
▶ Speed regulating system 231 30 Bar with keys depending on the equipment fitted:
▶ Speed limiter 232 ▶  Central locking system 61
▶ Headlight assist 74 ▶  START STOP 201
7 Steering wheel with horn/with driver's front airbag 25 ▶  Traction control TCS 212
8 Buttons for operating the information system 49 ▶  Electronic Stability Control ESC 211
▶ /selection of drive mode 241
9 Instrument cluster 36
▶  Park Assist 225
10 Operating lever: ▶  Parking aid
▶ Windscreen wipers and washers
215
79 ▶  Tyre pressure monitoring system
▶ Information system
249
49
31 Storage compartment/phone box 92, 92
11 Infotainment 122
32 USB input 93
12 Button for hazard warning light system 76
33 Controls for heating/air conditioning 115
13 Warning light for the front seat passenger airbag 28
14 Interior rear-view mirror 82 Note
15 Storage compartment on the front passenger side 95 The layout of the controls on right-hand drive vehicles differs partially from
16 Front passenger airbag 25 that shown in » Fig. 28.
17 External Infotainment module (in the passenger storage com-
partment) 124
18 Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag (in front
passenger storage compartment) 28
19 Power window in the front passenger door 68
20 Storage compartment 91
21 Light switch 72
22 Bonnet release lever 273
Cockpit 35
The brightness of the instrument illumination is set automatically depending
Instruments and warning lights on the ambient lighting throughout. If the visibility is poor and the lights are
not on, the brightness of the instrument lighting reduces to alert the driver to
Instrument cluster
switch on the lights in due time.
 Introduction The brightness of the instrument lighting can be adjusted in Infotainment in
the menu  /  →  → → Light.
Engine revolutions counter

The tachometer 1 » Fig. 29 on page 36 shows the actual engine speed per
minute.
The beginning of the tachometer red scale range indicates the maximum per-
mitted speed for an engine that has been driven-in and has reached operating
temperature.
You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolu-
tion counter is reached, or select mode D/S on the automatic gearbox.
The gear recommendation is important to note in order to maintain the opti-
mum engine speed » page 50.
Fig. 29 Instrument cluster
CAUTION
1 Engine revolutions counter » page 36 The pointer of the engine revolutions counter must reach the red area for only
▶ with warning lights » page 39
a short time - there is a risk of engine damage!
2 Display » page 49
3 Speedometer Coolant temperature gauge
▶ with warning lights » page 39
4 Depending on equipment fitted
▶ Coolant temperature display » page 36
▶ Natural gas display (applies to G-TEC-vehicles)
5 Bar with warning lights » page 39
6 Operation button
▶ setting the time » page 50
▶ Reset counter for distance travelled (trip) » page 49
▶ Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
» page 56
7 Petrol / Diesel fuel gauge » page 37 Fig. 30 Coolant temperature gauge: Version 1/version 2
The display only works if the ignition is switched on. 
36 Operation
A Cold area, The engine has not yet reached its operating temperature. Note
Avoid high speeds and high engine loads. The arrow  next to the symbol  within the fuel gauge displays the installa-
B The operating range tion location of the fuel filler on the right side of the vehicle.
C High temperature range, the warning light  illuminates in the instrument
cluster » page 46. Fuel gauge - natural gas / petrol
Fuel gauge - Petrol/ Diesel Fig. 32

Gas gauge
Fig. 33
Fig. 31 Fuel gauge: Version 1/version 2 Petrol fuel gauge
The display only works if the ignition is switched on.

The capacity of the fuel tank for petrol/diesel is approximately 50 litres for ve-
hicles with front-wheel drive, and approximately 55 litres for vehicles with
four-wheel drive.
If the fuel level reaches the reserve level A » Fig. 31, the warning light  illu-
minates in the instrument cluster » page 44.
The display only works if the ignition is switched on.
WARNING The capacity of the natural gas fuel tank is approximately 17.5 kg.
For the vehicle systems to function correctly, and thus for safe driving,
The capacity of the petrolfuel tank is approximately 8.5 l.
there must be sufficient fuel in the tank. Never drain the fuel tank com-
pletely – risk of accident! If the fuel level reaches the reserve area in the natural gas tank, the icon  and
a request for natural gas refuelling is shown in the display.
CAUTION If the fuel level in the fuel tank reaches the reserve area for petrol, A » Fig. 33
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of fuel the warning light  comes on » page 44.
can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the
exhaust system. Note
The arrow  next to the symbol  and  within the fuel gauge displays the
installation location of the fuel filler on the right side of the vehicle.
Instruments and warning lights 37

Digital instrument cluster Display in the digital instrument cluster
 Introduction
Fig. 34 Digital instrument cluster
1 Bar with warning lights » page 39

2 Coolant temperature display » page 36
3 Display » page 38 Fig. 35 Display variants / example of the classic display
4 Petrol / Diesel fuel gauge » page 37
A Display variants (from the left)
The brightness of the instrument illumination is set automatically depending ▶ Classic display
on the ambient lighting throughout. ▶ Advanced display
The brightness of the instrument lighting can be adjusted in Infotainment in ▶ Modern display
the menu  /  →  → → Light. ▶ Basic display
▶ Sporty display
B Central display area
C Additional information
38 Operation
▶ Auto - additional information is displayed depending on the selected driving
Operation of the digital instrument cluster
mode
▶ Classic - Information about the engaged gear and the current speed
Fig. 36 ▶ View 1 - adjustable pre-selection option
Buttons/dial on the multifunc- ▶ View 2 - adjustable pre-selection option
tion steering wheel ▶ View 3 - adjustable pre-selection option
Set the pre-selection option

The pre-selection options View 1. View 2 and View 3 can be set in infotainment in
the menu  /  in the  → Dig. Instrumentenpan..
▶ Inthe areas A » Fig. 37, the desired additional information can be selected
by moving your finger vertically across the display.
A Rotate - Movement in the selected menu / setting values / Manually ▶ The desired function area for the pre-selection option in the area B to save
change map scale (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen) the selection.
Press - confirm selected menu item
Turn and press - switch on automatic change of the map scale (applies to
Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen) Warning lights
 Press - Change the display version » Fig. 35 on page 38  Introduction
Hold - Display the menu for the pre-selection options with additional in-
formation
 Handbrake » page 40
 Press - display main menu / return to a previous level in the menu
» page 54  Brake system » page 41
 Front seat belt warning light » page 41
Pre-selection options for additional information  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) » page 41
Power steering
Fig. 37   » page 41
Steering lock (KESSY system)
Set the pre-selection Stabilisation control (ESC)
options in the Infotain-  » page 42
Traction control (ASR)
ment system
 Traction control (ASR) deactivated » page 42
 Antilock brake system (ABS) » page 42
 Rear fog light » page 42
 Exhaust control system » page 42
 Glow plug system (diesel engine) » page 43
Select the pre-selection option
› Press and hold the button  on the multi-function steering wheel.  EPC fault light (petrol engine) » page 43
› Select and confirm one of the following pre-selection options.  Safety systems » page 43
 Tyre pressure » page 43
 Brake pads » page 44 

 Fuel reserve- petrol/diesel » page 44  Adaptive chassis (DCC) » page 49
 Lane Assist » page 44  Service » page 49
 Turning signal system » page 44  Natural gas container test » page 49
 Trailer turn signal lights » page 44 The warning lights in the instrument cluster indicate certain functions or faults.
 Fog lights » page 45
Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in
Speed regulating system the display of the instrument cluster.
 » page 45
Speed limiter
After switching on the ignition, some warning lights light up briefly as a func-
 Brake pedal (automatic gearbox) » page 45 tion test. If the tested systems are OK, the corresponding warning lights go
 Natural gas operation » page 45 out a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after starting the engine.
 High beam » page 45
Warning lights in the display
 Automatic gearbox » page 45 Depending on the significance, the warning light  (danger) or  (warning)
 Rear seat belt warning light » page 45 will light up along with some other warning lights in the display.
 Alternator » page 45 Depending on vehicle equipment fitted, some indicator lights can be shown in
 Coolant » page 46 the display. For example. the coolant warning light can be shown as follows.
 Engine oil pressure » page 46 ▶ - monochrome (“black and white”) display
 Engine oil level » page 46 ▶ - coloured display
 AdBlue® level too low (diesel engine) » page 47 WARNING
 AdBlue® error (diesel engine) » page 47 ■ Ignoring illuminated warning lights and related messages or instructions
 Bulb failure » page 47 in the display of the instrument cluster may lead to serious personal injury
 Display when the light is switched off » page 47 or damage to the vehicle.
■ If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
 Particle filter » page 47
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
 Windscreen washer fluid level » page 47 warning lights » page 76. Place the warning triangle at the prescribed dis-
 Headlight assist » page 47 tance.
  START-STOP system » page 48 ■ The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. While working
 Display of a low temperature » page 48 in the engine compartment, be sure to observe the following warnings
» page 272.
 Water in fuel filter (diesel engine) » page 48
   Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) » page 48
 Handbrake
 Distance warning (Front Assist) » page 48
 Front Assist » page 48  Read and observe on page 40 first.
 Emergency call » page 48  illuminates - the hand brake is applied.
 Economy mode » page 48
An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 5 km/h while the
 Offroad mode » page 48 handbrake is still on. 
40 Operation
▶ Release the handbrake.   Power steering/steering lock (KESSY system)
 Brake system  Read and observe on page 40 first.
 Read and observe on page 40 first. Fault in the power steering

 lights up – this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the
 lights up – the brake fluid level in the brake system is too low. steering assist is no longer working (significantly higher steering forces).
▶ Stopthe vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the level of the brake fluid  lights up – this indicates a partial failure of the power steering and the
» page 276. steering forces can be higher.
WARNING ▶ Switch off the ignition, start the engine again and travel a short distance.
▶ If the warning light  does not go off, stop the vehicle,  do not continue
■ If the warning light  lights up at the same time as the warning light 
» page 42,  Anti-lock braking system (ABS),  do not continue your your journey. Seek help from a specialist garage.
▶ If the warning light  does not go off, you can drive on, exercising appropri-
journey. Seek help from a specialist garage.
■ A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi- ate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
cle's braking distance – risk of accident! Steering lock defect (KESSY system)
 flashes
 Front seat belt warning light Message: Steering lock faulty. Stop!
 Read and observe on page 40 first. ▶ Park the vehicle,  do not continue your journey. After switching off the ig-
nition, it is no longer possible to lock the steering, to activate the electrical
 lights up - the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. components (e.g. Infotainment ), to switch on the ignition again and to start
At a speed of more than 30 km/h, the warning light  flashes and an audible the engine. Seek help from a specialist garage.
warning sounds at the same time.
 flashes
If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next Message: Steering lock: workshop!
approx. 2 minutes, the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light 
▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
illuminates permanently.
cialist garage immediately.
 Adaptive cruise control (ACC) Steering column lock not unlocked (System KESSY)
 Read and observe on page 40 first.  flashes
Message: Steering lock: workshop!
 illuminates – the ACC delay is not sufficient.
▶ Move the steering wheel slightly back and forth, thereby facilitating unlock-
▶ Apply the brake. ing the steering lock.
▶ If the steering does also not unlock then, the help of a specialist garage is re-
For more information about the ACC system » page 234.
quired.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning
light  comes on after switching on the ignition. 

The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.  Traction control (TCS) deactivated
If, after the motor is restarted and a short drive, the indicator light does not go
out, there is a system error.
▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-  lights up – the TCS system is deactivated.
Note
 Stability Control (ESC)/Traction control (TCS) On vehicles without the ESC system, the warning light  does not illuminate
upon deactivation of the TCS system, a message is just displayed on the dis-
 Read and observe on page 40 first. play of the instrument cluster.
If your vehicle is equipped with the ESC system, the TCS is part of the ESC  Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
system.
 flashes – the ESC or TCS is currently active.
 lights up – there is an ESC or TCS fault.  lights up – there is an ABS fault.

▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS.
cialist garage immediately. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
If the warning light  comes on after starting the engine, the ESC or TCS may cialist garage immediately.
be switched off for technical reasons.
▶ Switch the ignition off and on again. WARNING
■ If the warning light  lights up at the same time as the warning light 
If the warning light  does not illuminate after you switch the engine back on, » page 41,  Brake system,  do not continue your journey. Seek help
the ESC or TCS is fully functional again. from a specialist garage.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery ■ A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator cle's braking distance – risk of accident!
light  comes on after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.  Rear fog light
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-  Read and observe on page 40 first.
ror.
 lights up – the rear fog light is switched on.
 Emission control system
For more information on the ESC system » page 211 or TCS system
» page 212.  Read and observe on page 40 first.
 lights up – there is a fault in the emission control system. The system makes
it possible to drive on in emergency mode – there may be a noticeable reduc-
tion in engine performance. 
42 Operation
▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- One of the airbags or a belt tensioner has been disabled by the diagnostic
cialist garage immediately. tool
 lights up for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then
 Preheating unit (diesel) flashes for approximately 12 seconds
 Read and observe on page 40 first. Message: Airbag/belt tensioner deactivated.
ProActive passenger protection
 flashes – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system
makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode - there may be a noticeable  illuminates and the following message is shown in the information cluster
reduction in engine performance. display
Proactive passenger protection not available.
There is a fault in the preheating unit if the warning light  does not come on
Message: or
or illuminates continuously once the ignition has been switched on.
ProActive passenger protection: funct. restricted.
The seat belt for the driver and front passenger needs to be replaced.
▶ Seek help from a specialist garage.
 Engine electronics warning light (petrol)
WARNING
 Read and observe on page 40 first. When a fault in the airbag system occurs, there is a risk of the system not
being triggered in the event of an accident. Therefore, this must be
 lights up – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system checked immediately by a specialized garage.
makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode – there may be a noticeable
reduction in engine performance.
▶ You
 Tyre pressure
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.  Read and observe on page 40 first.
 Safety systems Change of tyre pressure values

 lights up – there was a pressure change in one of the tyres.
 Read and observe on page 40 first. ▶ Immediately reduce speed and avoid sudden steering and braking manoeu-
System fault vres.
▶ Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and check the tyres and their inflation
 Illuminates
pressures » page 280.
Message: Error: airbag ▶ Correct the tyre pressure if necessary or replace the affected wheel
▶ Seek help from a specialist garage. » page 285 or use the repair kit » page 288.
▶ Save the tyre pressure values in the system » page 249.
The front passenger airbag has been disabled with the key switch
 lights up for around 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on. System fault
 flashes for approximately 1 minute and remains lit – there may be a fault in
the tyre pressure monitoring system.
▶ Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and start the engine again. 

If the warning light  flashes after starting the engine again, there is a system  Low fuel - petrol/diesel
error.
cialist garage immediately.  illuminates – the fuel level in the fuel tank is at the reserve level (approxi-
Disconnecting the vehicle battery mately 6 litres).
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator ▶ Fill up with fuel » page 266.
light  comes on after switching on the ignition.
Note
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
The text in the display goes out after refuelling and driving a short distance.
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-
ror.   Lane Departure Warning (Lane Assist)
Other incidents The warning lights   indicate the status of the Lane Assist system.
The warning light  might be lit for one of the following reasons. More information about the Lane Assist System » page 244.
▶ The vehicle is loaded on one side. Distribute the load evenly.
▶ The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
  Turn signal system
when driving uphill or downhill).
▶ Snow chains are mounted.  Read and observe on page 40 first.
▶ A wheel has been changed.
 flashes – the left turn signal is turned on.
CAUTION  flashes – the right turn signal is turned on.
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
roads) the warning light  in the instrument cluster can be delayed or does If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice its
not light up at all. normal rate (does not apply when towing).
When the hazard warning light system is switched on, this will cause all of the
 Brake linings turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash.
 Read and observe on page 40 first.  Trailer turn signal lights

 illuminates - the brake pads are worn.  Read and observe on page 40 first.
▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.  flashes – the trailer turn signal lights are switched on.
If a trailer is hitched and the warning light  is not flashing, one of the trailer
turn signal lights has failed.
▶ Check the trailer bulbs.
44 Operation
 Fog lights   Illuminates
Message: Gearbox overheated. Stop! Log book!
▶ Do not drive the vehicle! Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
 lights up – the fog lights are switched on.
You can continue your journey as soon as the warning light disappears.
 Speed regulating system/speed limiter ▶ Ifthe warning light does not go out,  do not continue your journey. Seek
help from a specialist garage.
Transmission problem
 lights up – the vehicle speed is limited by the speed regulating system or   Illuminates
the adaptive cruise control or by the speed limiter.
Message: Gearbox faulty. Stop the vehicle safely!
 flashes – the speed set with the speed limiter has been exceeded. ▶ Park the vehicle,  do not continue your journey. Seek help from a special-
ist garage.
 Brake pedal (automatic gearbox)
  Illuminates
Gearbox in emergency mode. No reverse gear.
Message:
 lights up – apply the brake. Error: gearbox. Speed is limited.
 Natural gas operation cialist garage immediately.
 Rear seat belt warning light
 illuminates - the vehicle is running on natural gas.
 Main beam  lights up – a rear seat belt is not fastened.
 Read and observe on page 40 first.  lights up – a rear seat belt is fastened.
 lights up – the main beam or the headlight flasher is switched on. When the seat belt is fastened/unfastened, the particular light lights up briefly
and indicates the current belt status!
 Automatic gearbox
 Generator
Gearbox overheated
 lights up – the battery is not being charged whilst the engine is running.
  Illuminates
▶ As the vehicle battery during your journey, are all non-essential electrical
Message: Gearbox overheated. You can drive on.
loads (e.g. Infotainment) must be switched off.
Transmission overheated. You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately. 

CAUTION CAUTION
If in addition to the light  the light  illuminates while driving,  stop driv- If it is not possible to top up with engine oil,  stop driving - there is a risk of
ing - there is a risk of engine damage. Switch off the engine and seek assis- engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist
tance from a specialist garage. garage.
 Coolant  Engine oil level

 Read and observe on page 40 first.  Read and observe on page 40 first.
Coolant level too low Engine oil level too low

  Illuminates   Illuminates
Message: Please check the coolant level. Log book! Message: Please add engine oil.
▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and let it cool. ▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level, top up
▶ Check the coolant level » page 275. if necessary.
If the coolant level is within the specified range and the warning light  lights The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 sec-
up again, then there may be a malfunction of the cooling fan. onds. If the engine oil is not replenished, the warning light will come on again
▶ Switch after driving about 100 km.
off the ignition.
▶ Check the fuse for the radiator fan, replace if necessary. Engine oil level too high
If the coolant level and fan fuse are both OK but the warning light  lights up   Illuminates
again,  stop driving. Message: Please reduce oil level.
▶ Seek help from a specialist garage. ▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level.
▶ Ifthe oil level is too high, you can driven on, exercising appropriate caution.
Coolant temperature too high
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
  Illuminates
Message: Engine overheat. Stop! Observe log book. Fault on the engine oil level sensor
  Illuminates
▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and let it cool.
▶ Continue your journey only after the warning light  has disappeared. Message: Oil sensor: please visit workshop.
▶ Immediately drive to the nearest specialist garage with appropriate caution.
 Engine oil pressure
CAUTION
 Read and observe on page 40 first. If it is not possible to top up with engine oil,  stop driving - there is a risk of
engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist
  flashes – the engine oil pressure is too low.
garage.
▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level.
▶ Ifthe warning light  flashes, stop driving, even if the oil level is OK. Also do
not leave the engine running at an idling speed.
46 Operation
 AdBlue®level II low (diesel engine) If the indicator light  does not go out within 30 minutes, the filter was not
cleaned.
 Read and observe on page 40 first. ▶ Immediately drive to the nearest specialist garage with appropriate caution.
 Illuminates - AdBlue®level too low.
WARNING
▶ Replenish Add AdBlue® » page 270. ■ Always adjust the speed and driving style to the actual weather, road, ter-
rain and traffic conditions.
 AdBlue® error (diesel engine) ■ The particulate filter reaches very high temperatures - there is a fire haz-
ard and serious injury could be caused. Therefore, never stop the vehicle at
places where the underside of your vehicle can come into contact with
 illuminates – there is a fault in the AdBlue® system. flammable materials, such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel or
the like.
CAUTION
 Lamp failure ■ As long as the warning light  illuminates, one must take into account an
 Read and observe on page 40 first. increased fuel consumption and a power reduction of the engine.
■ As long as the indicator light  is lit, the START-STOPfunction is not availa-
  lights up – one of the lamps is faulty. ble.
A message will appear in the display about the affected lamp. Note
We encourage you to avoid constant short journeys. This supports the correct
 Display when the light is switched off function of the particulate filter.
 Windscreen washer fluid level
Applies to vehicles with the digital instrument cluster.
 lit - no light is on.
Message: Please turn on the light.   lights up – the windscreen washer fluid level is too low.
▶ Top up the windscreen washer fluid » page 274.
 Particulate filter
 High-beam assistant
The particulate filter separates and burns the soot particles from the exhaust.
  lights up – the filter is clogged with soot.  illuminates – headlight assist is activated » page 74, Light Assist.
To clean the filter, if allowed by the traffic conditions » , you should drive at a
speed between 50-120 km/h in the recommended gear.
If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning light  extinguishes.

  START-STOPsystem Front Assist
The warning lights   indicate the status of the START STOP system  lights up – the safe distance to the vehicle in front is below the mini-
» page 201. mum.
Information on the Front Assist system» page 239.
 Display of a low temperature
 Read and observe on page 40 first.  Front assist
 lights up – the outside temperature is below +4 °C.  Read and observe on page 40 first.
WARNING   Illuminates
▶ Front Assist has recognised the risk of a collision or automatically triggered
Even at temperatures around +4 °C, black ice may still be on the road sur-
an emergency braking manoeuvre » page 239.
face! Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside tempera- ▶ An automatic deactivation of Front Assist took place with ESC Sport activa-
ture display that there is no ice on the road.
ted » page 211 and with ASR activated» page 212.
▶ Front Assist is not available » page 241.
 Water in the fuel filter (diesel engine)  Illuminates with the lettering   - Front Assist is deactivated » page 241.
 Emergency call
The fuel filter with water separator, filters out dirt and water from the fuel.
If too much water is present in the separator, the following information ap-
pears on the instrument cluster display.   lights up – there is a fault in the emergency call system.
  Illuminates ▶ Seek help from a specialist garage.
Message: Water in fuel filter. Log book!
 Economy mode
cialist garage immediately.  Read and observe on page 40 first.
   Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)  illuminates - the vehicle is in economy mode due to the intervention of the
active cylinder management or due to the neutral position of the automatic
 Read and observe on page 40 first. gearbox.
The warning lights    indicate the condition of the ACC system  Offroad mode
» page 234.
 illuminates – the conditions for the engagement of Offroad mode are

met» page 213, Offroadmode. 
48 Operation
 flashes (stronger) – the hill descent assistant is engaged at the moment.
Information system
 Adaptive chassis (DCC) Driver information system
Display in the instrument cluster
  illuminates – there is a DCC fault.
▶ Itis possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a Fig. 38
specialist garage immediately. Display overview
 Service
 lights up – information regarding a service appointment that is due

» page 56, Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the information system uses the dis-
 Natural gas tank test play in the instrument cluster to provide the following information » Fig. 38.
 Read and observe on page 40 first. 1 Time / symbols of the Infotainment voice control
2 Engaged gear / gear recommendation
 lights up - Note on the natural gas tank test Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox
The indicator light  will be displayed along with the remaining days until the Warning lights of the START-STOP system
natural gas tank check. Compass display
Detected traffic signs
An audible signal sounds as a warning.
3 Driving data (multifunction display)
▶ Seek help from a specialist garage. Warning lights
Information messages
WARNING
Door alarm
If the natural gas tank test fails, the natural gas drive is not available in your Eco tips
vehicle. Service interval display
4 Outside temperature
5 Cruise control / speed limiter
Total distance travelled
6 Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip)
Door, luggage compartment and bonnet alarm
When the door or luggage compartment / bonnet is open, a graphic warning
appears in the display. 
An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a A suitable engaged gear or, where appropriate, a recommended gear is dis-
door is open. played, with the aim of conserving the life of the engine and increasing driving
efficiency.
Reset counter for distance travelled (trip)
The counter can be reset by tapping the button A » Fig. 39 on page 50 or in Display » Fig. 40
Infotainment via the menu  /  →  → Instrument cluster menu.  Optimal gear engaged
 Gear recommendation (e.g.    means that it is advantageous to switch
Setting the time from 3rd to 4th gear)
For vehicles with automatic transmission the recommended gear will be
Fig. 39 shown provided the mode for manual switching (Tiptronic) is selected.
Button in the instrument cluster
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different
driving situations, such as overtaking.
Vehicle condition
The time can be adjusted in Infotainment via the menu  →  → Time and date Fig. 41
or by pressing the button in the instrument cluster. Vehicle condition
Set the time using the button in the instrument cluster
› Switch on the ignition.
› Press and hold the button A » Fig. 39until thetime is shown in the display.
› Release the button A and the system switches to the hour setting function.
› Press the button A again and set the hours.
› Wait 4 seconds, the system switches to the minutes setting.
› Press the button A again and set the minutes. Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked
› Wait 4 seconds, the system switches to the initial setting. continuously when the ignition is switched on. If there is a fault in the system,
the following message will appear in the display of the instrument cluster.
Gear recommendation
While the operational faults remain unrectified, the messages are always indi-
cated again. After the message is displayed for the first time, the warning
Fig. 40
lights  (danger) or  (warning) continue to be displayed.
Information on the selected
gear / Gear recommendation The vehicle condition can be displayed in Infotainment in the menu  /→
 → Vehicle status.
In the screen, information regarding vehicle condition or function of the tyre
pressure monitor is displayed.
› Using the function surfaces  select the menu item Vehicle status. 
50 Operation
Function surfaces and screen display » Fig. 41 Operation of the information system
A Vehicle representation (the zones of the vehicle are shown in different
colours, corresponding to any warning messages that occur. The warn- Operation using the control lever
ing messages are displayed once you touch the “vehicle”)
 No message/warning messages relating to vehicle status and the num- Fig. 43
ber (if there is only one message, one warning message text is dis- Buttons on the operating lever
played)
 Display information about the status of the START-STOP system
 Activation / deactivation of notes relating to START-STOP-Sys-
tem messages in another screen display
Display information on sporty driving in Infotainment

Operating the multifunction display
Fig. 42 A Press (up or down) - select data / set values
Infotainment display
B Press - display / confirm data
Operation of the display menus
A Press (up or down) - move in the selected menu
Hold (up or down) - display main menu
B Press - confirm selected menu item
Operation using the multifunctional steering wheel

The display of data on sporty driving is used to evaluate current motor values.
› To display tap in the Infotainment menu  /  tap on function surface 
→ Sports.
A swipe of the finger vertically across the screen allows three of the following
displays A to be shown » Fig. 42.
▶ Boost pressure display
▶ Acceleration display
▶ Power display
▶ Coolant temperature gauge
▶ Oil temperature display Fig. 44 Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel
Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel

 Switch voice control on/off
A Turn - set the volume
Press - sound on/off 
 Skip to next track/station AdBlue® range - drive distance in km which can be covered with the existing
 Switch to previous track/station AdBlue®tank capacity and with the same driving style. If you drive more effi-
 Display the assistance systems menu ciently this value can increase. When the system detects that AdBlue® can be
refilled, an indication of the minimum and maximum AdBlue ® refilling quantity
 Depending on equipment:
▶ Operating a digital instrument cluster » page 39
appears.
▶ Show previous menu (if one has been selected) / display Telephone Average fuel consumption - is calculated continuously since the last time the
menu memory was deleted. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the
first 100 m driven. With G-TEC vehicles, the average consumption of fuel cur-
Operating the multifunction display
rently being used is displayed.
B Turn - select data / set values
Press - display / confirm data Current fuel consumption - when the vehicle is stationary or slowly moving,
the fuel consumption is displayed in l/h (--,- km/l appears on models for some
Operation of the display menus countries). With G-TEC vehicles the current consumption of the fuel currently
 Hold - display main menu being used is displayed ( with regards to a stationary or slow moving vehicle,
Press - return to a higher level in the menu the natural gas consumption is displayed in kg/h).
B Turn - move in the selected menu
Oil temperature - if the temperature is lower than 50 °C or if there is a fault in
Press - confirm selected menu item
the system for checking the oil temperature, the  symbols are displayed.
Warning when the preset speed is exceeded - allows the setting of a speed
Driving data (Multifunction display)
limit where, if exceeded, an acoustic warning signal and a warning message ap-
 Introduction pears on the display of the instrument cluster.
Traffic sign recognition - traffic signs display » page 246, Traffic sign recogni-
The driving data display is only possible with the ignition switched on. tion.
The units can be adjusted in Infotainment in the menu  /  →  → Units. Current speed - digital speedometer.
The journey data can be set/reset in Infotainment in the menu  /→→ Average speed - is calculated continuously since the last time the memory
Instrument cluster. was deleted. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 300 m
driven.
Note
The setting of the information display is stored in the active user account per- Driving route - distance driven since the last time the memory was deleted.
sonalisation » page 57. Driving time - driving time since the last time the memory was deleted.
Comfort consumers - information about the total consumption of the com-
Information Overview fort consumers in l/h and a list of three consumers (e.g. air conditioning etc.),
Overview of driving data (depending on the vehicle equipment). which have the largest share of fuel consumption.
Range - drive distance in km which can be covered with the existing tank ca- Refill amount After the consumption of about 10 litres of fuel from the fully
pacity and with the same driving style. If you drive more efficiently this value refuelled tank, an amount of fuel is displayed in litres. This amount can now be
can increase. With G-TEC vehicles the following details are displayed - total safely refilled. 
range / with natural gas / petrol.
52 Operation
Natural gas qualityThe details of the quality of natural gas are displayed as a Warning when exceeding the set speed
percentage of between 70% to 100%. The higher the value of natural gas, the
lower is the consumption. The system offers the possibility to set a speed limit beyond which an acoustic
warning signal will sound and the following warning message appears in the
Coolant temperature - If the coolant temperature is in the range 70-120 °C,
display of the instrument cluster.
the engine operating temperature has been reached. If the temperature is be-
low 70 ° C, high engine speeds and straining the engine should be avoided. If Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary
the temperature is over 120 °C, the warning light  illuminates in the instru- › Select the menu item Warning at and confirm.
ment cluster » page 46. › Set the desired speed limit is 5 km/h steps.
› Confirm the set value, or wait several seconds; your settings will be saved
Infotainment display automatically.
Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving
Fig. 45 › Select the menu item Warning at and confirm.
Journey data › Drive at the desired speed.
› Confirm the current speed as the speed limit.
The set speed limit can be manually adjusted later if needed.
Reset the speed limit
› Select the menu item Warning at and confirm.
› By confirming the stored value, the speed limit is reset.
The speed limit set mode is stored even after the ignition is switched off and
› In Infotainment in the menu  /  tap on function surface  → Journey data.
on. After a gap between driving exceeding 2 hours, the pre-set speed limit is
Screen display » Fig. 45 deactivated.
A Distance travelled
B Driving time Memory
C Average speed
D Average fuel consumption Fig. 46
E Transit point rating (DriveGreen Function)
Memory display
F Graphic fuel level display (if the estimated range is less than 300 km, the
vehicle starts to approach the symbol )
G Approximate range (for vehicles with CNG drive, the approximate range
with petrol and CNG is displayed separately).
Use the function surfaces   to select one of the following preset lists.
▶ Since start - Driving data for the individual trip
▶ Long-term - Long-term journey data The system saves the data in the three memories described below which are
▶ Since refuel - Data since refuelling displayed at the position A » Fig. 46. 
Since start The menus with details can be operated and displayed using the buttons on
In the memory, driving data is saved for the time between switching on and the operating lever or the multifunction steering wheel » page 51.
switching off the ignition. New data will also flow into the calculation of the
Main menu items (depending on vehicle equipment)
current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after switch- ■ Driving data » page 52
ing off the ignition. ■ Assist systems » page 55
If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically ■ Navigation » page 54
erased. ■ Audio » page 54
■ Telephone » page 55;
Long-term
■ Vehicle » page 50
The memory gathers driving data from any number of individual journeys up to
■ Lap timer » page 55
a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9999 kilometres driven.
The indicator is automatically set back to zero if one of the indicated values is Note
exceeded. ■ If warning messages are displayed, these messages must first be confirmed
to access the main menu.
Since refuel ■ The display language can be set in Infotainment » page 134, Setting the Info-
The driving data is stored in the memory since the last fuel refuelling.
tainment language and » page 141, Setting the Infotainment language.
The memory is erased automatically the next time you fill up.
› To choose the memory bank, confirm the selected indication again and se- Navigation menu item
lect the desired memory. The following information is displayed in the Navigation menu item.
› To delete the memory bank of the chosen selection, hold down the button ▶ Driving
confirming the selection. recommendations
▶ Compass
The following driving data are stored. ▶ Last destinations
▶ Average fuel consumption ▶ Navigation card (applies to the digital instrument cluster)
▶ Distance travelled
▶ Average speed
audio menu item
▶ Driving time
The following information is displayed in the Audio menu item.
Note
Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data. Radio
▶ Currently playing station (name/frequency).
▶ The selected frequency range (e.g. FM) optionally with the number of the
Menus in the display of the instrument cluster station button (e.g. FM3), if the station is stored in the memory list.
▶ List of available stations (if more than 5 stations can be received).
 Introduction ▶ TP traffic announcements.
The instrument cluster display is a user interface which, depending on the Media
equipment configuration, provides information about the Infotainment, the ▶ Name of the track being played, if necessary, further information regarding
multifunction display, the assistance systems etc. title (e.g. artist, album name), if this information is stored as a so called ID3
tag on the audio source.
54 Operation
Telephone menu item The calculated times are displayed in minutes, seconds and tenths of seconds.
The following functions are available.
The call list with the following symbols is displayed in the Telephone menu item.
■ Start time - start the timing manually or continue the interrupted measure-
 Incoming call
ment
 Outgoing call ■ Since start - Start the timer automatically upon start-up
 Missed call ■ Statistics - Evaluate and reset the measured times
Symbols in the display Time measurement

 Telephone battery charge (this function is only supported by some mobile ▶ To start the measurement manually, choose the menu item Lap timer - start .
phones) ▶ To start the measurement automatically, choose the menu item Lap timer -
 Signal strength (this function is only supported by some mobile phones) Since Start . Timing will begin automatically when starting up.
 A telephone connected to the Infotainment system ▶ Tostart the measurement of the next lap during time measurement, choose
 Missed calls (if there are several missed calls, the number of calls is shown the menu item new lap.
next to the symbol) During timing, information about the fastest and the last lap time are also
 Switch-off microphone shown in the display.
Apple CarPlay Measure split time
An external device connected to the Infotainment system via Apple CarPlay ▶ During the timing, select the menu item Split time. The split time data is dis-
can be operated via the multifunction steering wheel as well as via menus in played for about 5 seconds in the display.
the instrument cluster display. The split time can be measured repeatedly during a round.
The following symbols are displayed in the Telephone menu option.
Stop measurement
 Answer the incoming call ▶ During the timing, press the menu item Stop.
 Reject incoming call / end call
The time measurement is stopped, the following functions are now available.
 Activate / deactivate microphone (applies for the infotainment Swing)
■ Continue - Continue measurement of the current lap time
■ New lap - Start measurement of the next lap time.
Assist systems menu item ■ Abort lap - Cancel the timer (the aborted lap time is not stored)
The following systems are activated/deactivated in the Assist systems menu ■ Hang up - End timing (the aborted lap time is stored)
item. Evaluate recorded times
▶ Lane Assist ▶ Select the menu item Lap timer - Statistics.
▶ Assist system for blind spot monitoring The following information is displayed.
▶ Rear Traffic Alert
▶ Fastest: - The fastest lap
▶ Front Assist ▶ Slowest: - The slowest lap
▶ Average: - The average lap time
Menu item Lap timer (stopwatch) ▶ Overall time: - The total of all the lap times
The Lap timer function offers the possibility of calculating the lap time, for ex- Reset measured times
ample when driving on a race course. The measured time is shown in the dis- ▶ Select the menu item Lap timer - Statistics - Reset. 
play.
WARNING Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
■ Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully
responsible for the operation of your vehicle. Fig. 47
■ Only use the Lap timer when you are in any traffic situation where you have
Button in the instrument cluster
full control over the vehicle.
Note
■ The system allows the measurement of up to 11 lap times.
■ The measurement of the individual lap time is ended after 99 hours, 59 mi-
nutes and 59 seconds. After this time has been reached, the measurement of
the new lap time will start automatically.
■ The measured times cannot be reset individually. The details regarding the remaining kilometres or days until the next scheduled
■ If the measured times are not reset, then these are stored even after turning service can also be displayed in Infotainment in the menu  /  →  → Events
off the ignition. or with the button in the instrument cluster.
Use the key to display
Service intervals › Switch on the ignition.
 Introduction
› Press and hold the button A » Fig. 47 until theService menu item is shown in
the display.
Compliance with the service intervals is of crucial importance for the serv-
› Release the button A .
ice life and value retention of the vehicle. Never exceed the service date. In the display, the symbol  appears for 4 seconds along with the following
message for the kilometres or days to the next service appointment.
The specialist garage will inform you about the type of service interval, the op-
tion to change it, and the service scope. Service messages
The service interval display in the display of the instrument cluster will notify
you when a service is due. Before the next service date has been reached, the symbol  as well as a
message about the mileage or days until the next service event appears in the
Service record display after the ignition is switched on.
A specialist garage will confirm the corresponding service record in the service
Once the service interval is reached, the symbol  appears in the display after
information system called Digital Service Plan.
the ignition is switched on, together with the message:
We recommend that you always print out the respective service record.
Resetting the service interval display
Note
The customer is responsible for covering the cost of all services including Have the display reset by a specialist garage.
changing or replenishing the oil, even during the warranty period, unless stated We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. In-
otherwise in the ŠKODA AUTO warranty terms or other binding agreements. correctly setting the service interval display can cause problems to the vehicle. 
56 Operation
Variable service interval As part of the personalisation, three default user accounts as well as a guestac-
For vehicles with variable service intervals, after resetting the oil change serv- count are provided.
ice display in a specialist garage, the values of the new service interval are dis-
Switch to a different user account
played, which are based on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle.
You can switch to a different user account in the instrument cluster display
These values are then continuously matched according to the actual operating » Fig. 48 within 10 seconds after turning on the ignition.
conditions of the vehicle.
An account can be changed at a later time in Infotainment in the menu  / 
→  →Vehicle status →  (if the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System is displayed first of
Personalization all, then use the arrow  or  switch to Vehicle status).
 Introduction If an account is selected in which not all of the points required by the system
are set, a configuration wizard can be automatically displayed on the Infotain-
Thanks to the personalisation, more drivers have the opportunity to use a vehi- ment screen » page 129.
cle with individually set system functions by means of a user account which is Electrically adjustable driver's seat (referred to only as seat in the
assigned to the respective vehicle key. following)
The seated position adjustment is carried out in the following cases.
WARNING ▶ After unlocking the vehicle and opening the driver's door (in this case: before
Make all adjustments when the vehicle is stationary - otherwise there is the the vehicle was locked, an account with a certain seat setting was selected.
risk of accident! After vehicle unlocking, an account is activated to which a different seat set-
ting is assigned).
▶ After switching to a different user account and at a speed less than 5 km/h.
Operating principle
The seat adjustment can be terminated as follows.
Fig. 48 ▶ By tapping on the function surface Cancel on the Infotainment screen.
Switch to a different user account ▶ By pressing any key on the seat » page 85.
Note
Vehicles with the personalisation function are provided with three vehicle
keys.
Overview of some personalized functions

▶ Driving mode - the last selected mode, mode setting Individual
After unlocking the vehicle and opening the driver's door, all the personalised ▶ Setting the electrically adjustable driver's seat.
functions are adjusted according to the user account that is assigned to the ▶ Exterior mirror adjustment.
key which was used to unlock the vehicle. ▶ Assistance systems - Lane Assist, parking aid (Park Pilot).
Any change to the set personalised functions is automatically stored in the ac- ▶ Light - ambient lighting, convenience turn signal, COMING HOME / LEAVING
tive user account. HOME. 
▶ Climatronic - temperature in each individual area, fan speed, recirculation ■ Assign vehicle key to current user account - manual assignment of the detected ve-
mode. hicle key to the active user account - follow the instructions on the Infotain-
▶ Infotainment settings - brightness level of the screen, keyboard arrangement screen
ment. ■ Reset all - reset the personalisation and the user accounts to factory settings
▶ Radio - sound settings, station sorting.
▶ Media - shuffle / repeat title, selected video format.
▶ Voice control - acoustic signals.
▶ Navigation - home address, alternative routes, recommended route, reminder
of the lack of fuel.
Note
The scope of the personalisation functions is dependent on the type of Info-
tainment package.
Setting the personalization

› In Infotainment in the menu  /  tap on function surface  → Personalisa-

tion.
The following menu items are displayed.
Personalisation
Active - activate/deactivate the personalisation
Select a user account
A list of user accounts with the option to manage user accounts and to switch
to another account.
■  - Account management with the following options:
■ Rename user account - rename the user account (not applicable to the Guest
account)
■ Copy settings to another account - copy the settings of an active user account
to another user account
■ Reset user account - reset the selected user account to factory settings
Adjusting
■ Key assignment: - Options for assigning the vehicle key to the user account:
■ Manual - detected vehicle key must be assigned to the active user account
manually
■ Automatic - detected vehicle key automatically assigned to a different ac-
count of the active user account
58 Operation
Unlocking and opening unlock / lock with the key on the lock cylinder
Unlocking and locking Fig. 49

Left side of the vehicle: Turning
 Introduction the key for unlocking and lock-
ing the vehicle
The vehicle is equipped with a central locking system which makes it possible
to unlock / lock all the doors, the fuel filler flap and boot lid simultaneously.
The door unlocking can be adjusted individually » page 61.
The unlocking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing
twice.  Read and observe and on page 59 first.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next
45 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically. Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the key » Fig. 49
 Unlocking the vehicle
The locking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing once.
 Locking the vehicle
If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
CAUTION
If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked, the
If the locking cylinder is provided with a cap » page 295, to unlock / lock the
turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed.
vehicle with key, the cap must be removed beforehand.
WARNING
■ Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthorized Unlocking/locking with the remote control key
persons (e.g. children) could lock the car, turn on the ignition or start the
engine - there is a danger of injury and accidents! Fig. 50
■ When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely in- Key with pop-out key bit
dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. These individuals
might not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help themselves.
Can be fatal at very high or very low temperatures!
CAUTION
■ Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected
against moisture and severe shocks.
■ Keep the keyway clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust etc.) have a negative  Read and observe and on page 59 first.
effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ignition lock.
Description of the key » Fig. 50
 Unlock button
 Lock button 
Unlocking and opening 59

 Depending on equipment fitted:  Read and observe and on page 59 first.
▶ Unlock boot lid (by pressing) / unlatch and partially open (by holding)
(vehicles with manual valve operation) The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables unlocking and
▶ Open/close/ the boot lid Stop movement of the boot lid (vehicles with locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key.
electric folding operation) › Grip the door handle to unlock the vehicle » Fig. 51 - .
A Locking button for folding the key bit in/out › Touch the sensor on the door handle with your finger to lock » Fig. 51 -  the
B Warning light for the battery charge - if the warning light does not flash vehicle.
when a button on the key is pressed, the battery is discharged. When unlocking/locking the vehicle, the key must be at a maximum distance
Unlock/unlatch the boot lid (vehicles fitted with manual folding operation) of approximately 1.5 m from the front door handle.
By pressing the button , the lid is unlocked. Information on locking
By holding the button , the lid is unlocked and unlatched (partially open). On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be moved
into the position P before unlocking.
If the lid is unlocked or unlatched using the  button, then the lid is automati-
cally locked after closing. The period after which the lid is locked can be set After locking the car, it is not possible to unlock within the next 2 seconds by
» page 64. touching the door handle. This can be used to check whether the vehicle is
locked.
CAUTION
Protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle
■ The remote control may be affected by signal superposition of transmitters
If one of the doors is closed after the vehicle has been locked and the key with
that are in the vicinity of the vehicle.
■ The range of the remote control key is about 30 m. The battery must be re-
which the vehicle was locked remains in the passenger compartment, the vehi-
cle will be automatically unlocked. After automatically unlocking, the turn sig-
placed if the central locking only reacts to the remote control at a distance of
nal lights will flash four times. If no door is opened within 45 seconds, the vehi-
less than approximately 3 m away » page 294.
cle is automatically locked again.
Locking / unlocking - KESSY If the boot lid is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which the
vehicle was locked remains in the luggage compartment, the lid is automatical-
ly unlatched (partially opened). After automatically unlocking, the turn signal
lights will flash four times. The boot lid remains unlatched (partially opened);
the other doors remain locked.
CAUTION
Some types of gloves can affect the unlocking or locking device via the sen-
sors in the door handle.
Deactivating KESSY
Fig. 51 Vehicle unlocking / vehicle locking  Read and observe and on page 59 first.
› Lock the vehicle with the button  on the key. 
60 Operation
› Within 5 s, touch the sensor on the door handle with your finger » Fig. 51 on SafeLock
page 60 - . Deactivation is confirmed by a single flash of the direction indi-
cators.  Read and observe and on page 59 first.
› To check the deactivation, wait at least 10 seconds and then pull the door
handle. The door must remain locked. SafeLock prevents the doors from behind opened from inside as well as win-
dow operation. This makes it more difficult for anyone to break into the vehi-
The KESSY system is activated again automatically after the vehicle is un- cle.
locked.
Switching on
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the central locking button SafeLock switches on when the vehicle is locked.
This function is enabled after switching off the ignition with the message Check
Fig. 52 SAFELOCK! Owner's manual! in the instrument cluster display.
Central locking button
Switch-on display
With the activated SafeLock, the warning light in the driver´s door flashes for
2 seconds in rapid succession, this then starts to flash at longer intervals.
Switching off
▶ By locking twice within 2 seconds.
▶ or: By deactivating the interior monitor and the towing protection
» page 63.
 Read and observe and on page 59 first. The warning light in the driver´s door flashes fast for about 2 seconds, goes
Conditions for the locking/unlocking using the central locking button. out and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.
 The vehicle is not locked from the outside. If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off, the door
 All doors are closed. can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on opening lever.
› To lock/unlock, press the  Press » Fig. 52 The safelock switches on the next time the vehicle is locked.
Locking is indicated by illumination of the  symbol in the button. WARNING

The following applies after locking. If the car is locked and the safe securing system activated, no people must
▶ Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible. remain in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or
▶ The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the open a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for
opening lever of the respective door. rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!
WARNING
Individual settings
Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!  Read and observe and on page 59 first.
The following central locking functions can be set individually in Infotainment

in the menu  /  →  → Opening and closing. 

All doors  Read and observe and on page 59 first.
The function allows you to unlock all doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap.
› To open from outside, unlock the vehicle and pull the door handleA in the
Single door direction of arrow » Fig. 53.
The function allows you to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap › To open from inside, pull on the door opening lever B and push the door
with the radio remote control. KESSY allows the unlocking of a single door away from you.
which is in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The other doors › To close from inside, grip the handle C and close the door.
and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is unlocked or
touched. WARNING
■ The door must be closed properly, otherwise it could open whilst driving -
Doors on a vehicle side
risk of death!
This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver's side and the fuel ■ Only open and close the door when no one is located in the opening/clos-
filler flap with the radio remote control unit. KESSY allows the unlocking of
ing range – risk of injury!
both doors which are in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The ■ Never drive with the doors open - it can be fatal!
other doors and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is un- ■ An opened door can close automatically if there is a strong wind or the
locked or touched.
vehicle is on an incline – risk of injury!
Automatic locking/unlocking
This function enables the locking of all doors and the boot lid from a speed of
Child safety lock
15 km/h. Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible.
The renewed unlocking of the doors and the boot lid is carried out when the
ignition key is removed or when the door is opened from inside (depending on
the individual setting for the central locking system).
Note
The individual adjustment of the central locking system is stored (depending
on the Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation » page 57.
Opening / closing door

Fig. 54 Rear door: Child safety system switch on / off
 Read and observe and on page 59 first.
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the in-
side. The door can only be opened from the outside.
Switching on and off
› To switch on, turn the parental control with the vehicle key in position 
» Fig. 54.
› To switch off, turn the parental control with the vehicle key in position .
Fig. 53 Door handle/door opening lever
62 Operation
Malfunctions CAUTION
Before leaving the vehicle, it must be checked that all of the windows, doors
 Read and observe and on page 59 first. and the sliding/tilting roof are locked in order to ensure the full functionality of
the anti-theft alarm system.
Synchronising the remote control
If the buttons on the remote control key have been operated several times be- Note
yond the effective range of the system or the battery in the remote control The alarm system has its own power source, the service life of which is 5
key has been replaced and the vehicle cannot be unlocked using the remote years. In order to ensure functionality of the alarm system, we recommend
control, the key must be synchronised. that you get the alarm checked after this time by a specialist garage.
› Press any button on the remote control key.
› Unlock the door with the key in the lock cylinder within 1 minute of pressing Alarm trigger
the button.
Fault with the central locking
If the warning light in the driver's door initially flashes quickly for around 2 sec- The alarm is triggered when one of the following unauthorised actions is acti-
onds, and then illuminates for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing vated on the vehicle with an activated warning system.
again slowly, you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage. ▶ Opening the bonnet.
▶ Opening the boot lid.
A fault in the central locking system means the vehicle doors and the boot lid ▶ Opening the doors.
cannot be emergency locked or emergency unlocked» page 295. ▶ Manipulation of the ignition lock.
Failure of the system KESSY ▶ Towing the vehicle.
If there is a fault in the KESSY system, the appropriate error message is dis- ▶ Movement in the vehicle.
played in the instrument cluster. ▶ Sudden and significant voltage drop of the electrical system.
▶ Uncoupling the trailer.
Low voltage of the key battery
If the voltage of the key battery is too low, a message appears in the display of An alarm is triggered also when the driver's door is unlocked and opened by
the instrument cluster referring to the need to replace the battery. Replace the the lock cylinder.
battery » page 294. The alarm is switched off by pressing the  button on the key or switching on
the ignition.
Anti-theft alarm system
Interior monitor and towing protection
 Introduction
The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to The interior monitor detects movements inside the locked vehicle and then
break into the vehicle (hereafter referred to as alarm). triggers the alarm.
The alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 seconds after The anti-towing detects tilts in the locked vehicle and then triggers the alarm.
the vehicle is locked. This is automatically disabled after release.
These functions should be deactivated if there is a possibility that the alarm
will be triggered by movements (e.g. by people or animals) within the vehicle
interior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed. 

Deactivation  Read and observe on page 64 first.
The functions can be deactivated once in the Infotainment menu  /→
→ Opening and closing. › To open, press the A button in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 55.
Safelock is switched off during deactivation.
› Raise the lid in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› To close, grab the mount B and pull in the direction of arrow 3 .
CAUTION Note
The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the in- Button A » Fig. 55 is deactivated when starting or at a speed of more than 5
terior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the km/h. The button is activated again after the vehicle has stopped and a door is
glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehi- opened.
cle.
Setting the delayed locking of the boot lid
Manually operated tailgate
 Introduction
If the boot lid is unlocked with the  button on the key, the lid is automatical-
ly locked again after closing.
WARNING
■ Never drive with the boot lid open or ajar, as otherwise exhaust gases The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by
may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning! a specialist garage.
■ Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
CAUTION
the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the lid was
There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked
locked – risk of accident!
automatically.
■ Make sure that when closing the boot lid, no body parts are crushed -
there is danger of injury!
■ Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid, it could crack Electric boot lid
– risk of injury!
 Introduction
Open/close boot lid The boot lid (hereinafter as lid) can be operated electrically and manual in the
event of an emergency » page 66.
WARNING
■ Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
the lid might open while the vehicle is moving - risk of accident.
■ Never drive with the lid open or unlatched, as otherwise exhaust gases
may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!
■ Only open and close the lid when no one is located in the opening/closing
range – risk of injury!
■ Make sure that no limbs are caught or crushed when closing the lid - risk
of injury! 
Fig. 55 Opening / closing tailgate
64 Operation
CAUTION Description of operation
■ Do not attempt to close the lid manually during electrical motion - there is a
risk of damaging the electric lid operation.
■ Lock the vehicle before driving through a car wash (or with the central lock-
ing button). In some car washes the boot lid might open automatically due to
the pressure action of the washing brushes - there is a risk of damage to the
vehicle interior, as well as to the objects being transported.
CAUTION
■ Before opening / closing the flap, check that there are no objects in the
opening / closing area that could damage the flap, and if there are any objects
in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle that could damage the vehicle interior
and the objects being transported.
■ In certain circumstances, if the lid is loaded (e.g. by a thick layer of snow), the
opening process of the lid can be interrupted. Remove the snow from the lid to
re-enable the electrical operation.
■ If the lid closes automatically (e.g. under load of snow), you will hear an inter-
mittent beep.
■ The flap is always to be close before disconnecting the battery.
Fig. 56 Lid operation
Ways to open the lid

▶ By pressing the handle A » Fig. 56.
▶ By holding the button C .
▶ By holding the button D on the key.
Ways to close the lid

▶ By pressing the button B » Fig. 56.
▶ By pressing the handle A .
Ways to stop the lid movement

▶ By pressing the button B » Fig. 56.
▶ By pressing the button C .
▶ By holding the button D on the key.
▶ By pressing the handle A . 

Audible signals Malfunctions
An acoustic signal is sounded when opening/closing the lid by means of the
button C or D .  Read and observe and on page 64 first.
Note Examples of operational malfunctions

If you rapidly enter the vehicle during the opening or closing process of the lid, Description of the malfunc-
Possible solutions
the whole vehicle may jerk and, as a result, the movement of the lid can be in- tion
terrupted. The lid cannot be opened Unlocking the lid » page 295
Removing a possible obstacle (e.g. snow), re-
Set the top position of the lid
opening the lid » page 65
The lid does not react to an
 Read and observe and on page 64 first. opening signal
Press handle A » Fig. 56 on page 65 and pull
The top position of the lid can be adjusted (e.g. in a limited space to open the the lid upwards
lid due to the garage height or for a more comfortable operation, depending The lid remains in the top
on the height of the person). position
Manual closing of the lid
Adjusting the top position of the lid The lid is open and the bat-
› Stop the lid in the desired position. tery was disconnected
› Press and hold button B » Fig. 56 on page 65 until you hear an acoustic sig- Close manually
nal.
Close the door slowly, push down the lid, push in the lock on the centre of the
Adjusting the top starting position of the lid edge, above the ŠKODA logo.
› Carefully raise the flap manually to the limit.
› Press and hold button B » Fig. 56 on page 65 until you hear an acoustic sig- Operating contactless boot lid
nal.
Note Fig. 57
The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically, is always Opening the boot lid
lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is
opened manually.
Depending on equipment the boot lid can be operated without contact.

The ignition must be switched off and you have to have the vehicle key on
your person. 
66 Operation
› To open/close, move one foot in the sensor area below the rear bumper CAUTION
quickly in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 57. ■ Keep the windows clean (free of ice and similar) to ensure the correct func-
The flap opens / closes automatically. When opening the fully closed flap, the tionality of the electric windows.
brake light in the rear window lights up. An acoustic signal is sounded when ■ Always close the electric windows before disconnecting the battery.
closing the lid.
Note
If the lid does not move, then repeat the operating process after a few sec- If the windows are opened, dust and other dirt can get into the vehicle and the
onds. wind noise is more at certain speeds.
The lid movement can be stopped by a rapid swinging of the foot. Swinging
the foot again will continue the lid movement. Mechanical windows
The function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment in the menu  /
→  → Opening and closing → “Easy Open”.
We recommend that the function is deactivated in the following cases:
▶ Installation of a roof rack.
▶ Connecting a trailer (accessory) to the towbar.
▶ Manual vehicle wash.
▶ Maintenance and repair work in the back of the vehicle.
When connecting a device to the trailer socket the deactivation of the func-
tion takes place.
Fig. 58 Window Operation: Left/right
Note
With heavy rain or a dirty rear bumper, under certain circumstances that there  Read and observe and on page 67 first.
may be limitations, or the automatic deactivation of the contactless opening
function of the boot lid may occur. › To open, turn the crank in the direction of arrow A » Fig. 58.
› To close, turn the crank in the direction of arrow B .
Window operation
 Introduction
WARNING
■ Always close the window carefully and controlled. Otherwise, you may
cause considerable crushing injuries to yourself or fellow passengers.
■ The system is fitted with a force limiter » page 68. If there is an obstacle
(e.g. If a body part gets trapped), the closing process is stopped and the
window goes down by several centimetres. However, the windows should
be closed carefully – risk of injury.

Electric Windows Note
■ After switching off the ignition, the windows can still open and close for
Fig. 59 about 10 minutes.
■ After the driver or front passenger door is opened, the operation of the win-
Electric window buttons
dow is only possible with the button A » Fig. 59, in which case this is pressed
or pulled for approx. 2 seconds.
Opening/closing the windows in the front passenger door and in

the rear doors
Fig. 60
 Read and observe and on page 67 first. Power window button
All windows can be operated from the driver's seat. The window in the front
passenger door and the windows in the rear doors are operated via the button
in each door.
Power window buttons » Fig. 59
A Left front door
B Right front door
C Left rear door
D Right rear door: There is a button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors for that
E Deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors (the deactivation may be window.
advantageous if, for example, children are transported on the rear seats) › To open, lightly press the appropriate button underneath and hold it until the
Opening/closing window window has moved into the desired position.
› To open, lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the win- › or: Press the button briefly at the bottom; the window automatically opens
dow has moved into the desired position. fully. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop.
› or: Press the button to the stop, the window automatically opens fully. Re- › To close, push the corresponding button above briefly and hold until the win-
newed pressing of the button causes the window to stop. dow has moved into the desired position.
› To close, pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold › or: Press the button briefly at the top; the window automatically closes fully.
until the window has moved into the desired position. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop.
› or: Pull the button briefly to the stop, the window automatically closes fully.
Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately. Force limiter
Disable / enable buttons in the rear doors  Read and observe and on page 67 first.
› To deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors, press the E button. If The electrical power windows are fitted with a force limiter.
the buttons are deactivated, the warning light  illuminates in the E button.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
down by several centimetres. 
68 Operation
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec- Convenience opening or closing the window using the key in the driver's door
onds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down locking cylinder is only possible within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle.
by several centimetres.
The movement of the window is stopped immediately when the respective
If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window be- button is released.
ing moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet
been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not Malfunctions
possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched
on.  Read and observe and on page 67 first.
The force limiter is only not operational if you attempt to close the window Repeatedly opening and closing the window can cause the window mechanism
again within the next 10 seconds – the window will now close with full force! to overheat and become temporarily blocked. You will be able to operate the
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again. window again as soon as the operating mechanisms has cooled down.
After disconnecting the vehicle battery, automatic opening / closing of the
Window convenience operation window can be deactivated. In this case, the system must be activated as fol-
lows.
Window in the driver door
The convenience operation for the window offers the option to open/close all › Switch on the ignition.
the windows at once (or only the window in the driver's door). The conven- › Pull the top edge of the button and close the window.
ience operation function can be adjusted individually in Infotainment in the › Release the button.
menu  /  →  → Opening and closing. › Pull up the respective button and hold for 1 second.
Opening Windows in the other doors
› Press and hold the  button on the key. › Switch on the ignition.
› or: Switch off the ignition, open the driver's door and hold the key A until it › Press the respective key above and close the window.
stops in the open position » Fig. 59 on page 68. › Release the button.
› or: Keep the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the unlock po- › Pull up the respective button above and hold for 1 second.
sition until all electrically operated windows are open.
Closing Panoramic tilt / slide sunroof
› Press and hold the  button on the key.
› or: Switch off the ignition, open the driver's door and hold the key A until it  Introduction
stops in the closed position » Fig. 59 on page 68.
› or: Keep the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the lock posi- The panorama sliding/tilting roof (hereinafter referred to as sliding/tilting roof)
tion until all the electrically operated windows are closed. can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the outdoor
› In the KESSY system, hold your finger on the sensor on the outside of the temperature is no lower than -20 °C.
door handle of the front door » Fig. 51 on page 60. The sliding/tilting roof can still be operated for approx. 10 minutes after
The convenience operation will only function correctly if all the windows auto- switching the ignition off. After opening the driver or front passenger door, it
matically open/close properly. is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof. 

WARNING Force limiter
When operating the sliding/tilting roof and the sunshade, proceed with
caution to avoid causing crushing injuries – risk of injury!  Read and observe and on page 70 first.
The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter.

CAUTION
■ During the winter, remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the sliding/tilt-
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the glass pane re-
ing roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism. tracts by several centimetres.
■ Always close the sliding/tilting roof before disconnecting the battery.
WARNING
If the tilting / sliding sunroof is closed, by pulling on the recess of the
Operation switch in the direction of arrow 2 , » Fig. 61 on page 70 and the closing
process is hindered by an obstacle, then at the third attempt at closing, the
force limitation will cease to function (if less than 5 s passes between the
individual attempts to close). The sliding/tilting roof closes with full force -
it may cause injury.
Convenience operation of the sliding / tilting roof

The convenience operation makes it possible to open or close the sliding/tilt-

Fig. 61 Operation of the sliding/tilting roof ing roof using the key or the KESSY system via the sensor in the door handle
of the front door.
 Read and observe and on page 70 first. › To open out, press and hold the  button on the key.
Operation of the sliding/tilting roof » Fig. 61
› or: Hold the key in the unlock position in the driver's door lock.
› To close, press and hold the  button (with KESSY, hold your finger on the
 Fully opening sensor on the outside of the door handle of the front door).
 Open to the low-noise position › or: Hold the key in the lock position in the driver's door lock.
A Open partially
By interrupting the locking process, the closing operation is interrupted.
 Complete closing
1 Opening (switch in position  ) Activate operation of the sliding/tilting roof
2 Resetting (switch in position  )
After turning the switch one stop to position  (spring-tensioned position),
the tilt / slide sunroof stops in the position in which the intensity of the wind If the operation of the sliding/tilting roof is deactivated (e.g. after disconnect-
noise is low. After turning the switch further to position , the tilt / slide sun- ing and connecting the battery), then operation will have to be activated.
roof opens up to the stop.
› Turn on the ignition and set the switch to position  » Fig. 61 on page 70.
› Press the switch on the recess E down and pull forwards.
The sliding/tilting roof opens/closes again after around 10 seconds. 
70 Operation
› Release the lever. Activating operation of the sunshade
Manually operated sunblind  Read and observe and on page 70 first.
If the operation of sunshade is deactivated (e.g. after disconnecting and con-

Fig. 62 necting the battery), then the operation will have to be activated.
Operation of the sunshade
› Turn on the ignition and set the switch to position  » Fig. 63 on page 71.
› Press the button  and hold down.
The sunshade opens and closes again after around 10 seconds.
› Release the button.
› To open, pull the handle in the direction of arrow A » Fig. 62.

› To close, pull the handle in the direction of arrow B .
Electrically operated sunblind
Fig. 63
Button for operating the sun-
shade
Operation of the sunblind » Fig. 63

 Open - by pressing (press again - sunshade stops moving)
 Close - by pressing (press again - sunshade stops moving)
The sunshade can also be operated by pressing and holding the appropriate
button (starts movement of the sunshade) and releasing it when the sunshade
reaches the desired position.

 All seats occupied, boot loaded
Lights and visibility
 Driver seat occupied, boot loaded
Light In the event of another vehicle loading condition, the setting for positions . . 
can be used.
 Introduction
The Full LEDFront headlights s automatically adjust to vehicle loading and driv-
ing conditions, so they do not have manual headlight range control.
Unless otherwise stated, the lights only work when the ignition is switched on.
For the basic position of the light switch, use position . WARNING
Always adjust the headlight range control to comply with the following
Note conditions and prevent accidents.
The headlights may mist up temporarily. When the light is switched on, the ■ The vehicle does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming vehi-
light-emitting surface demists after a short period of time. cles.
■ The beam range is sufficient for safe driving.
Operating the lights
Note
Fig. 64 ■ If, with a dipped beam, the ignition is turned off, then the dipped beam will
Light switch automatically switch off and the parking lights will come on. Does not apply to
the position , as long as the conditions are met for the COMING HOME
function . The parking lights are switched off when the ignition key is removed
(for vehicles with the KESSY system, after opening the driver's door).
■ If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically.
Daytime running lights
To switch on/off the lights, turn the A » Fig. 64 switch to one of the following The daytime running light (hereinafter referred to as "function") lights the
positions (equipment-dependent). front and rear vehicle area (only valid for some countries).
 Switch off lights (except daytime running lights) The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are
 Switching the light on/off automatically » page 73 met.
 Switching on the parking lights or parking lights on both sides » page 76  The light switch is in the position  or .
 Switch on the low beam  The ignition is switched on.
 The function is activated.
Headlight range control of the Halogen headlights
The headlight range can be set in Infotainment in the menu  /  →  → Light. Deactivating/activating
The function can be deactivated/activated in Infotainment in the menu  /
The range of the halogen headlights can be set on the screen, in accordance
→  → Light.
with the vehicle load, to the following basic settings.
 Front seats occupied, boot empty WARNING
 All seats occupied, boot empty Always switch on the low beam when visibility is poor. 
72 Operation
Note Convenience signalling can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment in the
The light can operate automatically under certain circumstances, even if the menu  /  →  → Light/
light switch is in position .
WARNING
Note Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will
The setting (activation/deactivation) of the daytime running lights is stored not be dazzled.
(depending on the Infotainment type) in the active user account for personali-
sation » page 57. Note
The setting (activation/deactivation) of the convenience turn signal is stored
Turn signal and main beam (depending on the Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisa-
tion » page 57.
Fig. 65
Operating lever: Turn signal and Automatic driving light control
main beam operation
Fig. 66
Light switch: Position 
Control stalk positions » Fig. 65

 Switch on the right turn signal
 Switch on the left turn signal
 Switch on main beam (spring-tensioned position) If the light switch is in position  » Fig. 66, then the lights are automatically
switched on/off to suit current light or weather conditions (rain), depending on
 Switch on main beam or headlight flasher (spring-loaded position)
the equipment.
The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on. If the light switch is in position , the lettering  illuminates next to the
The headlight flasher can be used even if the ignition is switched off. light switch. If the light is switched on automatically, the symbol  also illumi-
nates next to the light switch.
The turn signal switches off automatically depending on the steering angle af-
ter turning. Automatic driving light control in the rain (referred to as function in the
Use the control stalk to switch on/off the headlight assistant» page 74. following)
The dipped beam is switched on automatically if the following conditions are
Comfort flashing met.
When the control talk is pressed slightly up or down, the respective turn signal  The function is activated.
indicates three times.  The light switch is in the position .
If during comfort signalling the operating lever is pressed in the opposite di-  The windscreen wipers are on for more than 30 s.
rection, the indicating will stop.
The light turns off automatically about 4 minutes after turning off the wipers. 
Lights and visibility 73

Setting, activation/deactivation Light Assist
The following functions can be set or activated/deactivated in Infotainment in
the menu  /  →  → Light.
▶ Sensitivity adjustment of the sensor for determining the lighting conditions
for automatic driving light control
▶ Automatic driving light control during rain
WARNING
The automatic driving lamp control (position ) only acts as a support
and does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the light
and, if necessary, to switch on the lights depending on the prevailing light
conditions.
Fig. 67 Installation location of the sensor / system on/off
CAUTION
The system automatically switches the high beam on/off in accordance with
Poorer visibility is evaluated by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in the the existing traffic (other vehicles) and environmental conditions (e.g. driving
holder of the rear-view mirror. Do not cover the sensor - the system can be through a lit village).
affected.
The high beam on/off is controlled by a sensor or a camera » Fig. 67.
Note
The system can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment in the menu  /
The setting (activate/deactivate) of the automatic driving light control during →  → Light → Light Assist.
rain is stored (depending on the Infotainment type) in the active user account
personalisation » page 57. Conditions for the system function
 The system is activated.
FullLED headlights  The light switch is in the position .
 The vehicle speed is over 60 km/h or for some countries more than 40
The Full LED headlights (hereinafter referred to as just system) use the journey
km/h.
data to automatically ensure the best possible light cone in front of the vehicle.
 The windscreen is clean in the sensor area.
The system operates automatically in the following modes: urban, remote, mo-
torway and bad weather. Switch on the system
A component of the system is the static side light. This light is used in some
› Push the lever into the sprung position A » Fig. 67 The following indicator
light  lights up in the instrument cluster display.
light modes, e.g. for bend illumination during reversing.
Switch off the system
The system works as long as the light switch is in position .
› If the high beam is switched on automatically, move the lever into the sprung
WARNING position B . The warning light  goes out. The high beam turns off.
If there is a system malfunction the headlights are automatically lowered to › If the high beam is is not switched on automatically, move the lever into the
the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming sprung position A . The warning light  goes out. The high beam turns on.
traffic. This reduces the cone of light in front of the vehicle. Seek help from The high beam switches off automatically when the speed falls below 30 km/h
a specialist garage. (but the system remains switched on). 
74 Operation
If there is a fault, the error message will appear in the instrument cluster dis- Switch off the fog lights/rear fog lights in reverse order.
play. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Note
WARNING If an accessory is connected to the trailer socket, the rear fog lamp does not
The system is used only for support, thus the driver is not released from his light up on the vehicle.
obligation to manually adjust the main or low beam according to the given
ambient conditions (e.g. in unfavourable lighting and weather conditions, as Fog lights with CORNER function
when passing poorly lit road users, if necessary, when the area in front of
The CORNER function automatically switches on the fog lights on the respec-
the sensor is covered by an obstacle).
tive side of the vehicle (e.g. when cornering or steering), if the following condi-
tions are fulfilled.
CAUTION
 The turn signal is turned on or the front wheels are severely locked (in the
Do not cover the sensor and keep the front screen clean - system functionality
event of conflict between the two versions, has turn signal has the higher
can be impaired.
priority).
Note  The vehicle speed is below 40 km/h.
The setting for the high-beam assistant in Infotainment is stored (depending  The low beam is switched on.
on the Infotainment type) in the active user account for personalisation  The fog lights are not switched on.
» page 57.
The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear.
Fog lights/rear fog light
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME
Fig. 68 The function COMING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illumi-
Light switch – switch on front nated after switching off the ignition and opening the driver's door.
and rear fog lights The function LEAVING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illumi-
nated after unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control unit.
The function switches the light on only if there is poorer visibility and the light
switch is in the position .
The two functions can be used in Infotainment in the menu  /  →  → Light
(activated/deactivated and adjusted).
Switching on the fog lights/rear fog lights is possible under the following
conditions. CAUTION
 The lights switch is in position ,  or  » Fig. 68. ■ Really poor visibility is evaluated by a sensor mounted below the windscreen
in the holder of the rear-view mirror. Do not cover the sensor - the system can
› To switch on the front fog lights, pull the light switch to position 1 ; the
be affected.
warning light  illuminates in the instrument cluster. ■ If this option is always enabled, then the battery is heavily loaded.
› To switch on the rear fog lights, pull the light switch to position 2 ; the
warning light  illuminates in the instrument cluster. Note
If the vehicle is not equipped with front fog lights, the rear fog lights can be The setting of the two functions is stored (depending on the Infotainment
switched on by pulling the light switch to the only possible setting. type) in the active user account personalisation » page 57.

Hazard warning light system › Switch off the ignition and lock the car.
After removing the ignition key and opening the driver's door, an audible warn-
Fig. 69 ing sounds. After a few seconds, or after closing the driver's door, the acoustic
Button for hazard warning light warning signal stops.
system
CAUTION
■ Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded.
■ The parking lights may switch off automatically due to a low battery charge.
If the two-sided parking lights are switched on when the ignition is off, the
parking lights will not switch on automatically.
› To switch on/off, press the  button » Fig. 69. Entry space lighting
When switching on, all the turn signal lights as well as the warning light  in The lighting is positioned on the lower edge of the exterior mirror and illumi-
the button flash simultaneously with the control lights   in the instrument nates the entry area of the front door.
cluster. The lighting switches on after unlocking or opening the vehicle door (depend-
The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switching on the lighting conditions).
ed off. The lighting switches off after around 30 seconds after closing the front door
If one of the airbags is deployed, the hazard warning light system will switch or switching on the ignition.
on automatically.
Driving abroad
The automatic activation of hazard warning lights can take place during a
heavy braking. After starting or accelerating the hazard warning system is au- When driving in countries with opposing traffic system (traffic on the
tomatically switched off. left/right), your headlights may dazzle oncoming traffic.
When the hazard warning system is on and the turn signal is switched on, the Therefore, the Full LED front headlight setting must be adjusted by turning on
hazard warning lights are switched off temporarily and only the turn signal travel mode in Infotainment in the  /  →  → Light menu. In this mode,
flashes on the relevant side of the vehicle. there is no automatic adjustment of the light beam in front of the vehicle.
Parking light Interior lighting

The side light is provided for lighting of the parked vehicle.
 Introduction
Switching on the side light  on one side
› Switch off the ignition. The inner lighting also works if the ignition is switched off. With the ignition
› Press the control lever all the way into position  or until it stops » Fig. 65 off (or after a door is opened),the lights will automatically switch off after ap-
on page 73. proximately 10 minutes.
The parking lights on the respective side of the vehicle are turned on.
Switching on the side light on both sides 
› Turn the ignition on and turn the light switch to position  » page 72.
76 Operation
Front interior lights Interior light, rear
Fig. 70 Operation of the front light: Version 1/version 2 Fig. 71 Interior lights at the rear: Version 1/version 2
Positions of the rocker switch A . » Fig. 70

 Switching on Fig. 72
 Automatic operation (centre position) Interior lights at the rear: Variant
3
 Switching off
There is no icon available for the centre position (automatic operation) in ver-
sion 2.
Switching on / off (by pressing the relevant switch B ) » Fig. 70
 Reading lamp left
 Reading lamp right
The rear light (variant 1 and 2) is switched on/off automatically together with
Automatic operation - position  the front light. When the front interior lighting is switched off, the rear interior
The system is turned on when any of the following is present. lighting can be turned on/off as required.
▶ The vehicle is unlocked.
▶ One of the doors is opened. Version 1 and 2 (by pressing the switch) » Fig. 71
▶ The ignition key is removed. A  Switches the rear interior light on/off
B  Switches the left rear reading lamp on/off
The system is turned off when any of the following is present.
▶ The vehicle is locked. C  Switches the right rear reading lamp on/off
▶ The ignition is switched on. Version 3 - (by moving the spreader disc D ) » Fig. 72
▶ About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed.  Switches the rear interior light on
 Automatic operation (the light is switched on/off automatically together
with the front light)
 Switches the rear interior light off

Ambient lighting Visibility
Fig. 73  Introduction
Setting the ambient lighting
WARNING
No objects should be attached to the sun visors, which could limit the view
or endanger the vehicle occupants during sudden braking or should the ve-
hicle collide.
Windscreen and rear window heater

The ambient lighting illuminates the side door trim panels in colour, and the
footwell in white.
The switching on of the lighting takes place automatically after opening the
door, switching off occurs automatically after the locking of the vehicle or 30
seconds after the closing of the door with the ignition switched off.
The ambient lighting can be adjusted in Infotainment in the menu  /→
→ Background lighting.
Description of the function surfaces » Fig. 73
A Enable / disable the background lighting
Fig. 74 Buttons for the front and rear window heater: Climatronic /
B Activating of the brightness setting for all areas at the same time manual air conditioning
C Activating the brightness controls for the door area
D Activating the brightness setting for the footwell area  Read and observe on page 78 first.
E Choice of colour options/brightness adjustment
The heating aids defrosting and ventilation of the windscreen/rear window.
F Function surfaces for selecting lighting colour / brightness adjustment
The heating only works when the engine is running.
To display B , C , and D , tap the function surface .
Buttons for the heating (depending on vehicle equipment) » Fig. 74
Vehicles by selecting the driving mode  Switching the windscreen heater on/off
For vehicles with driving mode selection » page 241 The lighting can be
 Switch on/off the rear window heater
switched on automatically or manually A » Fig. 73. A change in the illumination
colour occurs automatically due to the driving mode change or manually by se- When the heating is switched on, a light illuminates inside or below the button.
lecting one of the colour options. In individual mode, the last manually selected The heating automatically switches off after ten minutes.
colour is displayed.
If the engine is switched off when the heating is on and turned back on again
Note within 10 minutes, the heating is continued. 
The adjustment of the ambient lighting is stored (depending on Infotainment
type) in the active user account personalisation » page 57.
78 Operation
Note Sunshade
■ If the on-board voltage decreases, the heating switches off automatically
» page 277, Automatic consumer shutdown - Discharge protection of the vehi-
cle battery.
■ If the lighting inside or below the button flashes, the heater will not work be-
cause of the low charge of the battery.
■ If the Climatronic recognises that the windshield could fog up, the windshield
heating is automatically switched on. This function can be activated/deactiva-
ted on the Climatronic control panel in the menu  → 
Front sun visors

Fig. 76 Sun screen
The sun screen is located in a housing on the luggage compartment cover.

› To roll down, pull the sunshade by the handle A in direction of arrow 1 and
suspend in the magnetic holder B in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 76.
› To roll up, pull the sunshade by the handle A out of the holder B against
the direction of arrow 2 . Hold the sunshade so that this can slowly roll back
in without damaging.
Fig. 75 Fold down visor / flip up visor / make-up mirror and Park Memo
Holder Windscreen wipers and washers
 Read and observe on page 78 first.  Introduction
Operation and description of the sun visor » Fig. 75
The windscreen wipers and the wash system operate if the ignition is switched
1 Swivel the visor towards the windscreen on and the bonnet and boot are closed.
2 Swivel cover towards the door
A Make-up mirror with cover (the cover can be pushed in the direction of WARNING
the arrow) Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
B Parking ticket holder heating the windscreen beforehand. The window washer fluid could other-
wise freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front. 

CAUTION  Read and observe and on page 79 first.
■ If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from
 Fast disk wiping
the windscreen. The wipers must be set to the service position to raise them
off the windscreen » page 296.  Slow disk wiping
■ In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before switching on the  Depending on equipment fitted:
ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen. If the wind- ▶ Intermittent wipe of the windscreen
screen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen, ▶ Automatic windscreen wiping in the rain
this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor.  Wipers and washers off
■ Carefully release the frozen-on windscreen wiper blades from the wind-  Single windscreen wipe (sprung position)
screen and remove snow and ice. A  Setting of windscreen wiper interval for the position  – by setting the
■ Handle the windscreen wipers with care - there is the risk of damaging the
switch in the direction of the arrow, the windscreen wipers will wipe more
windscreen with the windscreen wiper arms. often
■ Do not switch on the ignition when the front windscreen wiper arms are fol-
 Spraying and wiping the windscreen (sprung position)
ded down - there is the danger of damaging the bonnet by the windscreen
wiper arms.  Spraying and wiping the windscreen
■ If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wipers will try to push away the After releasing the operating lever, the wipers will make from 2 to 3 wiper
obstacle five times. Thereafter, the wipers will stop to prevent them becoming strokes.
damaged. Turn on the wipers again only after the obstacle has been removed.
At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds after
Note the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen. This
■ Each time the ignition switches off for the third time, the position of the
function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage.
windscreen wipers changes. This counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper Automatic windscreen wiping in the rain can be used in Infotainment in the
blades. menu  /  →  → Mirrors and wipers (activated/deactivated).
■ The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en-
gine is running and the outside temperature is less than +10 °C. WARNING
The automatic wiping in the rain function merely serves to help you. The
Front wipers and washers driver is not released from the responsibility to set the function of the
windscreen wipers manually depending on the visibility conditions.
Fig. 77
Operating the windscreen wip- Note
ers and washing system at the ■ If the wiping is carried out without interruption, the wiping speed varies de-
front pending on the vehicle speed.
■ The setting (activation/deactivation) of the automatic windscreen wiping in
the rain is stored (depending on the Infotainment type) in the active user ac-
count personalisation » page 57.
80 Operation
Rear window wipers and washers To clean the headlights, the headlamp is also sprayed after spraying the wind-
screen every first and tenth time. Setting the spray interval can be carried out
by a specialist garage.
Fig. 78
Operating the windscreen wip- To ensure the correct functioning of the system, even in winter, this needs to
ers and washing system be regularly cleared of snow and ice (e.g. using the de-icing spray).
Rear view mirror
 Introduction
WARNING
 Read and observe and on page 79 first. Exterior mirrors increase the field of view, however, make objects appear
 Spraying and wiping the windscreen (sprung position) - after releasing the smaller and further away. Therefore, use the rear-view mirror to determine
control stalk, the wipers perform another 2 to 3 wiper strokes the distances to the following vehicles.
 Windscreen wiping
WARNING
 Wipers and washers off
■ The mirrors with automatic dimming contain electrolyte fluid which may
Automatic rear wiper leak if the mirror glass is broken - this can irritate skin, eyes and the respira-
If the windscreen wiping is performed without interruption, then the automat- tory system.
ic regular intermittent wiping of the rear window takes place. ■ If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immedi-
This function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment in the menu  / ately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water.
→  → Mirrors and wipers (activated/deactivated). Seek medical assistance if required.
Note
■ The rear window is wiped automatically if the windscreen wipers are on
when reverse gear is selected.
■ The setting (activation/deactivation) of the automatic rear window wiping in
the rain is stored (depending on the Infotainment type) in the active user ac-
count personalisation » page 57.
Headlight cleaning system

Headlights are cleaned under the following conditions.

 The low beam is switched on.
 The outside temperature is about -12° C to +39° C.

Interior mirror dimming Exterior mirrors
Fig. 80
Exterior mirror operation
Fig. 79 Interior rear-view mirror: with manual dimming/auto-darkening  Read and observe on page 81 first.
 Read and observe on page 81 first. The exterior mirrors can (depending on vehicle equipment) have a manual or
electric fold-in function, automatic dimming and memory function.
Mirrors with manual dimming » Fig. 79
The rotary knob can be moved into the following positions (depending on
1 Basic position of the mirror (not dimmed)
vehicle equipment)
2 Mirror blackout
 Adjusting the left-hand mirror area
Mirror with automatic dimming  Switch off mirror control
The mirror dimming » Fig. 79 is automatically controlled after the engine start.  Adjusting the right-hand mirror area
When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the  Mirror heating (only works when the engine is running)
mirror moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).  Folding in the mirrors electrically (to fold back, move the rotary knob to
another position) »
WARNING
■ Attach external devices (e.g. navigation system) not in the vicinity of the Setting the mirror area
mirror with automatic dimming. The illuminated display of an external de- › Move the rotary knob in the direction of arrows » Fig. 80.
vice can affect the function of the rear-view mirror - it could cause an acci- If the mirror setting fails at any time, the mirrors can be adjusted manually by
dent. pressing on the edge of the mirror area.
■ The automatic dimming mirror only functions smoothly if the light falling
on the sensors is not compromised (e.g. by the sunshade at the back). The Setting the mirror surfaces synchronously
sensors are located on the front and back of the mirror. This function allows the simultaneous adjustment of the two mirror areas. The
function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment in the menu  /  → 
→ Mirrors and wipers (activated/deactivated).
› Turn the knob for the mirror control to the position for the driver mirror ad-
justment.
› Adjust the mirror areas to the desired position. 
82 Operation
Manual folding mirrors WARNING
The mirror can be manually folded towards the side windows. To put it back to Do not touch the exterior mirror surfaces, if the exterior mirror heating is
its original position, it should be folded back from the side window until it audi- switched on - hazard of burning.
bly clicks into place.
Automatic folding in/back of both mirrors CAUTION
The exterior mirrors are automatically collapsed after locking the vehicle in the ■ Never manually fold in/out the electrically folding exterior mirrors - there is a
park position. After unlocking the vehicle, the mirrors are folded back to the risk of damage to the mirror!
driving position » . ■ When the mirror is swung by external influences (due to impact during ma-
This function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment in the menu  / noeuvring, for example), then first fold-in the mirror by turning the knob and
→  → Mirrors and wipers (activated/deactivated). wait for a loud clapping noise.
Mirror with automatic dimming Note

The exterior mirror dimming is controlled together with the automatic rear- The setting of the mirror functions is stored in Infotainment (depending on the
view mirror dimming » page 82. Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation » page 57.
Memory function for mirror (vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's
seat)
It is possible to save the current setting of the exterior mirror when saving the
driver's seat position with » page 85, Memory Function of the electrically ad-
justable seator » page 85, Memory function of the remote control key.
Tilting the mirror area of the front passenger mirror (vehicles with
electrically adjustable driver's seat)
The front passenger mirror area can be tilted to the stored position to improve
the view to the curb when reversing.
Operating conditions
 The function can be activated in Infotainment in the menu  /  →  →
Mirrors and wipers.
 The setting for the mirror area has been previously stored » page 85,
Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat or » page 85, Memo-
ry function of the remote control key.
 The reverse gear is engaged.
 The knob for the mirror control is in the position for the passenger mirror
adjustment.
The mirror area returns to its initial position after the rotary knob is set to an-
other position or if the speed is greater than 15 km/h.

Seats and head restraints Electrical adjustment
Front seats
 Introduction
WARNING
■ Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
■ Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a
result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
Fig. 82 Control elements on the seat
Manual adjustment
Fig. 81 A Seat adjustment
Control elements on the seat ▶ 1 - Move in the longitudinal direction
▶ 2 - Change in inclination
▶ 3 - Change in height
B Adjusting the seat backrest
▶ 4 - Change in inclination
C Adjusting lumbar support
▶ 5 - Change curvature
▶ 6 - The degree of curvature change
WARNING
A Adjusting the seat in the longitudinal direction (after releasing the control
The electric front seat adjustment is functional even with the ignition off.
lever must lock audibly)
Therefore, when leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not com-
B Adjusting height of seat1) pletely independent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a
C Adjust the tilt of the backrest (do not lean on the backrest when adjusting) danger of injury! 
Note
After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the
backrest angle.
1) Only valid for some countries.
84 Operation
Note Retrieving the saved setting
■ If the inclination angle of the seat backrest relative to the seat surface is › With the ignition off and the driver’s door open-press- the desired memory
greater than approx. 110°, then it is not possible for safety reasons to save this button B.
setting in the memory of the electrically adjustable seats or the remote control › In other cases (e.g. if the ignition is switched on or the driver's door closed),
key. hold the button.
■ On vehicles with personalisation, the driver's seat setting is stored in the ac-
Stopping the ongoing adjustment
tive user account personalisation » page 57. › Press any button on the driver's seat or the  button on the remote control
key.
Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat
Note
Fig. 83 Every time you save new seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forwards,
SET button and memory but- you must also save the front passenger mirror setting for reversing again.
tons
Memory function of the remote control key
Applies to vehicles that do not have the personalisation function.
Every time the vehicle is locked, the driver´s seat and exterior mirror settings
are saved and assigned to the key with which the vehicle was locked.
After the following unlocking of the vehicle with the same key and opening the
Among the memory buttons B on the driver's seat, a setting for the driver´s driver’s door, the driver´s seat and exterior mirrors that are saved to this key
seat and exterior mirror position can be saved » Fig. 83. will be adopted.
Storing driver's seat and exterior mirror settings for the forwards drive This function can be used in Infotainment in the menu  /  →  → Seats (ac-
› Switch on the ignition, adjust the seat and the exterior mirrors, as required. tivated/deactivated).
› Press the  A » Fig. 83 button and then, within 10 seconds, press the de- Storing front passenger´s exterior mirror settings for reversing
sired memory button B . Storing is confirmed by an acoustic signal.
The function for lowering the front passenger's mirror area during reversing
Storing front passenger´s exterior mirror settings for reversing can be activated in Infotainment in the menu  /  →  → Mirrors and wipers.
The function for lowering the front passenger's mirror area during reversing
can be activated in Infotainment in the menu  /  →  → Mirrors and wipers. › Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key and switch on the ignition.
› Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror control to the position for the
› Turn on the ignition and press the desired memory button B » Fig. 83. front passenger mirror area » page 82.
› Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror control to the position for the › Engage reverse gear.
front passenger mirror area » page 82. › Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position.
› Engage reverse gear. › Disengage reverse gear. The adjusted position of the exterior mirror is stored
› Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position. in the remote control key memory. 
› Disengage reverse gear. The set position of the exterior mirror is stored.
Seats and head restraints 85

Stopping the ongoing adjustment WARNING (Continued)
› Press any button on the driver's seat or the  button on the remote control ■ When moving the seat backrest, keep limbs out of the area between the
key. seat and seat backrest – risk of injury!
■ Never transport the following items on the seat backrest when folded
Folding front passenger seat forwards.
■ Objects that could restrict the driver's view.
Fig. 84 ■ Objects which make it impossible for the driver to control the vehicle,
Folding the front passenger seat e.g. if they roll under the pedals, or could protrude into the driver's zone.
forward ■ Objects which could lead to injury to passengers due to a change of di-
rection or braking manoeuvre when accelerating sharply.
Armrest setting
Fig. 85
 Read and observe on page 84 first. Adjust armrest
The front passenger seat can, (depending on vehicle equipment fitted), be fol-
ded forward into a horizontal position.
› To fold down, pull the lever in direction of arrow 1 , fold the seat backrest in
the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 84. The locking mechanism must audibly snap
into place.
› To fold up, pull the lever in direction of arrow 1 , fold back the seat backrest  Read and observe on page 84 first.
against the direction of arrow 2 . The locking mechanism must audibly snap
into place. › To adjust the height, lift the armrest in the direction of the arrow A into one
› Check this by pulling on the seat and on the seat backrest. of the locking positions » Fig. 85.
WARNING › To close, lift the armrest in the direction of arrow A past the stop and then
fold down again.
■ If the seat backrest is folded down, only the seat behind the driver´s seat
can be used to transport passengers.
› To Set the armrest lengthways in the direction of arrow B Move to the de-
sired position.
■ When transporting objects on the folded seat backrest, the front passen-
ger airbag should be deactivated » page 28.
■ Do not adjust the seat backrest while driving - it can cause injury and ac-
cidents!
86 Operation
Rear seats Fold forward from the luggage compartment
On vehicles with a net partition, the left and then the right and middle rear seat
Seat backrests backrest must first be unlocked. The net partition must be rolled up in the
housing.
› Pull the corresponding lever in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 87. The re-
spective seat backrest is unlocked or folded forward.
Folding backwards
› Pull the seat belt C for the side panel in the direction of arrow 3 » Fig. 86.
› Raise the seat backrest against the direction of arrow 2 until the release
handle A audibly locks. Check this by pulling on the seat backrest.
› Make sure that the red pin B is hidden.
In the undivided seat back, pull the two outer belts to the side panel. After
folding back the backrest, the release handles A should audibly click into
Fig. 86 Fold the seat backrest forwards from the interior/pull the belt
place on both sides of the backrest and the red mark B should not be visible
for the side trim
on either side of the backrest.
WARNING
■ The seat backrests in the occupied rear seats must be properly engaged.
■ When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the backrest forward, ensure the safety of the passengers
transported on the other rear seats.
■ The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so that no objects
from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compartment
under sudden braking – risk of injury.
CAUTION
Fig. 87 Fold the backrest forward from the luggage compartment: Ver- When operating the seat backrests, the seat belts must not be pinched - there
sion 1/version 2 is a risk of damage to the seat belts.
Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adjust the position of the front
seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the seat backrests. Remove
the rear headrests if required » page 88.
Folding forwards from the passenger compartment
› Push the release lever A in the direction of arrow 1 and fold down the seat
backrest in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 86.
In the undivided seat back, press the release handles A on both sides of the
seat back at the same time.

Fold down armrest CAUTION
If the tablet holder adapter is secured to the guide rods of the headr-
Fig. 88 ests» page 101, do not push the headrests down to the stop – risk of damag-
Fold down armrest ing the headrests.
Adjusting the rear headrests
The armrest can be folded down by pulling on the loop A in the direction of
arrow » Fig. 88.
The folded-down armrest can be used as a side table.
Headrests Fig. 90 Setting the height of the back headrest

 Introduction Setting the height
› Grasp the headrest and move upwards in the direction of 1 » Fig. 90.
Note › To move the headrest down, press the securing button A in the direction of
In sports seats, the headrests are integrated into the seat backrests and can- arrow 2 and hold it down while pressing the headrest in the direction of ar-
not be adjusted in height. row 3 .
Adjust height of front head restraint Removing/inserting the rear headrests
Fig. 89
Setting the height of the front
headrest
› To adjust the height, hold the locking button A and move the rest in the de- Fig. 91 Removing/inserting the rear headrests
sired direction » Fig. 89.
Before removing/inserting the headrests, fold the corresponding seat backrest
slightly forward » page 87. 
88 Operation
› To remove, pull the rest out of the seat backrest up to the stop. WARNING
› Hold the locking button A in the direction of arrow 1 , at the same time us- If you have a limited pain and / or temperature sensitivity, e.g. due to medi-
ing a flat screwdriver with a max. width of 5 mm to press the locking button cation, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recom-
in the opening B in the direction of arrow 2 and pull out the rest in the di- mend that you do not use the seat heating. If the seat heating is used, we
rection of arrow 3 » Fig. 91. recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long dis-
› To insert the headrest, push the headrest into the seat backrest in the direc- tances, so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey.
tion of arrow 4 until the locking button clicks into place. Please consult your doctor, who can evaluate your specific condition.
Seat heaters CAUTION

The following instructions must be observed to avoid damage to the seats.
■ Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them.
■ Do not heat seats that do not contain occupants.
■ Do not heat seats in which objects are secured or resting (e.g. children´s
seat, a bag etc.).
■ Do not heat seats on which additional slipcovers or protective covers are fit-
ted.
Note
If the on-board voltage decreases, the seat heating switches off automatically
Fig. 92 Buttons for heating the front seats/rear seats » page 277, Automatic consumer shutdown - Discharge protection of the ve-
hicle battery.
The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the outer rear seats can
be heated electrically. Heated steering wheel
Seat heating buttons » Fig. 92
 Left seat heating
 Right seat heating
› To turn on the heating to max, press the key or button.
With repeated pressing of the button, the level is down-regulated until it
switches off . The level of the seat heating is indicated by the number of illu-
minated warning lights underneath / in the button.
The seat heating only operates when the engine is running.
When the ignition is switched off, the seat heating / ventilation is also switch- Fig. 93 Steering wheel heating: Manual air conditioning/Climatronic
ed off. if the engine is started again within 10 minutes, then the driver's seat
heating / ventilation is switched on again automatically according to the set- Switching heating on/off (applies to the manual air conditioning)
ting before switching off the ignition. › In the Infotainment system, in menu  /  tap the function surface A
» Fig. 93. 

Switching heating on/off (applies to Climatronic)
Practical features
› Press the button  on the Climatronic, then tap the function surface B
» Fig. 93.
Passenger compartment features
When the heating is switched on, the symbol in the function surface B is or-
ange.  Introduction
The heated steering wheel only works when the engine is running.
WARNING
Setting the heating power (applies to the Climatronic) ■ Do not place anything on the dashboard. These objects might slide or fall
› Press the button  on the Climatronic, then tap the function surface  → down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic
Steering wheel heating on the Infotainment screen. – risk of accident!
› Setting the heating power. ■ Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell -
The heating power is displayed by the number of segments in the indicator cause an accident!
light C » Fig. 93. ■ Do not carry any objects on the front passenger seat except objects de-
signed for this purpose (e.g. child seats) – risk of accident!
Steering wheel heating together with the driver's seat heating (applies to ■ No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the
the Climatronic) drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sud-
› To activate / deactivate the heated steering wheel with the driver's seat den braking or the vehicle collides with something.
heating, press the button  on the Climatronic, then tap the function sur- ■ For safety reasons, lockable storage compartments must be closed while
face  → Link seat/steering wheel heating in the Infotainment screen. driving - there is a risk of injury from the opened cover or from the items in
› To switch on / off the heated steering wheel, press the button for the driver the compartment.
seat heating. ■ Make sure that no objects protrude from the compartments - there is
If the heated steering wheel is turned on together with the driver's seat heat- danger of injury!
ing, then the function surface  is displayed on the Infotainment screen. This ■ Do not exceed the permissible load for the storage compartments and
can be used to switch the heated steering wheel off/on. pockets - it may cause injury or there is the risk of damaging the compart-
ments and pockets!
■ Ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like may only be placed in the ashtray - risk
of fire!
■ The storage compartments, multimedia holder and waste container are
not a substitute for the ashtray and must not be used for such purposes –
risk of fire!
CAUTION
No not place large or sharp objects in the storage compartments and pockets
- there is a risk of damage to the compartments and pockets.
90 Operation
Parking ticket holder Storage compartments in the doors
Fig. 94
Parking ticket holder
 Read and observe and on page 90 first. Fig. 96 Storage compartments: in the front door/in the rear door
The ticket holder is provided for the attachment of e.g. parking tickets.
Storage compartment on the driver's side Storage compartments » Fig. 96
A Storage compartment
Fig. 95 B Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 1.5 l
Opening the storage compart- C Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 0.5 l
ment
WARNING
The storage compartment A » Fig. 96n the front door is to be used exclu-
sively for storing objects which do not protrude - there is the danger of
limiting the operating range of the side airbags.
› To open, lift the handle and fold out the compartment » Fig. 95 .
› To close, swing the lid against the direction of the arrow until it audibly clicks
into place.
The maximum permissible load of the storage compartment is 0.5 kg.
Practical features 91
Storage compartment in the front centre console Telephones that support the standard for wireless Qi charging can be charged
wirelessly in the storage compartment.
While wireless charging is taking place, no objects may be between the pad
and the telephone being charged.
WARNING
■ The phone may become warm during wireless charging, so it should be
removed carefully from the tray.
■ Metal objects between the pad and the phone to be charged can become
hot due to the action of the induction field - this is a risk of injury. If there is
a metal object in the storage compartment that has become hot, then take
Fig. 97 Opening storage compartment/ non-lockable storage compart- out the telephone and let the object cook in the storage compartment!
ment
CAUTION
 Read and observe and on page 90 first. ■ Metal objects between the pad and the phone to be charged can become hot
due to the action of the induction field - this is a risk of damage to the tele-
› To open, press the ridge in the direction of arrow » Fig. 97 - . phone.
› To close, pull on the ridge against the direction of the arrow. ■ With some phones, the charging process can be interrupted or the phone
Certain models do not have a storage compartment lid» Fig. 97 - . can switch off due to heating up.
■ Do not insert any electronic or magnetic storage media (e.g. SD cards, USB
Phonebox sticks, cards with magnetic strips or chips) between the pad and the phone to
be charged- there is a risk of data loss and damage to these data carriers.
■ If a message appears in the Infotainment screen that the phone cannot be
Fig. 98
charged, then proceed as follows.
Phonebox
■ Check that there is no object between the support and the phone to be
charged. If this is the case, then take out the object and the phone. Place the
phone centrally on the phone symbol on the pad again.
■ Check if the position of the phone to be charged has not changed during
the journey. If this is the case, then take out the phone and put it back cen-
trally on the phone symbol on the pad.
Note
 Read and observe and on page 90 first. ■ At the start of the wireless charging, the appropriate message appears on
the Infotainment screen.
The storage compartment in the front centre console can be equipped with
■ For the optimum phone signal strength and uninterrupted wireless charging,
the Phonebox function.
we recommend position the phone in the storage compartment without the
If a phone is placed face up on the pad in the storage compartment » Fig. 98, protective sleeve, if possible.
the phone signal is amplified by the roof antenna. ■ Insert a max. 160x84 mm into the storage compartment.
92 Operation
USB inputs Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder.
In the front area of the holder A , a beverage container can be opened with
one hand by pushing the container into the holder and turning the lid.
WARNING
■ Do not use breakable cups or beakers (e.g. glass, porcelain). This could
lead to injuries in the event of an accident.
■ Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
they may spill – risk of scalding!
CAUTION
Fig. 99 Front USB input/rear USB inputs Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey.
There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the
 Read and observe and on page 90 first. electrical components or seat upholstery.
The USB input is above the storage compartment in the front centre console Waste container
and, depending on the equipment, also in the rear centre console » Fig. 99.
The USB input in the front centre console can be used for charging and for da-
ta transmission. The USB inputs in the rear centre console can be used only for
charging.
Information for use » page 150, USB input.
Cup holders
Fig. 101 Waste container: inserting and moving/opening 
Fig. 100 Cup holder at the front/rear
The cup holders are located in the front centre console A and in the rear arm-
rest B » Fig. 100.
Note
We recommend that you use 20 x 30 cm bags.
Multimedia holder
Fig. 103
Multimedia holder
Fig. 102 Replace bags
The waste container can be inserted into the slots in the doors.
Insert waste container
› Position the waste container at the front edge of the slot. Multimedia holder » Fig. 103
› Push the waste container in the rear area in the direction of the arrow A A Storage compartment for storing two coins
» Fig. 101.
B Storage compartment for storing the vehicle key
› If required, push the waste container in the direction of arrow B . C Storage compartment for storing a mobile phone
Remove the waste container
› Remove the waste container in the opposite direction to the arrow A Storage compartment underneath the front armrest
» Fig. 101.
Open/close waste container Fig. 104
› Lift the cover in the direction C » Fig. 101. Opening the storage compart-
ment
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Replace bags
› Remove the waste container from the slot.
› Press the two locking lugs on the frame in the direction of arrow
1 » Fig. 102.
› Pull the bag together with the frame downwards in the direction of arrow
2.  Read and observe and on page 90 first.
› Remove the bag from the frame.
› Pull the new bag through the frame and pull it over the bag frame in the di- › To open, pull the armrest by the handle A to the stop » Fig. 104.
rection of arrow 3 . › To close, fold down the armrest.
› Insert the bag containing the frame in the direction of arrow 4 into the con-
tainer body, so that the two lugs engage audibly with the frame.
94 Operation
Glasses storage box  Read and observe and on page 90 first.
The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light (this is illuminated

Fig. 105 when the parking lights / low beam are switched on), a pen/card holder and an
Opening the glasses storage box air outlet.
Storage compartment
› To open, pull the handle A in the direction of arrow 1 and fold the cover in
the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 106.
› To close, swivel the cover in the direction of arrow 3 until it audibly clicks
into place.
Air supply
 Read and observe and on page 90 first. › To open, turn the rotary switch until it stops in the position  » Fig. 106.
› To open, press on the outer edge of the glasses compartment in area A .
› To close, turn the rotary switch until it stops in the position .
The compartment folds in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 105. Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows
› To close, swivel the compartment against the direction of the arrow until it cooled air to flow into the storage compartment.
audibly clicks into place. Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or in-
The maximum permissible load of the glasses compartment is 250 g. terior air to flow into the storage compartment.
The maximum permissible load of the storage compartment is 3 kg.
CAUTION
■ Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - with high
Storage compartment for an umbrella
temperatures there is risk of damage.
■ The box must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle – risk of im-
pairment to the functions of the anti-theft alarm system. Fig. 107
Opening the storage compart-
Storage compartment on the front passenger side ment
› To open, pull the handle in direction of arrow 1 pull and open the compart-
ment in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 107.
› To close, screw in the lid in the opposite direction of arrow 2 until it audibly
Fig. 106 Open storage compartment / close storage compartment and clicks into place.
open air supply
Clothes hook Folding table on the front seat rest
Fig. 108 Fig. 110

Clothes hooks Opening the folding table
 Read and observe and on page 90 first.  Read and observe and on page 90 first.
The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on › To fold down, raise the table in the horizontal position in the direction of the
the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors » Fig. 108. arrow » Fig. 110.
The maximum permissible load of each of the hooks is 2 kg. › Fold the table back into the vertical position by push the table away from the
arrow.
WARNING The maximum permissible load for the table is 10 kg.
■ Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items
of clothing hung up. WARNING
■ To hang the clothes do not use hangers - there is a risk of limiting the ef- ■ During the trip to the table must be in folded-down - otherwise there is
fectiveness of head airbags. danger of injury.
■ Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision ■ Do not use breakable cups or beakers (e.g. glass, porcelain). This could
to the outside. lead to injuries in the event of an accident.
■ Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
they may spill – risk of scalding!
Storage pockets on the backs of the front seats
Fig. 109
Map pockets
The map pockets are intended for storage of maps, magazines, etc.
96 Operation
Storage compartment in rear centre console › To open from the luggage compartment, push the securing tab B in the di-
rection of the arrow and fold the cover with the armrest forwards.
Fig. 111
› To close, fold the cover and the rear armrest upwards until the stop. This
should audibly click into place.
Opening the storage compart-
ment The cover must be secured after the closing process. Ensure that the red field
above the securing tab B is not visible.
WARNING
The through-loading channel is only intended for transporting skis in a
properly secured, through-loading bag.
 Read and observe and on page 90 first. Removable through-loading bag

› Toopen Pull the handle on the upper section of the recess and open out the
compartment in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 111.
› To close, swivel the compartment against the direction of the arrow.
There is a cushioned insert in the storage compartment. This can be removed
if the storage compartment is opened to the stop.
Long cargo channel
Fig. 113 Tighten ribbon / secure through-loading bag
The removable through-loading bag (hereinafter referred to as through-load-

ing bag) is used exclusively for transporting skis and poles (max. 4 pairs).
Stowing through-loading bag and skis
› Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest downwards
Fig. 112 Open lid: from the passenger compartment / from the luggage » Fig. 112 on page 97.
compartment › Place the empty, through-loading bag in the opening in such a way that the
end of the bag with the zip is in the boot.
 Read and observe and on page 90 first. › Place the skis with the tips facing to the front and the sticks with the tips
facing to the rear. into the through-loading bag and close the bag.
› To open from the passenger compartment, fold down the rear armrest
slightly » page 88. Securing through-loading bag and skis
› Pull handle A in the direction of arrow 1 and fold down the cover in the › Tighten the strap A around the skis in front of the bindings » Fig. 113. The
direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 112. strap must hold the skis tight. 
› Partially fold the middle seat backrest forward » page 87. ■ Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery
› Guide the securing strap B through the opening in the seat backrest around of the vehicle!
the upper part of the seat backrest. ■ Before switching the ignition on / off or before starting the engine, switch
› Then, fold the seat backrests back until the locking button clicks into place. off the devices which are connected to the sockets - there is a risk of damage
Check this by pulling on the seat backrest. to the equipment due to voltage fluctuations.
› Insert the securing strapB into the lock C until it clicks into place.
12-volt power outlet
WARNING
■ The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 17 kg.
■ Always stow and secure the skis and the bag securely - otherwise there is
a risk of injury or accident!
Electrical sockets
 Introduction
WARNING
■ Do not place anything on the dashboard. These objects might slide or fall Fig. 114 12-volt socket cover: in the front centre console/in the luggage
down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic compartment
– risk of accident!
■ Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell -  Read and observe and on page 98 first.
cause an accident!
■ Safely stow all devices during the journey to prevent them from being › To use, remove the cover from the socket » Fig. 114 -  or open the cover of
the socket » Fig. 114 - .
thrown around the interior in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or
an accident – risk of death! › Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket.
■ The devices may warm up during operation – risk of injury or fire!
■ Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries.
■ The 12-Volt sockets also work if the ignition is switched off. When leaving
the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely independent, such
as children, unattended in the vehicle.
CAUTION
When using the 12 volt power outlets the following notes are to be observed.
■ The sockets can only be used for the connection of approved electrical ac-
cessories with a total power consumption of up to 120 watts, otherwise the
electrical system of the vehicle may be damaged.
98 Operation
230-volt socket WARNING
■ Make sure that no liquid or moisture enters into the socket - it can be fa-
tal! If fluid does manage to get into the power socket, completely dry out
the socket before reuse.
■ The child lock on the power socket is unlocked when using adapters and
extension cables which carry volts – risk of injury!
■ Do no insert any objects (e.g. knitting needles) into the contacts of the
power socket – risk of death!
CAUTION
■ The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical ac-
Fig. 115 Open the cover of the 230 volt outlet / 230 volt outlet cessories with a two-pin 230V plug, with a total power uptake of up to
150 watt.
 Read and observe and on page 98 first. ■ The plug of the electrical appliance must be plugged in up to the stop, other-
wise the child safety lock can be unlocked and the socket may be activated
The 230-volt socket has a child safety lock. When inserting the plug, the fuse but the electric appliance is still not receiving power.
is released, the socket is activated and the warning light above the socket is ■ Do not connect bulbs with neon tubes in the socket - there is a risk of dam-
illuminates green (if this flashes red, then the socket is deactivated). aging the lamp.
The socket works with the engine running (in STOP mode in vehicles with the ■ For appliances with an independent power source (e.g. such as notebooks),
START-STOP system) and for about 10 minutes after the engine is switched first connect the power source itself and only after that connect the appliance.
off, provided an appliance was still connected prior to switching off the engine
(the warning light flashes green)). Ashtray and cigarette lighter
› To use, fold up the cover of the socket in the direction of arrow » Fig. 115 and  Introduction
plug the electrical appliance plug into the socket.
› Before removing the electrical appliance plug from the socket, fold open the
cover of the socket part way in the direction of the arrow. The ashtray can be used for ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like
An automatic deactivation of the socket can take place, for example, for WARNING
the following reasons. Never place hot or flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire!
▶ Excessive current.
▶ Low state of charge of the battery.
▶ High outlet temperature.
If disabling reasons no longer exist, the automatic activation of the socket can
be done.
Should no automatic activation of the socket take place, the connected devi-
ces must be disconnected from the power outlet and reconnect after a short
time.
Ashtray Cigarette lighter
Fig. 118
Cigarette lighter
Fig. 116 Remove / open / disassemble ashtray  Read and observe on page 99 first.
› To use the lighter, push it in as far as the stop and wait until the glowing
Fig. 117 lighter clicks out again » Fig. 118.
Removing the rear ashtray in- › Take out the glowing lighter instantly, use it and insert it back into the sock-
sert et.
WARNING
■ The cigarette lighter also works if the ignition is switched off. When leav-
ing the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent,
such as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a risk of burning, fire or
damage to the vehicle interior.
■ Be careful when using the cigarette lighter - it can cause burns.
Removable ashtray Note

› Remove the ashtray in the direction of the arrow A » Fig. 116. Insertion The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12 volt socket.
takes place in reverse order.
› To open the ashtray, turn the cover in the direction of arrow B . Closing Tablet holder
takes place in reverse order.
› To disassemble turn the entire cover in the direction 1 until it stops and re-  Introduction
move in direction of arrow 2 . Assembling takes place in reverse order.
Ashtray with removable insert External devices (e.g. tablet, smartphone etc.) measuring min. 122 mm and
max. 195 mm can be secured in the holder.
› To remove the insert, open the ashtray fully, hold the insert in area C and
remove in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 117. The maximum permissible load of the compartment is 750 g.
Insertion takes place in reverse order. CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the holder - there is a risk of
damage or functional impairment.
100 Operation
Attaching the rear headrests Handling the holder
Fig. 119 Inserting: Adapter/Holder Fig. 121 Tilting and rotating the holder
Fig. 122
Adjusting the holder size
Fig. 120 Removal: Holder/Adapter  Read and observe on page 100 first.
 Read and observe on page 100 first. The holder may be by 30° in the direction of the arrow 1 tipped and by 360°
in the direction of arrow 2 turned » Fig. 121.
› Toinsert, attach the opened adapter to the guide rods of the front headrest › To adjust the holder size, pull out the securing tab
A in the direction of ar-
and clip in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 119 » .
row 3 and push the part B in the direction of arrow 4 to the desired posi-
› Clip in the holder in the direction of arrow 2 into the adapter. tion » Fig. 122.
› To remove, pull on the securing tab A in direction of arrow 3 and take the
holder out of the adapter in the direction of arrow 4 » Fig. 120. Note
› Press the adapter and remove in the direction of the arrow 5 from the If there is no external device in the holder, then we recommend that the part
guide rods of the headrest. B is moved down fully. Otherwise, irritating noise may occur at certain
WARNING speeds.
Be careful with the adapter- otherwise there is a risk of finger injury.

CAUTION
Transport of cargo
■ Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners,
Luggage compartment nets, hooks etc. - these could be damaged.
■ Make sure that the heating elements of the rear window heater, the ele-
 Introduction ments of the integrated aerial in the rear window or in the rear side windows
are not damaged by abrasive items.
When transporting heavy objects, the driving characteristics change due to ■ Do not place sharp objects in the nets and storage compartments in the lug-
the shift in centre-of-gravity. Therefore, adjust the speed and driving mode ac- gage compartment - there is a risk of damage to the net as well as the com-
cordingly. partments.
■ Put the items in the storage compartments carefully and not load these
When transporting cargo the following the instructions must be adhered to punctiform - there is a risk of damage to the compartments.
▶ Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment and secure it with
suitable lashing straps to the lashing eyes or securing nets so that they can- Fastening elements
not slip.
▶ Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment as possible.
▶ Tyre pressure is to match the load.
In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic
energy that they can cause severe injuries.
The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object.
Luggage compartment light
The light switches on/off when the boot lid is opened or closed.
If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off, the light will extinguish au- Fig. 123 Fastening elements: Variant 1/variant 2 (G-TEC) 
tomatically after around 10 minutes.
WARNING
■ Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners,
nets, hooks etc. Heavy objects were not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
■ An unfixed or improperly fixed load can slip during a sudden manoeuvre or
an accident - danger of injury!
■ Loose cargo could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants – danger of
death!
■ When transporting loads in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passen-
gers transported on the other rear seats .
102 Operation
Fixing nets
Fig. 124 Fastening elements: Version 3/version 4
 Read and observe and on page 102 first. Fig. 125 Fastening examples for nets
The fasteners are located on both sides of the luggage compartment.

Fig. 126
Overview of the fastening elements » Fig. 123and » Fig. 124 Fastening vertical pocket
A Fasteners for securing fastening nets and multifunction pocket
B Lashing eyes only for fastening fixing nets
C Lashing eyes for fastening of cargo and fastening nets (in variant 1, the
rear and centre eye is additionally provided for securing the multifunction-
al bag)
D Lashing eyes for fastening cargo and fastening nets
E Lashing eyes for fastening cargo and fastening nets
The lashing eyelet B is located behind the folding rear seat backrest .
The maximum permissible static load of the individual lashing eyes C and E is Fastening examples for nets » Fig. 125 and » Fig. 126
350 kg. A Horizontal pocket
The maximum permissible load of the individual lashing eyes is D is 150 kg. B Floor net
C Vertical pocket
The maximum permissible load of each of the nets is 1.5 kg.
If the vehicle is equipped with the variable loading floor and this is in the upper
position, then the lashing eyes E » Fig. 124 on page 103 can be used for at-
taching the nets.
CAUTION
On vehicles with lashing eyes D » Fig. 123 on page 102 only the cross-bag are
attached behind the seats and the floor net (the net can be attached to the
rear fasteners A » Fig. 123 on page 102at the rear).
Transport of cargo 103

Multifunction pocket An item of luggage with a maximum weight of 5 kg can be attached to each
side of the double hook.
Fig. 127
Foldable hook
Securing the multifunction
pocket
Fig. 129
Fold down hook
The pocket » Fig. 127 can be secured to the fastening elements A and the rear
and centre lashing eyes C » Fig. 123 on page 102.  Read and observe and on page 102 first.
The maximum permissible load for the bag attached to the fastening element Foldable hooks for hanging small items of luggage, such as bags, etc., are pro-
is 3 kg. vided on both sides of the luggage compartment.
CAUTION › To the use on the lower part A Press the hook and pull it down in direction
In vehicles with a variable loading floor, it is not possible to attach the bag to of the arrow » Fig. 129.
the fastening elements.
The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7 kg.
Folding double hooks
Fig. 128
Folding double hooks
Folding double hooks» Fig. 128 for attaching small items of luggage, such as
bags etc. are provided on one or both sides of the luggage compartment de-
pending on the equipment installed in the vehicle (e.g. Bags etc.).
104 Operation
Fasten the flooring CAUTION
The double sided floor covering can only be used in vehicles without the varia-
ble loading floor» page 110 - There is a risk of damage to the variable loading
floor.
Net on the luggage compartment cover
Fig. 131
Net on the luggage compart-
ment cover
Fig. 130 Fixing the floor covering: Version 1/version 2
Fastening options for the flooring » Fig. 130

 With the loop on a hook on the luggage compartment cover  Read and observe and on page 102 first.
 With the hook on the frame of the luggage compartment lid
The net at the bottom of the luggage compartment cover » Fig. 131 is provided
CAUTION for transporting light and soft items.
For version 1, the following information applies. The maximum permissible load of the net is 1.5 kg.
■ The hook on the luggage compartment cover is only provided for the fixing
of the floor covering, do not hang objects on it - there is a risk of damage to Luggage compartment cover
hook.
■ The flooring covering can be fixed to the hook only with the boot open. Be-
fore closing the lid, check that the flooring is not attached to the hook - there
is a risk of damage to the hook.
CAUTION
The floor covering can be fixed with Version 2 only if the variable loading floor
is folded in the upper position » Fig. 144 on page 111.
Floor covering on both sides

 Read and observe and on page 102 first. Fig. 132 Remove the luggage compartment cover 
A double-sided floor covering can be fitted in the luggage compartment. One

side is made of fabric, the other side is washable (suitable for transporting wet
or dirty items ).

CAUTION
Fig. 133
Luggage compartment cover
■Observe the following instructions to avoid canting and the subsequent
stowed behind the rear seats damage to the cover or the side trim.
■ The cover must be inserted properly and the load must not exceed the
height of the cover.
■ The cover must not be jammed in the surrounding seal of the luggage com-
partment lid when it is in the raised position.
■ There must be no object in the gap between the cover in the raise position
and the rear backrest.
 Read and observe and on page 102 first. Roll-up cover

If the retaining straps A » Fig. 132 are attached to the boot lid, then opening
the lid will also raise the luggage compartment cover (hereafter only referred
to as "cover").
The cover can be removed from the vehicle and stowed behind the rear seat
backrests if required » Fig. 133. Before removing the cover, the sunshade at
the back must be rolled up» page 79.
Removing
› On both sides of the boot lid, unhook the straps A in the direction of arrow
1 » Fig. 132.
› Hold the raised cover and press on the two sides on the underside of the Fig. 134 Roll-up cover: extending/retracting/removing 
cover in the area of the recess C .
› Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 .
Fitting
› Place the fixtures B on the cover above the brackets C on the side trim
» Fig. 132.
› Press on the two sides to the upper side of the cover in the region of the
mounts C . The fixtures B must lock into place of the recess C on both
sides of the luggage compartment.
› On both sides of the boot lid, unhook the straps A .
WARNING
Do not place any objects on the cover during the trip - There is a risk of
injury if you brake or have a collision!
106 Operation
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the roll-up cover - there is a risk of damage
to the cover and a risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or a vehicle
collision!
CAUTION
It is possible that the roll-up luggage compartment cover rolls more slowly
during winter weather conditions. This is not a defect.
Note
Fig. 135 Removing side covers / stowing foldable luggage compartment If you want to stow the roll-up luggage compartment cover and the roof rack
cover at the same time, then it is necessary that the rear part of the roll-up luggage
compartment is covering the rear roof rack.
Extending
Storage compartment with cargo element
› Grasp the cover at grip-point A and pull it out in the direction of the arrow
1 until it audibly clicks into place» Fig. 134. Fig. 136
Remove storage compartment 
Retracting
› Push the cover in the handle area A in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 134.
The cover rolls up automatically. The rolled-up cover can now be removed.
Removing/inserting
› Press on the side of the cross bar in the direction of arrow 3 and remove
the cover in the arrow direction 4 » Fig. 134.
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
Stowage
If the vehicle is equipped with the variable loading floor, then the removable
roll-up luggage compartment cover can be stowed in the recesses of the lug-
gage compartment side trim.
› Fold the variable loading floor into the upper position » page 111.
› Remove the side covers in the direction of arrows 1 » Fig. 135.
› Insert the front part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover under a por-
tion of the side trim D on the left.
› Fold the rear part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover in the direction
of the arrow 2 .
› Reinsert the lamp in the opposite direction to the arrow 1 .
› Fold out the variable loading floor to the upper position.

Storage compartments under the floor covering
Fig. 137 Remove cargo element / Load fastening example
 Read and observe and on page 102 first. Fig. 138 Lift floor covering/storage compartments under the floor cov-
ering
The storage compartment with cargo element may be located on either of the
two sides of the luggage compartment, depending on the equipment variant.  Read and observe and on page 102 first.
The space behind the storage compartment is designed for storing small ob- For vehicles that are not equipped with an emergency wheel located under the
jects with a maximum total weight of 2.5 kg. flooring of the luggage compartment B » Fig. 138.
The cargo element is designed for attaching and securing objects with a maxi- Every storage compartment B is designed for storing small objects of up to
mum total weight of 8 kg. 15 kg. in weight in total.
Storage compartment Use of the storage compartments
› Remove the storage compartment cover in the direction of the ar- › Dividing the luggage compartment with variable loading floor » page 111.
row» Fig. 136. Insertion takes place in reverse order. › Lift the floor covering in the direction of arrow» Fig. 138 and hook into hook
Cargoelement A on the upper edge of the variable loading floor.
› Before use, remove theCargoelement in the direction of arrow» Fig. 137 - . › Stow the cargo in the storage compartments.
› Use thecargoelements to secure the load as close as possible to the rear › Unhook hook A and fold back the flooring against the direction of the arrow
seats» Fig. 137 . (fold back the variable loading floor to the initial position if necessary).
› After use, stow the cargoelements in their original position. When transporting tall objects in the compartments, the hook A must be
hooked onto the upper edge of the variable loading floor.
CAUTION
Before closing the boot lid, check that the cargo transported in the storage
compartments does not strike against the luggage compartment cover - there
is a risk of damage to the lid.
108 Operation
Multi-function pocket Pushing in
› Remove the rear bar from the hooks in the direction of arrow 4 and push in
the pocket in the direction of arrow 5 » Fig. 139.
› Place the rear bar against the front bar and press them together at both ends
B.
› The front hooks on both sides of the luggage compartment fold back oppo-
site to the direction of arrow 1 .
Removing/inserting
› Remove the roll-up cover » page 106.
› Remove the pocket from the fittings in the direction of the arrow 6
» Fig. 139.
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
› Insert the end of the bar marked with   into the right-hand mounting and
the end of the bar marked with   into the left-hand mounting. The arrows
should be pointing forward.
Removable light
Fig. 140
Removable light 
Fig. 139 Multi-function pocket: pulling out/inserting/pushing in/remov-
ing
The multifunction pocket (hereinafter referred to as pocket) is provided for

storing clothing and light objects with no sharp edges.
The maximum permissible load of the multifunction box is 3 kg.
Removal and fitting
› Fold down the front hooks on both sides of the luggage compartment in the
direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 139.
› Grasp the rear bar A with both hands and withdraw the pocket in arrow di-
rection 2 .
› Place the rear bar onto the two hooks that are folded forward in the direc-
tion of the arrow 3 all the way to the stop.

Lamp charges
The lamp is supplied by three rechargeable type NiMH AAA batteries (voltage
1.2 V). The batteries are charged continuously with the engine running (to fully
charge the battery takes approximately 3 hours).
Replace batteries » page 294.
CAUTION
The light is not waterproof, so it must be protected from humidity - otherwise
there is risk of damage.
Fig. 141 Removing light/inserting light
Class N1 vehicles
The lamp is for the illumination of the luggage compartment or it can be used In class N1 vehicles that are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set that
as a portable lamp. complies with the EN 12195 standard (1-4) must be used for fastening the load.
The lamp is equipped with a magnet. As a result, this can, for example, be fitted Proper functioning of the electrical installation is essential for safe vehicle op-
to the vehicle body. eration. It is important to ensure that the electrical installation is not damaged
Description of the light » Fig. 140 during the adjustment process or when the storage area is being loaded and
unloaded.
A Button to turn the light that has been removed on / off
B Part that lights up when the lamp is in the mount
Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment (Estate)
C Part that lights up when the lamp is not in the mount
If the light is in the mount, this will illuminate when the boot lid is opened. Positions of the variable loading floor
› To remove, hold the light in the area D and swivel in the direction of arrow
1 » Fig. 141.
› To switch on the removed light, press button A » Fig. 140. Pressing the light
again will switch it off.
› To insert, first of all insert the light with the rear part E into the mount
» Fig. 141 and then push the light in the direction of arrow 2 until it audibly
clicks into place.
If the light is not switched off and is correctly inserted in the mount, the LED
diodes in the front part of the light C » Fig. 140 are automatically switched off.
If the lamp is not correctly inserted into the holder, this does not light up when Fig. 142 Set variable loading floor to the upper position / variable load-
the boot lid is opened and the rechargeable batteries are not charged. ing floor in the upper position 
110 Operation
Fold together / fold out the variable loading floor
Fig. 143 Set variable loading floor to the lower position / variable load-
ing floor in the lower position
Fig. 144 Fold up variable loading floor / folded variable cargo floor in
The variable loading floor can be set to the upper or lower position. the upper position
Set to the upper position › To fold together, hold the variable loading floor by the handle A and lift in
› Lift the variable loading floor by the handle A » Fig. 142 by about 20 cm and the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 144.
pull towards you. › Fold up the variable loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow
› Lift the variable loading floor to the height of the roll-up luggage compart- 2.
ment cover in the direction of arrow 1 until you hear the clicking sound and
Folding out takes place in reverse order.
press forward.
The variable loading floor is folded together / out in the same way in the upper
The space below the variable loading floor can be used for stowing objects
and lower position.
such as the removed roll-up luggage compartment cover » page 106, the roof
cross bars» page 113 etc.
Dividing the luggage compartment
The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg. For the
transport of heavy loads, adjust the variable loading floor in the lower position
Fig. 145
» Fig. 143.
Dividing the boot with variable
Set into the lower position loading floor
› Check that the area below the variable loading floor is empty.
› Lift the variable loading floor by the handle A » Fig. 143 above the loading
edge in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Pull the loading floor towards you in the direction of arrow 3 until it sinks to
the bottom position, and push forward.
› To divide, lift the variable loading floor by the handle

A and push in the rear
edge of the variable loading floor in the grooves B in the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 145.
The variable loading floor is secured against movements in the grooves B . 

Folding out takes place in reverse order. Pull out and secure the net partition behind the rear seats
The variable loading floor is divided in the same way in the upper and lower po- › Fold out part A of the roll-up luggage compartment cover in the direction of
arrow » Fig. 146.
sition.
› Pull out the net partition at the crossbar C and hook into one of the recep-
tacles D » Fig. 147.
Net partition › On the other side, press on the crossbar in the direction of the arrow and
hook it into the appropriate receptacle D .
Using the net partition
› Make sure that the crossbar is firmly seated in the two mountings D .
› Fold back part A of the roll-up luggage compartment cover in the opposite
direction of the arrow » Fig. 146.
Using the net partition behind the rear seats
› Fold out part A of the roll-up luggage compartment cover in the direction of
arrow » Fig. 146.
› Press on the crossbar and remove it from the receptacles D » Fig. 147, first
on one side, then on the other side.
› The crossbar C Hold in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up
without being damaged.
› Fold back part A of the roll-up luggage compartment cover in the opposite
Fig. 146 Open part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover / release direction of the arrow » Fig. 146.
lever
Pull out and secure the net partition behind the front seats
The process is analogous to that for behind the rear seats. Before pulling out
the net partition, the rear seat backs are to be folded forwards. After rolling up
the net partition into the housing, the rear seat backs are folded back
» page 87.
CAUTION
If the net partition blocks when pulling it out, push the release lever B in the
direction of the arrow » Fig. 146.
Fig. 147 Correctly secure net partition behind the front seats in the
pulled-out state
The net partition can either be pulled out and secured from behind the rear
seats or behind the front seats.
112 Operation
Removing and installing the net partition housing
Fig. 148
Removing the net partition
housing
Fig. 150 Remove the side panels of the luggage compartment/stow the
roof rack
› To remove, fold forwarded the rear seat backrests and open the rear right
door.
Depending on the equipment, the roof bars can be attached at the attachment
› Push the housing A in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove it from the
points » Fig. 149 or to the roof rail.
mountings in the direction of the arrow 2 » Fig. 148.
› To install, insert the recesses on the housing A into the mountings on the The attachment points A and B are located on both sides of the vehicle
rear seat backrests and push the housing against the arrow 1 up to the » Fig. 149.
stop.
Mounting and dismounting of the roof bars is carried out according to the in-
› Fold the rear seat backrests to their original position. structions provided.
Transport on the roof rack Roof load

The maximum permitted weight of the load incl. carriers is 75 kg.
Stowing the roof racks
With vehicles have the variable loading floor, then the roof racks can be stow-
ed in the recesses of the luggage compartment side trim.
› Fold the variable loading floor into the upper position » page 111.
› Remove the side panels of the luggage compartment in the direction of ar-
rows 1 » Fig. 150.
› Remove the key from the roof rack» and stow in the recess C .
› Insert the front roof rack A into the front recesses of the side panel and the
rear roof rack B into the back recesses of the side trim.
Fig. 149 Attachment points › Replace the side trims of the luggage compartment in the opposite direction
of the arrow 1 .
› Fold out the variable loading floor to the upper position » page 110. 

WARNING
Heating and ventilation
For road safety when transporting cargo on the roof rack, observe the fol-
lowing instructions. Heating, manual air conditioning system, Climatronic
■ Always distribute the load on the roof rack evenly and secure properly us-
ing suitable lashing straps or tensioning straps.  Introduction
■ When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on
the roof rack system, the handling of the car may change as a result of the The heating heats and ventilates the vehicle interior. The air conditioning sys-
displacement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must tem also cools and dehumidifies the vehicle interior.
therefore be adapted to the current circumstances.
■ The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and permissible total ve- The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
hicle weight must not be exceeded under any circumstances – risk of acci- output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
dent! The cooling system works under the following conditions.
 The cooling system is switched on.
CAUTION  The engine is running.
■ Before stowing the roof rack, the key must be removed from the carrier -  The outside temperature is below 2 ° C.
otherwise there is a risk of key corruption.  The blower is switched on.
■ If you want to stow the roof rack and the roll-up luggage compartment cov-
er at the same time, then it is necessary that the rear part of the roll-up lug- Fogging is prevented when the cooling system is switched on.
gage compartment is covering the rear roof rack. It is possible to boost the effectiveness of the cooling system by briefly acti-
vating the air recirculation system » page 117.
CAUTION
■ Make sure that the sliding / tilting roof or the boot lid does not collide with Health protection
the roof load when opened. To reduce health risks (e.g. common colds), the following instructions for the
■ Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the load being transported. use of the cooling system are to be observed.
▶ The difference between the indoor temperature and the outdoor air temper-
Note ature should not be greater than about 5 ° C.
We recommend that you use a roof rack from ŠKODA Original Accessories. ▶ The cooling system should be turned off about 10 minutes before the end of
the journey.
▶ Once a year, the air conditioning should be disinfected by a specialist garage.
WARNING
■ The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting.
Otherwise there could be an accident.
■ Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow
out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on. 
114 Operation
Note When this function is switched on, the warning light lights up below the but-
■ The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of e.g. ice, snow or ton.
leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly. Information on the cooling system
■ After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air
After pressing the button , the warning light underneath the button illumi-
conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is not a nates even if not all conditions for the cooling system are met. The cooling
leak! system starts to work as soon as the following conditions have been met
■ If the coolant temperature is too high, the cooling system is switched off to
» page 114.
ensure that the engine cools down.
When the air distribution control is turned to position  the cooling system is
Heating and manual air conditioning activated.
Note
To ensure adequate thermal comfort, during operation of the manual air condi-
tioning there could be an increase in the engine idle speed in some circumstan-
ces.
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)
Fig. 151 Controls of the heating / air conditioning
Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing

the corresponding button » Fig. 151.
A Adjust temperature
▶  Reduce the temperature/ Increase the temperature
Fig. 152 Controls the Climatronic
B Set the blower speed (Level 0: Adjust the fan speed (level 0: fan off; level  Read and observe on page 114 first.
6: highest speed)
C Set the direction of the air outlet » page 118 Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing
D Depending on equipment fitted: the corresponding button » Fig. 152.
▶  Auxiliary heating and ventilation on / switch off » page 119 A Display the set temperature for the left side
▶  Switching the windscreen heater on/off » page 78 B Display the set temperature for the right side
 Switch the cooling system on/off C Set the direction of the air outlet » page 118
 Switch on/off the rear window heater » page 78 D Adjust fan speed (the setting is indicated by the number of illuminated
 Switch recirculation on/off » page 117 control lamps shown in the knob)
▶ Turn to the left: Reduce speed up to turning off the Climatronic
▶ Turn to the right: Increase speed 
Heating and ventilation 115

E Adjust the temperature for the left side (or for both sides)1) Note
▶  Reduce the temperature/ Increase the temperature ■ In order to ensure adequate thermal comfort, there may be an increase in en-
F Adjust the temperature for the right side (or for both sides)2) gine idle speed during operation of the Climatronic in some circumstances.
▶  Reduce the temperature/ Increase the temperature ■ The setting of the Climatronic is stored in the active user account personali-
G Depending on equipment fitted: sation » page 57.
▶  Auxiliary heating and ventilation on / switch off » page 119
▶  Switching Climatronic system off Operate Climatronic in Infotainment
H Interior temperature sensor
 Switch recirculation on/off » page 117 Fig. 153
 Intense air flow to the windscreen on / off (when switching on, the air Infotainment: example display of
flow to the windows  and  is also switched on) the main Climatronic menu
 Switch on/off the rear window heater » page 78
 Switch the windscreen heating on/off » page 78
 Setting Climatronic in Infotainment (also operate with some functions)
 Synchronise the temperature inside the entire vehicle according to the
temperature setting on the driver's side
 Switching automatic mode on » page 117  Read and observe on page 114 first.
 Switch the cooling system on/off
› To display the main menu, press the button  on the Climatronic control
If the function is switched on, a warning light lights up within or below the but- unit.
ton.
Function surfaces and screen display » Fig. 153.
Adjust temperature
A Displays the current operation mode (or set the operation mode) of
The temperature can be set on the Climatronic control unit or in Infotain-
the Climatronic
ment» page 116. In the range between 16 ° C to 29.5 ° C, an automatic tem-
perature control takes place. B Set the desired temperature, front - left side
C Set the desired temperature, front - right side
At a temperature setting below 16 °C,  lights up in the temperature display,
the Climatronic functions with maximum cooling performance. D Setting the power in  operation
E Switching on/off and adjusting the fan speed, cooling system, air dis-
At a temperature setting above 29.5 °C,  lights up in the temperature display,
tribution and air recirculationa)
the Climatronic functions with maximum heating output.
 Colour representation of the air flow from the air vents at the front
CAUTION (Blue colour - temperature reduction / red colour - temperature in-
Do not cover the interior temperature sensor H » Fig. 152 - the function of crease)
the Climatronic could be affected.  Switching on/off the Climatronic 
1) Applies to left-hand drive vehicles.

2) Applies to right-hand drive vehicles.
116 Operation
 Switch the temperature synchronisation on/off throughout the entire Air distribution control
interior of the vehicle according to the temperature setting on the
driver's sidea)  Read and observe on page 114 first.
  Switch Air Care function on/off The recirculation mode prevents contaminated outside air getting into the In-
 Set the auxiliary heater and ventilation terior of the vehicle. In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of
 Switch the windscreen heating on/offa) the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.
 Turn the steering wheel heating on/offa) › To switch on, press the  button. The warning light below the button lights
 Other Climatronic settings up.
a) When function is switched on, the symbol in the function surface is green.
› To switch off, press the  button again. The warning light below the button
goes out.
Other Climatronic settings
Press the  button on the Climatronic control panel → tap the function sur- Heating and manual air conditioning system
face  on the Infotainment screen. If the air distribution control is set to position  when the recirculation modes
■ Air-cond. profile: - Setting the operating performance during  operation (ap- is switched on, the recirculated-air mode is switched off. By pressing the 
plies to Infotainment Swing) button, the air recirculation also in this position can be switched on again.
■ Automatic air recirculation - Automatic re-circulated air mode on/off When the cooling system (button ) is switched on and the temperature reg-
■ Automatic auxiliary heater - Quick interior heating on/off ulator is “turned” to the left, the recirculated-air mode is switched on.
■ Automatic windscreen heating - Activates/deactivates the automatic windscreen
Climatronic
heating
The Climatronic can have a sensor that measures the air recirculation mode
and automatically turns on if there is an increased concentration of pollutants
Climatronic - automatic operation
in the incoming air.
 Read and observe on page 114 first. When the pollutant concentration decreases to the normal level, the recircula-
ted air mode is automatically switched off.
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and
to demist the windows in the interior of the car. Automatic switch-on/switch-off of the air recirculation function can be set in
the Infotainment screen, by pressing the  button on the Climatronic and by
› To turn on, press the  » Fig. 152 on page 115 . then pressing the function surface  → Automatic air recirculation.
› To turn off, press any button for the air distribution or change the blower
speed. The temperature regulation is continued. The air recirculation function is shut off by pressing the  button; this may
be carried out automatically depending on the moisture conditions in the vehi-
Holding the button  will turn on  automatically.
cle interior.
Operating modes
Automatic mode works in three modes - moderate, medium, and intensive. WARNING
Setting the different modes is carried out via the function surface D » Fig. 153 The air recirculation should not be left switched on for a long period of
on page 116. time because then there is no supply of fresh air from the outside. “Stale
air” may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention lev-
After the automatic mode is switched on, Climatronic works in the last selec-
els and also cause the windows to mist up. As soon as the windows mist up,
ted mode. The currently selected mode is displayed on the Infotainment
turn the air recirculation mode off immediately - there is a risk of accident! 
screen.

CAUTION Air outlet vents
We recommend not smoking in the vehicle when the recirculating air opera-
tion is switched on. The smoke sucked from inside the vehicle is deposited on
the evaporator of the air conditioner. This produces a permanent odour when
the air conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through
considerable effort and expense (replacement of compressor).
Climatronic - Air Care function
Fig. 154
Example display of the Air Care
function
Fig. 155 Air vents at the front
The Air CareFunction reduces pollutant penetration contained in the outside

air into the vehicle.
When the function is activated, the air in the vehicle is circulated and cleaned
at the same time. The cleaning process is displayed by the zones displayed in
the Infotainment screen.
› To switch on/off, press the  button on the Climatronic control panel, and
then tap on the function surface   → Active on the Infotainment Fig. 156 Air vents at the rear
screen» Fig. 154.
To ensure correct Air Care functioning, all doors and windows including the
panoramic sliding/tilting roof must be closed. The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 3, 4
When opening a door or a window, the corresponding message is displayed in » Fig. 155 and 6 » Fig. 156, and the vents can be opened and closed individually.
the Infotainment screen. The setting of the airflow direction is carried out by moving the adjustment el-
ement A » Fig. 155 or » Fig. 156 in the desired direction.
› To open, turn the controller B » Fig. 155 or» Fig. 156 upwards.
› Toclose, turn the controller B » Fig. 155 or» Fig. 156 downwards.
Depending on the setting of the air distribution, the air stream comes out of
the following air vents. 
118 Operation
Set the direction of the air CAUTION
Air vents » Fig. 155 and » Fig. 156
outlet The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free (e.g. of ice, snow or
 1. 2. 4 leaves) to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly.
 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 Note
 3. 4. 6 ■ The auxiliary heating switches the blower on, if it has achieved a coolant tem-
 4. 5. 7 perature of approx. 50 °C.
■ In the engine compartment, water vapour may form during the operation of
 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
the heater.
CAUTION
Do not cover the air vents - the air distribution could be compromised. Power on / off
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)
 Introduction
The auxiliary heating heats the vehicle interior as well as the engine. For heat-
ing, fuel is consumed from the fuel tank.
The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior with
the engine switched off, whereby the interior temperature is effectively de-
creased (e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun). Fig. 157 Button for switching on / off (Climatronic / manual air condi-
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) (referred to just as auxil- tioning)
iary heating in the following) ensures the heating / ventilation depending on
the setting of the air conditioning and the air outlet vents before switching off  Read and observe and on page 119 first.
the ignition.
Functional requirements of the auxiliary heating.
WARNING  The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient.
■ The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms (e.g. garag-  The fuel supply is adequate (the warning light  is not illuminated in the
es) – risk of poisoning! instrument cluster).
■ The auxiliary heating must not be allowed to run during refuelling – risk of
Manual on / off
fire. ▶ Using the  button on the operating part of the air conditioning» Fig. 157.
■ The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of
▶ Using the  (switch on) /  (switch off) button on the remote control opera-
the vehicle. If you want to use the auxiliary heating, do not park the car in
tion.
places where the exhaust fumes can come into contact with flammable
materials such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel etc. - risk of Automatic on / off
fire. ▶ Via an enabled pre-selection time in Infotainment.
▶ According to the environmental conditions. 

After switching off, the coolant pump and the auxiliary heating will continue D Set the preset times 1-3 and the duration (10-60 minutes)
running a little while longer in order to burn the remaining fuel in the heating. E When heating the windows are shown in red / with continuous aeration,
Setting automatic on / off the windows are shown in blue
Climatronic: On the Climatronic, press the  button → tap the  function F Currently displayed preset time
surface on the Infotainment screen. There will be a display of the last set oper- G Activation of the currently displayed preset time
ating mode with the option to change this. H Setting the departure time: Day, hour, minute
Manual air conditioning: in Infotainment in the menu  /  tap the  func- Only one preset time can be active. The activated preset time will be deactiva-
tion surface. ted again after it has started automatically. For the next start, activate one of
Then follow the instructions on the Infotainment screen. the preset times.
When automatic switching on is activated, the warning light in the  symbol Note
button lights up for about 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off » Fig. 157. ■ In the selection of the day in the preset time, there is an option between
Sunday and Monday without the specified day. If this setting is selected, the
Operation in Infotainment vehicle will be ready for use at the selected time, regardless of the current day.
■ If a different time is set, the activated preset time is automatically deactiva-
ted. The preset time must be reactivated.
Radio remote control
Fig. 159
Radio remote control
Fig. 158 Auxiliary heater: Main menu/set preset time
Call up the main menu

› On the Climatronic, press the  button → tap the  function surface on the
Infotainment screen. Description of the remote control » Fig. 159
Or vehicles with manual air conditioning: A Warning light
B Aerial
› In Infotainment in the menu  /  tap the  function surface.
 Switch on the auxiliary heating
Function surfaces and screen display » Fig. 158
 Switch off the auxiliary heating
A Departure time - Day and time when the vehicle is to be ready for use
B Setting the operating mode (heating / ventilation) To switch the remote control on or off, hold the remote control vertically, with
the aerial B » Fig. 159 pointing upwards. Do not cover the antenna with the
C List of pre-selected times, activation / deactivation of the preset time
fingers or the palm of the hand. 
120 Operation
Display warning light A Meaning
The auxiliary heating has been switch-
Lights up green for 2 seconds.
ed on.
The auxiliary heating has been switch-
Lights up red for 2 seconds.
ed off.
Slowly flashes green for 2 seconds. The ignition signal was not received.
The auxiliary heating is blocked, e.g.
Quickly flashes green for 2 seconds. because the tank is nearly empty or
there is a fault in the auxiliary heating.
The switch off signal was not re-
Flashes red for 2 seconds.
ceived.
The battery is weak, however the
Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then
switching on or off signal was re-
green or red.
ceived.
The battery is weak, however the
Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then
switching on or off signal was not re-
flashes green or red.
ceived.
The battery is discharged, however
Flashes orange for 5 seconds. the switching on or off signal was not
received.
Replace the battery » page 294.
CAUTION
■ The remote control must be protected against moisture, severe shocks and
direct sunlight - Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the remote control.
■ The range of the remote control with a charged battery is a few hundred me-
tres (depending on obstructions between the remote control and the vehicle,
weather conditions, the battery condition etc.).

The availability of some of the functions described in this Owner's Manual
Infotainment depends on the type of device to be connected and the applications instal-
led in it.
Introductory information
Compatibility
Important information On the ŠKODA pages, check to see if Infotainment is compatible with the se-
lected mobile devices. This verification is carried out by reading the QR code
Introduction to the subject » Fig. 160 or after typing the following address into the web browser.
WARNING http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
■ Only use Infotainment in such a way that you have control of the vehicle Applications
in every traffic situation (e.g. Do not write text messages while driving, do Applications can be installed in external devices (e.g. Mobile, tablet) making it
not link or connect the telephone, do not work with the contact list, do not possible to display additional information on the Infotainment screen or to op-
enter any destinations, do not connect WLAN or SmartLink etc.)- Other- erate Infotainment.
wise there is a risk of an accident!
■ Always route the connection cable of the external device such that is Due to the variety of applications as well as their ongoing development, the
does not restrict you when driving. available applications may not work in all external devices. ŠKODA AUTO can
accept no liability for their proper function.
WARNING The range of available applications and their functionality is dependent on the
■ Adjust the volume to ensure that acoustic signals from outside the vehi- Infotainment model, vehicle and region.
cle, e.g. sirens from emergency vehicles, can be heard at all times.
■ High volumes can cause hearing damage! Infotainment Overview
CAUTION Description - Infotainment Columbus

In some countries, some Infotainment functions can no longer be selected
when the vehicle is running faster than a certain speed. This is not a malfunc-
tion, but complies with the national legal regulations.
Mobile devices and applications
Fig. 160
QR code with reference to web
pages for checking the compati-
bility of devices
Fig. 161 Infotainment Columbus 
122 Infotainment
 Switches Infotainment on/off Description – Infotainment Bolero
1  - Overview of Infotainment menus » page 128
2  - Display of the main screen “HOME” » page 129
 Volume up
 Volume down
3 Touchscreen » page 124
Description – Infotainment Amundsen
Fig. 163 Infotainment Bolero
 Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment
 Control dial for calls and confirmations
1  - Radio menu » page 144
2  - Media menu » page 147
3  - Telephone menu » page 158
Fig. 162 Infotainment Amundsen 4  - Voice control » page 130
5  - Infotainment settings » page 133
 Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment
6  - SmartLink menu » page 171
 Control dial for calls and confirmations
7  - Vehicle system settings » page 198
1  - Radio menu » page 144
2  - Media menu » page 147
3  - Telephone menu » page 158
4  - Voice control » page 130
5  - Navigation menu » page 176
6  - SmartLink menu » page 171

Description – Infotainment Swing External module
applies to Infotainment Amundsen and Columbus.
Fig. 165
Example of an external module
Depending on the vehicle configuration and Infotainment type, all the follow-
ing elements must not be included in the external module.
Fig. 164 Infotainment Swing
The external module is located in the storage compartment on the front pas-
 Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment senger side » Fig. 165.
 Control dial for calls and confirmations 1 SD1 card slot
1  - Radio menu » page 144 2 SD2 card slot
2  - Media menu » page 147 3  - CD / DVD eject button
3 Depending on equipment fitted: 4 CD / DVD slot
▶  - Telephone menu » page 158
5 SIM card slot
▶  - Muting
4  - Infotainment settings » page 141 Touch screen
▶  - Menu SmartLink (Press) / turn on / off the voice control function The Infotainment can be operated by lightly touching the screen with your
SmartLink (hold) » page 171 fingers.
▶  - Sound settings » page 141 The brightness level of the screen can be set by » page 133 or » page 141.
To protect the screen, a suitable protective film for touch screens can be used.
The screen can be cleaned with a soft cloth and pure spirit if necessary.
8 SD card slot » page 150
124 Infotainment
D Menu item with “Checkbox”
Infotainment operation ▶  - Function is switched on
▶  - Function is switched off
Infotainment operation
E  Opens a sub-menu of the menu item with a “pop-up window”
Screen areas Functional surfaces
The screen areas which confirm a function or a menu are called “function sur-
Fig. 166 faces”.
Screen areas ▶ White text - the surface is active and thus selectable
▶ Grey text - the surface is inactive and therefore not selectable
▶ Green frame - currently selected surface
Selecting menu/menu item/function

▶ Drag your finger over the screen in the required direction.
▶ By moving your finger over the slider
▶ Turning the knob  (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus).
Description of the display » Fig. 166 Confirming menu/menu item/function

A Status line with time and outdoor temperature data and other information ▶ By tapping on the function surface.
B Information and the operation of the current menu ▶ By pressing the knob  (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus).
C Function surfaces of the current menu Returning to the higher-level menu
▶ By tapping on the function surface .
Operation principles ▶ By tapping on the screen outside of the “pop-up window”.
▶ By pressing the corresponding button next to the screen (e.g. in the Media
Fig. 167 menu, by pressing the sensor field/the  button) (not applicable to Info-
Screen display tainment Columbus).
Selecting the menu item/function value
▶  - Selected menu item/function value
▶  - Deselected menu item/function value
Set value
▶ By tapping on the function surface  or  in the bottom of the screen.
▶ By touching or moving your finger over the scale.
Description of the display » Fig. 167 ▶ Turning the knob  (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus).
A Identification of the current menu

Note
B Return to the higher-level menu
Depending on the equipment, the Infotainment can also be operated by means
C Scroll symbol – you can move in the menu by moving your fingers up or of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Further information
down on the scroll symbol » page 51.
Infotainment operation 125

Operating the menus Description of the alphanumeric keyboard » Fig. 169
A Input line
B Context-dependent:
▶  - Switch from upper case to lower case and vice versa
▶  - Switch to special characters
▶  - Switch to numbers
C Context-dependent:
▶  - Switch to numbers
▶  - Switch to Latin letters
▶  - Switch to Cyrillic letters
 - Display of visited entries (the number of visited entries is displayed in the
Fig. 168 Operating the menus function surface)
 Erase the entered characters
Operating the menus » Fig. 168  By holding the variants of each type are displayed.
A Browse the menu- List entries
   Switch between keyboards with specific characters of the selected
B Enlargement/reduction of the menu window (applies to the infotainment languages » page 134 or » page 141
Columbus)  Enters a blank
C Expand/reduce the menu window (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
 Move the cursor within the input line to the left
D Open / close the menu window
 Move the cursor within the input line to the right
 Close the menu window  Confirmation of the entered number
Alphanumeric keyboard Search

While entering characters, a search is made for corresponding entries.
Fig. 169 The entry such as a telephone contact to be searched for must be entered
Example of the keyboard display along with the special characters (diacritics).
By tapping on the function surface  a list of matching entries opens.
The alphanumeric keypad is used to enter for letters, numbers and characters.
126 Infotainment
Gesture control Switching Infotainment on/off
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus. Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
› To switch on Infotainment, press  .
Fig. 170 › To switch off Infotainment, hold  .
Example of a menu with
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing
gesture control
› To switch on/off Infotainment, press
.
Automatic switch-on of Infotainment

If Infotainment was not turned off with  before the ignition was turned off,
it will automatically switch on when the ignition is switched on.
Automatic switch-off of Infotainment
If the vehicle key is pulled out of the ignition lock while Infotainment is switch-
Some menus of Infotainment Columbus can be operated by means of hand
ed on, Infotainment will switch off automatically.
gestures by slowly moving the hand back and forth approximately 8 cm above
the Infotainment screen. If the vehicle is fitted with the starter button, Infotainment will switch off au-
tomatically after the engine is switched off and the door is opened.
The menus with gesture control feature the symbol  in the lower right-hand
corner » Fig. 170. With the ignition off, Infotainment will automatically turn off after about 30
minutes.
Switching the function on / off
The gesture control function is switched on at the factory. Infotainment turns off automatically under certain circumstances. Infotain-
ment informs of this via a text message on the Infotainment display.
› To switch the function on/off, tap the sensor field  and then the function
surface  → Screen → Hand gesture . Restart of Infotainment
If Infotainment stops responding (if it “freezes”), it can be restarted by press-
Acoustic confirmation of gesture ing and holding  for longer than 10 s.
When the function is switched on, Infotainment indicates that a gesture has
been recognised by means of an acoustic signal.
Show time and date on the screen
› To activate/deactivate the acoustic confirmation of a recognised gesture, Standby mode
tap the sensor field  and then the function surface  → Screen → Audible
hand gesture feedback. With the ignition off and infotainment (standbyMode), it is possible to display
the time and date in the Infotainment screen.
Visual confirmation of the gesture
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
When the function is switched on and a gesture has been recognised, Infotain-
▶ To switch the time and date display on/off, press the  sensor field and
ment shows an animation with the bottom bar moving in the direction of the
then tap the function surface  → Screen → Show clock in standby mode.
hand movement.
The display mode can be changed by finger motion across the screen side-
› To activate/deactivate the visual confirmation of a recognised gesture, tap ways.
the sensor field  and then the function surface  → Screen → Visual hand
gesture feedback. Applies to Infotainment Swing
▶ To switch the time and date display on/off, press the  button, then tap
the function surface Screen → Show clock in standby mode. 

"Screen off" mode Infotainment menus
With the ignition on and functions Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) and Display clock
when screen is off » page 133 enabled, it is possible to display the time and date Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero.
when the Infotainment screen is switched off.
Fig. 171
The display type depends on the display mode selected in standby mode (does
Overview of Infotainment me-
not apply to the Infotainment Swing).
nus: Grid display
Adjusting the volume
Every change in volume is displayed on the screen.
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
› To increase the volume, tap the function surface  .
› To decrease the volume, tap the function surface  .
› To activate/deactivate the mute setting, tap the sensor field  . Fig. 172
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing Overview of Infotainment me-
› To increase the volume, turn the controller  clockwise. nus: List
› To decrease the volume, turn the controller  anticlockwise.
› To mute, turn the controller  anticlockwise to 0.
› or: To activate/deactivate the mute setting, press the button  (applies
to Infotainment Swing).
The following symbol appears on the screen when the sound is muted .
If, at the time of muting, sound is being played from a source in the Media › To display the overview of Infotainment menus, press the  sensor field.
menu, then the playback is stopped. › To set the display mode, press the button  sensor field and then tap the
function surface  → Screen → Menu:.
CAUTION
■ High volumes can cause sound resonance in the vehicle.
› Select the Grid » Fig. 171 or Horizont. Display » Fig. 172 option.
■ When changing or connecting an audio source, this may cause sudden Overview of Infotainment menus
changes in volume. Reduce the volume before changing or connecting an au-  Radio menu » page 144
dio source.  Media menu » page 147
 “ŠKODA Connect” Online Services » page 13
 SmartLink menu » page 171
With a connection established to an external device,  the actual connec-
tion is shown instead of a symbol
▶  Android Auto » page 172
▶  Apple CarPlay » page 173
▶  MirrorLink® » page 174
 Telephone menu » page 158 
128 Infotainment
 Vehicle system settings » page 198 Configuration wizard
 Navigation menu » page 176 (Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amund-
sen) The configuration wizard is automatically displayed if there are at least two
 List of traffic reports (TMC) (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amund- non-selected menu items after turning on Infotainment, or if a new personali-
sen) » page 196 sation user account has been selected.
 Media Command menu (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen) › For manual display in Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen and Bolero, tap the
» page 156 sensor field and then tap on the function surface  → Configuration wizard.
 Images menu » page 153 › For manual display in Infotainment Swing, press the  button, then tap
 Sound settings » page 133 the function surface Configuration wizard.

 Air conditioning menu » page 116 The Configuration wizard allows you to set the following menu items in se-
 Infotainment settings » page 133 quence.
 Identification of personalisation user account » page 57
Main screen “HOME”  Time and date format
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.  Storing the radio station with the strongest reception signal at present
 Pairing and connecting a phone to Infotainment
Fig. 173  Home address (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
HOME main screen  Setting “ŠKODA Connect” online services
The selected menu item is marked with the  symbol.
Operating using an application in the external device

Some Infotainment functions can be operated using an application in the sup-
ported external device.
› To display the information, tap the  sensor field. For the complete functionality of the application, data transmission from ex-
ternal devices must be activated and, if necessary, operation of the Infotain-
The “HOME” main screen contains three windows. ment via the application must be approved.
In the left window » Fig. 173 the navigation map is always displayed. By tapping Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
the screen within this window, the Navigation main menu is displayed.
› Activate data transfer in Infotainment. To do so, tap the  sensor field and
The contents of the window to the right can be changed. By holding the func- then the function surface  → Mobile device data transfer → Activate data transfer
tion surface A , the list of selectable menus is displayed. for ŠKODA Apps.
By tapping the function surface A or by double-finger tapping on the screen
› Release Infotainment operation using the application. To do so, tap the 
sensor field and then the function surface  Tap→ Mobile device data transfer →
within each window, the appropriate main menu is displayed.
Use apps to operate: → Confirm/Allow .
If there are other pages in the window, then the associated symbols are dis- › Connect Infotainment to an external device via WLAN» page 169.
played in area B . By moving your finger across the screen within each win- › In the external device, launch an application for Infotainment operation (e.g.
dow, it is possible to display these pages. ŠKODA Media Command). 

Applies to Infotainment Swing CAUTION
› Activate data transfer in Infotainment. Press the  button and then tap on ■ The messages are generated by Infotainment. Flawless clarity (e.g. road or
the function surface Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps. city name) cannot always be guaranteed.
■ For some Infotainment languages, there is no voice control available. Info-
Note
tainment indicates this fact through a text message that is displayed on the
The description of Infotainment operation ŠKODA Media Command is part of
screen after setting the Infotainment language.
the application.
Note
Voice control During voice control, no nav. announcements and traffic announcements are
played.
Introduction to the subject
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero. Voice control on / off
The navigation, telephone, radio and media menu can be operated by voice
Fig. 174
commands.
Voice control: Main menu
The voice control system can be used either by the driver or by the front pas-
senger.
Function requirements for voice control
 Infotainment is switched on.
 There will be no telephone call using a phone connected to Infotainment.
 The parking aid is not active.
Requirements for optimum voice command recognition Switching on
▶ The voice commands must only be issued when the  symbol is displayed on › Press the button  on the multifunction steering wheel or the  sensor
the Infotainment screen and the input tone has completely faded. field on the Infotainment (does not apply to Infotainment Columbus).
▶ Speak at your normal volume without intonation and long pauses. The main menu is displayed » Fig. 174.
▶ Avoid bad pronunciation.
▶ Close the doors and windows in order to avoid disturbing environmental in- Switching off
fluences on the function of the voice commands. › Press the button twice  on the multifunction steering wheel or the 
▶ You are recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the sound of sensor field on the Infotainment twice (does not apply to Infotainment Co-
your voice is not drowned out by the increased ambient noise. lumbus).
▶ During voice control, limit additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. passengers talk- › or: Issue the voice command “End voice control”.
ing at the same time.
WARNING
The emergency number should be dialled manually. Your voice commands
may not be recognised in such situations. The telephone connection may
not be established or the connection may take too much time to complete.
130 Infotainment
Operation principle Voice commands
Enter
Fig. 175 The voice commands must only be issued when the  symbol is displayed
Example of screen display on the Infotainment screen and the input tone has completely faded. The in-
put tone can be switched on / off. To do so, tap the  sensor field and then
the function surface  → Voice control.
It is not necessary to wait for the end of message playback when Infotainment
is playing a message. The Infotainment message can be acknowledged by tap-
ping the  sensor field (does not apply to Infotainment Columbus) or press-
ing the button  on the multifunction steering wheel. Then a voice command
In the voice control main menu » Fig. 174 on page 130 There are basic voice can be issued. The voice control is hereby much faster.
commands for the individual menus. Stop
Other voice commands are displayed by tapping the respective function sur- This allows for more time for input of the voice command (e.g. in the list of
face, if required, by issuing the name of respective command (e.g. navigation). visited contacts).
The screen shows the following » Fig. 175. The process for the voice command input can be stopped by moving a finger
Context-dependent: up/down across the screen or by turning the controller  (not applicable to In-
A
fotainment Columbus).
▶
 The system is waiting for a voice command When stopping, the symbol changes from  to .
▶
 The system recognises a voice command Restore
The procedure for voice command input can be restarted in one of the follow-
▶
 The system plays a message ing ways.
▶
 Voice command entry was stopped ▶ By tapping on the function surface .
▶ By tapping the  sensor field on the Infotainment (does not apply to Info-
B Available list entries
tainment Columbus).
C Possible voice commands ▶ By pressing the key  on the multifunction steering wheel.
 Display other possible voice commands
Not recognising a voice command
Voice commands that can be issued, are indicated in “quotation marks”.
If a voice command is not detected three times in succession from Infotain-
Note ment, then the voice control is stopped.
The display of the voice control symbols A » Fig. 175 are dependent of the Correction of a voice command input
equipment fitted also on the display of the instrument cluster. A voice command can be corrected, modified or re-entered by tapping the
 sensor field (does not apply to Infotainment Columbus) or pressing the
button  on the multifunction steering wheel. However, this is only possible
as long as the  symbol appears on the screen.
You do not have to wait until the voice command is recognised by Infotain-
ment. 

Voice commands can be used during voice control Updating the Infotainment software
Voice command Operation
“Back” Return to the previous menu Fig. 176
reproducing and displaying possible voice com- Available software updates on
“Help” the ŠKODA websites
mands
Voice commands that can be used while browsing the list entries
Voice command Operation
“Next page”
“Previous page”
Browse menu / list / directory
“First page” The software update ensures optimum operation of Infotainment (e.g. Com-
“Last page” patibility with new phones).
Information on Infotainment compatibility can be found on the following
Additional Information ŠKODA Internet pages. This is carried out by reading the QR code » Fig. 176 or
Navigation - applies to Infotainment Columbus after entering the following address into the web browser.
If the set Infotainment language matches with the language of the currently http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
selected country when entering the destination, then the destination address
is entered in one step. ▶ To determine the software version, tap the  sensor field and then the
The voice command “Navigate” and immediately the city, street and street function surface  → System information.
number (if it is included in the navigation data) Interest (POI) or a contact with ▶ To start the software update, tap the  sensor field and then tap the
the previously stored address, can be issued. function surface  → System information → Update software.
Navigation - applies to Infotainment Amundsen Applies to Infotainment Swing
To the destination, you are first required to issue the command“enter ad- ▶ To determine the software version, press the  button, then tap on the
dress” and then follow Infotainment instructions. System information function surface.
▶ To start the software update, press the  button, then tap on the System
It is not necessary to spell city and street names if the entered destination is
information → Update software function surface.
located in a country that has no voice control available for the language.
Online POI search – applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen
When “Infotainment Online” » page 17 services are activated, a POI search can
also be carried out online by issuing the voice command “Find online POI”.
Radio
In order for a radio station can be selected using voice command, the station
must be stored in the list of available stations » page 145 or in the preset list
» page 145.
132 Infotainment
■ Touchscreen tone - Switch on/off audible tone when touching the screen
Infotainment settings - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero ■ No navigation sound during call - Switching on / off the nav. announcements dur-
ing a telephone call (not applicable to Infotainment Bolero)
Infotainment system settings
sound settings Display settings
› Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  . › Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → Screen.
■ Volume - Volume settings ■ Menu: Setting the Infotainment menu display
Radio announcements - Volume adjustment of traffic announcements (TP)
■ Horizont. Display - Horizontal display » Fig. 172 on page 128
■
■ Navigation announcements - Volume adjustment of navigation announcements ■ Grid display - Grid display » Fig. 171 on page 128
■ Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) - Enable/disable the automatic power off func-
(does not apply to infotainment Bolero)
■ Voice control - volume setting for voice output tion
■ Maximum switch-on volume - Setting the maximum volume when switching on ■ Display clock when screen is off - Time and date display when the screen is
Infotainment switched off

■ Speed-dependent volume adjustment - Increases the volume as speed increases ■ Brightness: - Adjusts the brightness of the screen
■ Bluetooth audio: - Volume setting of the device connected via the Bluetooth ® ■ Touchscreen tone - Switch on/off audible tone when touching the screen
■ Menu button tone - Turn on / off the acoustic signal by pressing a button next to
audio profile
■ Quiet - Low volume the screen
■ Medium - Medium volume ■ Hand gesture - Enable/disable the gesture control using hand movements via
■ Loud - High volume the Infotainment screen (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
■ Entertainment fading while parking - Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume) ■ Visual hand gesture feedback - Enable/disable the animation when a gesture is
when the parking aid is activated recognised (applies to Infotainment Columbus)

■ Entertainment fading (nav. announcements) - Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio ■ Audible hand gesture feedback - Enable/disable acoustic signal when a gesture is
volume) in the event of a navigation announcement recognised (applies to Infotainment Columbus)

■ Bass - Mid - Treble - Setting the equalizer ■ Animation when finger near screen - Turn the proximity sensors on/off (When the
■ Balance - Fader - Sets the balance between left and right, front and rear function is on, e.g.Navigation will be shown in the main menu when moving a
■ CANTON Equaliser - Setting the equaliser finger towards the bottom bar with the function surfaces on the screen)
■ Individual- Adjustment of treble, mid and bass ■ Show clock in standby mode - Time and date displayed on the screen when the
■ Profile - Setting of the profile (e.g. Rock, Classical and so on.) ignition is switched on and Infotainment is switched off
■ CANTON optimisation -Setting the optimum room sound perception
■ All areas - Setting optimised for the whole vehicle interior Time and date settings
■ Front - Setting optimised for the front seats
■ Driver - Setting optimised for the driver › Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → Time and date.
■ CANTON surround - Setting the surround sound level (“-9 ”Stereo / “+9”full sur- ■ Clock time source: Time source settings: manual/GPS (applies to Infotainment
round) Columbus, Amundsen)
■ Subwoofer - Subwoofer volume settings ■ Time: - Time settings
■ Sound focus -Setting the optimum room sound perception ■ Summer (DST) - Switches summer time on/off
■ All areas - Setting optimised for the whole vehicle interior ■ Automatic summer time - Switches the automatic switch to summer time on/off
■ Driver - Setting optimised for the driver ■ Time zone: - Select the time zone
■ Time format: - Set the time format 
Infotainment settings - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero 133

■ Date: - Date settings › Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → Mobile device data
■ Date format: - Set the date format transfer.
■ Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps- Turning data transfer on and off
Setting the Infotainment language ■ Use apps to operate: - Setting Infotainment operation via the applications of the
› Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → Language. external device (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
› Select the Infotainment language. ■ Deactivate - Deactivation of Infotainment operation via an external device
■ Confirm - Infotainment operation with required confirmation
In some languages, after selecting the function surfaceFemale and Male are dis- ■ Allow - Infotainment operation without required confirmation
played for the choice of voice prompts for Infotainment.
Note Voice control settings

■ When a language is selected which does not support voice control, Infotain- › Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → Voice control.
ment will indicate this with a message on the screen.
■ The messages are generated by Infotainment. Flawless clarity (e.g. road or
■ Example commands (Infotainment system) - Turn on/off display of the menu con-
city name) cannot always be guaranteed. taining voice commands in the Infotainment screen when voice control is ac-
tivated
■ Example commands (instrument cluster) - Turn on/off display of the menu contain-
Additional keypad language settings
ing basic voice commands when voice control is activated
› Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → Additional keypad ■ Voice control session start tone - Switch on/off the audible signal when turning on
languages. the voice control
■ Voice control session end tone - Switch on/off the audible signal when voice con-
In this menu, a keyboard language set can be added to allow characters other trol ends
than those in the currently selected language to be entered. ■ Input tone in voice dialogue - Switch on/off the audible signal for the voice input
■ End tone in voice dialogue - Switch on/off the audible signal for the voice input
Unit settings
› Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → Units. Safe removal of the external device
■ Distance: - Distance units › Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  Remove safely: and
■ Speed: - Speed units select the external device to be removed.
■ Temperature: - Temperature units
■ Volume: - Volume units Reset to factory settings
■ Fuel consumption: - Consumption units
■ CNG consump.: - CNG consumption units › Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → Factory settings.
■ Pressure: - Pressure units for tyre pressure In this menu, all or only chosen settings can be restored.
Settings for data transfer Bluetooth®Settings

Activated data transfer enables data transfer between the Infotainment sys- › Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → Bluetooth. 
tem and the external device or the operation of some Infotainment functions
using the applications of the external device (e.g. ŠKODA Media Command).
134 Infotainment
■ Bluetooth - Switch on/off Bluetooth® function Network settings
■ Visibility: Switch the visibility of the Bluetooth® device for other Bluetooth® de-
vices on/off Applies to the infotainment Columbus with seated in the external module SIM
■ Name: - Change the name of the Bluetooth® unit card as well as for the Infotainment Amundsen with the connected Carstick-
■ Paired devices - Display the list of paired Bluetooth ® devices Device.
■ Find devices - Search for available Bluetooth® devices
■ Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP) - Activate/deactivate the ability to connect a
› Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → Network.
Bluetooth® audio device (e.g. MP3 player, tablet etc...) ■ Network settings - Sets the data connection from the associated telephone
service provider (APN settings)
Wireless settings ■ Access point name: ... - Access point name setting
■ User name: ... - User name setting
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen. ■ Password: ... - Password setting
› Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → WLAN. ■ Authentication: Sets the check type
■ Normal - Without verification
■ WLAN - List of available hotspots of external devices ■ Safe - Verification required
WLAN - Turn on / off Infotainment wireless
■ ■ Reset Access Point (APN) - Delete the parameters for the network setting
WPS quick connection (WPS button) - Establishing a secure connection to the
■ ■ Store - Storage of the parameters for the network setting
hotspot of the external device using WPS (applies to Infotainment Amund- ■ Network provider: ... - Selection of the network provider (the menu item is visi-
sen) ble when the SIM card is inserted in the external module or CarStick device)
■ Manual settings - Setting the parameters for search and connection to the ■ Data roaming - Enable / disable the use of data roaming connection
hotspot of the external device ■ Current connection details - Display of information on data downloaded (by tap-
■ Network name - Enter the Hotspot name
ping the function button Reset the data information is deleted)
■ Network key - Setting the access password ■ Data connection: - Usage settings for the data connection (Internet connection)
■ Security level: - Security setting (WPA2 always set)
of the SIM card inserted in the external module or CarStick device
■ Connect - Connection establishment ■ Off - Use of the data connection is not possible
■ Search - Search / Restore the list of available hotspots ■ Ask - Use of the data connection is only possible after it has been confirmed
■ Mobile hotspot - Setting Infotainment hotspot (in the function surface the sym- ■ On - Use of the data connection is possible at any time
bol  is displayed in the function surface with the number of connected ex-
ternal devices) ŠKODA Connect Online Services settings
■ Mobile hotspot - Switching on / off Infotainment hotspot
■ WPS quick connection (WPS button) - Establishing a secure connection to the In- › Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → ŠKODA Connect
fotainment hotspot via WPS (applies to Amundsen) (Online Services).
■ Hotspot (WLAN) settings - Setting the parameters for the connection to Info-
■ Services Management - Information on licensing of the respective online serv-
tainment hotspot
■ Security level: - Security setting (WPA2 always set)
ices and the option to switch them on / off
■ registration - Enter the registration PIN code for online services (in the user
■ Network key - Input of the access password
■ SSID: ... - Infotainment hotspot name
profile on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal receive)
■ Do not send network name (SSID) -Turn Infotainment hotspot visibility on/off
■ Store - Storage of Infotainment hotspot parameters System information
› Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  → System information. 

The information available will be displayed, for example regarding the Infotain- ■ Automatic frequency control (AF) - Activate/deactivate the search for alternative
ment hardware and software, the Bluetooth® software version, the navigation frequencies of the station currently being played
database version, etc. ■ Radio Data System (RDS) - enable/disable RDS function (receiving additional in-
formation from the station)
› To Update the Infotainment software, Bluetooth® software version, etc., tap ■ RDS Regional: Switch on/off automatic tracking of related regional stations
on the function surface Update software.
■ Fixed - Maintains the selected regional station continuously. When the sig-
› To Update the navigation database and the POI categories created in the nal is lost, another station must be set manually.
user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website, tap on the function sur-
■ Automatic - Auto-selects the station with the best reception at the moment.
face Online update.
If you lose reception in the given the region, Infotainment will automatically
The information on available software updates is obtained from a ŠKODA part- set another available region.
ner or from the following ŠKODA Internet pages.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal Advanced settings (DAB)
› In the Radio main menu, select the DAB range and tap on the function sur-
Radio menu settings face  → Advanced settings.
Settings for all broadcasting ranges ■ Auto-save station logos- Automatic storage of the station logos
■ DAB traffic messages - Switch on/off DAB traffic messages
› In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface  . ■ Other DAB messages - Switch on/off other announcements (e.g., warnings, re-
gional weather, sports reports, financial news)
■ Sound - sound settings ■ DAB - DAB station tracking - Switch on/off automatic DAB station tracking on
■ Scan - Automatic playback of short portions of all available stations in the
another frequency or in other station groups
current frequency range ■ Automatic DAB - FM switching - Switch on/off auto-switching from DAB to the
■ Arrow buttons: - Set the function of the function surfaces  
■ Preset list - Change between stations stored under the preset buttons
FM broadcasting range if the DAB signal is lost
■ Switch to a similar station - Activate/deactivate automatic switching to another
■ Station list - Change between all available stations of the selected broadcast-
station with similar content in the event of signal loss (applies to Infotain-
ing range
■ Traffic programme (TP) - Switches TP traffic programme on/off
ment Columbus)
■ L-band - Activate/deactivate the availability of the L-band
■ Delete presets - Deletes station buttons
■ Station logos - Manual management of station logos Automatic change from DAB to FM
■ Radio text - Switching the text display radio (FM and DAB) on and off In the event of bad DAB reception, the device tries to find an FM station.
■ Advanced settings - Other settings that are different depending on the selected
The station name is followed by () while the station is being received on the
broadcasting range (FM and DAB)
FM band. When the corresponding DAB station is received again, the system
automatically switches from FM to DAB.
Advanced settings (FM)
If a DAB station is also not available in the FM band due to poor reception, In-
› Select the FM band in the Radio main menu and tap on the function surface fotainment will be switched to mute.
 → Advanced settings.
L-band
■ Auto-save station logos- Automatic storage of the station logos For the DAB radio reception in different countries, different broadcasting
■ Region for station logo: - Setting the region for station logos ranges are used. In some countries the DAB radio reception is only possible in
the what is known as the L-band. 
136 Infotainment
If no L-band DAB radio reception is possible in the country then we recom- Settings
mend turning off the L-band. The channel scan is therefore faster.
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface  .
Media menu settings ■ Hands-free - Switch a call to the telephone/back to Infotainment (the menu
› Tap the function surface in the Media main menu  . item is displayed during a call)
■ Select mobile phone - Search for available telephones/list of paired tele-
■ Sound - sound settings phones/select telephone
■ Manage jukebox - Managing (record / delete) supported files (audio / video) in ■ Bluetooth - Bluetooth® settings » page 134
the internal Infotainment memory (applies to Infotainment Columbus) ■ User profile - User profile settings
■ Mix/repeat including subfolders - Switching the title display including subfolders ■ Manage favourites - Set the function surfaces for your favourite contacts
■ Bluetooth - Settings for the Bluetooth® function ■ Mailbox number: - Enter the mailbox phone number
■ WLAN - Wi-Fi settings (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen) ■ Network selection: - Select the service provider of the SIM card inserted in the
■ Video (DVD) settings - Setting the parameters of the DVD video (applies to Info-
external module (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot
tainment Columbus) in the external module)
■ Remove safely: - Safe removal of the external device ■ Priority assignment: - Select the phone service priority of the SIM card inser-
■ Traffic programme (TP) - Switches traffic programme on/off
ted in the external module (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM
card slot in the external module)
Image menu settings ■ Automatic - Depending on the telephone service provider
■ Telephone call - Telephone calls are preferred
› In the Images main menu, tap on the function surface  . ■ Data transfer - A data connection is preferred
■ Image view: - Image view settings ■ Sort by: - Arrangement of telephone contact list
Full - Display the maximum image size while retaining the aspect ratio
■ ■ Surname - Sort by contact name
Automatic - Full screen display
■ ■ 1st name - Sort by contact's first name
■ Display time: - Set the display time for the slideshow ■ Profile name: Rename the profile of the SIM card inserted in the external
■ Repeat slideshow - Switching on/off the slideshow repeat module (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the ex-
ternal module)
Video DVD menu settings ■ Import contacts: - Import telephone contacts
■ Select device contacts - Open the paired phones menu (applies to Infotain-
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus. ment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external module - if the SIM
› In the Video DVD main menu, tap on the function surface  . card is inserted in the external module)
■ Select ring tone - Select the ring tone (depending on the connected phone)
Depending on the DVD, some of the following menu items are displayed. ■ Reminder: Remember your mobile - Turn on/off the warning mode before forget-
■ Format: - Set the screen width/height ratio ting the phone in the vehicle (if the phone was connected to the device)
■ Audio channel: - Select the audio channel ■ Show pictures for contacts - Switch on/off the display of the image assigned to
■ Subtitles: - Subtitle selection the contact
■ Enter/change PIN for parental settings - Management of the PIN code for parental ■ Conference call - Activates/deactivates conference calls 
control
■ Parental control: - Parental control settings

■ Call settings: - Setting the phone functions of the SIM card inserted in the ex- ■ Delete text message - Delete the data stored on the SIM card text messages
ternal module during a call (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM ■ All - Delete all text messages
card slot in the external module) ■ Inbox - Delete the text messages received
■ Hold call: - Switch on/off the display of the option for answering an incoming ■ Outbox - Delete draft text messages
call during a call, determining the current divert setting ■ Sent - Delete sent text messages
■ On - Turn on the display ■ Telephone interface “Business” - Turn on / off the phone function of the external
■ Off - Turn off the display module (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the ex-
■ Request status - Check the settings of the SIM card function ternal module)
■ Send own number: - Sets the telephone number display for the call receiver ■ Use SIM card only for data connection - Switch on - Activating only the data serv-
■ On - Turn on the display ices / Switch off - Activating the data and telephone services of the SIM
■ Off - Turn off the display card inserted in the external module (applies to Infotainment Columbus with
■ Network dependent - Display depending the telephone service provider the SIM card slot in the external module)
■ Request status - Check the settings of the SIM card function ■ Network - Setting of the telephone service provider for the sim card inserted
■ Delete calls - Delete the selected call type performed via the SIM card inserted in the external module or in the telephone connected to Infotainment by the
into the external module or via a telephone connected to Infotainment by the Bluetooth® profile rSAP (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card
Bluetooth® profile rSAP (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external module)/the SIM card inserted in the CarStick device (ap-
slot in the external module) plies to Infotainment Amundsen) » page 135
■ All areas - Delete all calls ■ PIN settings: - Setting the PIN code of the SIM card inserted in the external
■ Missed calls - Delete list of missed calls module (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the ex-
■ Dialled numbers. - Delete outgoing calls ternal module)
■ Received calls - Delete list of received calls ■ Automatic PIN entry - Activate/deactivate storage of the SIM card PIN code
■ Text message settings - Text message settings for the sim card inserted in the ■ Change PIN - Change the PIN code of the SIM card
external module or in the telephone connected to Infotainment by the Blue- ■ Add PIN 2 - Enter the second PIN code of the SIM card (when the function
tooth® profile rSAP (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot Automatic PIN entry is on or when the SIM card supports another telephone
in the external module) service provider)
■ Standard account - Setting for the use of text messages (only visible when the ■ Forward calls - Setting forwarding of incoming calls (valid for Infotainment Co-
SIM card is only used for data services while a telephone is connected to lumbus with the SIM card slot in the external module)
the Infotainment that supports the Bluetooth® profile MAP) ■ All calls - Forward all incoming calls
■ No standard account - Without priority (selection of the SIM card or the con- ■ If engaged - Forwarding incoming calls during a telephone call
nected telephone required) ■ Unavailable - Forwarding the incoming calls when the vehicle is outside the
■ SIM - A list of text messages on the SIM card range of the telephone service provider signal
■ MAP - A list of text messages of the connected telephone ■ If no answer - Redirecting incoming calls when the incoming call is not an-
■ Service centre number: Setting the number of SMS services of the telephone swered
service provider
■ Store sent text messages - Enable / disable the storage of the text message on SmartLink+ menu settings
the SIM card
■ Period of validity: - Adjustment of the period in which the telephone service › In the main SmartLink menu, tap on function surface  . 
provider will try to deliver a text message (for example, if the recipient is
not available or Infotainment is switched off.)
138 Infotainment
■ Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps- Activate/deactivate data transfer for ■ Show POIs - Switch on/off the display of POIs
ŠKODA applications ■ Select categories for POIs - Selection of the displayed category POIs
■ MirrorLink® - Settings of the system MirrorLink® ■ Show brand logos for POIs - Switch on/off the company logos available for the
■ Allow MirrorLink® notification to be shown - Turn the display of Mirror link® appli- POIs shown
cation messages on the Infotainment screen on/off ■ Map view in the instrument cluster - Settings of the map display in the digital in-
strument cluster (applies to vehicles with Infotainment Columbus and the
Navigation menu settings digital instrument cluster)
■ 2D north - two-dimensional map, aligned towards the north - the map does
Route options not rotate
■ 2D heading up - two-dimensional map display, aligned in relation to direction
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface  → Route options. of travel - the map rotates
■ 3D heading up - three-dimensional map display
■ Suggest 3 alternative routes - Switch on/off the menu for alternative routes (eco-
■ Traffic flow settings - Setting the display of a traffic obstruction received from
nomical, fast, short)
■ Route: - Setting the preferred route online traffic
■ Display free-moving traffic - Enable / disable the display of routes with free-
■ Freq. Routes - Show/hide the menu of the most frequent routes in the split
screen moving transport
■ Dynamic route - Switch on/off dynamic route recalculation due to TMC traffic ■ See jam - Enable / disable the display of routes with heavy traffic
■ Display traffic events (symbols on map) - Activate/deactivate the display of
reports or online traffic reports
■  Avoid motorways - Switch on/off the non-use of motorways in the route cal- routes with a traffic incident
culation
■  Avoid ferries and motorail trains - Switch on/off the non-use of ferries and mo- Manage memory
torail trains in the route calculation
■  Avoid toll roads - Switch on/off use of toll roads for route calculation
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface  → Manage memory.
■  Avoid tunnels - Switch on/off use of tunnels for route calculation ■ Sort contacts: - Setting the configuration of the phone book
■  Avoid routes requiring toll stickers - Switch use of routes requiring toll stickers By surname - Sorting by the contact surname
■
on/off for route calculation By first name - Sorting by the contact first name
■
■ Show available toll stickers - Selection of countries for which a valid toll sticker is ■ Define home address - Enter the home address
required (routes requiring toll stickers are used for route calculation) ■ Delete My POIs - Deleting own POI categories (Personal POI)
■  Include trailer - Activate/deactivate the setting to include the trailer in route ■ Update "My POIs" (SD/USB) - Import / update your own POI categories (Personal
calculation » page 190 POI)
■ Retrieve "My POIs" (online) - Online import / update of the user profile on the
Map website ŠKODA Connect Portal started own POI categories
■ Import destinations (SD/USB) - Import destinations in vCard format
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface  → Map. ■ Delete user data - Delete user data (by pressing the function surfaceDelete and
■ Show road signs - Switch on/off the display of traffic signs confirm the deletion)
■ Last destinations - Delete the last destinations
■ Lane guidance - Display of lane guidance on/off
■ Dest. memory - Delete the stored destinations
■ Show favourites - Switch on/off the display of favourites
■ Online dests - Delete the stored online dests
■ Routes - Delete saved routes
■ My points of interest (Personal POI) - Delete the custom POIs 

■ Entered cities - Delete the history of places already entered via the address ■ Select preferred fuel station - Select your preferred fuel station brand (the selec-
■ Home address - Delete the stored home address ted station brand will be displayed in the first three positions of the list)
■ Flagged destination - Delete the flagged destination ■ Fuel warning -Turn on- / Off the display of a warning message with the option
■ Waypoints - Delete item in the Waypoint mode menu (applies to Infotain- to visit the nearest petrol station when the fuel level reaches the reserve
ment Columbus) area
■ Freq. Routes - Delete the most frequently travelled routes
Version information
Navigation announcements
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface  → Version informa-
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface  → Navigation an- tion.
nouncements.
A list of countries is displayed that exist for the navigation data, together with
■ Volume - Volume control of the nav. announcements the date of the last update.
■ Entertainment fad. (Navigation) - Adjust the fading of the audio volume (e.g. radio An update of the navigation data can be carried out by tapping the function
volume) when navigation announcements are being made surface Update (SD/USB) or Update (online) (applies to Infotainment Columbus).
■ Navigation announcements: - Setting the playback method for navigation an-
nouncements (applies to Infotainment Columbus) The information on updating the navigation data is to be obtained from a
■ Comprehensive - All nav. announcements ŠKODA partner or on the following ŠKODA Internet pages.
■ Brief - Short nav. announcements
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
■ Congestion only - Only nav. announcements when a route is changed
■ No navigation sound during call - Activate/ deactivate non-playback of nav. an-
Advanced settings
nouncements during a telephone call
■ Note:“My POIs” - Activate/deactivate an audible indication when approaching a › In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface  → Advanced settings.
custom POI (if supported by the imported custom POI) ■ Time display: - Select the time display in the status line
■  - Estimated arrival time at destination
Top speeds ■  - Estimated travelling time to the destination
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface  → Speed limits. ■ Status line: - Selection of the target type, for which the status line, the route
and travel time are displayed (Here it is also determined which destination
The maximum speed limits for the current country are displayed. type after selecting  →  )
When the function is switched on Note:National border crossed» page 140, Ad- ■  - Route destination
vanced settings, display the country-specific speed limits when crossing inter- ■  - Next stopover
national borders. ■ Note:National border crossed - Switching the display of information on country-
specific speed limits when crossing a national border on/off
Fuel options ■ Demo mode - Switch on/off guidance in demo mode
■ Define demo mode starting point - Specifying the start point of the route guidance
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface  → Fuel options. in the demo mode by entering the address or the current vehicle position
140 Infotainment
■ Time: - Time settings
Infotainment settings - Swing ■ Time format: - Set the time format
■ Summer (DST) - Switches summer time on/off
Infotainment system settings ■ Automatic summer time - Switches the automatic switch to summer time on/off
■ Date: - Date settings
Sound settings
■ Date format: - Set the date format
› Press the  or  button, then tap the function surface Sound.
■ Volume - Volume settings Setting the Infotainment language
Maximum switch-on volume - Setting the maximum volume when switching on
■
› Press the  button, then tap the function surface Language.
Infotainment
■ Announcements - Adjustment of traffic announcements volume (TP)
› Select the Infotainment language.
■ Speed-dependent volume adjustment - Volume increases as speed increases
Additional keypad language settings
■ Entertainment fading (parking) - Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume)
with activated parking aid › Press the  button, then tap the function surface Additional keypad languages.
■ Entertainment fad. (Navigation) - Reduction of the audio volume (eg radio vol-
In this menu, a keyboard language set can be added to allow characters other
ume) during an application navigation announcement of an external device
than those in the currently selected language to be entered.
connected via SmartLink
■ Bluetooth audio: - Volume setting of the device connected via the Bluetooth ®
audio profile Unit settings
■ Balance - Fader - Sets the balance between left and right, front and rear
■ Bass - Mid - Treble - Setting the equalizer
› Press the  button, then tap the function surface Units.
■ Touchscreen tone - Switch on/off audible tone when touching the screen ■ Distance: - Distance units
■ Speed: - Speed units
Display settings
■ Temperature: - Temperature units
■ Volume: - Volume units
› Press the  button, then tap the function surface Screen. ■ Fuel consumption: - Fuel consumption units
■ CNG consump.: - CNG consumption units
■ Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) - Enable/disable the automatic power off func- ■ Pressure: - Pressure units for tyre pressure
tion
■ Display clock when screen is off - Time and date display when the screen is
switched off Setting data transfer
■ Brightness: - Adjusts the brightness of the screen
Activated data transfer enables data transfer between the Infotainment and an
■ Touchscreen tone - Switch on/off audible tone when touching the screen
external device.
■ Show clock in standby mode - Time and date displayed on the screen when the
ignition is switched on and Infotainment is switched off › Press the  button and then tap on the function surface Activate data trans-
fer for ŠKODA apps.
Time and date settings
Safe removal of the data source
› Press the  button, then tap the function surface Time and date.
› Press the  button, then tap the function surface Remove safely and select
the external device to be removed.
Infotainment settings - Swing 141

Restore factory settings Radio menu settings
› Press the  button, then tap the function surface Factory settings. Settings for all broadcasting ranges
In this menu, individual settings or all settings can be restored at the same › In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface  .
time.
■ Scan - Automatic playback of short portions of all available stations in the
Bluetooth® settings current frequency range
■ Sound - sound settings
› Press the  button, then tap the function surface Bluetooth. ■ Arrow buttons: - Set the function of the function surfaces  
■ Presets- Switch between stations stored under the preset buttons
■ Bluetooth - Switch on/off Bluetooth® function
■ Stations - Switch between all available stations of the selected broadcasting
■ Visibility: Switch the visibility of the Bluetooth® device for other Bluetooth® de-
vices on/off range
■ 1st name - Change the name of the Bluetooth® unit
■ Radio text - Switching the text display radio (FM and DAB) on and off
■ Paired devices - Display the list of paired Bluetooth ® devices
■ Sort channel list: - Sort types of radio stations in the station list
■ Find devices - Search for available Bluetooth® devices
■ Group - Sort by transmitted program type
■ Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP) - Activate/deactivate the ability to connect a
■ Alphabetically - Alphabetical sorting according to station name
Bluetooth® audio device (e.g. MP3 player, tablet etc...)
■ Station logos - Manual management of station logos
■ Delete presets - Delete the stations stored under station buttons
Settings of online services ŠKODA Connect ■ Advanced settings - Other settings that are different depending on the selected
› Press the  button, then tap the function surface ŠKODA Connect (online serv- broadcasting range (FM and DAB)
ices).
Advanced settings (FM)
■ Services Management - Information on licensing of the respective online serv-
ices and the option to switch them on/off › Select the FM band in the Radio main menu and tap on the function surface
■ registration - Enter the registration PIN code for online services (in the user  → Advanced settings.
profile on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal receive)
■ RDS Regional: Switch on/off automatic tracking of related regional stations
Automatic - Auto-selects the station with the best reception at the moment.
■
System information
If you lose reception in the given the region, Infotainment will automatically
› Press the  button, then tap the function surface System information. set another available region.
■ Fixed - Maintains the selected regional station continuously. When the sig-
The information available will be displayed, for example regarding the Infotain-
nal is lost, another station must be set manually.
ment hardware and software, Bluetooth® software version, etc. ■ Automatic frequency control (AF) - Activates/deactivates the search for alterna-
› To Update the Infotainment software, Bluetooth® software version, etc., tap tive frequencies of the station currently being played
on the function surface Update software. ■ Radio Data System (RDS) - enable/disable RDS function (receiving additional in-
formation from the station)
The information on available software updates is obtained from a ŠKODA part- ■ Sort channel list: - Sort types of radio stations in the station list
ner or from the following ŠKODA Internet pages. ■ Group - Sort by transmitted program type
http://go.skoda.eu/infotainment ■ Alphabetically - Alphabetical sorting according to station name
142 Infotainment
Advanced settings (DAB)
■ Hands-free - Switch a call to the telephone/back to Infotainment (the menu
item is displayed during a call)
› In the Radio main menu, select the DAB range and tap on the function sur- ■ Select mobile phone - Search for available telephones/list of paired tele-
face  → Advanced settings. phones/select telephone
■ Find - search for available phones
■ DAB traffic announcements - Switch on/off DAB announcements ■ Bluetooth - Bluetooth® settings » page 142
■ Other DAB messages - Switch on/off other announcements (e.g., warnings, re- ■ User profile - User profile settings
gional weather, sports reports, financial news) ■ Manage favourites - Set the function surfaces for your favourite contacts
■ DAB - DAB station tracking - Activate/deactivate automatic DAB station tracking
■ Sort by: - Arrangement of telephone contact list
on another frequency or in other station groups ■ Surname - Sort by contact name
■ Automatic DAB - FM switching - Enable/disable auto-switching from DAB to the
■ 1st name - Sort by contact's first name
FM frequency band if the DAB signal is lost ■ Import contacts - Import phone contacts
DAB program tracking ■ Select ring tone - Select the ring tone (depending on the connected phone)
When a DAB transmitter is a part of several broadcast stations and if the cur- ■ Reminder: Remember your mobile - Turn on/off the warning mode before forget-
rent station group is not available on any other frequency, then when the signal ting the phone in the vehicle (if the phone was connected to the device)
is poor, the same station will be searched in another station group. ■ Simultaneous calls - Enable/disable the option to hold two concurrent calls
Automatic change from DAB to FM

SmartLink+ menu settings
In the event of bad DAB reception, the device tries to find an FM station.
The station name is followed by () while the station is being received on the › In the main SmartLink menu, tap on function surface  .
FM band. When the corresponding DAB station is received again, the system ■ Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps- Activate/deactivate data transfer for
automatically switches from FM to DAB. ŠKODA applications
If a DAB station is also not available in the FM band due to poor reception, In- ■ MirrorLink® - Settings of the system MirrorLink®
fotainment will be switched to mute. ■ Connect automatically via Bluetooth - Activate/deactivate the option of pairing
and connecting the external device via Bluetooth®
■ Allow MirrorLink® notification to be shown - Turn the display of Mirror link® appli-
Media menu settings
cation messages on the Infotainment screen on/off
› Tap the function surface in the Media main menu  .
■ Sound - sound settings
■ Mix/repeat including subfolders - Switching the title display including subfolders
■ Bluetooth - Settings for the Bluetooth® function
■ Remove safely: - Safe removal of the external device
Import contactsTelephone menu settings

› In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface  .
Infotainment settings - Swing 143

 Radio text display (DAB) / picture presentation (DAB)
Radio
 Settings of menu Radio » page 136 or » page 142
service Information symbol in the status line
Introduction to the subject Symbol Meaning
 Traffic signal is available
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the Infotainment type, analogue ra-
dio reception of the FM and AM frequency ranges as well as DAB digital radio   Traffic signal is not available
reception is possible.  Signal is not available (DAB)
CAUTION If the displayed station name continuously changes (dynamic text), then it is
■ For vehicles with window antennas do not stick foil or metal coated stickers possible to fix the current text by holding your finger on the device screen in
to the window - Radio signal reception could be affected. the station name area. By holding your finger in the area of the station name
■ Car parks, tunnels, tall buildings or mountains can interfere with the radio again, the station name is displayed in its entirety again.
signal even causing it to fail completely.
Search stations and select frequency
main menu Find stations
› Tap on the function surface in the Radio main menu  or  .
Fig. 177
Depending on the setting  →Arrow buttons: will set an available station from
Radio: Main menu (DAB)
the Stations list or a station of the current broadcast range on the Station
buttons.
Select frequency
› To display the value of the currently chosen frequency, tap the function sur-
face in the Radio main menu  .
› To Set the desired frequency value in Infotainment Swing, use the slider or
the function surfaces   in the bottom area of the screen, if necessary, turn
› To display the main menu, press the sensor field/the  button. the controller  (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus)
› or: Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  . Scan through the stations one after the other (scan)
Main menu » Fig. 177 The function scans through all the available stations in the current frequency
A The selected radio station (description or frequency) range in succession, for a few seconds each.
B Radio Text (FM) / Description of the group (DAB) › To start automatic scanning of the available stations, go to the main Radio
C Preset station buttons for favourite channels menu and tap on the function surface  → Scan.
D Choice of radio range (FM / AM / DAB) › To end autoplay, tap the function surface  .
E Choice of storage group for the preferred station
  Changing the station
 List of available stations
 Manual / semi-automatic station search
144 Infotainment
List of available stations Symbol Meaning
The transmitter reception is not secure (DAB) (applies to Info-

tainment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing)
Stations with image broadcasting (DAB) (does not apply to info-

tainment Swing)
Refresh list
Depending on Infotainment, the station list update takes place as follows:
Frequen-
Columbus Amundsen, Bolero Swing
cy
FM automatically automatically automatically
Fig. 178 Example, the list of available FM/DAB stations
AM automatically manually manually
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero DAB automatically manually manually
› To display the list of available stations of the currently selected broadcasting ▶ To
area, tap the function surface in the Radio main menu  . manually update, tap on the function surface  » Fig. 178 .
› To play, tap on the function surface of the desired station. CAUTION
› To Sort (FM) the stations in alphabetical order, by group or genre, tap on the To sort the stations according to genre, the RDS and AF functions must be
function surface A » Fig. 178 » .
switched on. These functions can be set in the radio main menu in the FM band
Applies to Infotainment Swing by tapping the function surface  → Advanced settings.
› To display the list of available stations of the currently selected broadcasting
area, tap the function surface in the Radio main menu  . Preset buttons for your favourite channels
› To play, tap on the function surface of the desired station.
› To filter the stations based on the program type (e.g. Music, Sport etc.) in the In every broadcasting range, there are station buttons available to store pre-
FM station list (with activated RDS function) and the DAB station list (with ferred stations C That are split into groups E » Fig. 177 on page 144 or .
alphabetical sorting of the channel list selected), tap the function surface A › To save the station currectly being listen to on the main menu Radio, hold
» Fig. 178. down the desired function surface C until an acoustic signal sounds.
Information symbols › To save a station in the list of available stations, keep the function surface
of the desired station held down, select the memory group, and then tap the
Symbol Meaning
desired station button.
 Radio station, which is stored on a preset button
 Currently played stations Station logos - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
 Traffic information station Station logos are stored in the Infotainment memory which are assigned auto-
(e.g.)  Type of program being broadcast (FM) matically by the device when storing the stations under preset buttons.
(e.g.)  Type the regional broadcast (FM)
Assign station logo automatically
 Signal reception is not available (DAB) › to Disable / Enable in the radio main menu, tap on the function surface  →
Advanced settings → Autostore station logos. 
Radio 145
Assign station logo manually Note
› Tap on the function surface in the Radio main menu  → Station logos. ■ If the station that is currently set does not transmit traffic reports or the sig-
› Tap on an occupied station button and select the data carrier (SD card, USB). nal is not available, then Infotainment automatically searches in the back-
› Search for and select the desired station logo on the respective data carrier. ground for another TP station.
■ During playback in the Media menu or a station in the AM radio range, traffic
Remove channel logo manually
› Tap on the function surface in the Radio main menu  → Station logos. news is received from the previously selected FM radio range.
› Tap on the station button from which you wish to remove a logo.
Note
■ The following image formats are supported: jpg, gif, png, bmp.
■ We recommend a resolution of up to 500x500 pixels.
Station logos - Swing

The station button of a preferred station can contain the name and the station
logo.
Assign a station logo
› Tap on the function surface in the Radio main menu  → Station logos.
› Tap on an occupied station button and select the data carrier (SD card, USB).
› Search for and select the desired station logo on the respective data carrier.
Remove station logo
› Tap on the function surface in the Radio main menu  → Station logos.
› Tap on the station button from which you wish to remove a logo.
› or: Tap the function surface  All areas to delete the logos of all station but-
tons at the same time.
› Confirm / cancel the removal.
Note
■ The following image formats are supported: jpg, png.
■ We recommend a resolution of up to 400x240 pixels.
TP Traffic program
› To switch on/off traffic monitoring in the main menu Radio, tap on the func-
tion surface  → Traffic programme (TP).
During a traffic announcement, it is possible to cancel the current announce-
ment if necessary by deactivating traffic monitoring.
146 Infotainment
Media Playback control - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
service Operation Action

Play / Pause Tap 
Main menu Tap  after 3 s from the start of the
track playback
Fig. 179
Plays the current track from the start Finger movement to the right of the
Media: Main menu dis-
screen area A » Fig. 179 on page 147
play example
after 3 seconds from the start of
track playback
Fast-reverse within the title Press and hold 
Fast-forward within the title Press and hold 
Tap  within 3 seconds from the
start of the track playback
› To display the main menu, press the sensor field/the  button. Finger movement to the right of the
› or: Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  . Play the previous title
screen area A » Fig. 179 on page 147
Main menu » Fig. 179 within 3 seconds of the start of track
A Information on playing track playback
B Playback timeline with a slider Tap 
C Select the audio source Play back the next title Finger movement to the left of the
D Selected audio source / album image / album overview screen area A » Fig. 179 on page 147
 Depending on the audio source type: Switch on/off the random playback
Tap 
▶ Folder/track list from the current album or folder
▶ Multimedia database Switch on/off the repeat playback
Tap 
 Settings of menu Media » page 137 or » page 143 from the current album or folder
Switch on/off repeat playback of spe-
Note Tap 
cific track
■ Information concerning the track being played appears on the screen, if it is Search (applies to sources with dis-
stored as a so-called ID3 Tag on the audio source. If no ID3 tag is available, only playable multimedia database) (applies Tap 
the title name is displayed. to Infotainment Columbus)
■ The remaining playback time indicated does not correspond to the actual re-
maining playback time for titles with variable bitrates. Turn on / off playback of similar tracks
■ When an audio source is connected or plugged in, the Infotainment Colum- according to information from what is
Tap 
bus searches the local Gracenote® database for information on the track being called the ID3-Tag (applies to Infotain-
played (e.g. album name, artist name, genre, album image etc.). If the informa- ment Columbus)
tion is not available and the “Infotainment Online” » page 17 service is active, Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline
Infotainment will search for this information in the Gracenote® online database. B » Fig. 179 on page 147.
Media 147
Playback control - Swing Folder/track list » Fig. 180
A Selected audio source / audio source folder (movement within the folder
Operation Action takes place by pressing the function surface for the folder)
Play / Pause Tap  B Options folder/track playback
Tap  within 3 seconds from the C Display of multimedia database (only available in the source directory) (not
Play the previous title applicable to the Infotainment Swing)
start of the track playback
Tap  after 3 s from the start of the  Select the audio source
Plays the current track from the start  Folder
track playback
Fast-reverse within the title Press and hold   Playlist
Fast-forward within the title Press and hold     Currently playing title / track playback stopped
Play back the next title Tap   The title cannot be played (tapping on the function surface shows the
cause).
Switch on/off the random playback
Tap 
from the current album or folder Note
Switch on/off the repeat playback ■ In the list, the first 1000 entries (titles, directories etc.) are displayed with the
Tap 
from the current album or folder oldest creation date.
Switch on/off repeat playback of spe- ■ The scanning speed of the folder / track list depends on the connection
Tap  speed and volume of data.
cific track
Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline Multimedia database
B » Fig. 179 on page 147.
Fig. 181
Folder / track list
Multimedia database
Fig. 180
Folder/Title list
› To display the multimedia database, in the Media main menu tap on the func-
tion surface  (if this display is supported by the currently selected source).
› To display the folder / track list on the Media main menu, tap on the function The audio files are sorted by their properties into individual categories B .
surface  (if this display is supported by the currently selected source). › To playback, select the category and then the title.
› To playback select a title. Multimedia database » Fig. 181
A Selected audio source / Selected category / folder of the audio source
B Sorting categories 
148 Infotainment
C Display of files/track list (only available in the bibliography) › To insert a CD/DVD, with the labelled side facing up, press into the CD slot
 Select the audio source until it is automatically drawn in.
› To eject, press the button  The CD/DVD is moved to the starting position.
Audio sources If the ejected CD/DVD is not removed within 10 seconds, it is retracted again
for safety reasons. However, the unit will not change to the CD/DVD source.
WARNING
CAUTION ■ The CD/DVD player is a laser product.
■ On the manufacturing date, this unit was classified as a class 1 laser prod-
■ Do not save any important data or that which has not been backed up on the
uct in accordance with the national/international standards
connected audio sources. ŠKODA assumes no responsibility for lost or dam-
DIN EN 60825-1: 2008-05 and DHHS Rules 21 CFR, Subchapter J. The la-
aged files or connected audio sources.
ser used in this class 1 laser product is so weak that there is no risk of dan-
■ When changing or connecting an audio source, this may cause sudden
ger when operated correctly.
changes in volume. Reduce the volume before changing or connecting an au-
■ This product is designed such that the laser is restricted to the inside of
dio source.
Infotainment. However, the installed laser could be classified in a higher
■ When connecting an external audio source, the external source information
class were the housing to be removed. For this reason, never remove the
messages can be displayed. These messages must be observed and if necessa-
Infotainment housing.
ry confirmed (e.g. enabling data transfer etc).
Note CAUTION
The national copyright laws that apply in your country must be observed. ■ Be sure to remove the CD/DVD before you try to insert a new CD/DVD. Oth-
erwise you can damage the drive inside Infotainment.
CD / DVD ■ Only insert in the CD/DVD drive original Audio CDs/video DVDs or standard
CD-R/RWs or DVD±R/RWs.
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus. ■ Do not affix anything to the CD/DVDs!
■ If the ambient temperature is too high or too low, the CD / DVD playback
may not work.
■ Damp (condensation) may affect Infotainment in cold weather or high hu-
midity. This can cause the CD to jump or impair the play function. Once the
moisture has dissipated, playback is fully functional again.
Note
■ After pressing the button  it takes a few seconds for the CD / DVD to be
ejected.
■ On uneven or unpaved roads, playback jumps may occur.
Fig. 182 CD / DVD slot ■ If the CD/DVD is physically damaged, is not readable or is inserted incorrect-
ly the following message is displayed Error: CD/DVD.
The CD/DVD» Fig. 182 slot is located in an external module in the glove box on ■ It is possible that CD/DVDs protected by copyright cannot be played back at
the front passenger side. all or only in certain circumstances.
Media 149
SD card USB input
Installation location of the USB input and information regarding its use
Fig. 183 » page 93.
Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero:
Insert the SD card The USB input audio source can be connected directly or via a connecting ca-
ble.
› To connect, insert the USB audio source into the appropriate input.
› To disconnect the USB, tap on the Media main menu function surface  →
Tap on Remove safely.
› Disconnect the audio source from the corresponding USB input.
Load USB audio source
Fig. 184 With the ignition, the charging process starts automatically after the USB au-
Swing: Insert the SD card dio source is connected (applies to audio sources where charging via the USB
connector is possible).
The charging efficiency can differ compared to charging from the usual mains
power supply.
Depending on the type of the connected external device and the frequency of
use, the charging current may not be sufficient to charge the battery of the
connected device.
Inserting Some connected audio sources may not be recognised and cannot be charged.
› Insert the SD card in the slot in the direction of arrow (with the cut end fac- CAUTION
ing right), until it “locks” » Fig. 183 or » Fig. 184.
USB extension cords, or reducers may impair the function of the connected
Removing audio source.
› Before removing the SD card, go to the main Media menu and tap function Note
surface  → Tap on Remove safely.
› Press on the inserted SD memory card. The SD card “jumps” into the eject We recommend that you use extension cords from ŠKODA Original Accesso-
position. ries.
CAUTION Bluetooth®player
■ Do not use an SD card with a broken write protection “slide” - there is a risk
of damage to the SD card reader! Infotainment allows audio files of a connected Bluetooth® player to play using
■ When using an SD card with an adapter, vehicle vibrations might cause the the A2DP and AVRCP audio profile.
card to fall out of the adapter. With Infotainment, multiple devices can be paired using Bluetooth® , but only
one of them can be used as a Bluetooth®player. 
150 Infotainment
Connect / disconnect Note
› To connect the Bluetooth® player with Infotainment- follow the same in- ■ Files that have already been copied are recognised and cannot be copied
structions as for pairing Infotainment with a telephone» page 159. again (shown in grey).
› To disconnect the Bluetooth® player, end the connection in the list of paired ■ It is not possible to copy files while simultaneously playing back audio/video
external devices » page 162. files in the CD/DVD drive.
Replace Bluetooth® player (applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero)
If you would like to replace a Bluetooth®-Player which is connected to Infotain- WLAN
ment as a phone at the same time, , then a relevant information message ap- Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen.
pears on the Infotainment screen.
Infotainment allows you to play audio files from one of the external devices
› End the connection to the currently connected Bluetooth® player and repeat connected to the Infotainment WLAN.
the pairing procedure » page 162, Managing paired external devices.
› Connect an external device that supports the DLNA (Digital Living Network
CAUTION Alliance), with Infotainment WLAN» page 170.
If an external device is connected to Infotainment using Apple CarPlay or › If necessary use the UPnP application (Universal Plug and Play) in the con-
Android Auto, then it cannot be connected using Bluetooth®. nected device, which allows playback to start.
› Select the audio source  WLAN .
Jukebox
Supported audio sources and file formats - Columbus, Amundsen,
Bolero
In the Jukebox (in the Infotainment internal memory), supported audio / video
files can be imported from connected external devices. Supported audio sources
Import files Source Interface Type Specification File system
› Tap the function surface in the Media main menu  → Manage jukebox → Import. Standard
› Select the desired source. SD card SD reader
size
SD, SDHC, SDXC
› Select the desired folders or files.
› Tap the function surface  . USB stick;
HDD (without any spe-
Delete files MSC cial software);
› Tap the function surface in the Media main menu  → Manage jukebox → Delete. USB devices that sup- FAT16
› Select the desired folder or files in the selected category. USB 1.x; 2.x port MSC operation FAT32
› Tap the function surface  → Delete. USB
and 3.x or
Devices with the An- exFAT
higher with NTFS
Show level of Infotainment memory devices droid operating system
support of MTP
› Tap the function surface in the Media main menu  → Manage jukebox. USB 2.x
or Windows mobile
(mobile phone, tablet)
information about the occupied and free space of the Infotainment memory
and the number of files that cannot be imported is displayed. Devices with the iOS
Apple operating system
(iPhone, iPod, iPad) 
Media 151
Source Interface Type Specification File system Files that are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) technology can-
not be played back by Infotainment.
Audio CD
(Up to 80
CD/DVD min); Supported audio sources and file formats - Swing
ISO9660;
Applies to CD-R / RW
CD/DVD Joliet (Level 1,2,3); Supported audio sources
Infotain- (Up to 700 -
Drive UDF 1.x;
ment Co- MB); Source Interface Type Specification File system
UDF 2.x
lumbus. DVD±R/RW;
Standard
DVD Audio, SD card SD reader SD, SDHC, SDXC
size
DVD-Video
USB stick;
Blue- Bluetooth protocols
HDD (without any spe-
tooth®- - - A2DP and AVRCP -
MSC cial software);
Player (1.0-1.5)
USB devices that sup- FAT16
Supported audio file formats USB 1.x; 2.x port MSC operation VFAT
and 3.x or FAT32
Maximum USB Devices with the An-
Codec type Max bit Multi higher with exFAT
File suffix sampling Playlists devices droid operating system
(File formats) rate channelsa) support of MTP
rate or Windows mobile
USB 2.x
(mobile phone, tablet)
Windows Media
384 kbit / Devices with the iOS
Audio wma
s Apple operating system
9 and 10
(iPhone, iPod, iPad)
Defined by 96 kHz
the format Blue- Bluetooth protocols
WAV wav
(approx.
no tooth®- - - A2DP and AVRCP -
1.5 Mbit/s) m3u Player (1.0-1.5)
pls
MPEG-1; 2 and Supported audio file formats
wpl
2.5 mp3 Maximum
320 kbit / m3u8 Codec type
Layer 3 File suffix Max bit rate sampling Playlists
s asx (File formats)
aac; mp4; rate
MPEG-2 and 4
m4a 48 kHz
Windows Media m3u
Defined by wma 384 kbit / s 96 kHz
yes Audio 9 and 10 pls
FLAC; the format wpl
flac; ogg MPEG-1; 2 and 2.5
Vorbis (approx. mp3 320 kbit / s 48 kHz asx
(Layer-3)
5.5 Mbit/s)
a)
The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured audio sources
Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the CANTON sound system.
are not supported by Infotainment.
The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured audio sources
are not supported by Infotainment. Files that are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) technology can-
not be played back by Infotainment.
152 Infotainment
Images Control viewed images
Image viewer Operation Action

Moving your finger across the screen to the
main menu Display of the next image left (with initial representation)
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero. Tap 
Moving your finger across the screen to the
Fig. 185 Display the previous image right (with initial representation)
Images: Main menu Tap 
Touch screen using two fingers and pull apart
Increase the image size Turning the knob  to the right (not applica-
ble to Infotainment Columbus)
Touch screen using two fingers and close to-
gether
Reduce the image size
Turning the knob  to the left (not applica-
› To display the main menu, tap the  sensor field and then tap the function ble to Infotainment Columbus)
surface  . Moving the image with an en- Drag your finger over the screen in the re-
Main menu » Fig. 185 larged display quired direction
A Select the image source Touch screen using two fingers and move
   Folder / Image List clockwise or counter clockwise (only availa-
Rotate by 90 ° ble with start representation)
 Display the previous image
 Switching on the slideshow Tap  or 
 Switching off the slideshow Maximum magnification of
Double finger tap on the screen
representation
 Display of the next image
 Menu settings for Images » page 137 Double tap on the screen again
Display the initial image size
 Rotate the image 90° anticlockwise while retaining the aspect ratio Pressing the knob  (not applicable to Info-
tainment Columbus)
 Rotate the image 90° clockwise
 Display the initial image size while retaining the aspect ratio CAUTION
 Guidance to GPS coordinates (Amundsen; the display only occurs if the Viewing images on the Infotainment screen is not supported by connected Ap-
image contains GPS coordinates) (applies to Infotainment Columbus, ple devices.
Amundsen) » page 185
Images 153
Supported image file formats and sources Video DVD
Supported image sources video player
Source Type Specification File system Main menu
SD card Standard size SD, SDHC, SDXC FAT16
USB stick; USB 1.x; 2.x and VFAT
HDD (without 3.x or higher with FAT32
USB devices exFAT Fig. 186
any special soft- support of USB
NTFS Video DVD: Main menu
ware) 2.x
ISO9660;
CD / DVD (Applies CD-R / RW (Up Joliet (Level 1,2,3)
to Infotainment Co- to 700 MB); ; -
lumbus) DVD±R/RW UDF 1.x;
UDF 2.x
Supported file formats
Codec type Max. resolution
› to display the main menu, insert a CD / DVD in the corresponding slot in the
File suffix external module.
(File formats) (Megapixels) › or: In the main menu Media, select the video source, display the folder/track
BMP bmp 4 list and start the video file.
JP (E) G jpg; jpeg 4; 64 Main menu » Fig. 186
GIF gif 4 A Select a video source
PNG png 4 B Playback timeline
C Information for the selected video file (e.g., video title, chapter)
Note
 Display the Video DVD menu
■ The max. supported image size is 20 MB.
■ The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured images sources  Video DVD menu settings » page 137
are not supported by Infotainment. Note
For safety reasons, the image display is switched off at speeds over 5 km/h.
Only the sound continues. The respective message appears on the screen.
Control playback
Operation Action
Play / Pause Tap /
Tap  within 3 s from the start of the
Play the previous video
track playback 
154 Infotainment
Operation Action Symbol Operation
Tap  after 3 s after the start of the  Confirmation
Play the current video from the start
playback Main menu Return to video DVD main menu
Fast rewind Press and hold a)
Play the next video Tap  Supported video sources and file formats
Fast forward Press and hold a)
Forward / rewind the video at the de- Tapping the playback timeline B Supported video sources
sired time » Fig. 186 on page 154 File sys-
Source Interface Type Specification
a) The longer the function surface is held, the faster the fast forward/reverse.
tem
SD card SD reader Standard size SD, SDHC, SDXC
DVD menu USB stick; FAT16
USB 1.x; 2.x HDD (without VFAT
Fig. 187 and 3.x or any special soft- FAT32
USB
DVD menu higher with MSC ware); exFAT
devices
support of USB devices that NTFS
USB 2.x support MSC op-
eration
CD-R / RW (Up to ISO9660;
700 MB); Joliet (Level 1,2,3)
CD/DVD
CD/DVD DVD±R/RW; ; -
Drive
default DVD; UDF 1.x;
› To display the DVD menu, in the main menu Video DVD, tap the function sur- DVD video; UDF 2.x
face  » Fig. 186 on page 154 .
Supported video file formats
Description of the DVD menu » Fig. 187
Codec type Max. frames per
A Operating surface File suffix Max. resolution
(File formats) second
B Example of the displayed menu
MPEG-1 30 352 x 288
Function surfaces on the operating surface .mpeg
MPEG-2
Symbol Operation MPEG-4 .mp4
/ Move the operating surface left / right QuickTime .mov
25 720 x 576
/ Show / hide full screen display of the operating sur- Matroska .mkv
face DivX; XviD
 Close the operating surface .avi
MJPEG
 Movement in the EPG/teletext
Video DVD 155

Media Command › Establish a WLAN connection in the tablet » page 169, Connecting via
WLAN.
Operation › In the tablet, start the “ŠKODA Media Command” application.
CAUTION
Introduction to the subject ■ If several devices are connected to the Infotainment system by means of
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen. WLAN, there is the danger of WLAN overloading and thus also the inability of
Media Command to function properly.
Fig. 188 ■ High-definition video playback (e.g. HD) may cause playback problems or
ŠKODA Media Command appli- problems connecting the tablets to the Infotainment system.
cation
Main menu
The Media Commandfunction allows playback of audio files or videos in up to

two TabletsThat are connected to Infotainment via WLAN, to control Info-
tainment.
The function Media Command enables operation of tablets with the Android
operating system or iOS.
Fig. 189 One tablet / two tablets
The prerequisitefor the Media Command function is enabled data transfer, the
application installed in the tablet “ŠKODA Media Command” as well as Info- › To display the main Media Command menu, tap the  sensor field and
tainment control approved using the application » page 129. then tap the function surface  .
“ŠKODA Media Command” application Main menu » Fig. 189
The application is available in the App Store and Google Play online shops. A Information on playing track
After entering the following address into the web browser, the website is B Playback timeline with a slider
opened with information on the ŠKODA mobile applications. C Playback control
http://go.skoda.eu/service-app D Image from the video being played back
E Name of the tablet used/Switch to main menu of two tablets (when icon
“ŠKODA Media Command” application
displayed )
› Scan the QR code » Fig. 188 .
   Increase/decrease the tablet volume
Connect tablet with Infotainment F Display of main menu and operation of first tablet (symbol )
› Switch on the infotainment hotspot (tap on the sensor field  and then on G Display of main menu and operation of second tablet (symbol )
the function surface  → WLAN → Mobile hotspot → Mobile hotspot).
› Turn on WLAN in the tablet.  Selection of the playback source
 Wi-fi settings » page 135
156 Infotainment
Select source and control playback Operating system Operating system
Type Format
Android iOS
› To select the playback source tap the function surface in the main menu  MPEG-1;2 and
and select the source tablet.
2.5
› To playback, select the category and then the title. Layer 3 (mp3)
 
If two tablets are connected, the title playback starts in the two tablets at the AAC  (4.1) 
same time. Audio M4A  (4.1) 
Playback can be controlled via Infotainment or on each tablet, and are inde- OGG  
pendent from each other. This means there is an option to playback different
titles on the tablets at the same time. FLAC  
WAV  (4.1) 
Playback control
Operation Action
Play / Pause Tap 
Tap 
Plays the current track from the start after 3 s from the start of the track
playback
Tap 
Play the previous title within 3 seconds from the start of the
track playback
Play back the next title Tap 
Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline
B » Fig. 189 on page 156.
Note
Some tablet types allow playback of audio files or videos by an inserted SD
card in the tablet. Playback of these tracks may be limited.
Supported file formats

Operating system Operating system
Type Format
Android iOS
MPEG-4 Part 2  
MPEG-4 Part 10
Video  
(H264)
XVID  
Media Command 157

F List of connected telephones, which are available as the source of tele-
Telephone phone contacts
▶  - no telephone is connected for telephone contacts
Introductory information ▶  - a telephone is connected for telephone contacts
Introduction to the subject  Change the main phone to the extension telephone
 Enter the telephone number
WARNING
 List of contacts
The general binding country-specific regulations for operating mobile
 Menu with text messages (SMS)
phones in the vehicle must be observed.
 Call list
 Settings for the Telephone menu » page 137
Telephone
Symbols in the status bar
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero. G Signal strength of the telephone network, data connection type if re-
quired
Fig. 190  A telephone connected via Bluetooth® (applies to Infotainment Colum-
Telephone: Main menu bus)
 Charge status of the telephone battery
 Missed call
 Current call
 Incoming SMS
 ID of the telephone's wireless charging function » page 92 (applies to In-
fotainment Columbus)
The Telephone main menu is displayed if a phone or a SIM card with activated  PIN code of the SIM card was not entered
phone service on the external module is connected to Infotainment.
› To display, tap the sensor field  . Telephone
› or: Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  . Applies to Infotainment Swing.
Main menu » Fig. 190
A Name of the connected telephone (tap to display the list paired tele- Fig. 191
phones) Telephone: Main menu
B Preset station buttons for favourite contacts
C Choice of storage group for the preferred contacts
D Name of the telephone service provider (with active roaming, the symbol
appears before the name )
E Main telephone icon
▶  - a telephone connected via Bluetooth®
▶  - a SIM card with activated telephone services, inserted in the exter-
The Telephone main menu appears when a telephone is connected to Infotain-
nal module ment. 
158 Infotainment
› To display, press the  button. The range of the connection to Infotainment is limited to the passenger com-
partment.
To display the Telephone main menu if a different menu is displayed, which was
open last, press the  button again. Compatibility and update
By scanning the QR code » Fig. 160 on page 122 or typing the following ad-
dress into the web browser, information about the compatibility of phones and
A Name of the main telephone (tap to display the list of paired telephones)
available updates for the Infotainment's Bluetooth ®can be displayed.
B Preset station buttons for favourite contacts
C Choice of storage group for the preferred contacts http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
D Name of the telephone service provider (with active roaming, the sym-
bol appears before the name ) conditions for pairing
 Enter the telephone number  The ignition is switched on.
 List of contacts » page 164  The Bluetooth® function of the infotainment and the telephone is switched
 Call list (missed calls, in addition to the function surface, the number of on.
calls when missed is displayed)  The visibility of the infotainment and the telephone is switched on.
 Starting voice control of the connected phone (e.g. Apple Siri, Google  The telephone is within range of the Bluetooth® signal of Infotainment.
Voice)  The telephone is compatible with the infotainment.
 Settings for the Telephone menu » page 143  There is no external device connected to Infotainment using Apple
Symbols in the status bar CarPlay.
 Signal strength of the telephone service network
 Charge status of the telephone battery Pairing and connection process
 Missed call Pair the telephone with Infotainment
 Current call › Search available Bluetooth® devices in your telephone.
› Select the name of the Infotainment system.
Pairing and connecting The name of the Infotainment system can be checked in the Telephone main
menu if you tap on the function surface  → Bluetooth in the Name: menu item.
› Confirm the PIN code (enter and confirm if necessary).
To connect a telephone with Infotainment, the two devices must be paired via The phone is either connected to the Infotainment or just linked, depending on
Bluetooth®. the number of already connected external devices and on the use of the SIM
Depending on the Infotainment model, up to 20 external devices can be paired card inserted in the external module (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
with the device. After reaching the maximum number, the pairing of the next » page 160.
external device will replace that of the device that has not been used for the
Pair Infotainment with the telephone
longest period of time.
› If no telephone is connected to the Infotainment system, press the but-
Connection to an already paired telephone is established automatically after ton/sensor field  and then tap the Find telephone function surface or press
the ignition is switched on. Or, it is sufficient to search for the phone in the list the  sensor field, and then tap the function surface  → Find mobile phone.
of paired devices. › If one telephone is connected to the infotainment system, then, in the Tele-
phone main menu, tap on the  → Find mobile phone function surface. 
Telephone 159
› If a SIM card with activated telephone services is inserted in the external › In the Telephone main menu, switch on the  → Business phone “interface”.
module of infotainment Columbus, then, in the Telephone main menu, tap on › Switch on Bluetooth® visibility in the phone and allow the connection via the
the  → Find mobile phone. Bluetooth®rSAP profile.
› Select the desired telephone from the list of visited external Bluetooth® devi- › Search for a phone and connect to the device » page 159, Pair Infotainment
ces. with the telephone.
› Confirm the PIN code (enter and confirm if necessary). If the Bluetooth ® rSAP profile is supported by the telephone to be connected,
WARNING then the infotainment system tries to connect to the phone using this profile
Do not pair and connect a telephone to the Infotainment system while driv- with priority.
ing the vehicle - there is risk of an accident! Functional impairment
In the following cases, the phonecannot be connected to Infotainment via the
Connect phone using the rSAP profile Bluetooth® rSAP profile.
▶ The SIM card is plugged into the external module.
Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external mod-
▶ An external device is connected to Infotainment using Apple CarPlay or
ule.
Android Auto.
A phone that has been connected via the Bluetooth® rSAP profile (remote
transfer of SIM data) can be used for phone and data services. Note
Vehicle antennas are used to receive the mobile radio signal of the connected
Pair the phone with Infotainment phone.
Possible connection types
Depending on the number of connected Bluetooth® devices, connection type, as well as the use of the SIM card in the external module, the following functions
are available. 
160 Infotainment
The first device (main phone) The second device (additional phone)
Connec-
tion SIM card SIM card Third device Fourth device
version Telephone (In the external mod- Telephone (In the external mod-
ule) ule)
rSAP
incoming / outgoing
Calls, text messages, HFP (incoming calls),
1. - - Bluetooth® playera) -
Phone contacts, Bluetooth® playera)
Data connection,
Bluetooth® playera)
HFP (Incoming / out-
going
HFP (incoming calls),
2. calls), text messages, - Data connection Bluetooth® playera) -
Phone contacts,
HFP (Incoming / out-
going Incoming calls,
3. calls), text messages, - - Messages, Bluetooth® playera) -
Phone contacts, Data connection
incoming / outgoing
Calls, text messages, Phone contactsb),
4. - Messages, - Bluetooth® playera)
Phone contactsb), Bluetooth® playera)
Data connection
a) In every connection variant, there is an option to only connect an external device as a Bluetooth connection® player with Infotainment.
b) If phone contacts from the third device are imported into infotainment, the telephone contacts of the SIM card inserted in the external module cannot be used.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero Applies to Infotainment Swing
The second device (additional The second device (additional
The first device (main phone) The first device (main phone)
phone) phone)
HFP (Incoming / outgoing calls), SMS, HFP (Incoming / outgoing calls),
telephone contacts, telephone contacts, Bluetooth® playera)
Bluetooth® playera) Bluetooth® playera)
a) Only an external device can be connected to Infotainment as a Bluetooth® player. a) Only an external device can be connected to Infotainment as a Bluetooth® player.
Telephone 161
Managing paired external devices Connection set-up
▶ Select the desired external device from the list of paired external devices.
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface  → Bluetooth → ▶ Select the desired profile from the list of available Bluetooth® profiles - .
Paired devices.
If external Bluetooth® devices are already connected to Infotainment, then dur-
In the list of paired external devices, the following symbols may appear for the ing the Infotainment connection process, messages and options for the possi-
individual external devices. ble connection type (e.g. replacement of the connected external Bluetooth®
device) are displayed.
Symbol Disconnection
Symbol Operation ▶ Select the desired external device from the list of paired external devices.
colour
▶ Select the desired profile from the list of available Bluetooth® profiles - .
Grey External device can be connected as telephone
 Delete the paired external device
Green External device is connected as telephone
▶ To delete, tap on one of the following function surfaces.
External device can be connected as Bluetooth® play-
Grey  Delete all or All areas - Delete all external devices
 er
White External device is connected as Bluetooth® player  - Delete the desired external device
▶ Confirm the deletion by tapping on the function surface Delete.
Applies to Infotainment Columbus with SIM card inserted in external mod-
ule
Use the SIM card in the external module
Symbol
Symbol Operation Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external mod-
colour
ule.
External device can be connected to use telephone
Grey contacts and the text message function from this ex-
ternal device

External device is connected and telephone contacts
blue and the text message function from this external de-
vice can be used
Applies to Infotainment Swing
Symbol
Symbol Operation
colour
White External device can be connected as telephone Fig. 192 Insert SIM card in the external module

Green External device is connected as telephone
A SIM card size “mini” (standard size 25x15 mm) must be used.
External device can be connected as Bluetooth® play-
White The SIM card can be used for phone and data services.
 er
Green External device is connected as Bluetooth® player The SIM card slot is located in an external module in the storage compartment
on the front passenger side » Fig. 192. 
162 Infotainment
Switching SIM card use on / off in the external module Telephone functions
› In the Telephone main menu, switch on the  → Business phone “interface”.
Insert SIM card Enter telephone number and select
› Insert the SIM card into the appropriate slot » Fig. 192 With the beveled cor- Enter a telephone number and dial
ner on the left and the contacts facing downwards until it “locks”. › In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface  .
Use the SIM card for the first time Function surfaces of the numerical keyboard
When using the SIM card in the external module, select the use type.  Enter the last dialled number / dial the telephone number entered
Calls too - enabling data and telephone services.    Emergency call (Only applies to some countries)
Only data connections - enabling of data services only.  Breakdown call in case of breakdown
   Information call (for information regarding the products and services of
Set the network parameters for Internet connection if required » page 169.
the brand ŠKODA )
By using the SIM card for phone services, the connection to the connected  Choosing the mailbox number (the function is not supported for Info-
phones is terminated. tainment Swing)
Enter the PIN code and save  Delete the last number entered
› If the SIM card is protected by a PIN code, then the PIN code of the SIM card    Display of function surfaces   for movement of the cursor in the input
must be entered. line
› Confirm the entered PIN code by tapping  . Search for a contact using the numeric keypad
› or: Tap the function surface  to save and confirm the PIN code. The numeric keypad can also be used for a contact search.
Change PIN code
For example, if you enter 32, the unit will display contacts with the letter se-
› The PIN code can be changed in the Telephone main menu, in the  → PIN quence DA, FA, EB, etc. next to the numerical keypad.
setup → Change PIN menu item
Voicemail box (does not apply to Infotainment Swing)
Changing SIM card usage ▶ To select the voice mailbox number, tap the function surface  .
› In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface  → Use SIM card only for
data connection function surface. If not import the voicemail number or was not imported or entered, then this
can be entered or changed as follows.
Remove SIM card
› Press the inserted SIM card and remove it. ▶ Inthe Telephone main menu, tap on function surface  → User profile → Mailbox
number:.
CAUTION ▶ Enter the number of your voice mailbox.
■ When inserting an incorrectly sized SIM card, there is a risk of damage to the
external module.
■ Avoid using an adapter for the SIM card as the SIM card may fall out while
driving due to vehicle vibrations - There is the risk of damage to the external
module.
Telephone 163
List of telephone contacts Import list
After the primary telephone and/or the SIM card (applies to Infotainment Co-
lumbus) connects to the infotainment system for the first time, the import of
the telephone contacts to the infotainment memory starts. The import can
take several minutes.
In the infotainment phonebook, there are 4000 (applies to Infotainment Co-
lumbus) and 2000 (applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing) free
storage locations for imported telephone contacts. Each contact can contain
up to 5 telephone numbers.
The number of imported contacts can be determined in the menu item  →
User profile → Import contacts: or Import contacts.
Fig. 193 List of telephone contacts / contact details
If an error occurs during the import, an appropriate message appears on the
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface  and a list of tele- screen.
phone contacts will be displayed » Fig. 193. Refresh list
The main telephone is connected to Infotainment, the telephone contacts When the telephone reconnects with Infotainment, the list is automatically up-
from the telephone are used. dated.
If a SIM card with activated telephone services is located in the external mod- The update can be carried out manually as follows.
ule of Infotainment Columbus, the SIM card telephon contacts are available. the Telephone main menu, tap on function surface  → User profile → Import
▶ In
Another external device to import telephone contacts can be selected by tap- contacts: or Import contacts.
ping the function surface F » Fig. 190 on page 158.
Functional surfaces Management of preferred contacts (favourites)
A Contact search
B Dial a number in the telephone contact list (if a telephone contact contains Fig. 194
several telephone numbers, a menu containing the telephone numbers as- Favourite contacts
signed to this contact is displayed after the contact is selected)
 Display the contact details
C Select the telephone number in the contact details
 Edit the telephone number of the contact before dialling
Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero:
 The contact name can be read out by Infotainment’s generated voice
 Open the menu for sending a text message (SMS) Assigning favourites
› In the main menu Telephone, tap on the desired function surface A » Fig. 194.
Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen: › Select the desired contact (if required, one of the contact numbers). 
 Start the route guidance to the contact address
164 Infotainment
Connecting to a favourite Call list
The function surfaces of preferred contacts allow the contact telephone num-
bers to be dialled immediately.
The favourites are available in two storage groups.
› To the change Storage Group tap on the functional surface B » Fig. 194.
› To dial, tap the assigned function surface A » Fig. 194.
Change allocated favourites
› In the main Telephone menu, press and hold the desired function surface A
» Fig. 194.
› Select the desired contact (if required, one of the contact numbers).
Delete a favourite Fig. 195 Call history / Contact details
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on function surface  → User profile → Manage
favourites. › In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface  and a call list will
be displayed » Fig. 195.
› Press the desired function surface of the preferred contact and confirm the
deletion. The call list can also be displayed during a telephone call.
You can delete all contacts by tapping on the function surface  Delete all / All Functional surfaces
areas and confirming the delete process. A Setting the display depending on the type of call
▶ All areas - List of all calls
Function surface for emergency call 
▶ Missed calls/Missed calls - List of missed calls
If the vehicle is not equipped with the buttons for the Care Connect service
▶ Dialled numbers - List of dialled numbers
» page 16, the position of the last function surface in the first group of favour-
▶ Received calls / Received calls - list of received calls
ites will show the function surface for an emergency call  . In some coun-
tries, this function may not be available. B Dial the contact number/telephone number
Call type symbols
The function surface can be assigned a different number for the preferred ▶  - Answered call
contact. ▶  - Outgoing call
To restore the emergency number, it is necessary to remove the telephone ▶  - Missed call
from the list of paired external devices » page 162 and then to pair and con-  Edit the phone number before dialling (not applicable to Infotainment
nect again. Swing)
 Display the contact details » Fig. 195
▶ C - Dial the contact number
Phone call
Depending on the conversation context, the following functions can be carried
out.
 End dialling / reject incoming call / end call
 Accept incoming call / return to held call 
Telephone 165
 Switch on/off ringer  Display details of participant
 Hold a call  Talk to a participant separately from the conference call
 Switch off/on microphone  End the call to a conference participant
Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero:
 Set up a conference call Text messages (SMS)
 Show caller details (if the contact is stored in the list)
Main menu
Switch on/off hands-free (call to the telephone / switch to Infotainment) Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero.
▶ To switch off the hands-free system, in the Telephone main menu, tap on the
function surface  → Hands-free during a call.
▶ To switch off the hands-free system, tap on the function surface  during a Fig. 196
Main menu text messages
call.
Conference
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero.
The conference call is a shared call with between three and six participants.
Start a conference call/invite additional participants
› During a call/conference call, carry out the next call. › In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface  and the main
› or: Take the new incoming call by tapping the function surface . menu for text messages will be displayed » Fig. 196.
› To initiate conference call or return to the conference call, tap on the func- › If required, select whether the SIM card inserted in the external module or
tion surface  . the telephone (applies to Infotainment Columbus) is to be used as the source
of the text messages.
Ongoing conference call
During an ongoing conference call, the call duration is displayed on the screen. Depending on your model of connected telephone, you can perform the fol-
Depending on the context, the following functions can be selected. lowing functions.
 Hold a conference call - leave the conference call temporarily (the con- A Opening a list of templates for quick answers
ference call continues in your absence)  New text message - Creating and sending the message
 Return to the held conference call  Inbox- Open a list of received messages
 Switch off/on microphone  Sent - Open a list of sent messages
 End conference call  Outbox - Open a list of messages not sent
 Display conference call  Drafts- Open a list of drafts (messages in progress)
Conference details  Deleted- Open a list of deleted messages
▶ During the ongoing conference call, press the function surface  .  Send contact details - Send contact details (business card) (applies to Info-
tainment Columbus)
A list of other conference participants is displayed. The following functions
can be selected depending on the type of telephone.  Select source of text messages (applies to Infotainment Columbus) 
166 Infotainment
Display for the selection of the source of text messages (this applies to the Tap on the Find function surface to open a list of available telephone contacts.
Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external module)
After selecting the contact number or entering the telephone number, the re-
If a SIM card used only for data services is located in the external module and if
cipient list will be displayed in the screen.
a phone that supports the Bluetooth® profile MAP is connected to Infotain-
ment, then it is possible to adjust the source from which a text message menu Recipient list
will be displayed after tapping on the function surface  in the main Telephone The following functions can be executed by tapping on one of the functional
menu. surfaces.
▶ In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surfaces  → Text message    Display contact list with the option of adding/removing additional re-
settings → Standard account. cipients (tap on the function surface to return to the recipient list  .
▶ Select the desired menu item.  Removal of the contact from the recipient list
 Sending the message
New text message  Return to view the message
Creating and sending the message
› In the main menu of the text messages, tap on function surface  » Fig. 196 Received text message
on page 166.
When you receive a new message, the number of new messages received is
› Write a text message and confirm. A view of the text message is displayed. displayed within the function surface  and at the same time the symbol  .
› Tap the function surface    .
› Select the recipient of the message from the displayed contact list or tap on › To open a list of received messages, go to the Telephone main menu and
the  and enter the telephone number. tap on function surface  →  .
› To add additional recipients, tap on the function surface    . › Select a message.
› To send the text message, tap the function surface  . The message content and the following menu is displayed.
Viewing the text message  The text can be read out by the device's generated voice
After opening the view message function, the following functions can be exe-
 Display a menu with additional options
cuted. ▶ Reply with template - Reply using a template
 The text can be read out by the device's generated voice ▶ Delete current text message - Distance of displayed text message (applies to
 The text can be stored as a draft Infotainment Columbus, when the SIM card is inserted in the external
 Open a list of templates with the option to replace the recorded text with module or the phone is connected via the Bluetooth® profile RSAP)
▶ Display numbers - Recognition of telephone numbers in the message in-
the selected template
cluding the contact number (recognised numbers can be dialled directly
   Open the contact list
or edited before dialling, or may be sent to this message)
The message can be edited, as long as the text range is within the entered  Forwarding a message with the option to edit the message before sending
view.
 Reply to the sender via a message
Contact list
After the list has been opened the following functions can be executed.
 Insert a contact in the recipient list
 Enter the telephone number
 Return to view the message
Telephone 167
Data connection Connecting Infotainment Amundsen
Internet connection
Infotainment Columbus
Fig. 198 WLAN (Wi-Fi) / CarStick
Possible connection types » Fig. 198

A Using WLAN, by connecting the Infotainment system to the hot spot of
Fig. 197 WLAN (Wi-Fi) / Bluetooth® / SIM card the external device » page 170, Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of
the external device.
Possible connection types » Fig. 197 B Using the CarStick USB device » page 168.
A Using WLAN, by connecting the Infotainment system to the hot spot of
the external device » page 170, Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of Connecting via the CarStick device
the external device.
B By connecting to a mobile phone (it is connected to the Internet) using the Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Bluetooth®rSAP profile » page 169, Establishing a connection using the The CarStick USB device can be purchased from the original accessories.
Bluetooth ® rSAP profile.
C Using a SIM Card with a data tariff » page 169, Establishing a connection
› Insert a SIM card with activated data services into the CarStick device.
using a SIM card in the external module. The required dimensions of the SIM card, as well as the correct procedure dur-
ing insertion can be found in the instructions enclosed with the CarStick ŠKO-
DA original accessory.
› Insert the CarStick into the USB input at the front » Fig. 99 on page 93,
› Wait approximately one minute until the red light on Carstick stays continu-
ously lit (if the red lights up, then disconnect and re-insert the Carstick).
› If the SIM card is protected by a PIN code, then the PIN code of the SIM card
must be entered.
› Confirm the entered PIN code by tapping  .
› or: Tap the function surface  to save and confirm the PIN code. 
168 Infotainment
› If necessary, set the required network of the data service provider. The data connection setting using the SIM card can be configured in the menu
item  →  → Network → Data connection:.
If your data provider is not available in the list, ask your provider whether one
of the displayed providers can be used. CAUTION
The parameters of the telephone service provider network can be set in the When inserting an incorrectly sized SIM card or in the wrong direction, there is
menu item  →  → Network → Network settings. a risk of damage to the external module.
CAUTION Establishing a connection using the Bluetooth ® rSAP profile

If you insert a SIM card of the wrong size or in the wrong direction, there is a
risk of damage to the CarStick device. Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external mod-
ule.
Establishing a connection using a SIM card in the external module The prerequisite for establishing an Internet connection is using a telephone
with a SIM card with active data services.
Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external mod-
ule. › Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
A SIM card size “mini” (standard size 25x15 mm) mit enabled data services
› Switch on the “Business” function in Infotainment, and tap on the sensor field
and then the function surface  →  → "Business" telephone “interface”.
must be used.
› Switch on Bluetooth®, tap on the sensor field  and then the function sur-
› Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment. face  → Bluetooth → Bluetooth.
› In the Telephone main menu, switch on the  → Business phone “interface”. › Turn on Infotainment visibility (tap on the sensor field  and then tap the
› Insert a SIM card into the corresponding slot into the external module in the function surface  → Bluetooth → Visibility: → Visible.
storage compartment on the passenger's side » Fig. 192 on page 162. › Switch on Bluetooth® and its visibility in the phone.
Insert the SIM card with the bevelled corner on the left and the contacts › Connect and pair the phone with Infotainment » page 159.
facing downwards until it “locks”.
Connecting via WLAN
› Select the SIM card usage type:
Calls too - enabling data and telephone services. Introduction to the subject
Only data connections - enabling of data services only. Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen.
› If the SIM card is protected by a PIN code, then the PIN code of the SIM card WLAN can be used to connect to the Internet, to playback audio files in the
must be entered. menu media or for operating the Infotainment system using an application in
› Confirm the entered PIN code by tapping  . the external device (e.g. “ŠKODA Media Command”).
› or: Tap the function surface  to save and confirm the PIN code. It is possible to connect up to 8 external devices to the Infotainment hotspot
› Set the data service provider’s required network and confirm the Internet and at the same time to connect Infotainment to another hotspot.
connection.
If your data provider is not available in the list, ask your provider whether one Switching the Infotainment hotspot on/off
of the displayed providers can be used.
The parameters of the telephone service provider network can be set in the › Switch the hotspot on/off in menu item  →  → WLAN → Mobile hotspot →
menu item  →  → Network → Network settings. Mobile hotspot.
Data connection 169

Setting the Infotainment hotspot › If the Infotainment WLAN is not activated, activate it in the menu item  →
 → WLAN → WLAN → WLAN.
The Infotainment hotspot is factory set.
In area A » Fig. 199, a list of available or previously connected hotspots is dis-
The setting can be changed in menu item  →  → WLAN → Mobile hotspot → played.
Hotspot (WLAN) settings.
The hotspot list can be updated by tapping the function surface B .
Security level: - Type of access protection (always set to WPA2)
■
■ Network key - Access password
› Select the hotspot and enter the password.
■ SSID: ... - Hotspot name If the hotspot is not visible, you can establish the connection to it manually.
■ Do not send network name (SSID) - Switch the visibility of the hotspot on/off
› Tap the function surface Manual settings.
▶ To save the configured parameters, tap the Store function surface. › Set the required hotspot parameters.
› Tap the function surface Connect.
Connecting an external device to the Infotainment hotspot Icons and function surfaces in the list of available hotspots A » Fig. 199
› Switch on the ignition.  Connected hotspot
› Switch on WLAN in the external device and search for the infotainment hot-  Signal strength of the connected hotspot
spot.  Delete the hotspot
› Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the required password. Hotspot connection recommendations
› Confirm the connection. ▶ Only leave the hotspot to be connected switched on, switch off the other
Note hotspot.
The name of the infotainment hotspot (SSID) and the access password can be ▶ On some hotspots, the connection setup takes longer, wait for the end of
found in menu item  →  → WLAN → Mobile hotspot → Hotspot (WLAN) settings. the connection setup.
▶ If the connection is interrupted, search for available hotspots again and re-
Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of the external device peat connection setup.
▶ Delete unused hotspots. This shortens the time required for connection set-
up.
Fig. 199
Main menu of the Infotainment Note
WLAN ■ It is not possible to connect Infotainment Columbus to the hotspot of the ex-
ternal device as long as a SIM card with enabled data services is in the external
module of Infotainment or a phone connected to Infotainment via the Blue-
tooth®rSAP profile.
■ An Infotainment Amundsen connection with external device hotspot is not
possible, as long as there is an active connection using the Carstickdevice.
The Infotainment system can only be connected to a hotspot with WPA2 Connect via WPS
access protection.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
It is not necessary to enter the access password when connecting via WPS. 
170 Infotainment
Connecting the Infotainment system to the hotspot of the external device
SmartLink
› In the external device, switch on the hotspot, its visibility, and the WPS con- Introductory information
nection option.
› In the Infotainment system, switch on WLAN in menu item  →  → WLAN Introduction to the subject
→ WLAN → WLAN.
› Tap the function surface WPS quick connection (WPS button). Fig. 200
Connecting the external device to the Infotainment hotspot Information on SmartLink on the
› Switch on the ignition. ŠKODA websites
› Switch on the Infotainment hotspot in menu item  →  → WLAN → Mobile
hotspot → Mobile hotspot.
› Tap the function surface WPS quick connection (WPS button).
› In the external device, switch on the WPS connection option.
SmartLink offers the option to display certified applications on an external de-

vice equipped with a USB device on the Infotainment screen and to operate
them.
SmartLink supports the following communication systems.
▶ “Android Auto”
▶ “Apple CarPlay”
▶ “MirrorLink®”
Using the applications in the connected external device, you can use navigation
to make a call and to listen to music.
For reasons of safety, the operation of some applications while driving is not
possible or only limited.
Read in the QR code» Fig. 200orenter the following address in the web brows-
er to open the website with information on the SmartLink system.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity-smartlink
Depending on the model of the connected external device, some applications
can be operated via the Infotainment system, using your voice or using the
buttons on the multi-function steering wheel.
To activate voice control for the connected external device, hold down  or
 or hold down the button  on the multifunction steering wheel. 
SmartLink 171
CAUTION Android Auto
To establish the connection, it is necessary that the date and time in Infotain-
ment are set correctly. If the date and time setting is based on the GPS signal, Connection set-up / disconnection
then problems may arise with establishing a connection with a poor GPS signal
reception. Prerequisites for establishing a connection
 The external device to be connected must support the “Android Auto”
Note communication system.
■ We recommend that you use extension cables from ŠKODA Original Acces-  In the external device to be connected, the “Android Auto” application
sories. must be installed.
■ With some connected external devices, it is necessary for the connected ex-  Some applications require the data connection in the connected external
ternal device to be “unlocked” for trouble-free functioning of the SmartLink device to be switched on.
function.
A list external of devices, supported regions and applications that the “Android
Auto” connection supports can be found on the websites of Google Inc..
Main menu
Connection set-up
› Switch on the Infotainment system.
› Switch on the external device.
› Connect the external device to the USB input using a cable » page 93.
› Select the connection using “Android Auto” B » Fig. 201 on page 172.
Disconnection of the active connection
› In the “Android Auto” main menu, tap the function surface  .
› Tap the “ŠKODA” function surface to go back to the main menu SmartLink.
› Tap the function surface  .
Fig. 201 Supported communication systems / Example of available › or: Disconnect the cable from the USB input. When reconnected, the exter-
communication systems of the connected external device nal device is automatically connected.
› to display the SmartLink main menu, tap on the sensor field  or press the Function restriction of Infotainment
button.
 For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
› or: Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  . audio source in the Media menu.
If no external device is connected, then a menu with supported communica- By connecting the external device with “Android Auto”, all currently connected
tion systems SmartLink is displayed A » Fig. 201, Bluetooth® devices will be disconnected and the external device will automati-
cally be connected as the main telephone.
A Supported communication systems For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth devices can be connected to
the infotainment system. The SIM card inserted in the external module can on-
B Available communication systems of the connected external device
ly be used for data connection. 
 Display of information about SmartLink
 Disconnection of the active connection
 Settings of the SmartLink » page 138 menu or » page 143
172 Infotainment
If route guidance is taking place at this moment in Infotainment, then there Apple CarPlay
is the option to start the route guidance in the “Android Auto” application. And
vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking place in the “Android Auto” Connection set-up / disconnection
application, then there is the possibility that this will be terminated by the
start of route guidance by the Infotainment system. Prerequisites for establishing a connection
 The external device to be connected must support the “Apple CarPlay”
main menu communication system.
 The data connection of the external device to be connected must be ac-
Fig. 202 tive.
Android Auto: Main menu  The voice control (Siri) of the external device to be connected must be ac-
tive.
A list external of devices, supported regions and applications that the “Apple
CarPlay” connection supports can be found on the websites of Apple Inc..
Connection set-up
› Switch on the Infotainment system.
Main menu » Fig. 202 › Switch on the external device.
 Navigation applications › Connect the external device to the USB input using a cable » page 93.
 Telephone applications › Select the connection using “Apple CarPlay” B » Fig. 201 on page 172.
 Overview regarding current applications, telephone calls, accepted text Disconnection of the active connection
messages, tasks in the working directory, weather or similar. › In the main menu “Apple CarPlay”, tap the function surface of the “ŠKODA”
 Music applications application, the main menu SmartLink is displayed.
 Display of other available applications as well as the option of returning to › Tap the function surface  .
the SmartLink main menu › or: Disconnect the cable from the USB input. When reconnected, the exter-
nal device is automatically connected.
 Switching on voice control (Google Voice)
Function restriction of Infotainment
The symbol appears next to the function surface in the area A appears and
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
then, after tapping on this function surface again, a list of new applications is
audio source in the Media menu.
displayed.
By connecting the external device with “Apple CarPlay”, all currently connec-
ted Bluetooth® devices will be disconnected.
For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth devices can be connected to
the infotainment system. The SIM card inserted in the external module can on-
ly be used for data services. 
SmartLink 173
If route guidance is taking place at this moment using Infotainment, then this Connection set-up
is terminated by starting the route guidance in the “Apple CarPlay” application. › Switch on the ignition.
And vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking place in the “Apple › Switch on the Infotainment system.
CarPlay” application, then this will be terminated by the start of route guid- › Switch on the external device.
ance by the Infotainment system. › Connect the external device to the USB input using a cable » page 93.
› Select the connection using “MirrorLink®” B » Fig. 201 on page 172.
Note
Some phone features of the connected external device can be operated in the Disconnection of the active connection
display of the instrument cluster » page 55. › In the main menu of “MirrorLink ®”, tap the function surface  The SmartLink
main menu is displayed.
main menu › Tap the function surface  .
› or: Disconnect the cable from the USB input. When reconnected, the exter-
nal device is automatically connected.
Fig. 203
Apple CarPlay: Main menu Function restriction of Infotainment
applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero: If you wish to use the
device to be connected in the Telephone menu, the external device must be
paired with and connected to the Infotainment system before establishing the
connection» page 159.
Applies to Infotainment Swing. By connecting the external device to all cur-
rently connected Bluetooth® devices will be disconnected and the external de-
vice will automatically be connected as the main telephone. Depending on the
Main menu » Fig. 203 device to be connected, a connection confirmation may be required.
A List of available applications
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
B More pages with applications audio source in the Media menu.
 Depending on how long the function surface is pressed for:
▶ Tap - Return to “Apple Carplay” main menu
main menu
▶ Hold - Switch on voice control (Siri)
Fig. 204
MirrorLink® MirrorLink®: Main menu 
Connection set-up / disconnection

Prerequisites for establishing a connection
 The external device to be connected must support the communication
system “MirrorLink®”.
 The external device to be connected must have at least one
“MirrorLink®”application installed.
 Some applications require the data connection in the connected external
device to be switched on.
174 Infotainment
Main menu » Fig. 204 Application“ŠKODA OneApp”
 Return to SmartLink main menu » page 172
 List of running applications Introductory information
 Display of the last running application in the connected external device
 Settings of the SmartLink » page 138 menu or » page 143 Fig. 205
A List of applications Information on the ŠKODA
OneApp application on the ŠKO-
B More pages with applications
DA websites
 Applications cannot be operated while driving
Display of the function surfaces during the running application
 Return to “MirrorLink ®” main menu
   Show function surfaces at the top/bottom (applies to Infotainment
Amundsen, Bolero)
A mobile telephone connected to the Infotainment system allows you to edit
       Move the functional surfaces in the desired corner of the screen
and evaluate journey data in the “ŠKODA One App” application.
(applies to the infotainment Swing)
To show/hide the function surfaces, press the controller  (applies to Infotain-
opened with information on the ŠKODA mobile applications.
ment Amundsen, Bolero).
function problems The “ŠKODA OneApp” application is available in the App Store and Google
If problems occur with the “MirrorLink ®”connection, then one of the following Play online shops.
messages may occur on the screen. “ŠKODA OneApp” application
■ Fault: transfer - Disconnect and reconnect the external device › Scan the QR code » Fig. 205 .
■ MirrorLink® audio is not available. - Disconnect and reconnect the external device
For the full functionality of the “ŠKODA One App” application, data transfer
■ MirrorLink® availability on this mobile device is restricted. - it is not possible to use the
from external devices must be activated.
connected device during the journey or the device only has limited availabili-
ty (applies to Infotainment swing) Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
■ The mobile device is locked. Please unlock the mobile device to use MirrorLink® - “unlock” ▶ To activate data transfer from external devices, tap the  sensor field
the connected external device and then tap on function surface →  → Mobile device data transfer → Activate data
■ Unable to start app or app not working. - Disconnect and reconnect the external transfer for ŠKODA Apps.
device Applies to Infotainment Swing
▶ Toactivate data from external devices, press the  button, then tap on
function surface → Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps.
Note
Some functions of the application are not available in all countries or there is a
function restriction during the journey » page 122, Mobile devices and applica-
tions.
SmartLink 175
Connecting to Infotainment Navigation
The mobile telephone can be connected to the Infotainment system using the
Introductory information
SmartLink function or via WLAN.
Connection by SmartLink Navigation - function sequence
› Switch on the ignition. Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen.
› Establish the connection via SmartLink (eg “MirrorLink®”)» page 171.
› In the list of available applications, select the “ŠKODA One App” application. Route guidance is started as follows.
Depending on the model of the connected external device, some applications › Search for/ enter a new destination or Select one of the stored destinations.
can be started using voice activation, via the Infotainment screen, using the › Confirm the route calculation in the destination details or if necessary, adjust
operating elements on Infotainment, or using the buttons on the multi-func- the route options.
tion steering wheel. › Select the preferred route type, if this is requested by Infotainment.
Once connected, the contents of the application in the infotainment screen A route calculation occurs and route guidance starts.
may be displayed. The route guidance is provided by graphical driving recommendations and nav.
A possible connection between the mobile telephone and the Infotainment announcements.
system via WLAN will be terminated after a connection is established using The is an option to add additional destinations during route guidance, or to
SmartLink. adapt the route.
Connection via WLAN (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen) If a traffic radio station is available, information concerning traffic delays is
› Switch on the ignition. evaluated by Infotainment and, if necessary, an alternative route is offered.
› Establish the WLAN connection » page 169.
› In the mobile telephone, start the “ŠKODA OneApp” application. If you deviate from the route, then a new route calculation is carried out.
Disconnection GPS satellite signal

The connection can be switched off in one of the following ways.
Infotainment uses the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellite signal for
› Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter route guidance.
button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door).
› End the connection in the “ŠKODA OneApp” application. Outside the range of the GPS satellite signal (e.g. in dense vegetation, in tun-
› Disconnect the mobile telephone from the USB port or terminate the WLAN nels, parking garages, etc.), Infotainment navigates only with restrictions using
connection. vehicle sensors.
The unit offers the possibility to show in the split screen display the following
Position » Fig. 208 on page 179 information about the current geographical po-
sition of the vehicle and the satellite signal.
 Geographical latitude
 Geographical longitude
 Elevation
 Number of received/available satellites 
176 Infotainment
If no GPS satellite signal is available, no values are displayed. Navigation data and POI categories Import / Update online
Navigation data Manual update
When “Infotainment Online” » page 14 online services are activated, there is
Navigation data source Columbus the option of downloading/updating navigation data (applies to Infotainment
The navigation data is stored in the Infotainment memory. Columbus) or of downloading POI categories created in the user profile on the
Navigation data source Amundsen “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website.
The navigation data is stored on an Original SD Card. ▶ In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface  → Version information
In order to ensure the function of the navigation, the Original SD card, with the → Update (online) → Retrieve.
▶ or: Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  →  .
navigation data, must be inserted in the respective slot in the external module
» page 124. A menu for importing/updating the navigation data and POI categories is dis-
If the original SD card is damaged or lost, a new original SD card can be pur- played.
chased from the ŠKODA Original Accessories. ▶ Tap the function surface  and select one of the following menu items.
With a Non-original SD Card, navigation does not work. ■ All - Import all the available navigation data
Determining the version of the navigation data
■ Favourites - Import of navigation data preferably countries / regions (applies to
the infotainment Columbus)
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface  → Version informa- ■ POIs - Import of the POI category created in the user profile on the “ŠKODA
tion.
Connect Portal” website » page 185
Update navigation data ■ Maps - Import of the navigation data available for the respective countries/re-
We recommend that you update the navigation data on a regular basis. gions (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
The Infotainment can give incorrect driving recommendations if the road con- ▶ Select the desired list entries.
dition or the traffic situation does not match the navigation data. This can lead ▶ Tap on function surface Retrieve and confirm the deletion.
to route guidance being carried out using a different route or proposing a
change of direction in a one-way street. Therefore, observe the respective Automatic update
traffic signs while driving, which always have priority over the driving recom- Applies to vehicles with the Infotainment Columbus: if the online services
mendations. “Infotainment Online” » page 14 are activated and an update of the navigation
data for the current vehicle position or the route destination is available, the
The information on updating the navigation data is to be obtained from a infotainment will issue this automatic note and offer an update option.
ŠKODA partner or on the following ŠKODA Internet pages.
During the upgrade process, infotainment is usable without limitation.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
To complete the update of the navigation data, the ignition and Infotainment
When activated online services “Infotainment online” » page 14 can the naviga- must be switched off for at least 30 min.
tion data for the Infotainment Columbus Updating online » page 177, Naviga-
tion data and POI categories Import / Update online,
Navigation 177
Main menu  Display for the volume setting of the navigation announcements/repeti-
tion of the navigation announcement » page 191
 Navigation settings » page 139
B Change the map display between the digital instrument cluster and the In-
fotainment screen (applies to vehicles with the Infundainment Amundsen
and the digital instrument cluster)
Map
Fig. 207
Card description
Fig. 206 Navigation: Main menu
› To display, tap the sensor field  .

› or: Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  .
Description of the function surfaces A » Fig. 206
 Context-dependent:
Route guidance is deactivated - Search / enter a new destination
The following information and function surfaces can be displayed in the
Route guidance is enabled - The following menu is displayed:
▶ Route details - Displays the route details » page 192
map. » Fig. 207
▶ Change route in map - Displays a menu for the route change in the map
A Vehicle position
(applies to Infotainment Columbus) » page 193 B Route
▶ Congestion ahead - Manually adjusts traffic conditions » page 197 C Function surfaces for card use » page 186
▶ Enter destination - Search for/enter a new destination/stopover D Function surface of the POI
» page 179 E Function surface for the POI list
▶ Stop route guidance - Stops route guidance » page 191
F Function surface for displaying a traffic incident » page 197
 The following menu is displayed: G Information on the maximum permitted speed
▶ Curr. current position - Store the current vehicle position as the flagged
 Destination position
destination » page 183
▶ Routes - Displays the list of saved routes » page 193  Intermediate destination position
▶ Destinations - Displays the list of stored destinations » page 182  Destination position Home address
▶ Last destinations - Displays the list of recent destinations to which route  Favourite position
guidance was carried out » page 182 Information in the status line
▶ Home address - Route guidance to your home address » page 183
 Street name / street number of the current vehicle position
 Search for POIs in categories ,  and 
 Distance to destination
 Map presentation options » page 186
 Route to the stopover
   Playback Control Media/Radio (does not apply to vehicles with Infun-
 Estimated travelling time to the destination 
dainment Amundsen and the digital instrument cluster)
178 Infotainment
 Estimated travel time to the stopover Search for destination and enter
 Estimated time of arrival at destination / stopover
Selecting the type of destination search/destination entry
additional window
Fig. 209
Fig. 208 Selecting the type of destina-
Split screen tion search/destination entry
› Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
Applies to vehicles with Infotainment Amundsen and the digital instrument surface  →  .
cluster: when the map display is displayed in the digital instrument cluster, the › Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-
split screen is always shown and cannot be dimmed. tion surface  → Enter destination →  .
› To switch on/offin the main menu Navigation, tap on the function surface  Functional surfaces » Fig. 209
→ Split screen. A Search for a destination or POI (point of interest) by name » page 179
› To select content of the additional window A » Fig. 208 tap the function B Destination entry by address » page 180
surface  and select one of the following menus, depending on the context.
C Online POI search » page 179
■ Audio - Operation of Radio/Mediaplayback D Search for a point along the route (only works with active route guidance)
■ Compass - Displays the current vehicle location in relation to the compass di- » page 179
rections E Destination input via the map point or using the GPS coordinates
■ Freq. Routes - Displays the three most frequently travelled routes (if route
» page 181
guidance is disabled) » page 191
■ Manoeuvre - Displays graphical driving recommendations (if route guidance is
Search POI destination /
enabled) » page 191
■ Position - Displays the geographical coordinates of the current vehicle loca-
tion Fig. 210
■ Map - Preview card display (applies to vehicles with Infotainment Columbus, Menu for the destination search 
without the digital instrument cluster) » page 188
Navigation 179
▶ Select the desired destination and the destination details will be displayed.
▶ or: Tap the B » Fig. 210 function surface.
A map with the following symbols and a list of the destinations found is dis-
played.
 Destinations found in the navigation data » Fig. 211 - .
 Destinations found online » Fig. 211 - .
▶ Select the desired destination and the destination details will be displayed.
Fig. 211 List of destinations visited: in the navigation data / online Enter destination using the address
The feature allows a full text search of locations or points of interest (POI) by
entering keywords.
Show menu
surface  →  .
› Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-
tion surface  → Tap Enter destination
› Then tap the function surface of one of the menu items for the destination
search A , C or D » Fig. 209 on page 179.
Fig. 212 Enter destination using the address: Main menu / List of visited
Function surfaces » Fig. 210 and » Fig. 211 destinations
A Input line
Show menu
B Depending on the search mode, the following symbols are displayed
 - Display the map as well as the list of the destinations listed in the navi-
surface  .
gation database
 - Display the map as well as the list of online destinations
› Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-
C  - Select the destination search/destination entry » page 179
› Then tap the function surface  → B » page 179
D List of last destinations (if no character is entered) / List of visited destina-
tions Enter dest.
E Keypad
› Enter the destination address and then confirm » Fig. 212 - .
F Status of online services
› Tap the function surface  to see the destination details.
Relevant names (e.g. Place/street names) are offered in the entry line during
Find destination entry, depending on the context. The location of the proposed destination can
▶ Enter the POI name or the POI category (POI) and, if required, the place and
be displayed by tapping the function surface Map.
street name or house number/postal code.
Depending on the number of places visited, a map with a list of visited places
A list of the destinations found is displayed in area D » Fig. 210. can be displayed automatically » Fig. 212 - . 
180 Infotainment
The map with the list of visited locations can be accessed manually by tapping Entering a destination via the map point
the function surface  .
Fig. 214
Entering a destination via the map point and using GPS coordinates
Menu after tapping the map
point
Tap on the map to display the symbol  and a menu with the following menu
items (depending on the context) » Fig. 214.
Fig. 213 Enter destination: via the map point / using the GPS coordi- A Display the destination details » page 189
nates B Display the POI details/display the POI list (function surface) )
 Start route guidance to the selected point
Show menu  Paste the selected point as the next destination in the current route
› Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function guidance
surface  .
 Start route guidance to the favourite
› Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-  Start route guidance to the home address
› Then tap the function surface  → E » Fig. 209 on page 179.  Destination search in the vicinity of the selected point » page 179
C Define the starting point for demo mode (if it is turned on) » page 190
Enter destination via map point
› Touch the screen to move the desired destination into the cross-hair Find petrol station, restaurant or car park
» Fig. 213 - .
through via coordinates
› Tap in the values of the GPS coordinates one at a time and adjust » Fig. 213 -
,
If information about the point entered is available in the Infotainment system's
navigation data, this will be displayed instead of the GPS coordinates (e.g. ad-
dress A » Fig. 213).
Fig. 215 List of petrol stations visited: in the navigation data / online 
Navigation 181
Note
With activated function  → Fuel options → Select preferred fuel station function ac-
tivated, the preferred fuel stations are displayed in the first three positions
during the fuel station search.
Saved destinations
Last destinations
List of last destinations
Fig. 216 List of car parks visited: in the navigation data / online › In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface  → Last destinations.
The Infotainment allows you to find petrol stations, restaurants or car parks Details of the last destination (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus)
quickly in the navigation data as well as online. › In the main Navigation menu, tap the  sensor field.
If route guide is disabled, then the details of the last destination are displayed
› In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface  . to where the route guidance was carried out. If route guidance is enabled,
› The function surface of the desired category button. Then the details of the final destinations are displayed.
› or: Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  →  or  .
Search destination in the navigation data Last destinations menu for destination / POI search
Depending on the context below a list be examined POIs in the selected cate- In the destination search menu, a short list of recent destinations is show in
gory is displayed. area D » page 179.
▶ No route guidance is taking place - The nearest destinations in a radius of Function surfaces in the list of last destinations
200 km from the current vehicle position are displayed. Search - Destination search by name (the function surface is displayed with
▶ Route guidance is taking place - Destinations on the route or near the route more than 5 entries available)
are displayed.  - Display the details of the selected destination » page 189
Find Target online
target memory
When “Infotainment Online” » page 14 services are activated, a list of POIs
from the selected category in a radius around the current vehicle position is
displayed, regardless of whether or not route guidance is taking place.
After performing destination search, it is possible to switch between the list of
visited in the navigation data or online goals by one of the following functional
areas on the position A » Fig. 215 or. » Fig. 216 is tapped.
 Displays the list of destinations visited in the navigation data.
 Displays list of last destinations
Fig. 217 Select list of stored destinations / categories of saved destina-

tions 
182 Infotainment
List of stored destinations ▶ Show the destination details by tapping on the function surface  at the de-
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the functional surface  → Destinations. sired destination.
› Tap on function surface A » Fig. 217 and select one of the following catego- ▶ Tap the function surface Edit .
ries of saved destinations B » Fig. 217. ▶ Tap the function surface Favourite.
 All saved destinations Delete destination

▶  - Flagged destination (vehicle position at the time of storage) ▶ In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Destinations.
▶  - Stored destination (manually saved destination/destination impor- ▶ Tap the function surface  and select the desired list of destinations.
ted in vCard format) ▶ Show the destination details by tapping on the function surface  at the de-
▶  - Favourite (destination with additional favourite property) sired destination.
 Favourites (the favourite location is shown on the map by the  symbol). ▶ Tap the function surface Edit .
▶ Tap the function surface Delete and confirm the deletion.
 Telephone contact addresses of the connected phone or the inserted SIM
card.
 Online destinations created in the user profile on the “ŠKODA Connect Home address
Portal” website or in the “ŠKODA Connect” application » page 185 Define home address
Function surfaces in the list of stored destinations When your home address is not entered, then proceed as follows.
Search - Destination search by name (the function surface is displayed if there › In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Home address.
are several entries on the next page of the list) › Defining the home address using the current vehicle position or by entering
 - Display of the destination details » page 189 the address.
Store target Change the home address
▶ In theNavigation main menu, tap the functional surface  → Last destinations. › In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Manage memory →
▶ Tap the function surface  at the desired destination to display the destina- Define home address.
tion details. › Tap the function surface Edit .
▶ Tap on the function surface Store . › Edit the home address or set one up using the current vehicle position or by
▶ Rename the destination if necessary and confirm storage. entering the address.
“Flagged destination” Save (current vehicle position) Delete home address
▶ In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Store → Store current › In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Manage memory →
position. Delete user data → Home address.
▶ By then tapping on function surface Rename, you can rename the flagged des- › Tap the function surface Delete and confirm the deletion.
tination and store it as a destination in the dest. memory.
By storing the next flagged destination, the last flagged destination will be
overwritten. To maintain the existing flagged destination, this destination must
be stored in the Infotainment memory.
Save as a favourite / cancel
It is not possible to store a contact, a vCard or target image as a favourite.
▶ In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Destinations.
▶ Tap the function surface  and select the desired list of destinations.
Navigation 183
Import your own goals Goals in vCard format
Introduction to the subject In the Infotainment memory, a custom destination can be imported in the
vCard format (*.vcf) from an SD card or a USB source.
Fig. 218 Import
MyDestination application on › Insert the SD card into the external module or connect a USB source with
the ŠKODA websites the file of the custom destination.
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Manage memory →
Import destinations (SD/USB).
› Select the source and confirm the import.
Route guidance
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Destinations →  →
.
Fig. 219 › Search for and select the desired imported destination.
Websites ŠKODA Connect Delete own destination
.
› Tap the function surface  Tap on the desired custom destination.
› In the destination details, tap the function surface Edit → Delete and confirm
the deletion.
In the application “MyDestination” created POI categories

Your own destinations can be created using the ŠKODAapplication
Import / update
“MyDestination”, in the user profile on the website “ŠKODA Connect Portal” or
in the application “ŠKODA Connect”
› Insert the SD card into the external module or connect a USB source with
the POI categories.
By reading the QR code » Fig. 218 or after typing the following address in the › In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Manage memory →
web browser, more information on the “MyDestination”application is dis- Update "My POIs" (SD/USB).
played.
If there is already the same POI category name in the Infotainment memory,
http://go.skoda.eu/my-destination then it will be overwritten during the import.
For the “ŠKODA Connect Portal” refer to the website of “ŠKODA Connect”. Show POIs in the map
This is carried out by reading the QR code » Fig. 219 or after entering the fol- › In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Map → Select catego-
lowing address into the web browser. ries for POIs → My points of interest (Personal POI).
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity › Select the imported POI category.
Guidance to the POI
› Tip on the traffic obstruction icon in the map.
Details of the selected destination will be displayed » page 189. 
184 Infotainment
Clear all own POI categories In user profile “ŠKODA Connect Portal” objectives created
Delete "My POIs". The destinations you have created in the user profile on the website “ŠKODA
› Tap the function surface Delete and confirm the deletion. Connect Portal” or in the application “ŠKODA Connect” can be imported to the
Infotainment memory.
In user profile “ŠKODA Connect Portal” created POI categories The requirement for importing the destinations is that “Infotainment Online”
Your own POI categories created in the user profile on the website “ŠKODA » page 14 services are activated.
Connect Portal” can be imported into the Infotainment memory. import goals
The requirement for importing a POI category is that “Infotainment Online” › In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Destinations →  →
» page 14 services are activated. .
› or: Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  →  .
Import POI categories › Tap on the function surface Store .
In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Version information → › Are new targets available, then confirm the import.
Update (online).
If the user profile on the website “ŠKODA Connect Portal” or in the application
› or: Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  →  . “ŠKODA Connect” creates an object and sent to the Infotainment, after
A menu for importing/updating the navigation data and POI categories is dis- switching on the ignition in the Infotainment screen displays a message re-
played. garding a new destination with the option to import this displayed.
› Tap the function surface  → POIs (online services) → Retrieve. Guidance to an online destination
Are new POI categories available, their number and the file size is displayed on
.
the Infotainment.
› In the list of online dests to visit and select the desired destination.
› Tap the function surface Startto start route guidance. Delete Online dests
› To complete the import, tap the function surface Next and confirm the im- › to delete all Online destinations in the main menu navigation the function
port.
surface  → Manage memory → Delete user data → Online destinations.
Show POIs in the map › To delete one online destination, go to the navigation main menu and tap on
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Map → Select catego- function surface  → Destinations →  →  →  → Edit → Delete.
ries for POIs → My points of interest (Personal POI).
› Select the imported POI category. Image with GPS coordinates
Route guidance to a destination of imported POI category
› Tip on the traffic obstruction icon in the map. Fig. 220
Image with GPS coordinates 
Details of the selected destination will be displayed » page 189.
Clear all own POI categories
Delete "My POIs".
› Tap the function surface Delete and confirm the deletion.
Navigation 185
Infotainment enables guidance to the GPScoordinate data stored in the image. D Turns the split screen display on / off » page 179 (does not apply to vehi-
cles with the infotainment Amundsen when the map is displayed in the
› Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface Images. digital instrument cluster)
› Select the connected source and open the image with GPS coordinates.
› Tap the function surface  » Fig. 220 in the image and a menu will open with E Switch the display of selected POI categories on/off » page 181, Entering a
the option to start route guidance. destination via the map point
The image can be obtained from an external device in which GPS coordinates If the map scale of the 2D Map or 3D Map is greater than 10 km, then the map
are stored during the imaging process. This can be created and imported in is automatically displayed as 2D and aligned in the direction of north. If the
the“MyDestination” application » Fig. 218 on page 184. scale is increased beyond this value, then the map is switched back to the orig-
inal representation.
Map
Map scale
Map display options
Fig. 222
Fig. 221 Function surfaces for
Map options changing the map scale:
Infotainment Columbus
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  .

The following function surfaces are displayed » Fig. 221.
 2D - Two-dimensional map display
 3D - Three-dimensional map display
 Display of the route from the current vehicle location to the destination
 Presentation of the destination or the next interim destination in the map
(depending on the menu item setting)  → Advanced settings → Status line:)
A Automatic map display in day or night mode (depending on the currently
Fig. 223 Function surfaces for changing the map scale: Infotainment
active vehicle lighting) Amundsen
B Daytime map display
C Night-time map display It is possible to change the map scale manually or to turn on the automatic
change of scale.
› Tap on function surface A » Fig. 222 or» Fig. 223. 
186 Infotainment
In area B » Fig. 222 or » Fig. 223, function surfaces for changing the map scale Change map orientation
are displayed.
Types of manual scale change Fig. 224
▶ Touch the screen with two fingers and pull them apart or close them togeth- Change the map orientation
er.
▶ Turn the control knob  (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus)
▶ Tap the function surface A » Fig. 222 and use the slider or tap the function
surface /  in area B » Fig. 222 (applies to Columbus Infotainment).
Switch on/off the automatic change of scale
If the automatic scale is active, the map scale will change automatically de-
pending on the type of roads travelled (motorway - smaller map scale / town
larger map scale) and from the manoeuvre to be carried out. Changing map orientation is possible under the following conditions.
▶ To
switch on the automatic scale change, go to the Navigation main menu  The map is in the 2D display.
and tap on function surface  →  .  The map is centred (the function surface  is hidden).
 The map scale is max. 10 km away.
Tap the function surface  is highlighted in green.
The automatic scale is only active as long as the map is centred on the vehicle
› To change the map orientation, go to the Navigation main menu and tap on
function surface  A » Fig. 224.
position (the function surface  is hidden).
▶ To switchoff the automatic scale change, go to the Navigation main menu The map is oriented to the north
and tap on function surface  →  . The symbol  for the vehicle position rotates, the map and the polar star sym-
bol  do not rotate.
Tap the function surface  is highlighted in white.
With a map scale greater than 10 km, the map is automatically oriented to-
The turning off occurs likewise when the map is moved or the map scale is wards north.
changed manually.
Map oriented to the direction of travel
Map view in reduced scale The map and the Polar Star Symbol  rotate, the vehicle position symbol 
▶ In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface A →  . does not rotate.
The map scale is reduced for a few seconds and then restored.
Map alignment
Fig. 225
Map centring 
Navigation 187
The moved map can be centred/aligned to the vehicle, destination or route po- Only applies to Infotainment Columbus
sition. The map can be displayed in the digital instrument cluster and in infotainment
at the same time.
› To centre the map, tap on function surface  A » Fig. 225.
The type of map shown in the digital instrument cluster can be selected from
Options for map display in the split screen the main menu Navigation in the menu item  → Map → Map view in instrum. clus-
ter:.
Applies to vehicles with Infotainment Columbus, without the digital instrument
cluster. The map scale can be adjusted with the dial A on the multifunction steering
wheel » page 39,
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen
The map can be displayed in the digital instrument cluster or on the Infotain-
ment display.
▶ Tochange the display, tap on function surface B » Fig. 206 on page 178 in
the main menu Navigation
The type of map shown in the digital instrument cluster is changed via the
main menu Navigation in the menu item  .
The map scale can be changed in one of the following ways.
Fig. 226 Map in split screen
▶ With the function surfaces in Infotainment » page 186,
› In the split screen, tap on function surface A » Fig. 226. ▶ By turning the dial .
▶ With the dial A on the multifunctional steering wheel » page 39,
Depending on the context, some of the following function surfaces will be dis-
played in area B .
POIs display
 Map display with the route from the current vehicle location to the desti-
nation The Infotainment system offers the possibility of displaying POI symbols on
the map on the Infotainment screen.
 Change the map orientation
 2D - Two-dimensional map display › To activate/deactivate the display, go to the main Navigation menu and tap
 3D - Three-dimensional map display on the function surface  → POIs.
 Switch on/off the automatic change of scale
› To select the POIs to be displayed, go to the main Navigation menu and tap
on the function surface  → Map → Select categories for POIs and select the de-
sired categories (max. 10).
Map display options in the digital instrument cluster
Applies to vehicles with Infotainment Columbus, with the digital instrument Road sign display
cluster.
Infotainment offers the option of displaying the traffic signs stored in the navi-
The ignition must be switched on for the map to be displayed in the digital in- gation data or detected by the front camera during guidance on the Infotain-
strument cluster. ment screen G » Fig. 207 on page 178.
› To switch on/off the road sign display in the main menu Navigation, tap on
the function surface  → Map → Show road signs. 
188 Infotainment
For some vehicles it is possible to set an alert when exceeding the permitted Destination details
speed limited set by a road sign.
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface  → Driver assistance →
Speed warning:.
For trailer towing, we recommend that you activate recognition of road signs
relevant to trailers.
› Tap the sensor field and then the function surface  → Driver assistance →
Show road signs relevant to trailers.
Route guidance
Fig. 227 Details of the: in the navigation data / destination searched for
Introduction to the subject online
A route is created by starting route guidance to a destination. Additional inter-
The following menu items and information are displayed in the destination de-
mediate destinations can be added to the route.
tails » Fig. 227.
The route guidance takes place as follows
▶ Through graphical driving instructions on the Infotainment screen and in the
A Area with function surfaces
display of the instrument cluster. B Detailed destination information
▶ With nav. announcements. C Destination position in the map
D Detailed target information (if available)
Infotainment tries to allow for continued guidance even if the navigation data
is incomplete or there is no data at all for the given area. E Status of online services
The route is recalculated each time if you ignore driving recommendations or Display the destination details
change the route. The destination details can be displayed in one of the following ways.
▶ While entering a destination.
CAUTION ▶ By tapping on the function surface  in the destination list.
The nav. announcements provided may vary from the actual situations, e.g. due ▶ By tapping the  sensor field in the Navigation main menu (not applicable
to out-of-date navigation data. to Infotainment Columbus), the details of the last destination are displayed.
Function surfaces
Using function surfaces in the field A the following functions can be per-
formed, depending on the context.
▶ Start / stop route guidance.
▶ Search for a nearby destination » page 179.
▶ Setting route options.
▶ Store destination. 
Navigation 189
▶ Edit destination (the object can be deleted, renamed or saved). Selecting the type of route will start the route guidance.
▶ Dial the POI phone number (if Infotainment is connected to a
If no route selection is made within 30 s after the calculation of all routes, the
phone» page 159, Pairing and connecting).
route guidance is automatically started according to the preferred route type.
Route calculation and start route guidance Route calculation for the trailer
Fig. 228 When driving with a trailer or any other accessory connected to the trailer
Alternative routes socket, we recommend that you switch on the trailer recognition, if necessary
to set the maximum speed for towing a trailer.
› For calculating the route for towing a trailer, tap the function surface in the
main navigation menu  → Route options →  .
› To set the maximum speed for towing a trailer, tap the  sensor field and
then the function surface  → Driver assistance → Trailer recognition → Maximum
speed for trailer.
Route calculation is done on the basis of the set route options. The route op- Demo mode
tions can be set:  → Route options.
The Demo mode provides a travel simulation to the entered destination. The
Alternative routes function offers the option to travel through the calculated route “virtually”.
With selection of alternative routes turned on, the following menu is displayed
after the calculation of a new route » Fig. 228. When the Demo mode is turned on, a menu for route guidance in the Demo
mode or in normal operation is displayed before the start of route guidance.
A  - calculate the most economical route with the shortest driving time
and shortest distance travelled – the route is highlighted green › To switch on/offin the main menu Navigation, tap on the function surface 
B  - calculate the fastest route to the destination, even if a detour is nec- → Advanced settings → Demo mode.
essary –the route is highlighted in red When the Demo mode is switched on, the route starting point can be defined.
C  - calculate the shortest route to the destination, even if a longer driving
time is required – the route is highlighted in orange
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Advanced settings →
Define demo mode starting point.
In the function surfaces of the alternative routes, information on the route › Define the starting point by entering the address or the current vehicle posi-
length and the estimated travel time and the following symbols are displayed tion.
(applies to Infotainment Columbus). › The demo mode starting point can also be set provided demo mode is turned
on by tapping on the desired map location and selecting the menu item Start
 Use of a toll motorway
Demo Mode » page 181, Entering a destination via the map point.
 Use of a train / ferry
 Using a tunnel
 Use of a toll road
 Using a vignette duty highway
It is possible to select an already calculated alternative route before the calcu-
lation of the remaining routes is completed.
190 Infotainment
Graphical driving recommendations The last navigation announcement can be repeated in the main Navigation
menu by tapping on the function surface  →  .
The timing of the navigation announcement is dependent on the type of road
and on the driving speed.
The type of nav. announcements can be set:  → Navigation announcements.
Note
Route guidance on the most frequently travelled route takes place without
navigation announcements.
Most common routes

Fig. 229 Driving recommendations / travel recommendation detail
The most frequently travelled routes are automatically saved by Infotainment.
The display of the graphical driving recommendations is carried out in the split Of these, up to 3 routes can be offered, which best match the current time,
screen Manoeuvre as well as the display of the instrument cluster. day of the week as well as the vehicle position.
In the split screen Manoeuvre the following driving recommendations are shown A route guidance to one of the routes used most frequently can be started as
» Fig. 229. long as no route guidance takes place.
A Street name / street number of the current vehicle position › To display the menu with the most frequently travelled routes, in the split
B Driving recommendations with street names / road numbers, with the screen, tap on tje function surface Freq. routes → Show on map.
route and the travel time to the manoeuvre location › Select the desired route.
C Details of driving recommendation (is displayed near the manoeuvre) Then a selected route is calculated and the route guidance starts.
D Lane guidance
The menu display in the split screen can be turned on/off in the main menu
In the split screen Manoeuvre, Infotainment also announces TMC traffic obstruc- navigation by tapping the function surface  → Route options → Freq. Routes .
tions and on motorways, car parks, petrol stations or restaurants. The stored most frequent routes can be deleted in the main menu navigation
Speed limits by tapping the function surface  → Manage memory → Delete user data → Freq.
With activated function  → Advanced settings → Note:National border crossed , Routes .
display the country-specific speed limits when crossing international borders.
Note
These speed limits can be displayed by tapping on function surface  → Speed Route guidance on the most frequently travelled route takes place without
limits in the Navigation main menu. navigation announcements.
Navigation announcements Finish route guidance

Infotainment issues nav. announcements during route guidance. The route guidance can be finished in one of the following ways.
The nav. announcements are generated by the instrument system. Flawless › The final destination is reached.
clarity of the message (e.g., road or city name) cannot always be guaranteed. › In the main menu Navigation by tapping the function surface  → Stop route
guidance. 
Navigation 191
› By turning off the ignition for longer than 120 minutes.  Remaining distance to the destination
C Chosen route type (economic, fastest, shortest)
Abort route guidance D Current vehicle position (address / GPS coordinates)
If the ignition is switched off and on again, then the route guidance is contin- The display of the arrival time or the remaining driving time can be adjusted as
ued depending on the stop time in one of the following ways. follows.
▶ Within 15 min. - route guidance continues to take the calculated route into ▶ In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Advanced settings →
account. Time display:.
▶ From 15 min to 120 min - after confirming the message on the infotainment
Several route destinations
screen, the route guidance continues, taking into account the calculated
In the route plan, the following information is displayed at the respective desti-
route.
▶ After 120 min - the route guidance is cancelled. nations» Fig. 230 - .
Route  Stopover (with sequential number)
 Final destination
Route details  Estimated time of arrival at destination / stopover
 Driving distance to destination / stopover
 Change destinations with each other
 Delete the destination
 Continuation of the route guidance from the selected target (previous
waypoints are skipped)
 Display the destination details » page 189
Insert destination into the route
▶ In the area A , tap on the function surface Enter destination and enter a new
destination.
Fig. 230 Route details: a route destination / several route destinations ▶ or: Tap on the area A the function surface destinations and select an object in
the list of stored destinations.
During route guidance, the Route details (Information about the current route)
can be displayed. Each additional destination is added to the list as the first subsequent destina-
tion route.
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Route details.
Change positions of destinations with each other
A route destination ▶ The relevant function surface  and move the destination to the desired po-
In the route plan, the following information is displayed at the destina-
sition.
tion» Fig. 230 - .
With destinations on the route already reached the note Dest. reached is dis-
played below the destination name. It is not possible to change the position of
B Destination information these destinations with each other. 
 Estimated time of arrival at destination / remaining driving time to desti-
nation
192 Infotainment
Store route Remove transit point
▶ In the area A , tap the function surface Save. › In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Change route in map.
▶ Save the edited route as a new route or replace the existing saved route. › Tap on function surface Delete waypoint.
The route is saved in the route list » page 193. › Tap on the function surface  .
Then a route is recalculated and the route guidance starts.
Stop route guidance
▶ In the area A , tap the function surface stop .
route list
Route change in the map In the route list, it is possible to create routes, save, delete, or start navigation.
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus. New route
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Routes → New route.
Insert a route destination in one of the following ways.
› Tap on the function surface Enter destination and enter a new destination.
› or: Tap on the function surface Destinations and select a destination from the
list of saved destinations.
› To save the created route, tap the function surface Store.
› Tap the function surface Startto start route guidance.
route import
A prerequisite for importing the route is that “Infotainment Online” » page 14
Fig. 231 Route change in the map / route transit point services are activated.
A route in which no waypoints are contained, can be changed during route A route that has been created in the user profile on the “ŠKODA Connect
guidance by adding a transit point. Portal” website and sent to the Infotainment system can be imported into the
Infotainment memory even before switching on the ignition .
Add a transit point
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Change route in map. If the route was created when the ignition was switched on and sent to Info-
› Touch the screen in the route field and move the cross-point to the desired tainment, Infotainment is not imported until after switching off (for at least 15
minutes) and after switching the ignition back on again.
location on the map, e.g. A , move » Fig. 231).
The transit point B is added to the route » Fig. 231. › Switch on the ignition. When a new route is available, a message regarding
the option to import this route appears in the Infotainment screen automati-
› Tap on the function surface  . cally.
Then a route is recalculated and the route guidance starts. If the user opts not to import the route immediately, the route can be impor-
Customise transit point ted manually later, as follows.
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Change route in map. › In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface  → Routes Tap to
› Touch the transit point B and move to a different location on the map. check if a new route is available.
› Tap on the function surface  . › or: Tap the  sensor field and then the function surface  →  .
Then a route is recalculated and the route guidance starts. › The function surface import routes Tap. 
Navigation 193
If a new route available, then a message is displayed on the Infotainment. The main menu is displayed» Fig. 232.
› Tap the function surface Retrieveto start route guidance. Any ongoing route guidance is terminated after the selection of this way-
point mode menu.
After being successfully imported, the route is displayed in the list of saved
routes. Description of the function surfaces A » Fig. 232
Managing saved routes  Context-dependent:
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Routes . ▶ No route guidance is taking place - Start recording a waypoint
› Choose the desired route, and then select one of the following functions. tour/display saved waypoint tour management/exit menu
▶ A waypoint tour is being recorded - Stop recording a waypoint
Delete Clear saved route tour/manually adjust waypoint/exit menu
Edit - Edit the route » page 192, Route details ▶ Route guidance is taking place - Stop route guidance/skip the next
Start - Calculate the route and start route guidance » page 190, Route calcula- waypoint/exit menu
tion and start route guidance  Setting the map display / show/hide the additional window / activate/de-
activate the display of POIs on the map
Waypoint mode  Operation of Radio/Mediaplayback
 Setting Navigation is not available in theWaypoint mode menu
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus. Record waypoints
This mode is suitable for off-road navigation or for areas where maps are not
Fig. 233
available.
Recording a waypoint
Infotainment allows the recording of waypoint tours driven using automatic of tour
manually entered waypoints.
Then there is the possibility to start route guidance to the stored waypoint
tour or to save the waypoint tour on the SD card.
Main menu
Start recording a waypoint tour
Fig. 232 ▶ Inthe Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface  → Record
Waypoint mode: Main waypoint tour.
menu
Select one of the following recording types.
■ Select on map - Enter destination on the map and start recording waypoints
■ Start recording - Start recording waypoints without entering a destination
Recording a waypoint tour
After starting the recording of a waypoint tour the following contextual infor-
› In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface  → Waypoint mode. mation may be displayed » Fig. 233. 
194 Infotainment
A Automatically set waypoints ■ Reverse tour - Reverse the order of waypoints (suitable for guiding along a
B Manually set waypoints waypoint tour in the reverse direction)
■ Next. Waypoint. - Skip to the next waypoint
C Split screen Waypoints with the number of already set waypoints / maxi-
■ Start - starts route guidance
mum number of waypoints
Add waypoint manually Route guidance
▶ In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on function surface  → Add waypoint During the guidance along a waypoint tour, no nav. announcements are made
manually. by Infotainment.
When driving along the waypoint tour shown, follow as closely as possible the
Stop recording
▶ In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface  → Stop re- information shown on the Infotainment screen.
cording. While driving along a waypoint tour, the split screen shows the Waypoints and
the direction to drive as well as the distance to the next waypoint, the se-
The recording also stops when the waypoint mode menu is exited.
quence number of the next waypoint and the total number of waypoints B
The recorded waypoints are merged to a waypoint tour and stored in the way- » Fig. 234.
point memory after completion of the recording.
The waypoint tour from the vehicle position to the next waypoint “reduces”
The recording cannot be continued once it has been stopped. A new recording continuously while driving “ ” C » Fig. 234 .
must be started.
If you drive past but very close to the next waypoint, the route guidance will
continue with the next waypoint.
Guide along a saved waypoint tour
If you drive past a waypoint and this does “not disappear” from the waypoint
tour (e.g. because the distance to this waypoint is too large), then there is the
possibility to “skip” over this waypoint and continue the guidance to the next
waypoint.
▶ In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on function surface  → Skip waypoint.
Stop route guidance
▶ In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on function surface  → Stop route guid-
ance.
The guidance also stops when waypoint mode is exited.
Fig. 234 Display a waypoint / Guide along a waypoint tour
Manage waypoint tour memory
Start guidance
› In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface  → Waypoint › to display a list of saved and imported waypoint tours, from main menu
memory. Waypoint mode, tap the function surface  → Waypoint memory.
› Select the desired route from the displayed list. The name of the waypoint tour, the date and time of storage and the number
› Tap on the function surface  . of waypoints appears in the function surface for the waypoint tour.
› Select one of the following menus A » Fig. 234.
› Choose the desired waypoint tour, and then select one of the following menu
items. 
Navigation 195
 Store the waypoint tour on the SD card Source of Traffic Information
 Delete the waypoint tour On the position C » Fig. 235 can the following symbols are displayed.
 Rename the waypoint tour  TMC Traffic Information (with strikethrough icon, the Infotainment is out
 Display the waypoint tour » Fig. 234 on page 195 of range of any traffic information provider)
 Online traffic information
Import waypoint tour from the SD card
▶ Inthe Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface  → Waypoint Display options
memory → Import. ▶ Route guidance is disabled - All traffic messages are displayed.
▶ Select the source of the waypoint tour recording and confirm the import. ▶ Route guidance is taking place - After tapping function surface B
» Fig. 235 in the displayed menu, you can select all traffic messages by tap-
Traffic reports ping the function surface All areas, or you can select only the traffic messages
present on the route by tapping the function surface Route.
List of traffic reports A traffic report may contain some of the following information.
▶ Symbol of the traffic obstruction
Fig. 235
▶ Number of road affected
List of traffic reports
▶ Name of the location affected
▶ Description of the traffic obstruction
Distinguish the importance of a TMC message traffic obstruction using
colour
The symbol for traffic obstruction (e.g. , , ) precedes the obstruction and
the length of the obstruction is shown in the map on the right along the route.
Depending on the context, the symbol for the obstruction is displayed in one
The Infotainment system enables the reception of traffic reports, which in- of the following ways.
clude information regarding traffic congestion, using TMC (Traffic Message
Channel) or online (when “Infotainment Online”» page 14 services are activa- No route guidance is taking place
ted). ▶ Red- All traffic obstructions
ŠKODA AUTO does not accept responsibility for the availability, content, up- Route guidance is not taking place
to-dateness or evaluation of TMC traffic reports or other data provided by ▶ Grey - The traffic obstruction is not on the route
third parties. ŠKODA AUTO is not entitled to examine or adapt this data in any ▶ Red - The traffic obstruction is on the route, the route will not be recalcula-
way. The data can only be edited by Infotainment in areas where it is available. ted and the route passes through the traffic obstruction
▶ Orange - The traffic obstruction is on the route, the route is recalculated and
› To display the list of traffic reports, tap on the  sensor field and then tap an alternative route is available
the function surface  .
Distinguish the importance of a TMC message traffic obstruction using
In the list of traffic messages and the map, a max. of 6 messages are displayed,
colour
that are provided with a letter and a traffic obstruction symbol (e.g. , , )
The colour differentiation of traffic conditions on the provider of the online
A » Fig. 235.
traffic reports depends. 
At present on the route traffic information is taken by using a nav. announce-
ment.
196 Infotainment
To change the map orientation, go to the Navigation main menu and tap on  The dynamic route function is turned on.
function surface  → Map → Traffic flow settings.  The traffic congestion included in the traffic information is on the route.
Update  The traffic obstruction will be evaluated by Infotainment as of great im-
The list of traffic reports will be updated by Infotainment on a continuous ba- portance.
sis. › To switch on/offin the main menu Navigation, tap on the function surface 
→ Route options → Dynamic route.
Detail of the traffic report
Entering/removing a traffic obstruction on the route manually
Fig. 236
Details of the traffic report If a traffic obstruction is detected during route guidance (e.g. traffic jam), this
traffic obstruction be manually entered into the route.
After entering, Infotainment calculates and provides an alternative route.
Enter traffic obstruction
› In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Congestion ahead.
› Adjust the length of the traffic obstruction.
The traffic obstruction will be displayed in red in the map to the right along the
The details of the traffic message depends on the source of the traffic mes- route.
sage.
Remove traffic obstruction
› To display this, select the desired traffic report from the list of traffic re- The traffic obstruction is removed from the route after completion of the
ports. route guidance or can manually be removed as follows.
› or: Tap on the traffic obstruction icon in the map. › In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface  → Delete "congestion
Depending on the context, the following information and function surfaces are ahead".
displayed » Fig. 236.
A Map of the affected location
B Description of the traffic obstruction
C Reception timing and information relating to the traffic report provider
(if “ŠKODA Connect” is the provider, it is an online traffic report)
D Symbol of the traffic obstruction
E Length of the traffic obstruction
Dynamic route
Infotainment allows an evaluation of the traffic reports received during the
route guidance. In fulfilling the following conditions, a bypass route is calcula-
ted, and the appropriate announcement is issued.
Navigation 197
 Depending on the vehicle equipment with manual air conditioning: Set-
Vehicle systems ting the auxiliary heating and ventilation / operating the heated wind-
screen
CAR - Vehicle settings
 Operation of the steering wheel heating
Introduction to the subject  Vehicle system settings
In the menu CAR , journey data and vehicle information can be displayed and
some vehicle systems can be set.
Reset to factory settings
You can reset to factory settings in the infotainment system in menu  /→
 → Factory settings.
Note
Settings relating to the vehicle systems can only be made when the ignition is
switched on.
Main menu
Fig. 237
Function surfaces in the main
menu
› Tap on the button/sensor field /  →  to display the main menu with
the following function surfaces » Fig. 237.
 Selecting the following menu points
▶ Dig. Instrument panel
▶ Sport (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
▶ Convenience consumers
▶ Journey data
▶ DriveGreen
▶ Vehicle status
 Operating playback - Radio / Media
198 Infotainment
Driving Electronic immobiliser and steering lock
Starting-off and Driving
The electronic immobiliser (hereinafter referred to as immobiliser) makes it
Starting and stopping the engine more difficult for someone to attempt to steal or use your vehicle without au-
thorisation.
 Introduction
Immobilizer
Depending on equipment fitted, it is possible to switch the ignition on/off and The immobilizer allows the engine to be started only with the original car key.
start/stop the engine with the key in the ignition or using the starter button. Malfunction of the immobilizer
If the immobiliser in the key fails, it is not possible to start the engine. A mes-
WARNING
sage appears in the display of the instrument cluster to explain that the immo-
■ Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci- biliser is active.
dent!
■ The ignition must always be switched during the journey when the engine To start, use the other vehicle key or seek help from a specialist garage.
is idling. Otherwise, the steering may lock - danger of an accident! Steering lock - lock
■ Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle
has come to a stop » page 204, Parking. Otherwise, the steering may lock -
› On vehicles with ignition lock, remove the key and turn the steering wheel
until the steering lock engages.
danger of an accident!
■ Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is a
› On vehicles with a starter button, switch off the ignition and open the driv-
er's door. If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off after-
risk of theft etc! wards, the steering is only locked automatically after the vehicle has been
■ Never run the engine in an enclosed space (e.g. in garages) - there is the
locked.
danger of poisoning and death!
Steering lock - unlock
CAUTION › On vehicles with ignition lock, insert the key into the ignition and turn on the
■ Only start the engine when the engine and the vehicle are stationary - there
ignition. If this is not possible, move the steering wheel slightly back and
forth and thereby unlock the steering lock.
is a danger of starter and engine damage!
■ Do not push-start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and the › On vehicles with starter button, get into the car and close the driver's door.
Under certain circumstances, the steering lock can be unlocked only when
catalytic converter! The battery from another vehicle can be used as a push-
the ignition is switched on or the engine is started.
start aid.
■ On vehicles with the starter button, pay attention to where the key is loca- WARNING
ted. The system can recognize the valid key, even if it has been accidentally Never let the vehicle roll with locked steering lock - there is a risk of acci-
left on the vehicle roof - there is danger of loss or damage to the key! dent!
Note
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. The engine will reach its oper-
ating temperature faster.
Starting-off and Driving 199

Switching the ignition on/off Starting engine
› On vehicles with Ignition lock, turn the key to position 3 and the engine
starts» Fig. 238 on page 200 . Release the key, the engine will start auto-
matically.
If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position 1 . Re-
peat the starting process after 30 seconds.
› On vehicles with starter button, press the button briefly » Fig. 238 on
page 200 - , the motor will start automatically.
In vehicles with diesel engines, the glow plug warning light  lights up after
the ignition is switched on. The engine can be started after the indicator light
goes out.
Fig. 238 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock / starter button
Stopping the engine
 Read and observe and on page 199 first. › Stop the vehicle.
Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock » Fig. 238 - 
› On vehicles with ignition lock, turn the key to position 1 » Fig. 238 on
page 200 .
1 Ignition switched off, engine switched off
› On vehicles with starter button, press the button » Fig. 238 on page 200 -
2 Ignition switched on , The engine and the ignition will be switched off simultaneously.
3 Starting engine
For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed
Switching on /off ignition in vehicles with starter button if the selector lever is in position P .
› Press the » Fig. 238 -  button, the ignition is turned on / off. Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the
On vehicles with manual transmission the pedal must not be depressed to engine has been running for a prolonged period at high loads. Leave it to run at
switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start. an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumulation of
heat when the engine is switched off.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the brake pedal must not be de-
pressed to switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start. Emergency shutdown of the engine in vehicles with starter button
The system is equipped with a protective device against accidental switching
Starting engine / Stopping off, the engine can only be shut off while driving in the event of an emergency.
 Read and observe and on page 199 first. › Keep the knob pressed » Fig. 238 on page 200 -  or press it twice within 1
second.
Before starting the engine After the emergency stop of the engine, the steering lock will remain un-
› Firmly apply the handbrake. locked.
› For vehicles with manual transmission, shift gear stick to neutral, depress
the clutch pedal and hold it there until the engine starts. CAUTION
› For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in position When the outdoor temperature is below -10 ° C, the selector lever when start-
P or N and » depress the brake pedal until the engine starts. ing must always be in P mode. 
200 Driving
Note If the system determine that the engine is not needed when the vehicle stops
■ The engine running noises may be louder at first for a short time after start- or is at a standstill (e.g. at the traffic lights), it turns off the engine and starts it
ing the cold engine. again when moving off.
■ You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating The system function depends on many factors. Some of them are down to the
period, otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily. driver, while others are systemic and can neither be influenced nor identified.
■ After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan may intermittently continue
to run for approx. 10 minutes (also continuously). For this reason, the system may react differently in situations which seem
identical from the driver's perspective.
Problems with the engine start - vehicles with starter button The system is automatically activated every time the ignition is switched on
(even when it has previously been manually deactivated with the  button).
Fig. 239
Note
Starting the engine - press the
button with the key If the engine has stopped due to the system, the ignition remains switched on.
Operation
Fig. 240
Display
If no engine start is possible and the display of the instrument cluster shows a
message that the key could not be detected by the system or there is a sys-
tem fault, then try to start the engine as follows.
› Press the starter button with the key » Fig. 239.
Vehicles with manual transmission
If the engine does not start, the help of a specialist garage is required. The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a
CAUTION halt, the shift lever is moved into neutral and the clutch pedal is released.
The key may not be detected by the system if the battery in the key is running The engine is automatically started as soon as the clutch pedal is depressed.
out of charge or the signal fails.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a
START-STOPsystem halt and the brake pedal is operated.
 Introduction The engine is automatically started as soon as the brake pedal is released. 
The START-STOPsystem (hereinafter referred to as the system) reduces

CO2emissions and harmful emissions, and saves fuel.

Conditions for the system function Note
The following conditions must be met for the system to function correctly. ■ If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than approx. 30 seconds or the
 The driver's door is closed. driver's door is opened during automatic stop mode, the engine will have to be
 The driver has fastened the seat belt. started manually.
 The driving speed after the last stop was higher than 4 km/h. ■ No automatic engine shut-down takes place when a vehicle with automatic
transmission is moving at low speed (e.g. during a traffic jam) and remains sta-
System status tionary after pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shut-down
The system status is shown in the display when the vehicle comes to a halt takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force.
» Fig. 240. ■ For vehicles with automatic transmission there is no automatic engine shut-
 The engine is switched off automatically; when moving off, the ignition down when the system detects a manoeuvring action due to a large steering
process will be initiated automatically. angle.
 The engine is not switched off automatically.
When stopping, the engine will not switch off for the following reasons,
manually activate/deactivate system
among others.
▶ The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet Fig. 241
been reached. Button for the START-STOP sys-
▶ The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low. tem
▶ The current consumption is too high.
▶ High air conditioning or heating output (high blower speed, big difference
between the desired and actual interior temperature).
If the engine is shut down automatically and the system detects that the en-
gine is required, such as when the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly, then the
system automatically starts the engine.
› To deactivate/activate, press the  button » Fig. 241.
More information about the current system status can be displayed in the info-
When the system is deactivated, the  symbol lights up in the button.
tainment screen in menu  /  →  → Vehicle status.
If the system is deactivated, it will be reactivated automatically after the igni-
If there is a system fault, the following message will appear in the display of
tion has been switched off and on.
the instrument cluster. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Note
If the system is deactivated when the engine is turned off automatically, then
the automatic start process takes place.
202 Driving
Brakes and Parking WARNING
■ Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switch-
 Introduction ed off – risk of accident!
■ During the braking procedure on a vehicle with manual transmission,
The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driv- when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs, press the clutch pedal. Other-
ing style. Under difficult conditions (e.g. urban, sporty driving style) the condi- wise, the functionality of the brake system may be impaired – risk of acci-
tion of the brakes should also be checked by a specialist garage between the dent!
service intervals. ■ Do not press the brake pedal if braking is now required. This causes the
brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and ex-
The performance of the brakes can be delayed if the brakes are damp, iced up
cessive wear - risk of accident!
in winter or if covered in a layer of salt. The brakes are cleaned and dried by ■ Braking for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs should be
applying the brakes several times » .
carried out only if the traffic conditions permit. Do not place any other road
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the brake pads occur if the vehicle users in jeopardy.
has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the ■ Recommendations for new brake pads have to be observed.
braking system. The brakes are cleaned by applying the brakes several times ■ When stopping and parking, the parking brake should always be applied
» . firmly, otherwise the vehicle could move off - There is a risk of an accident!
■ If a front spoiler, full wheel trim, etc. is mounted retrospectively, it must
Before travelling a long distance with a steep gradient, reduce speed and
shift into the next lowest gear. As a result, the braking effect of the engine will be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced.
be used, reducing the load on the brakes. If you do have to brake, this should Otherwise, the functionality of the brake system may be impaired – risk of
be carried out at intervals. accident!
Emergency braking display - when an emergency braking is performed, the

automatic flashing of the brake lights are used to alert the traffic behind. Handbrake
New brake pads must first be “worn in” because these do not initially have the
Fig. 242
best possible braking effect. Drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or
Handbrake
so.
A too low brake fluid level can cause faults in the braking system, and the
warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster» page 41,  Brake system.
If the warning light does not illuminate and an extended stopping distance is
required, the driving style should be adapted according to the unknown cause
of fault and restricted braking effect - seek the assistance of a specialist ga-
rage immediately.
The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The  Read and observe on page 203 first.
brake booster only operates when the engine is running.
The handbrake secures the vehicle against unwanted movement when stop-
ping and parking.
Apply
› Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards. 

Release WARNING
› Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking ■ The exhaust system components can become very hot. Therefore, never
button » Fig. 242. stop the vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come in-
› Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button. to contact with flammable materials such as dry grass, undergrowth,
The handbrake warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster when the leaves, spilled fuel or such like. - Risk of fire and serious injury can occur!
■ When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who could, for example, lock
handbrake is applied and the ignition is on.
the vehicle or release the brake, unattended in the vehicle - risk of accident
A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the hand- and injury!
brake applied. The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a
speed of over 5 km/h for more than 3 seconds.
Manual gear changing and pedals
WARNING
Disengage the handbrake completely. A handbrake which is only partially  Introduction
disengaged can result in the rear brakes overheating. This can have a nega-
tive effect on the operation of the brake system – risk of accident! CAUTION
When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator
Note pedal – this may lead to gear damage.
Push the armrest cover all the way back to the stop before applying the hand-
brake» page 86. Manual gear changing
Parking Fig. 243

 Read and observe on page 203 first. The shift pattern
When stopping and parking, look for a place with a suitable surface » .
Only carry out the activities while parking in the specified order.
› Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal.
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.  Read and observe on page 204 first.
› Switch off the engine.
› For vehicles with manual transmission, select 1st gear or reverse gear R. The gearshift pattern for the individual gear positions is shown on the gear lev-
› Release the brake pedal. er » Fig. 243.
The gear shift indicator should be observed when changing gear » page 50.
Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear
on the clutch.
Reverse gear is engaged
› Stop the vehicle. 
204 Driving
› The clutch pedal is fully depressed. WARNING
› Switch the gear lever to N. ■ Do not use the throttle if the forwards mode has been set using the se-
› Push the shift lever downwards fully to the left and then forward into lector lever prior to starting up - risk of accident!
R» Fig. 243. ■ Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving – risk of acci-
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the dent!
■ If the vehicle stalls with the engine running, in the D, S, R or Tiptronic
ignition is on.
mode, then the vehicle must be prevented from rolling away by means of
WARNING the brake pedal. Even when the engine is idling, the power transmission is
Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident! never completely interrupted – the vehicle creeps.
■ When leaving the vehicle, the selector lever must always be set to P .
CAUTION Otherwise, the vehicle could start to move - risk of accident.

If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gear shift
lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gear shift mech- CAUTION
anism to wear excessively. ■ If you want to move the selector lever from position N to position D / S
whilst driving, the engine must be running at idling speed.
■ When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator
Pedals
pedal – this may lead to gear damage.
Select selector lever position
The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances!
In the driver's footwell, only a footmat (supplied by the factory or from the Fig. 244
ŠKODA Original Accessories) which is secured on the respective attachment Selector lever settings / display
points should be used.
WARNING
No objects should be located in the driver's footwell, otherwise the pedal
operation could be disabled - risk of accident!
Automatic transmission
 Introduction
Move the selector lever to change to the following positions » Fig. 244. In
some positions you have to push the locking button » page 206, Selector lever
The automatic transmission performs an automatic gear change irrespective
lock.
of the engine load, the operation of the accelerator, the vehicle speed and the
selected driving mode. When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected
gear are indicated in the display » Fig. 244. 
The modes of the automatic transmission can be adjusted by the driver by
means of the selector lever.

P Park - the position can be set only when the vehicle is at a standstill. Disengage selector lever from P mode or N
The drive wheels are mechanically locked. › Press the brake pedal and, at the same time, push the lock button in the di-
R Reverse gear - the position can be set only when the vehicle is at a stand- rection of arrow 1 » Fig. 245.
still and the engine is at idling speed. To move the selector lever from mode N to D / S only the brake pedal is press-
N Neutral (idle position) - the power transmission to the drive wheels is in- ed.
terrupted.
The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving across the position N
D/S Forward mode / sports programme - the gear change takes place in the
(e.g. from R to D/S). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck,
position S at higher engine speeds than in mode D
e.g. in a bank of snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in posi-
 (Sprung position) - choice between positions D and S tion N for more than approx. 2 seconds without the brake pedal being de-
If the Sport driving mode is selected with the engine running » page 241, Se- pressed.
lect the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection) , the transmission is automati- If it is not possible to release the gear selector from mode P in the usual man-
cally set in the S mode. ner, then this can be emergency unlocked » page 296.
E – Economical driving mode
Note
If the driving mode Eco or Individual (engine - Eco) » page 241 is selected and
the selection lever is in the setting D/S, the transmission is automatically set to If you want to switch the selector lever from mode P to mode D/S or vice ver-
mode E. This mode cannot be selected with the selector lever. sa, move the selector lever quickly. This prevents that you accidentally select
mode R or N.
The forwards mode is switched up or down automatically in mode E at lower
engine speeds than in mode D. Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic)
Selector lever lock Fig. 246
Selector lever/multi function
Fig. 245 steering wheel
Shift lock button
 Read and observe and on page 205 first. Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lev-
er or multifunction steering wheel.
The selector lever is locked in mode P and N to prevent that the forward driv-
ing is selected accidentally, thereby setting the vehicle in motion. Switching to manual shifting using the selector lever
The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds
› Push the gear selector from position D/S towards the right, or left in a right-
hand drive vehicle. The current gear is maintained. 
up to 5 km/h.
The selector lever lock is indicated by the illumination of the  warning light.
206 Driving
Switching to manual shifting by using the rocker switches under the The selector lever position N does not have to be selected if stopping for a
multifunction steering wheel short time, such as at cross roads. However, you must apply the brake pedal in
› To change gear, pull one of the rocker switches - / + briefly towards the order to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
steering wheel » Fig. 246.
Accelerate to max. speed during the journey (kickdown function)
› To cancel manual shift, pull the rocker switch + towards the steering wheel The kickdown function is applied when the accelerator pedal is pressed down
for more than 1 s.
in the forward mode.
If you do not pull one of the rocker switches - / + for a certain time, manual
The gear change is adjusted accordingly to reach the maximum acceleration.
shifting of the gears is deactivated automatically.
Accelerate to maximum speed when starting (launch control function)
Changing gear
The launch control function is available in mode S or Tiptronic.
› To shift up, tap the selector lever forwards + or pull the rocker switch +
briefly towards the steering wheel » Fig. 246. › Disable the TCS » page 211, Braking and stabilisation systems.
› To shift down, tap the selector lever backwards - or pull the rocker switch › START STOP deactivate » page 202, manually activate/deactivate system.
- briefly towards the steering wheel » Fig. 246. › Fully depress and hold the brake pedal with your left foot.
The currently selected gear is marked with the letter M in the instrument clus- › Fully depress the accelerator pedal with your right foot.
ter display. › Release the brake pedal - the vehicle is running at maximum acceleration.
Driving in neutral (“coasting”)
The gear shift indicator should be observed when changing gear » page 50.
When releasing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle moves without the braking
When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear effect of the engine.
just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached. If a lower gear
Operating conditions
is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine ▶ The selector lever is in the D/S position.
over revving. ▶ Driving mode Eco or Individual (Drive: - Eco) is selected » page 241, Select
Note the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection).
▶ The vehicle speed is 20-130 km/h.
It may be beneficial, for example, when travelling downhill, to use manual shift-
▶ No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket.
ing of gears. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and hence
the wear of the brakes. The gear is selected again automatically, when you depress the accelerator or
brake pedal or pull one of the rocker switches - / + towards the steering
Start and drive wheel » page 206, Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic).
 Read and observe and on page 205 first. WARNING
Rapid acceleration, particularly on slippery roads, can lead to loss of control
Starting and temporarily pausing
of the vehicle – risk of accident!
› Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal.
› Start the engine.
› Press the locking button and move the selector lever to the desired position Running in the engine and economical driving
» page 205.
› Release the brake pedal and accelerate. Run in engine
During the first 1,500 km, the driving manner determines the quality of the
running in process on a new engine. 

During the first 1,000 km, the engine should not be charged with more than DriveGreen can be displayed in the infotainment screen in menu  /→
3/4 of the maximum permitted engine revs and without the trailer. → DriveGreen.
In the area of 1,000 to 1,500 kilometres, the engine load can be increased up A driving liquid display
to the maximum permitted engine speed. With the driving is fluid, the display is located in the middle (near the green
dot). When accelerating, the display moves down, and upwards when braking.
Tips for economical driving
B “Green leaf”
The fuel consumption depends on the driving style, road condition, weather The greener the leaf, the more economic the driving style. With less economi-
conditions and the like. cal driving, the leaf is presented without any green colouring or it can be com-
pletely hidden.
For an economical driving style, the following instructions must be observed.
▶ Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. C bar graph
▶ Observe the recommended gear » page 50. The higher the green bars, the more economical the driving style. Each bar
▶ Avoid full throttle and high speeds. shows the driving efficiency in 5-second steps, the current bar is on the left.
▶ Reduce idling.
▶ Avoid short distances. D scoring (0 - 100)
▶ Ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure is maintained» page 280. The higher the indicated value, the more economical the driving style. When
▶ Avoid unnecessary ballast. you tap the function surface D , a detailed assessment showing the driving ef-
▶ Remove the roof rack when it is not needed. ficiency during the last 30 minutes is displayed.
▶ Only switch on electrical consumers (e.g. seat heating) for as long as they are If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add
needed. In the infotainment system, in menu  /  →  → Fuel consumption:, the assessment from the previous journey (the bars are shown in dark green).
it is possible to display up to three consumers that are currently making up
E the average fuel consumption from the start
the largest share of fuel consumption.
▶ Before switching on, ventilate the cooling system briefly and do not use the When you tap the E function surface, a detailed overview of the average fuel
consumption during the last 30 minutes is shown.
cooling system with open windows.
▶ Do not leave windows open at high speed. If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add
the overview of the average fuel consumption from the previous journey (the
DriveGreen function bars are shown in dark green).
F symbols
Fig. 247 The display may show the following four symbols, which give information on
Display in Infotainment screen the current driving style.
 Economical driving style
 The current speed has a negative effect on fuel consumption.
 The journey does not take place in a free-flowing manner, avoid unneces-
sary acceleration and braking
 Recommended gear
Tips for economical driving
The DriveGreen function (hereinafter referred to as DriveGreen) evaluates the Tap on the B leave to display tips for economical driving. 
driving efficiency based on the information respecting the driving style.
208 Driving
Note WARNING
When resetting the single-trip memory “from start”; the average consumption ■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
E , the driving assessment D , and the diagram C are also reset. and traffic conditions. Too high a speed or an erroneous manoeuvre may
cause serious injury and damage to the vehicle.
Radiator shutters ■ Combustible objects such as dry leaves or twigs caught under the base of
the vehicle could ignite on hot vehicle parts - risk of fire!
The radiator shutters located in front of the radiator (hereinafter: shutter) help
to reduce CO2 emissions as well as harmful emissions and to save fuel.
CAUTION
If the system detects that it is possible to reduce the amount of air flowing to ■ Pay attention to the ground clearance of the vehicle! When driving over ob-
the radiator, it closes the blinds. As a result, the air resistance of the vehicle is jects which are larger than the ground clearance, the vehicle can get damaged.
reduced. ■ Any objects that get trapped under the vehicle floor must be removed as
If a driving speed of 150 km/h is reached due to a function impairment of the soon as possible. These items can cause damage to the vehicle (e.g. on parts of
shutters, a message regarding the function impairment of the shutters is the fuel system or the brake system).
shown in the instrument cluster display.
Driving through water
After this message has been displayed, the maximum speed of the vehicle is
automatically limited to 160 km/h. The manner of driving should therefore be
adapted to this limitation. Fig. 248
Maximum permissible water lev-
If this message appears in the winter, the cause may be ice or snow caught up el when driving through water
in the blinds. After the ice or snow has thawed, the blinds are functional again.
If the impairment not due to ice or snow, then assistance from a specialist
should be sought.
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
Driving Tips The following must be observed to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving
through bodies of water (e.g. flooded roads).
Only drive on such roads and in such terrain that match the vehicle parameters
» page 306, Technical data as well as your driving skills. › Therefore determine the depth of the water before driving through bodies of
water. The water level must not reach above the lower edge of the lower
The driver is always responsible for deciding whether the vehicle can handle brace » Fig. 248.
travelling in the given terrain. › Drive at a maximum speed of walking pace, otherwise a shaft may form in
When travelling off paved roads, we recommend activating Offroad mode front of the vehicle which could enable water to enter the vehicle system
» page 213. (e.g. in the air induction system of the engine).
› Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off. 

CAUTION
Assist systems
■ Water entering the vehicle systems (e.g. the air induction system of the en-
gine) can cause serious damage to the vehicle! General information
■ Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permis-
sible water level for your vehicle.  Introduction
■ Do not drive through salt water, as the salt can cause corrosion. An vehicle
coming into contact with salt water is to be thoroughly rinsed with fresh wa- WARNING
ter.
■ The assistance systems only serve to support the driver and do not re-
lieve the driver of the responsibility for driving the vehicle.
■ The increased safety provision, as well as the increased occupant protec-
tion provided by the assistance systems must not tempt you to take risks -
risk of accident!
■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions.
■ The assistance systems have physical and system-related limitations. For
this reason, the driver may experience some undesired or delayed system
responses in certain situations. You should therefore always be alert and
ready to intervene!
■ Only enable, disable or set the assistance systems when you have the car
fully under control, in every traffic situation - risk of accident!
Radar sensor
Fig. 249
Installation location of the radar
sensor
The radar sensor (hereinafter referred to only sensor) uses electromagnetic

waves to capture the traffic situation ahead of the vehicle. The radar is located
under a cover » Fig. 249.
The sensor is part of the ACC » page 234 and Front Assist » page 239systems. 
210 Driving
The sensor function may be impaired in the event of one of the following sit- Stability Control (ESC)
uations arising.
▶ The sensor cover is soiled (e.g. with mud, snow and the like).  Read and observe on page 211 first.
▶ The area in front of and around the sensor cover is obscured (e.g. by labels,
auxiliary headlights and the like(. ESC improves vehicle stability in critical driving situations (e.g. if the vehicle
▶ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall). starts to skid) by the braking the individual wheels to maintain the direction.
▶ In exceptional cases, the sensor may be covered in the area beneath the cov- During an ECS intervention, the  warning light flashes in the instrument clus-
er, e.g. due to snow. ter.
If the sensor cover or the sensor is dirty or covered, a message to that effect
from the ACC system » page 238, Malfunctions or Front Assist » page 241, Mal- ESC Sport
functions system appears in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING
ESC Sport allows for a sportier driving style. With ESC Sport activated, no
■ If you suspect that the sensor is damaged, deactivate the ACC system
ESC intervention takes place when the vehicle slightly oversteers and under-
and Front Assist system» page 236, » page 241. Have the sensor checked by steers, and ASR is so limited that the drive wheels can be spun.
a specialist garage.
■ A collision or damage in the front or lower area of the vehicle could affect Activation
the sensor function - there is risk of accident! Have the sensor checked by › Press and hold down the  » Fig. 250 on page 212 button.
a specialist garage. › or: In the infotainment system, in menu  /  tap on function surface  →
■ Do not cover the area in front of and around the sensor cover. This can ESC system: → ESC Sport.
lead to impaired function of the sensor - risk of accident! When activated, warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster and a cor-
responding message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
CAUTION
Deactivation
Remove snow with a brush and ice with a solvent-free de-icer from the sensor
cover.
› Press the  » Fig. 250 on page 212 button.
› or: In the infotainment system, in menu  /  tap on function surface  →
ESC system: → Activated.
Braking and stabilisation systems
When deactivated, the  warning light in the instrument cluster goes out and
 Introduction a corresponding message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
The brake and stabilization systems are automatically activated each time the Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ignition is switched on, unless otherwise indicated.  Read and observe on page 211 first.
The error display is in Chapter » page 39, Warning lights.
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thus helping the driver to
WARNING maintain control of the vehicle.
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys- An ABS intervention can be noticed through pulsating movements of the
tems » page 210, in section Introduction. brake pedal and distinct noises. 
Assist systems 211

When the ABS system is active, do not brake periodically or reduce the pres- Activation
sure on the brake pedal. › Press the  » Fig. 250 button.
› or: Press the  » Fig. 250 button.
Engine drag torque control (MSR) › or: In the infotainment system, in menu  /  tap on function surface  →
ESC system: → Activated.
When activated, the  warning light in the instrument cluster goes out and a
The MSR prevents the blocking tendency of the drive wheels when shifting corresponding message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
down or with an abrupt deceleration (e.g. on icy or otherwise slippery road
The TCS should normally always be enabled. The system should be deactivated
surfaces).
only in the following situations, for example.
If the drive wheels lock, the engine speed is automatically increased. This re- ▶ When driving with snow chains.
duces the braking effect of the engine, and the wheels can rotate freely again. ▶ When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface.
▶ When it is necessary to “rock” a car free when it has become stuck.
Traction control (ASR)
Note
On vehicles without the ESC system, warning light  does not light up upon
deactivation of the TCS system, but only a message is shown in the instrument
cluster display.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL and XDS)

EDL prevents the turning of the respective wheel of the driven axle. EDL
brakes the spinning wheel, if necessary, and transmits the driving force to the
Fig. 250 System button: Vehicle with ESC / vehicle without ESC other driving wheel. Driving becomes easier on road surfaces with different
traction under each wheel of the driven axle.
EDL switches off automatically to avoid excessive heat generation on the
The TCS prevents spinning of the drive wheels. TCS reduces the drive power brake of the wheel being braked. Once the brakes have cooled down, there is
transmitted to the wheels in the case of slipping wheels. Thus, for example, an automatic re-activation of EDL.
driving on road surfaces with low grip is made easier. XDS+ is an extension to the electronic differential lock (EDL). The XDS+ re-
During TCS intervention, the  warning light flashes in the instrument cluster. sponds to the release of pressure on the wheels during fast cornering by
means of a braking intervention on the wheel on the inside of the corner on
Deactivation the driven axle. By decelerating the individual wheels, this prevents the vehicle
› Press the  » Fig. 250 button. from over-steering or understeering. This has a positive effect on the driving
› or: Press the  » Fig. 250 button. stability and steerability of the vehicle.
› or: In the infotainment system, in menu  /  tap on function surface  →
ESC system: → ASR off.
When deactivated, warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster and a
corresponding message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
212 Driving
Active steering assist (DSR) The automatic brake interventions can take place only if the following condi-
tions are met.
 Read and observe on page 211 first.  A head-on or side collision occurred.
In critical situations, the DSR provides the driver with a steering recommenda-  The impact speed was greater than approx. 10 km/h.
tion in order to stabilise the vehicle. DSR is activated, for example, on the right  The brakes, the ESL and other required electrical systems remain function-
and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces. al after impact.
 The accelerator pedal is not actuated.
Brake Assist (HBA)
Trailer stabilisation system (TSA)
The HBA increases the braking effect and helps to reduce the braking dis-
tance. The TSA helps the combination stable in situations where the trailer sways and
then the whole trailer combination.
The HBA is activated by very quick operation of the brake pedal. In order to
achieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be ap- TSA brakes the individual wheels of the towing vehicle in order to damp the
plied firmly until the vehicle has come to a standstill. rocking motion of the entire vehicle combination.
The HBA function is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is re- The following conditions are required for the correct TSA function.
leased.  The trailer was shipped from the factory or purchased from the ŠKODA
genuine accessories.
Hill Start Assist  The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer
socket.
 The parking aid is activated.
When driving on slopes, Hill Start Assist (hereinafter referred to simply as the  The speed is greater than 60 km/h.
system) allows you to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator
Further information » page 250, Towing device and trailer.
pedal without the vehicle rolling downhill on its own.
The vehicle is braked by the system for about 2 seconds after releasing the Offroadmode
brake pedal.
The system is active as of a 5% slope, if the driver door is closed. The system is  Introduction
only ever active on slopes when starting off in forward or reverse.
Offroad mode includes functions that help to overcome routes that are diffi-
Multicollision brake (MCB) cult to navigate when travelling on non-paved roads.
 Read and observe on page 211 first. But even with offroad mode activated, your vehicle is never a true SUV.
MCB helps to decrease speed after a collision by means of automatic braking WARNING
interventions and to stabilise the vehicle. This reduces the risk of a subsequent Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys-
crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement. tems » page 210, in section Introduction. 
Assist systems 213

CAUTION Note
■Offroad mode is not designed for use on common roads. If the engine is “stalled” while travelling in Offroad mode, you should check af-
■All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by ter engine re-start to see if Offroad mode is still enabled. It may need to be
ŠKODA AUTO to ensure Offroad mode operates correctly. activated again.
Operation Hill Descent Assist

The hill descent assistant (hereinafter referred to as assist system), with its au-
tomatic braking action on all wheels, ensures a constant speed is maintained
on a steep slope when driving forwards and reversing.
During an intervention, the white warning light  in the instrument cluster
lights up.
The assist system is automatically engaged under the following conditions.
 The engine is running.
Fig. 251 Button for selecting the driving mode / function surface on the  For vehicles with Manual transmission the shift lever is in the neutral posi-
Infotainment screen tion and or the 1st, 2nd, 3rd gear, or reverse gear is engaged.
 On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the R,
N, D/S position or in the Tiptronic position.
Offroad mode intervenes at a speed up to 30 km/h.  The downhill gradient is at least 10 % (when driving over sleepers, the limit
can briefly drop to 8 %).
We recommend that you activate the Offroad mode for every trip on non-
paved roads.  Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is pressed.
› To activate, press the  » Fig. 251button. Driving speed

Initiate the downhill descent at a reasonable speed of approx. 2 - 30 km/h, the
In the Infotainment screen, a running mode menu » Fig. 251 appears. assist system constantly maintains this speed as you travel downhill.
› Press theOffroad function surface on the Infotainment screen. Warning light If a forwards or reverse gear is engaged on vehicles with a manual transmis-
 lights up in the instrument cluster. sion, the speed must be high enough to avoid “stalling the engine”.
› To deactivate, press the  » Fig. 251 button and, in the infotainment screen,
choose mode other than the Offroad mode. The driving speed can be changed by pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
This is true even if the shift lever is in the neutral position and the selector lev-
The following functions are integrated into Offroad mode. er in the N position. Engagement of the assist system is resumed after the
▶ Hill descent assistant » page
214 pedal is released.
▶ ESC Offroad » page 215
▶ ASR Offroad » page 215 WARNING
▶ EDS Offroad » page 215 For the correct operation of the assistant the road surface must be suffi-
▶ ABS Offroad » page 215 ciently adherent. The assistant cannot properly fulfil its function on slushy
soil due to physical reasons (e.g. ice or mud). - there is a risk of an accident!
214 Driving
ESC Offroad Parking aid (ParkPilot)
 Read and observe and on page 213 first.  Introduction
ESC Offroad makes driving on dirt roads easier, as no ESC interventions occur
when the vehicle is slightly over or under steered. The parking aid (hereinafter referred to as system) uses acoustic signals or the
Infotainment screen when manoeuvring around obstacles in the vicinity of the
vehicle.
ASR Offroad
 Read and observe and on page 213 first. WARNING
■ Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
TCS Offroad makes starting and driving on an unpaved surface easier as it par- systems » page 210, in section Introduction.
tially allows wheel-spin. ■ Moving persons or objects may not be recognized by the system sensors.
■ Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
Note clothing cannot reflect the system signals. There is a danger that such ob-
When disabled, TCS » page 212 Offroad mode works without the support of jects or people may not be recognised by the system sensors.
TCS Offroad. ■ External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors.
There is a danger that obstacles may not be detected by the system sen-
EDS Offroad sors.
■ Before reversing, make sure that there are is not any small obstacle, such
as a rock, thin post etc., in front of or behind your vehicle. Such obstacles
EDS Offroad supports the driver when driving on a surface with different grip may not be recognised by the system sensors.
under the drive wheels or when driving over bumps.
CAUTION
A spinning wheel or wheels are braked earlier and with more force than with
the intervention of the standard EDS system.
■ Keep the system sensors » Fig. 252 on page 216 clean, snow-and ice-free and
do not cover with any objects of any kind, otherwise the system functioning
may be impaired.
ABS Offroad ■ Under adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or high
 Read and observe and on page 213 first. temperatures, etc.), the system function may be limited - “incorrect recogni-
tion of obstacle”.
ABS Offroad supports the driver when braking on an unpaved surface (e.g. ■ Accessories fitted to the vehicle rear, such as bicycle carriers, can impair the
gravel, snow etc.). system function.
The system generated by a controlled locking of the wheels braked wheel be-
fore a “wedge” of piled material, which shortens the braking distance. Settings in Infotainment
Maximum system efficiency is achieved when the front wheels are in the  Read and observe and on page 215 first.
straight ahead position.
› In the infotainment system, in menu  /  tap on function surface  → Park-
ing and manoeuvring. 
Assist systems 215

■ ParkPilot - Settings for the parking aid  Read and observe and on page 215 first.
■ Activate automatically - Activate/deactivate the compact parking aid display
(when driving forward) The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the
■ Front volume - Adjust the volume of the beeps for obstacle detection in front bumper and an obstacle. The ultrasonic sensors are, depending on vehicle
■ Front tone setting - Setting the pitch of the beeps for obstacle detection in equipment,, located in the back or in the front bumper » Fig. 252.
front Depending on the equipment, the following system versions are possible
■ Rear volume - Set the volume level of the beeps for the rear obstacle detec- » Fig. 253.
tion ▶ Variant 1: warns of obstacles in areas C , D .
■ Rear tone setting - Setting the pitch of the beeps for the rear obstacle detec- ▶ Variant 2: warns of obstacles in areas A , B , C , D .
tion ▶ Variant 3: warns of obstacles in the areas A , B , C , D , E .
■ Entertainment fading while parking – Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio vol-
ume) with activated parking aid Approximate range of sensors (in cm)
■ Manoeuvre braking - Activation / deactivation of the automatic emergency Variant 1 Variant 2 Variant 3
braking Area » Fig. 253
(4 sensors) (8 sensors) (12 sensors)
A - 120 120
Operation
B - 60 90
C 160 160 160
D 60 60 90
E - - 90
Audible signals
The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is
reduced. At a distance of approx. 30 cm a continuous tone starts to sound -
danger area.
The acoustic signals can be set in Infotainment » page 215.
Fig. 252 Installation location of the sensors on the left side of the vehi-
Towing a trailer
cle: front/rear
When towing, or when another accessory is connected to the trailer socket,
only the areas A and B » Fig. 253 are active in the system.
Fig. 253
Note
Sampled areas and range of the
sensors
■ If with Version 3 vehicles not all fields around the vehicle silhouette are ac-
tive after activation, the vehicle should be moved forwards or backwards.
■ The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory-set to be higher
than for rear obstacle recognition.
■ The setting of the acoustic signals is stored (depending on Infotainment
type) in the active user account personalisation » page 57.
216 Driving
Display Infotainment screen Activation / deactivation
Fig. 254 Fig. 255

Screen display System key (option 2, 3)
Function surfaces and warnings » Fig. 254 Activation

A Road display. To activate the system, engage reverse gear and, on vehicles with version 2
and 3, also press the  » Fig. 255 button.
   Depending on the Infotainment type: Switching off park assistant dis-
play. During activation, an alarm sounds and the  symbol lights up in the button.
 Switching audible parking signals on/off. Deactivation
 Disable / enable the automatic emergency braking. On vehicles with Version 1, the system can be deactivated by moving out of
 Change to rear-view camera display . reverse gear.
 There is an obstacle in the collision area (the distance to the obstacle For vehicles with version 2 and 3, the system is deactivated when you press
is less than 30 cm).  Stop moving in the direction of the obstacle! the  button, or automatically at a speed of more than 15 km/h (the  sym-
 There is an obstacle in the road (the distance to the obstacle is great- bol in the button goes out).
er than 30 cm). Fault display
 An obstacle is located outside of the road (the distance to the obsta- Vehicles with Variant 1
cle is greater than 30 cm). ▶ After system activation an acoustic signal sounds for approx. 3 seconds
 System failure (there is no indication of obstacles). (there is no obstacle near the vehicle).
Road display Vehicles with the Variants 2 and 3

▶ After system activation, the  symbol flashes in the button.
The road display A » Fig. 254 indicates the road on which the vehicle would
▶ In the display of the instrument cluster a message about an error of the Park-
take the current steering wheel and shift / selector lever position.
Pilot system appears (at the same time there is an audible signal).
The shift lever is in the neutral position and the gear selector is in mode N. the
road display is at the front. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Note
The system can only be activated with the button at a speed of below 15
km/h.
Assist systems 217

Automatic system activation when moving forward The brake function can also be deactivated once with the function surface 
» Fig. 254 on page 217.
Fig. 256 CAUTION
Infotainment screen: Display Automatic emergency braking will only work if the system is engaged by en-
with automatic activation gaging reverse gear or pressing the button  has been activated.
Rear traffic alert and wizard for “Blind spot”Monitoring
 Introduction
 Read and observe and on page 215 first. Fig. 257

Installation location of the radar
Automatic system activation occurs when moving forward at a speed below sensors
10 km/h when the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
After activation, the following is shown in the left pane of Infotainment display
» Fig. 256.
Acoustic signals are sounded as of a distance from the obstacle of around
50 cm.
The automatic display can be activated / deactivated in Infotainment The Rear Traffic Alert and Wizard for “blind spot” monitoring works based on
» page 215. the information from the radar sensors in the rear bumper » Fig. 257. The radar
sensors are not visible from the outside.
Note
Rear Traffic Alert
The setting (activate / deactivate) of the automatic display is stored (depend- The Rear Traffic Alert (hereinafter referred to as system) warns when leaving a
ing on Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation » page 57. parking space from a transverse parking space about any approaching vehi-
cles.
Automatic emergency braking
If necessary, the system tries to avoid a collision with automatic braking, or at
 Read and observe and on page 215 first. least to mitigate the consequences.
If the system detects a collision risk when travelling forwards or reversing at a Wizard for “blind spot”monitoring
speed up to 8 km/h, there is an automatic emergency braking to reduce the The wizard for“blind spot monitoring” (hereafter referred to as system) draws
impact consequences. attention to vehicles travelling in the same direction in the next lane in the so-
called blind spots.
Disable / Enable
The brake function can be enabled / disabled in the Infotainment in the menu The “blind spot” is an area that is not easily visible in a rear-view mirror or even
Parking and manoeuvring » page 215. directly from the vehicle. 
After switching the ignition on and off, the systems remains activated / deacti-
vated depending on the setting prior to switching off the ignition.
218 Driving
WARNING Rear Traffic Alert- Operation
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys-
tems » page 210, in section Introduction.
WARNING
■ In the case of a collision or damage to the rear of the vehicle, the function
of the systems may be affected - risk of accident! Have the vehicle
checked by a specialist garage.
■ Do not cover the sensor area - the function of the systems could be limi-
ted.
■ Remove snow, ice and such obstacles from the sensor environment im-
mediately. Fig. 258 Infotainment screen: warning indicator / driving situation
WARNING  Read and observe and on page 219 first.

The wizard for “blind spot”monitoring is limited by physical and system-re- With the ignition switched on, the area next to and behind the vehicle is moni-
lated limits. Therefore, in the following situations the system can be de- tored by the radar sensors of the system. If an approaching vehicle is detected
layed in drawing attention (or not at all) to a vehicle in the next land. from the rear of the vehicle » Fig. 258, the system warns of this fact.
■ When a vehicle is approaching at a very high speed.
■ When passing through a very sharp curve or a roundabout. Warning - vehicles with parking aid
You will hear a continuous tone and one of the following warning levels ap-
CAUTION pears on the Infotainment screen » Fig. 258.
■ If a trailer or other accessory is to be connected to the trailer socket, then A An oncoming vehicle is detected. Do not continue driving backwards and
the two systems are not available. check around the vehicle.
■ In adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or high B A vehicle is detected in the collision zone. Do not continue reversing .
temperatures, etc.), the system function may be limited - “failure to recognise
a vehicle”. Warning - vehicles without parking aid
■ Accessories additionally installed on the vehicle rear, such as bicycle carriers, An acoustic signal is sounded and information asking the driver to observe the
can impair the system function. traffic behind is shown in the instrument cluster.
Automatic emergency braking
If the driver does not react to the warning and the system detects an impend-
ing collision, then this can trigger an automatic braking at a speed up to 10
km/h. A corresponding message is shown in the information cluster display.
Assist systems 219

Wizard for “Blind Spot”Monitoring - Operation
At a speed of more than 15 km/h, the area alongside and behind the vehicle is
monitored by the system. At the same time, the distance and the difference in
speed between your vehicle and other vehicles in the monitored area are
measured.
When driving, the system monitors an area the size of a normal lane width to
the left and right.
Fig. 260 Driving situation / indicator light in the right outside mirror in-
If a vehicle is detected in the “blind spot” area, the system indicates this vehi- dicates the driving situation
cle by the warning light  in the exterior mirror.
System constraint  Read and observe and on page 219 first.
The system is unable to recognise the specific lane width by means of sensors.
In the following situations, the indicator light in the outside mirror indicates a
Therefore it may respond to a vehicle in a lane further away in the following
vehicle detected in the “blind spot”.
scenarios, for example.
▶ Your vehicle B is being overtaken by vehicle A » Fig. 259.
▶ When driving on a road with narrow lanes or on the lane edge.
▶ Your vehicle C is overtaking vehicle D at a speed of max. 10 km high-
▶ Driving around a bend.
er» Fig. 260. If the speed during the overtaking is even higher, then there is
The system may also respond to objects on the roadside such as crash barri- no warning by the warning light.
ers, noise barriers or similar objects.
The warning is always displayed in the exterior mirror on the side of the vehicle
where a vehicle is detected in the “blind spot”.
Wizard for “Blind Spot”Monitoring - driving situations and warnings
The greater the speed difference between the two vehicles, the earlier the
warning of the vehicle overtaking you is provided (by means of the warning
light).
Two warning levels
 light ups - a vehicle has been detected in the “blind spot”.
 flashes - a vehicle has been detected in the “blind spot” and the turn signal
is switched on.
An advanced warning for vehicles with Lane Assist
 flash also if the steering wheel is turned in the direction of the vehicle in
Fig. 259 Driving situation / indicator light in the left outside mirror indi- the “blind spot” . Therefore the Lane Assist » page 244 must be enabled and
cates the driving situation the boundary line between the vehicles detected.
If in this case your vehicle indicates crossing the boundary line, with a short vi-
bration of the steering wheel. 
220 Driving
Note Rear View Camera
The brightness of warning light  is dependent on the vehicle lighting setting.
With the low or high beam on the brightness of the light will be lower.  Introduction
Activation / deactivation
The rear view camera (following as system) helps the driver when parking and
 Read and observe and on page 219 first. manoeuvring by displaying the area behind the vehicle on Infotainment screen
(hereinafter only known as screen).
The activation or deactivation of the system can be carried out in one of the
There are four modes available for different situations during the park and ma-
following ways.
▶ In the instrument cluster display » page 55, Assist systems menu item.
noeuvring action. The mode change is carried out using the function surfaces
▶ In the infotainment system, in menu  /  →  → Driver assistance (Applies to
on the screen » page 222.
the “blind spot” monitoring assistant). WARNING
▶ In the Infotainment system, in menu  /  →  → Parking and manoeuvring (Ap-
plies to Rear Traffic Alerts).
systems » page 210, in section Introduction.
After switching off and switching on the ignition, depending on the setting pri- ■ The system displays auxiliary boxes and lines regardless of the current ve-
or to switching off the ignition, the systems remains activated / deactivated. hicle environment. The driver is responsible for checking that there is no
obstacle in the selected parking space and that the vehicle can safely park
Note in this space.
During activation of the “blind spot” monitoring wizard, the  warning lights ■ The camera may not be soiled or obscured, otherwise the system func-
light up in the two exterior mirrors. tion will be significantly affected - there is a risk of accident. For informa-
tion on cleaning » page 263.
Malfunctions
CAUTION
■ The camera image is distorted by contrast with eyesight. For this reason, the
If the systems are not available, an appropriate message appears in the display screen display is only of limited use for estimating distances to following vehi-
of the instrument cluster. cles.
■ Some items, such as thin posts, chain link fences, grilles or uneven road sur-
Sensor covered / dirty
faces may not be properly displayed in terms of screen resolution.
If the sensor is dirty or covered, a message indicating that there is no sensor ■ In a crash or damage the vehicle's rear camera can possibly deviate from the
view appears. Clean or remove the obstructing object from the sensor envi-
correct position. If this is the case, have the sensor checked by a specialist ga-
ronment » Fig. 257 on page 218.
rage.
Systems unavailable
If the systems are unavailable, a message regarding unavailability appears. Stop Note
the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If the systems are still The camera is equipped with a cleaning system. Spraying takes place automat-
not available, seek the assistance of a specialist garage. ically, together with spraying the rear or windscreen.
System fault
In the case of a system fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a spe-
cialist garage.
Assist systems 221

Operation Activation/deactivation
Fig. 262
Button for activation / deactiva-
tion
Fig. 261 Installation location of the camera / scanned area behind the  Read and observe and on page 221 first.
vehicle
Activation
 Read and observe and on page 221 first. The system is activated by selecting reverse gear or pressing the symbol 
button» Fig. 262.
The camera for capturing the area behind the vehicle is in the grip of the boot
During activation, an alarm sounds and the  symbol lights up in the button.
lid » Fig. 261.
The mode for traverse parking is displayed on the screen.
Area behind the vehicle » Fig. 261
A Detection range of the camera Deactivation
B Area outside the detection range of the camera The system is deactivated when you press button , switch off the ignition,
put the selector lever in position P, or when you drive forwards at a speed of
The system can assist the driver when parking and manoeuvring under the fol- more than 15 km/h (the  symbol in the button goes out).
lowing conditions.
 The ignition is switched on. Function surfaces
 The luggage compartment lid is completely closed. Fig. 263
 The vehicle is travelling at less than 15 km/h. Function surfaces
 The area behind the vehicle is clearly visible.
 The selected parking / manoeuvring area is clear and even.
It is possible to adjust the parking and manoeuvring mode by means of the

function surfaces. 
222 Driving
Functional surfaces » Fig. 263 Lane
A Turns off the display of the area behind the vehicle The lane lines D » Fig. 264 change depending on the steering angle and indi-
B Mode - traverse parking cate the roadway on which the vehicle would take with the current steering
wheel position.
C Mode - parallel parking
D Mode - driving up to a trailer / distance monitoring CAUTION
E Mode - monitor the area behind the vehicle (wide view) The objects shown on the screen can be closer or even further away than they
F Screen settings - brightness, contrast, colour appear. This is especially the case in the following situations.
G Parking aid (thumbnail display) ■ Protruding objects, such as the rear of a truck and the like.
   Switch thumbnail display on/off ■ When driving from a horizontal surface into a slope or a depression.
 Switch to full screen display ■ When driving from a slope or a depression onto a horizontal surface.
Orientation lines and lane Mode - traverse parking
Fig. 264
Orientation and lane lines
 Read and observe and on page 221 first. Fig. 265 Screen display
In the modes for transverse and parallel parking guidance, orientation lines for  Read and observe and on page 221 first.
the assessment of distance and lane lines are displayed on the screen.
This mode supports the driver when reverse parking in a parking space that is
Screen display » Fig. 264 transverse to the road.
A The distance is about 40 cm (safety distance limit).
Parking manoeuvre
B The distance is about 100 cm.
› Select a suitable parking space.
C The distance is about 200 cm. › Press the  » Fig. 262 on page 222 button.
D The lane lines terminate approximately 300 cm behind the vehicle. › At the selected parking space 1 » Fig. 265 slowly drive past and stop the ve-
The distance may vary slightly depending on the load of the vehicle and the hicle.
road inclination. › Engage reverse gear.
› Adjust the steering wheel so that the lane lines lead into the parking space
The distance between the side lines corresponds approximately to the vehicle 2.
width including mirrors. › Carefully move backward and steer so that the yellow lines are still leading
into the parking space. 
Assist systems 223

› At the latest when the red line of the back of the parking space (for example, › In this case, adjust the steering wheel so that the yellow lines 6 the red line
curb) 3 is touched, stop the vehicle. 8 fade into each other.
› Carefully reverse until  appears on the screen or the green line 7 is con-
Mode - parallel parking gruent with the lateral boundary of the parking space (e.g. kerb) 2 .
› Stop the vehicle and steer opposite until the yellow lines 6 the red line 8
fade into each other (required roadway alignment). Hold the steering wheel
in this position.
Orientation lines are displayed » Fig. 264 on page 223 on the screen.
› Carefully move backwards.
› Stop the vehicle when  appears on the screen, or at a safe distance from
the obstacle situated behind the vehicle.
Note
The guidance in the parking space is cancelled due to the system when the
Fig. 266 Screen display steering wheel is set for a period of time against the required road direction.
The parking is to be started again.
This mode supports the driver when reverse parking in a parking space that is Mode - driving up to a trailer / distance monitoring
parallel to the road.
Fig. 267
Parking manoeuvre Screen display
› When driving past a parking space push the button  » Fig. 262 on
page 222.
› Tap the function surface C » Fig. 263 on page 222.
The screen shows auxiliary boxes for both road sides.
› Switch on the indicator for the side on which you want to park.
The auxiliary boxes for the opposite side will be hidden.
› Stop the vehicle stop so that there are no obstructions in the gap between  Read and observe and on page 221 first.
the auxiliary boxes 1 » Fig. 266 and the rear box does not extend over the
In this mode, the area behind the vehicle is shown at the top of the screen.
side of the parking space 2 (e.g. kerb).
› Turn the steering wheel in the direction recommended 3 until the colour of Vehicles with towing hitch
the trapezoidal frame 4 is green. Hold the steering wheel in this position. If your vehicle is factory fitted with a tow-bar, this mode supports the driver
› Once the arrow 5 appears on the screen, reverse (when reversing in the when the vehicle approaches a trailer draw bar.
parking space the arrow will get shorter).
Screen display » Fig. 267
The screen shows the yellow lane lines 6 and the green line 7 . A Ball head of the towing device
If the steering angle is corrected while reversing then the red line 8 appears B Lines for the distance estimation (at a distance of about 10 cm) 
(required roadway alignment).
224 Driving
C Line for approaching a trailer draw bar WARNING
D Trailer draw bar ■ Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
The line C moves depending on the steering angle and indicate the roadway systems » page 210, in section Introduction.
■ During the parking process, the system automatically performs rapid
on which the vehicle would take with the current steering wheel position.
steering movements. While it is doing so, do not place your hands between
Vehicles without towing hitch the steering wheel – risk of injury!
If your vehicle is not factory equipped with a towing hitch, a red line for moni- ■ During parking manoeuvres on loose or slippery surfaces (gravel, snow,
toring the distance to obstacles is displayed on the screen at a distance of 40 ice, etc.) it is possible to stray from the calculated road. It is therefore rec-
cm behind the vehicle. ommended that you do not use the system in such situations.
Mode - monitor the area behind the vehicle CAUTION

 Read and observe and on page 221 first. The correct evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure de-
pends on the circumference of the wheels on the vehicle.
In this mode, the area behind the vehicle is shown on the screen. ■ The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fitted with the wheel size
approved by ŠKODA AUTO.
The mode is suited for the entire view of the situation behind the vehicle.
■ Do not use the system if snow chains or an emergency wheel are fitted.
■ If wheels other than those approved by ŠKODA AUTO are fitted, the result-
Park Assist ing position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly. This can be
avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage.
 Introduction
CAUTION
Park Assist (following referred to system) helps drivers park in suitable parallel If other vehicles are parked behind or on the kerb, the system can drive your
and perpendicular parking places or also to manoeuvre out of parallel parking vehicle over the kerb or up to the kerb - there is a risk of damage to the
spaces. wheels. Intervene in time if necessary.
The system takes over the steering movements only when entering or leaving Note
a parking space. The driver operates the brake, accelerator or clutch pedal and
■ We recommend performing the parking at a safe speed of up to about 5
the shift / selector lever.
km/h.
The state in which the steering wheel is operated by the system, is referred to ■ The parking procedure can be stopped at any time by pressing the 
as parking operation. » Fig. 268 on page 226 button or by a steering intervention.
The Park Assist is an extension of the parking aid » page 215 and operates on
the basis of data collected by the ultrasonic sensors.
For this reason, the chapter on the parking aid is to be read carefully and
the safety notes are to be observed.
Assist systems 225

Operation  The TCS does not engage.
 No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket.
Fig. 268 Activation/deactivation
System button The system can be activated/deactivated by pressing the  button» Fig. 268.
When the system is activated, the  symbol lights up in the button.
Search for parking space

The system searches for a parking space in a number of parallel and transverse
 Read and observe and on page 225 first. parked vehicles on the passenger or driver's side.
The system support is provided in the following manner. Process with the parking space search
▶ While the parking space search is going on, a measurement and evaluation of › Slowly drive past a row of parked vehicles.
the parking space size is completed. › Activate the system with the  button» Fig. 268 on page 226.
▶ The display of the instrument cluster (hereinafter only display) shows suita- The system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger
ble parking spaces and a parking mode is recommended. side.
▶ The display shows instructions and information before the start and during
If the system finds a parking space, the recommended parking mode is dis-
the parking.
▶ Based on the calculated road surface, the front wheels will be automatically played » Fig. 270 on page 227  or » Fig. 271 on page 227 - .
rotated during the parking. Activate the turn signal on the driver's side if you wish to look for a parking
space on this side of the road. The display changes and the system searches
Conditions for the system function
for a parking space on the driver's side.
The system can look for a parking space only if the following basic conditions
are met. Note
 The system is activated. If the symbol  (km / h) is shown in the display while you are looking for a
 The vehicle is travelling at less than 40 km/h. parking space, the vehicle speed should be reduced below 40 km / hr (parallel
 The vehicle is travelling at less than 20 km/h. parking) or below 20 km / hr (Transverse parking).
 The distance to a number of parked vehicles is approximately 0.5 - 1.5 m.
 TCS is activated » page 212.
The system can only carry out the parking procedure if the following basic
conditions are met.
 The vehicle is travelling at less than 7 km/h.
 The parking procedure takes less than 6 minutes.
 There is no driver intervention in the automatic steering operation.
 TCS is activated » page 212.
226 Driving
Switch to park mode Parking
Fig. 269 Menus with the parking modes: Display Fig. 270 To park in a parallel parking space: Display
While the parking space search is going on and before the start of the parking,
a menu may appear showing other suitable parking modes.
Parking modes » Fig. 269
 To park backwards in a parallel parking space
 To park backwards in a traverse parking space
 To park forwards in a traverse parking space
The parking mode can be changed by pressing the  » Fig. 268 on page 226
button. Fig. 271 To park in a traverse parking space: Display
After switching through all parking modes offered, an additional press of the
 button deactivates the system.  Read and observe and on page 225 first.
If you want to return to the originally recommended parking mode, press the The system helps the driver to reverse park in a parking space found in a row
 button again. of traverse and parallel parked vehicles.
Display view » Fig. 270 or » Fig. 271
 Parking space detected with the indication to drive on
 Parking space recognised with the indication to reverse
 Note to drive on to the parking space
 Note to reverse to the parking space
Process for reverse parking
The parking space found is shown in the display » Fig. 270 -  or » Fig. 271 - .
› Continue driving forwards until  appears in the display. 
Assist systems 227

› Stop and ensure that the vehicle does not continue to move forward until the  Read and observe and on page 225 first.
parking procedure starts.
› Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R. The system helps the driver to drive into a parking space found in a row of par-
› As soon as the following message is shown in the display: Steering int. active. allel parked vehicles.
Observe your surroundings, let go of the steering wheel and the steering is taken As soon as the system finds a parking space, select the  » Fig. 268 on
over by the system. page 226 button for forwards parking mode » Fig. 269 on page 227 - . The
› Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully. display shows the following » Fig. 272.
If necessary, the parking procedure can be continued with further steps. The further procedure is analogous to that for reverse parking.
› If the arrow in the information display is flashing to the front , engage › Follow the system instructions shown in the display.
1st gear or move the selector lever into the position D/S.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, an audible signal sounds and the
The display shows the  icon (brake pedal). following message appears in the display.
› Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro- The system is activated by pressing the  button and this is also possible if the
tates into the required position, the symbol  goes out. vehicle has already been partially moved to a suitable parking space.
› Carefully drive forwards.
› If the backwards arrow is flashing in the display - , select reverse gear again Leaving a parallel parking space
or move the selector lever into position R.
The display shows the  icon (brake pedal).
› Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro- The system supports the driver when leaving a parking space of a parallel
tates into the required position, the symbol  goes out. parking space.
› Carefully move backwards. Leaving a parking space process
You can repeat these steps several times in succession. › Press the  » Fig. 268 on page 226 button.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, an audible signal sounds and the The following message is displayed: Please indicate and engage reverse gear.
following message appears in the display. › Activate the turn signal for the side of the road you will drive onto after exit-
ing the parking space.
Parking forwards › Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
The further procedure is analogous to that for reverse parking.
Fig. 272
To park forwards in a traverse parking space: Display › Follow the system instructions shown in the display.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, an audible signal sounds and the
following message appears in the display.
If the parking space is too small, it is not possible to use the system to leave
the parking space. A corresponding message is shown in the information clus-
ter display.
228 Driving
Automatic brake assist When manoeuvring, the system only undertakes the steering movement. The
driver operates the brake, accelerator or clutch pedal and the shift / selector
 Read and observe and on page 225 first. lever.
Automatic brake assist when speeding The state in which the steering wheel is operated by the system, is referred to
If a velocity of 7 km / h is exceeded during the parking manoeuvre for the first as parking operation.
time, the speed will be automatically reduced by the system to less than 7 km /
WARNING
h. This prevents the parking manoeuvre from aborting.
Automatic emergency braking systems » page 210, in section Introduction.
If the system detects a risk of collision during parking, automatic emergency ■ The system is not oriented to the area around the vehicle, there is no ob-
braking takes place to prevent a collision. stacle detection.
■ During manoeuvring, always observe the movement of the trailer and if
The parking is terminated by the emergency braking.
necessary cancel the manoeuvring autonomously to prevent accidents or
CAUTION damage to the vehicle and the trailer.
The automatic emergency braking is not triggered by the system when the ■ During the parking process, the system automatically performs rapid
parking process stops due to the speed of 7 km / hr being exceeded! steering movements. While it is doing so, do not place your hands between
the steering wheel – risk of injury!
■ During parking manoeuvres on loose or slippery surfaces (gravel, snow,
Malfunctions
ice, etc.) it is possible to stray from the calculated road. Therefore, use the
 Read and observe and on page 225 first. system with extreme caution in such situations.
If the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of

CAUTION
the instrument cluster.
■ The trailer position is evaluated by the rear camera based on the bending an-
System unavailable gle of the drawbar and the steering movement carried out by the system. For
If the system is not available because the vehicle has a fault, a message ap- this reason, the drawbar must not be obstructed by external influences.
pears concerning the unavailability. Seek help from a specialist garage. ■ The rear camera lens must not be contaminated, otherwise the system may
be unavailable or the system function my be significantly impaired.
System fault
In the case of a system fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a spe- Note
cialist garage. ■ We recommend performing the parking at a safe speed of up to about 5
km/h.
Trailer manoeuvring assistant (Trailer Assist) ■ The parking process can be terminated at any time by pressing the button 
» Fig. 273 on page 230 or by a steering intervention.
 Introduction ■ The correct system function can only be ensured if a one- or two-axle trailer
is hitched without steered axle.
The trailer manoeuvring assistant (below only system) helps the driver when
reversing with a trailer.
Assist systems 229

Operating principle Activation / deactivation
Fig. 273
System button The system is activated by engaging reverse gear and pressing  » Fig. 273 on
page 230.
When the system is activated, the  symbol lights up in the button.
The system is deactivated by pressing the button  (the  symbol in the but-
ton is no longer illuminated).
Manoeuvring trailer
The trailer position is detected by the system based on the information of the
rear camera. Trailer is steered in the direction set by the driver using steering
wheel movements.
Conditions for the system function
 The engine is running.
 The parking aid is activated.
 The driver's door and the boot lid are fully closed.
Fig. 274 Instrument cluster display: Trailer manoeuvring
 The trailer is plugged into the trailer socket.
 The trailer is not veering too much.  Read and observe and on page 229 first.
Determining the drawbar length Trailer manoeuvring
The system must know the drawbar length in order that the driver is offered
the maximum possible setting angle with respect to the target position of the
› Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
trailer.
› Ensure that the vehicle/trailer combination is at a standstill.
› Release the steering wheel and press the button  .
The system needs some turning manoeuvres or cornering with a hitched trailer The steering is taken over by the system.
in order to determine the drawbar length.
The symbol of the control button for the exterior mirror is shown in the display
The manoeuvring dimensions are shown in the display 5 » Fig. 274 on » Fig. 274 - .
page 230.
› Tilt the adjusting knob for the exterior mirror » page 82, Exterior mirrors to
left or right according to the required direction of travel of trailer.
The display shows the silhouette of the vehicle rear with trailer in top view
» Fig. 274 - .
The actual position of the trailer is indicated by the silhouette 2 . 
230 Driving
The target position of the trailer is indicated by the contour 3 . Cruise Control System
› Tilt the knob for the adjusting exterior mirror to adjust the trailer contour 3
to the target position.  Introduction
› Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully.
The Cruise Control System (CCS) maintains a set speed without you having to
The set angle of articulation can be further corrected while reversing by tilting
actuate the accelerator pedal. The state where the CCS maintains the speed is
the adjusting knob for the side mirrors.
referred to hereinafter as the control.
› Stop the vehicle/trailer combination in the required position.
WARNING
If a forward gear is engaged or the D / S mode set, the system is deactivated.
To align the vehicle/trailer combination (trailer and vehicle in a line), tilt the ad- systems » page 210, in section Introduction.
justing knob for the exterior mirror in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 274. The ■ After pressing the clutch pedal, no interrupted control occurs! For exam-
trailer contour 3 pivots to the position 4 . ple, if a different gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is released, control is
› Carefully reverse and drive forwards until the desired position of the vehicle continued.
combination is achieved.
Note Operation
The outer mirror surfaces cannot be adjusted while the system is active.
Automatic brake intervention

The systems is deactivated and an automatic braking intervention takes place

in the following situations.
▶ If, during the manoeuvring,  the button is pressed, the driver's door is
opened or the steering wheel is gripped.
▶ If the angle between the vehicle and trailer is assessed by the system as too Fig. 275 Instrument cluster display: Examples of status displays the
large during the manoeuvring procedure. CCS
▶ If a specific speed is assessed by the system as too high during the manoeu-
vring procedure due to the current angle between the vehicle and trailer and  Read and observe on page 231 first.
the driver does not react to the warning braking intervention.
CCS status displays » Fig. 275
 Speed is set, control is inactive (in the colour display the digits of speed
limits is shown in grey).
 Control active (in the colour display the digits of the speed limits are high-
lighted).
 No speed set.
 System fault - seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. 
Assist systems 231

Basic requirements for start of control After the start of the regulation, the CCS regulates the vehicle to the current
 The CCS is activated. speed and warning light  illuminates in the instrument cluster.
 On vehicles with a manual transmission, the second gear or higher is en- The automatic control interruption occurs if any of the following conditions
gaged. are met.
 On vehicles with automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the D/S ▶ The brake pedal is operated.
position or in the Tiptronic position. ▶ When one of the brake assist systems (e.g. ESC) intervenes.
▶ Through an airbag deployment.
 The current speed is greater than approx. 20 km/h.
This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output WARNING
and braking power of the engine. ■ Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the sys-
tem being switched on unintentionally.
WARNING
■ The control does not resume if the set speed for the existing traffic con-
If the engine power and engine braking effect is insufficient in order to ditions is too high.
maintain the set speed, the acceleration and brake pedals must be taken
over!
Note
During control, speed can be increased by pressing the accelerator pedal. Re-
Operation description leasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set
speed.
Fig. 276
Cruise control system controls Speed limiter
 Introduction
The Speed Limiter limits the maximum driving speed to the set speed limit.
The speed limit can only be exceeded by depressing the accelerator pedal fully.
The condition in which the Speed Limiter prevents a potential set speed limit
 Read and observe on page 231 first. excess is referred to as Regulation.
Overview of the CCS controls » Fig. 276 WARNING

A  Activate CCS (control deactivated) Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys-
tems » page 210, in section Introduction.
 Interrupt control (spring-tensioned position)
 Deactivate CCS (delete set speed)
B  Take control againa) / Increase speed
C  Launch control / reduce speed
a) If no speed is set the current speed is adopted.
232 Driving
Operation Operation description - Variant with CCS
Fig. 278
Controls the speed limiter (ver-
sion with CCS)
Fig. 277 Instrument cluster display: Examples of Speed Limiter status  Read and observe on page 232 first.
displays
Overview of the control elements of the speed limiter » Fig. 278
 Read and observe on page 232 first. A  Activate CCS (required condition for the subsequent activation of
the speed limiter)
Speed limiter status displays » Fig. 277
To activate the speed limiter, set the switch to position , then
 Speed limit is set, control is inactive (in the colour display the digits of
press D .
speed limits is shown in grey).
 Interrupt control (spring-tensioned position)
 Control active (in the colour display the digits of the speed limits are high-
lighted).  Disable speed Limiter (delete set limit )
 No speed limit set. B  Take control again a) / increase speed limit - press (in increments
 System fault - seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. of 1 km/h), hold (in increments of 10 km/h)
C  Start control/ reduce speed limit - press (in increments of 1 km/h),
Basic requirements for start of control
hold (in increments of 10 km/h)
 The Speed Limiter is activated.
D  Switching between CCS and speed limiter
 The current speed is greater than approx. 30 km/h.
a) If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.
After starting the system, the current speed is set as the speed limit and the
warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster. Note
By pressing the button D » Fig. 278 during the regulation this is cancelled and
Exceeding the speed limit during the regulation
the CCS is activated.
If, during the control, it is necessary to exceed the speed limit (e.g. to over-
take), the accelerator pedal must be pressed fully.
When the speed limit is exceeded (e.g. driving down a hill), an acoustic signal
sounds and warning light  flashes in the instrument cluster.
Regulation resumes once the speed has fallen below the set limit.
Assist systems 233

Operation description - Variant with ACC The front of the vehicle and the distance to the vehicle ahead is monitored by
a radar sensor » page 210.
The state in which the ACC maintains the speed or the proximity is described
as control from here on.
WARNING
■ The driver must always be ready to take over the operation of the accel-
erator and brake pedal.
■ The ACC does not react when approaching a stationary obstacle, such as
Fig. 279 Controls the speed limiter (version with ACC) traffic jams, vehicle breakdowns or vehicles waiting at a traffic light.
■ The ACC does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects.
 Read and observe on page 232 first. ■ If the ACC does not decelerate fast enough, immediately apply the vehi-
cle's foot brake.
Overview of the control elements of the speed limiter » Fig. 279
1  Activate ACC (required condition for the subsequent activation WARNING
of the speed limiter) For safety reasons, do not use the ACC under the following conditions.
To activate the speed limiter, set the lever to position , then ■ When driving in turning lanes, motorway exits or construction sites, to
press B to operate. avoid an unwanted acceleration to the stored speed.
■ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
2  Resume controla) / increase speed limit by 1 km/h at a time
■ When road conditions are poor (e.g. ice, slippery road, gravel, dirt road).
(sprung position)
■ Driving in “sharp” corners or in steep gradients / on steep inclines.
3  Interrupt control (spring-tensioned position) ■ When driving through places where metal objects (such as metal build-
4  Disable speed Limiter (delete set limit ) ings, railway tracks, etc.) can be found.
5   Increase speed limit by 10 km/h at a time ■ When driving through very divided and enclosed spaces (such as large-
6   Decrease speed limit by 10 km/h at a time capacity garages, car ferries, tunnels and the like.).
A  Start control / reduce speed limit in increments of 1 km/h
Note
B  Switching between ACC and speed limiter
■ The ACC is designed primarily for use on motorways.
a) If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit. ■ The ACC reduces the speed by automatically releasing the accelerator or by
means of a braking procedure as appropriate. If the brakes are used for an au-
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) tomatic speed reduction at any moments, then the brake light illuminates.
■ In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the con-
 Introduction nected trailer, the ACC becomes unavailable.
■ The control automatically cancels the engagement of the brake supportive
The Adaptive Cruise Control (hereinafter referred to as ACC) maintains the set assistance systems (e.g. ESC) or when the maximum permitted engine speed is
speed and at the same time the distance to the vehicle ahead without the ac- exceeded.
celerator or brake pedal being pressed.
234 Driving
Settings in Infotainment  Read and observe on page 234 first.
 Read and observe on page 234 first. The ACC makes it possible to set a speed of 30-160 or 30-210 km/h (depend-
ing on equipment fitted) as well as the distance to preceding vehicles.
› In the infotainment system, in menu  /  tap on function surface  → Driv-
The ACC can detect a vehicle that is up to approx. 120 m ahead using the radar
er assistance.
sensor.
■ ACC (adaptive cruise control) - Setting for the ACC ACC displays » Fig. 280
■ Driving progr.: - Adjustment of vehicle acceleration when ACC is activated
1 Vehicle detected (control active)
(this setting is made for vehicles with driving mode selection » page 241)
■ Last distance selected - Last selected distance level on/off 2 Line showing the displacement of the distance when setting » page 237,
■ Distance: - Set the distance to the vehicles ahead Setting the distance
3 Set distance to the vehicle ahead
Operation 4 Vehicle detected (control deactivated)
ACC status displays » Fig. 281
 Regulation is inactive (in the colour display the digits of speed limits is
shown in grey).
 Regulation active - no vehicle detected (in the colour display the digits of
the speed limits are highlighted).
 Regulation deactivated - no speed stored.
 Regulation active - vehicle detected (in the colour display the digits of the
speed limits are highlighted).
Note to reduce speed
Fig. 280 Display in the instrument cluster: Examples of ACC displays If the ACC's deceleration is insufficient in relation to the vehicle in front, the
warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster and the display shows a
message to engage the brake pedal.
Regulation according to the vehicle in the adjacent lane
During regulation your vehicle may be regulated according to the vehicle in the
adjacent lane.
This could occur at speeds above about 80 km/h when your vehicle is moving
faster than the vehicle in the adjacent lane on the driver's side. The display
shows the detected vehicle is in the adjacent lane.
Note
Fig. 281 Instrument cluster display: Examples of ACC status displays Some ACC notifications in the display of the instrument cluster may be hidden
by notifications for other functions. An ACC notification automatically appears
for a brief moment when there is a change in status of the ACC.
Assist systems 235

Automatic stopping and starting A   Set proximity level
B  Start control / reduce speed in increments of 1 km/h
If the lever is set from the position  directly into the sprung position 
Vehicles with an automatic transmission can decelerate to a standstill and the current speed is stored and the control process is started.
start moving again using the ACC.
Decelerate to a standstill Start control
If a vehicle ahead decelerates to a standstill, the ACC will also decelerate your  Read and observe on page 234 first.
vehicle to a standstill.
Basic requirements for start of control
Starting to drive again after a holding period
As soon as the vehicle ahead starts moving again after a holding period, your  ACC is enabled.
vehicle will also move and the speed will continue to be regulated. Control is  On vehicles with manual transmission, the second gear or a higher gear is
automatically disconnected in case of longer holding periods. selected and the current speed is greater than 30 km/h.
 On vehicles with automatic transmission the selector lever is in the posi-
Operation overview tion D / S or in the Tiptronic position and the current speed is higher than
2 km / h.
Start control
› Press the button  » Fig. 282 on page 236 .
› or: Set the lever into the sprung position  » Fig. 282 on page 236 .
The ACC adopts the current driving speed and performs the control, and the
warning light  illuminates in the instrument cluster.
If control is started by moving the lever to the position  and if the speed
is already stored, the ACC adopts this speed and carries out the control.
Note
Fig. 282 Operating lever
If control is started at a speed of less than 30 km/h on vehicles with an auto-
 Read and observe on page 234 first. matic transmission, the speed of 30 km/h is stored. The speed increases auto-
matically to 30 km/h or is regulated with respect to the speed of the vehicle
Overview of ACC functions operated with the lever » Fig. 282 ahead.
1  Activate ACC (control deactivated)
2  Start control (resume) / increase speed by 1 km/h at a time Stop/resume control
(sprung position)  Read and observe on page 234 first.
3  Interrupt control (spring-tensioned position)
Stop control
4  Deactivate ACC
Increase speed by 10 km/h at a time
› Set the lever into the sprung position  » Fig. 282 on page 236 .
5  
› or: Apply the brake.
6   Decrease speed by 10 km/h at a time
Control stops, the speed remains stored. 
236 Driving
Resume control The distance is adjustable in a range of 1 to 3.6 s.
› Start control » page 236, Start control. Adjusting the distance in the Infotainment system
Note › In Infotainment in the ACC the Distance: menu item and set the distance
Control is also stopped when the clutch pedal is held down for longer than 30 » page 235, Settings in Infotainment.
s or the TCS is deactivated. Adjust the distance with the lever
› Set the switch  Adjust in the spring-tensioned position  or  » Fig. 282
Set/change desired speed on page 236.
 Read and observe on page 234 first. The instrument cluster display shows line 2 » Fig. 280 on page 235, which in-
dicates the proximity.
The desired speed can be set or changed using the control lever » Fig. 282 on
page 236. › Using the switch  on the lever, adjust the line 2 to the desired dis-
tance.
Setting/changing the speed by increments of 10 km/h at a time () - re-
quirements Note
 ACC is enabled. ■ If the distance is changed in the Infotainment, the change will only come into
effect after a subsequent activation of the ACC.
Increasing/reducing the speed by increments of 1 km/h at a time (/ ■ The distance setting is stored (depending on Infotainment model) in active
- requirements
user account personalisation » page 57.
 ACC is enabled.
 Vehicle control takes place. Special driving conditions
Changing the speed by adopting the current speed () - requirements
 ACC is enabled.
 The vehicle is moving at a speed other than that which is stored.
Note
■ If during control the speed is increased by pressing the accelerator, control is
temporarily stopped. Upon releasing the accelerator, control is automatically
resumed.
■ If during control the speed is reduced by applying the brake, control is stop-
ped. Control needs to be restarted in order to resume » page 236.
■ If the vehicle is controlled by a lower speed than the stored speed, then  Fig. 283 Cornering / narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side 
the current speed is stored by pressing the button again  and the speed is
reduced in increments of 1 km/h.
Setting the distance

The ACC allows you to set five distance steps to the preceding vehicle.
Assist systems 237

Overtaking and towing
When overtaking
When your vehicle is being controlled at a speed that is lower than the set
speed and the turn signal is operated, ACC assesses this situation as meaning
that the driver wishes to overtake. The ACC automatically accelerates the ve-
hicle, thereby reducing the proximity to a vehicle ahead.
If your vehicle changes to the overtaking lane and no vehicle is detected
Fig. 284 Lane changes of other vehicles / stationary vehicles ahead, ACC accelerates until the set speed is reached and then keeps it con-
stant.
Acceleration can be cancelled at any time by touch on the brake pedal or
The following (and similar) situations require special attention and possibly the pressing the button  on the lever » Fig. 282 on page 236.
intervention of the driver (braking, accelerating etc.).
Towing a trailer
When cornering When towing, or if another accessory is connected to the trailer socket, ACC
When driving into or driving out of long corners, it could be that a vehicle is control is set with a lower rate. The manner of driving should therefore be
travelling in the adjacent lane and is scanned by the radar » Fig. 283 - . The adapted to this limitation.
host vehicle is then controlled according to this vehicle.
Malfunctions
Narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side
A narrow or offset vehicle driving can only be recognized by the ACC if this is  Read and observe on page 234 first.
located in the scanning range of the radar » Fig. 283 - .
If ACC is not available, the warning light  appears in the display of the instru-
Other vehicles changing lanes ment cluster and an appropriate message is shown.
Vehicles that change onto the lane with a small distance » Fig. 284 -  may not
be detected by ACC in good time. Sensor covered / dirty
If the sensor cover or the sensor is dirty or covered, a message appears on the
Stationary vehicles instrument cluster display stating there is no sensor view. Clean the sensor
The ACC does not detect stationary objects! When a vehicle detected by the cover or remove the obstacles » Fig. 249 on page 210.
ACC turns or sheers off and there is a stationary vehicle in front of this vehicle,
» Fig. 284 - the ACC does not respond to the stationary vehicle. If there is no sensor view in the winter, the snow on the sensor under the cov-
er could be the reason. The ACC is functional again after the snow melts away
Vehicles with special load or special body parts from the sensor.
Other vehicles with a load or with body parts protruding from the sides, back
or top of the vehicle contour may not be detected by the ACC. ACC not available
If the ACC is unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If ACC continues
to be unavailable, seek the assistance of a specialist garage. 
238 Driving
ACC fault Operation
With an ACC fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a specialist ga-
rage.  Read and observe and on page 239 first.
The system support is provided in the following manner.

Front Assist ▶ Alerts you about a dangerous proximity to the vehicle ahead.
▶ Warns you of an impending collision.
 Introduction ▶ Assists with a brake action triggered by the driver.
▶ If the driver fails to respond to a detected danger, an automatic braking ac-
The Front Assist (hereinafter referred to as the system) warns you of the dan- tion is performed.
ger of a collision with a vehicle or another obstacle in front of the vehicle, and
tries to avoid a collision or mitigate its consequences by automatically applying The system can work only if the following basic conditions are met.
the brakes where necessary.  The system is activated.
The area in front of the vehicle is monitored by a radar sensor» page 210.  TCS is activated » page 212.
 The vehicle is travelling forwards at a speed of more than approx. 5 km/h.
WARNING
■ Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance Note
systems » page 210, in section Introduction. The system can be impaired or may not be available, for example when driving
■ The system does not respond vehicles that are crossing or oncoming. in “sharp ”curves or with an ESC engagement » page 211.
CAUTION Distance warning

In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the electri-
cally connected trailer, the system becomes unavailable. Fig. 285
Display in the instrument cluster: Distance warning
Settings in Infotainment

er assistance.
■ Front Assist (ambient traffic monitor. sys.) - Set the assistant for distance
monitoring to the vehicles ahead  Read and observe and on page 239 first.
■ Active - Activate/deactivate the assistant
■ Advance warning - Activate/deactivate and set the distance level at which a If a safe distance from the vehicle ahead is fallen short of, the warning light ap-
warning occurs pears in the display  » Fig. 285.
■ Display distance warning - Activate/deactivate distance warnings Immediately increase the proximity if the current traffic situation allows
you to do so!
The proximity at which the warning is displayed depends on the current speed.
The warning may occur when driving between about 60 km/h and 210 km/h.
Assist systems 239

Warning and automatic braking Automatic braking - a stationary obstacle
If the driver does not respond to the advance warning of the risk of a collision
with a stationary obstacle in a speed range of approximately 30 km/h to 60
Fig. 286
km/h, the system initiates automatic braking.
Display in the instrument cluster: Advance warning
or emergency braking at low speed Information on automatic braking
If automatic brake intervention is triggered by the system, the pressure in the
brake system increases and the brake pedal cannot be operated with the nor-
mal pedal stroke.
The automatic braking interventions can be cancelled by pressing the acceler-
ator pedal or by means of a steering intervention.
 Read and observe and on page 239 first. Brake assist

If the driver brakes inadequate with an impending collision, the system auto-
Emergency braking at low speed matically increases braking force.
In the event of a risk of collision in a vehicle speed range of approximately
The braking assistance only occurs as long as the brake pedal is being firmly
5 km/h to 30 km/h, the warning light appears on the display  » Fig. 286 and
pressed down.
the system initiates automatic braking.
Advance warning Pedestrian recognition
If the system detects a risk of collision, the warning light appears on the dis-
play  » Fig. 286 and an audible signal is emitted.  Read and observe and on page 239 first.
The pre-warning display can occur in the following situations. The pedestrian recognition can help to prevent accidents with crossing pedes-
▶ If there is a risk of collision with a moving obstacle in a speed range of ap- trians or to mitigate the consequences of an accident.
proximately 30 km/h to 210 km/h.
▶ If there is a risk of collision with a stationary obstacle in a speed range of ap-
The system warns of an imminent collision, prepares the vehicle for an emer-
gency braking, supports during braking or performs an automatic braking.
proximately 30 km/h to 80 km/h.
Emergency braking at low speed
When the advance warning is issued, the brake pedal must be pressed or
If there is a risk of collision in a vehicle speed range of about 5 km/h to 30
the moving obstacle avoided!
km/h, the system triggers an automatic braking.
Immediate warning and automatic braking - a moving obstacle
With automatic braking, the warning light appears in the display  » Fig. 286
If the driver does not react to the advance warning when in danger of a colli-
on page 240.
sion with a moving obstacle, the system briefly applies the brake automatically
via an active brake intervention to draw attention to the potential danger of a Advance warning and automatic braking
collision again. If the system detects a risk of collision in a vehicle speed range of 30 km / h to
65 km / h, the warning light appears on the display  » Fig. 286 on page 240
If the driver does not respond to acute warning, the system begins to auto-
and an audible signal is emitted.
matically brake the vehicle.
With a warning the brake pedal must be pressed or the moving obstacle is
to be avoided! 
240 Driving
If the driver does not respond to the advance warning, the system begins to Select the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection)
automatically brake the vehicle.
 Introduction
Disable/enable
 Read and observe and on page 239 first. By selecting the driving mode, the driving behaviour can be adapted to the de-
sired mode of operation.
▶ In
the instrument cluster display, in the Assist systems menu item. The following modes Eco. Comfort. Normal. Sports. Individual and Offroad are availa-
▶ In Infotainment,in the Front Assist (ambient traffic monitor. sys.) menu, in ble.
the Active » page 239, Settings in Infotainment menu item.
TheComfort mode is only available on vehicles with adaptive chassis (DCC) and
The function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on. the Offroad mode is only available on Octavia Scout vehicles.
The system should only be disabled in exceptional cases » .
WARNING
WARNING Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys-
In the following situations, Front Assist should be switched off for safety tems » page 210, in section Introduction.
reasons.
■ When the vehicle is being towed away.
Adaptive chassis (DCC)
■ When the vehicle is on a rolling test bench.
■ If an unfounded warning or a system action was taken.  Read and observe on page 241 first.
■ When on a truck, or a car ferry service or similar.
The adaptive chassis (hereafter known as DCC) provides the ability to adjust
the shock characteristics for the sporty, normal or comfortable driving when
Malfunctions the corresponding control mode is selected.
 Read and observe and on page 239 first. The DCC evaluates steering response and road conditions while driving contin-
uously and adjusts the suspension behaviour within the selected driving mode
If the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of accordingly.
Sensor covered / dirty Mode Eco
If the sensor cover or the sensor is dirty or covered, a message appears on the
instrument cluster display stating there is no sensor view. Clean the sensor
cover or remove the obstacles » Fig. 249 on page 210. This mode is suitable for a relaxed style of driving and helps to save fuel.
If there is no sensor view in the winter, the snow on the sensor under the cov- Selecting this mode primarily affects the function of the following systems.
er could be the reason. The system is functional again after the snow melts
away from the sensor. Drive
Vehicle acceleration is more relaxed than in Normal mode.
System unavailable
If the system is unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears. The recommended gear is controlled such to achieve the lowest possible fuel
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If the system consumption » page 50. 
still is not available, seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
Assist systems 241

If the START-STOP system is deactivated manually» page 202, this will be au- Drive
tomatically activated. The vehicle acceleration is more dynamic than in Normal mode.
The automatic gearbox is set automatically to mode E » page 206. Front axle differential lock
The driving force distribution between the front wheels is adapted to the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
sporty driving style.
Acceleration occurs more relaxed than in Normal » page 234mode with distance
control. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The acceleration is quicker than in Normal mode with distance control
Air conditioning (Climatronic)
» page 234.
The air conditioning is controlled so as to save energy. For this reason, for ex-
ample, it may take longer to reach the desired interior temperature in mode ProActive passenger protection
Normal. The first level of protection is deactivated » page 243.
Note Engine noise
The maximum vehicle acceleration (kick down function) is possible also in driv- The engine noise is noticeable in the interior more intensely than in Normal
ing mode Eco. mode.
Mode Comfort Mode Individual
This mode is suitable for driving on roads with poorer surface or for long mo- In the mode Individual each system can be set independently » page 243, Indi-
torway journeys. vidual mode settings.
Mode Normal Mode Offroad
This mode is suitable for a conventional driving. The mode Offroad is suitable for driving outside paved roads.
Further information » page 213, Offroadmode.
Mode Sports
Note
 Read and observe on page 241 first. The mode Offroad is deactivated after switching off and switching on the igni-
This mode is suitable for a sporty driving. tion and the mode Normal is set automatically.
Selecting this mode primarily affects the function of the following systems.
DCC
The DCC adjusts the chassis for the sporty driving style.
Steering
The power steering is reduced slightly, i.e., the driver needs to exert more
force for steering .
242 Driving
Mode selection and Infotainment display Note
■ The currently selected driving mode is displayed in the infotainment system
in the status bar next to the symbol .
■ The selected driving mode or the configuration of Individual mode is stored in
the active user account personalisation » page 57.
Individual mode settings

In the Individual mode, the following menu items can be set.

■ DCC: - Set the shock characteristics
Fig. 287 Button for selecting the driving mode: Version 1/version 2 ■ Steering: - Set the power steering characteristics
■ Drive: - Set the driving characteristics
Fig. 288
■ Front axle differential lock: - Sets the characteristics of the front axle differential
Display on Infotainment screen lock
■ ACC: - sets the vehicle acceleration when adaptive cruise control is activated
■ Dynamic Cornering light: - Sets the Full LED headlight characteristics
■ Air conditioning: - Set the Climatronic characteristics
■ Engine sound: - Sets the engine noise in the vehicle
■ Reset mode - Setting for all menu items in Individual mode to Normal
■ Cancel - Keep the current settings
■ Reset - cancels all menu items in the Normal mode

Proactive passenger protection (Crew Protect Assist)
Display of the driving mode menu
› Press the buttonand  » Fig. 287.  Introduction
The following function surfaces are displayed on the Infotainment screen ProActive passenger protection (following known as system) increases pas-
» Fig. 288. senger protection in the front seats in situations that could lead to vehicle im-
A Information on setting the currently selected mode pact or overturning.
Setting the Individual mode
B Driving mode menu WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys-
The driving mode selection is performed in one of the following ways. tems » page 210, in section Introduction. 
▶ By repeatedly pressing the button  or .
▶ By tapping the function surface on the Infotainment screen » Fig. 288,
After switching the ignition off and on, the drive is set to Normal in the current
driving mode. To change the drive setting, select the relevant driving mode
again.
Assist systems 243

Note Vehicles with the Front Assist system
■ The system component service life is monitored electronically. Further infor- Using this information, a system intervention may also occur when there is the
mation » page 43,  Safety systems. danger of a collision with an obstacle detected in front of the vehicle.
■ If the front passenger front airbag is deactivated, the belt tensioning func-
tion for the front passenger seat is switched off. Spurhalteassistent (Lane Assist)
Operation  Introduction
Fig. 289
In critical driving situations (e.g. during emergency braking or a sudden change Sensor for Lane Assist
in direction), the following steps can be taken separately or combined in order
to reduce the risk of serious injury.
▶ The front passenger's and driver's seatbelts, if worn, are automatically ten-
sioned closely over the body.
▶ Opened electrically powered door windows are closed automatically up to a
gap of about 5 cm from the edge.
▶ The sliding/tilting roof is closed.
The lane departure warning (following known as system) helps to keep the ve-
Once the critical driving situation has passed, the tension on the seatbelts will hicle between the boundary lines of a lane.
be released again.
The system recognises the boundary lines of the lane using a sensor » Fig. 289.
The system operates at two levels of protection.
When the vehicle approaches a detected line between lanes, the system
The first level of protection makes a light movement of the steering wheel in the opposite direction to the
The system already intervenes in situations that may occur during dynamic boundary line. This corrective steering intervention can be manually overridden
driving. As a result, this primarily helps to keep the driver and the passenger in at any time.
the correct seated position.
WARNING
The first protection level can be deactivated in one of the following ways.
▶ In the infotainment system, in menu  /  tap on function surface  → Driv- ■ Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
er assistance. systems » page 210, in section Introduction.
▶ Deactivation of TCS » page 212. ■ Lane Assist can help you keep the vehicle within the lane. However, it
▶ By selecting the driving mode Sport » page 243. does not steer the vehicle for you. The driver retains full responsibility for
steering at all times.
Provided that the driving mode Sportis not selected, the system is activated ■ Some objects or markings on the road can be recognised as the boundary
over the two levels of protection after switching the ignition off and on again. lines - an erroneous steering intervention may be the result.
The second level of protection
The system intervenes only if the situation is evaluated as critical, such as WARNING
when panic braking at high speeds. The system may not be able to recognise the boundary line, or recognise it
This level of protection cannot be deactivated. incorrectly, for example, in the following situations.
■ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall). 
244 Driving
WARNING (Continued)
■ When driving in “sharp” bends.
■ The sensor is blinded by the sun or oncoming traffic.
■ The field of view of the sensor is limited by an obstacle or a preceding ve-
hicle.
CAUTION
Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front of the sensor on the wind-
screen to avoid impairing the functions of the system.
Note Fig. 291 Colour display of the instrument cluster: Examples of system
■ The system is designed for driving on motorways and roads with adequate indications
longitudinal markings.
■ The system can detect both continuous and broken lines.  Read and observe and on page 244 first.
System displays » Fig. 290 and » Fig. 291

 The system is active, but not ready to intervene.
 Read and observe and on page 244 first.  The system is active and ready to intervene.
 The system intervenes when approaching the right-hand boundary lane.
er assistance.  Adaptive tracking takes place.
■ Lane Assist (lane departure warning sys.) - Settings for Lane Assist The system can intervene when the following basic conditions are present.
■ Active - Activate/deactivate the assistant  The system is activated.
■ Adaptive lane guidance - Activate/deactivate adaptive lane guidance  The vehicle is travelling at more than around 65 km/h.
 The boundary line of at least one side of the lane is detected.
Operation  The driver's hands are on the steering wheel.
 The lane is more than 2.5 m in width.
If the turn signal is switched on (e.g. when turning), no steering intervention
takes place when the vehicle approaches the boundary line. The system re-
gards the situation as an intended lane change.
Warning lights in the instrument cluster
 The system is active, but not ready to intervene.
 The system is active and ready to intervene or is currently intervening.
Adaptive lane assist
Adaptive tracking helps to keep the vehicle in the position between the boun-
Fig. 290 Monochromatic display of the instrument cluster: Examples of dary lines selected by the driver, by means of steering intervention. 
system indications
Assist systems 245

If the position within the lane is changed, the system quickly adapts and holds Sensor covered / dirty
the newly-selected position. If the windscreen is dirty, iced or misted up in the sensor area, a message ap-
pears indicating that there is no sensor view. Clean the windscreen or remove
Steering wheel vibrations
the obstacles from the sensor area.
In the following situations, it may occasionally be the case that due to the
steering wheel vibrations the syst4em indicates that a driver steering interven- System unavailable
tion is required. If the system is unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears.
▶ The system is not able to keep the vehicle by a within the lane due to a steer- Try to re-activate the machine. If the system still is not available, seek the as-
ing intervention. sistance of a specialist garage.
▶ During an intense system-related steering intervention, the system suddenly
System fault
cannot recognize the boundary lines.
In the case of a system fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a spe-
WARNING cialist garage.
The system function may be restricted if, for example there is danger due Request to take over steering
to ruts on a downhill road or in a crosswind. If the system detects that there are no hands are on the steering wheel, this
will not work properly. You will be prompted to take over steering. Place your
Activation / deactivation hands on the steering wheel.
 Read and observe and on page 244 first. Traffic sign recognition
The activation/deactivation of the system can be carried out in one of two
ways.
 Introduction
▶ In the instrument cluster display » page 55, Assist systems menu item.
▶ In Infotainment » page 245, Settings in Infotainment. The traffic sign recognition (following known as system) shows certain traffic
signs (e.g. speed limits) on the display of the instrument cluster and if necessa-
Adaptive tracking can also be enabled or disabled In Infotainment. ry warns against excessive speeds.
After switching off and switching on the ignition, the system setting is re-
WARNING
tained.
Note systems » page 210, in section Introduction.
The system setting is stored (depending on Infotainment type) in the active ■ Vertical traffic signs must always take precedence over the traffic signs
user account personalisation » page 57. shown in the display. The driver is always responsible for correctly assess-
ing the traffic situation.
■ The speed indications in the traffic signs shown refer to the speed units
Malfunctions
that are common in the country. For example, the display  may relate to
 Read and observe and on page 244 first. km/h or mph depending on the country in question. 
If the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of

246 Driving
WARNING Operation
The traffic signs may not be displayed or may be displayed incorrectly in
the system e.g. in the following situations. Fig. 292
■ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
Sensor for traffic sign recogni-
■ The sensor is blinded by the sun or oncoming traffic.
tion
■ The field of view of the sensor is limited by an obstacle or a preceding ve-
hicle.
■ Travelling at high speed.
■ The traffic signs are covered (e.g. by trees, snow or dirt).
■ The traffic signs are not standard (round with a red border) or are dam-
aged.
■ The traffic signs are attached to flashing neon signs.
■ The traffic signs were changed (the navigation data are out of date).
Note
The system is only available in some countries.

er assistance. Fig. 293 Display in the instrument cluster: Display examples
■ Dynamic Road Sign Display - Settings for the Dynamic Road Sign Display  Read and observe on page 246 first.
Show in instrument cluster - Activation/deactivation of the additional traffic
■
signs in the display of the instrument cluster Description of displays and displayed traffic signs
■ Speed warning: - Setting a warning when the speed limit is exceeded
Display » Fig. 293
■ Warning at over - Configuration of the warning timing with the option to ex-
 Display of detected traffic signs » page 52, Driving data (Multifunction
ceed the speed limit in a range from 0 to 20 km/h
■ Trailer recognition
display)
■ Show road signs relevant to trailers - Activating / deactivating the display of road  Additional display (monochromatic display)
signs relevant to trailers  Additional display (colour display)
■ Use for route calculation - Activation / deactivation taking trailers in account
The system can display the following (vertical) traffic signs where identified.
for route calculation in navigation ▶ Speed limit.
■ Maximum speed for trailer - Set the top speed for towing a trailer
▶ Overtaking prohibited.
Additional signs, such as 'when wet' or signs which only apply for a limited time
can also be displayed. 
Assist systems 247

The system displays only traffic signs that are in the “viewing area” of the sen- Malfunctions and information messages
sor » Fig. 292.
Data from the sensor is supplemented by information from the Infotainment
Navigation. This is the reason why traffic signs with maximum speeds can also If the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of
be shown on sections of roads which do not have any traffic signs. the instrument cluster.
Warning when exceeding the speed limit Sensor dirty/covered
The warning when exceeding the permissible speed (based on the detected If a note appears in relation to the cleaning of the windscreen, clean the wind-
traffic sign) can be activated and set in Infotainment» page 247. screen or remove the obstruction from the sensor area.
Mode when towing a trailer System fault
For vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, in Infotainment it is possible If an error message appears, seek assistance from a specialist garage.
to enable or disable the relevant traffic signs for trailer operation and the top
speed for towing a trailer » page 247, Settings in Infotainment. System limitation
The system displays a message about system limitation in the following cases.
Note ▶ The map documents are not up to date.
If, for example, you are on a motorway without speed limits, then a road sign ▶ The vehicle is located in an area for which no map documents are present.
relating to the end of all limits is shown in the instrument cluster display.
Fatigue detection system
Additional display
The fatigue detection system (hereinafter simply the system) advises the driv-
 Read and observe on page 246 first. er to take a break from driving when driver fatigue can be detected based on
the driver's steering behaviour.
If the menu item Road sign is currently not shown » Fig. 293 on page 247 - ,
the road sign with the speed limit will appear in the upper display area of the The system evaluates the steering behaviour at speeds of 60-200 km/h.
instrument cluster » Fig. 293 on page 247 - , . Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system
▶ The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.
If several traffic signs are detected simultaneously, in some cases the next
▶ The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed and the driver's door opened.
traffic sign will also be displayed in the colour display - » Fig. 293 on page 247 -
▶ The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes.
.
All detected traffic signs can be displayed via the multifunction display in the If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the
menu item Traffic Sign Recognition » Fig. 293 on page 247 - . system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes.
The additional display can be activated / deactivated in Infotain- The system can be activated/deactivated in menu  /  →  → Driver assis-
ment» page 247. tance.
Pause recommendation
Note
The icon appears and the following message for a few seconds in the display
The setting (activation/deactivation) of the auxiliary display will be saved (de- of the instrument cluster  and a message about the detected fatigue. An au-
pending on Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation dible signal is also emitted. 
» page 57.
248 Driving
WARNING WARNING (Continued)
■ Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance ■ The system cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss,
systems » page 210, in section Introduction. e.g. in case of sudden tyre damage.
■ For the driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if ■ Before storing the pressures, the tyres must be inflated to the specified
you feel tired. inflation pressure » page 280. If the wrong pressure valuesare stored, the
■ The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed. system may not issue any warnings, even if the tyre pressure is too low.
■ Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.
■ There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep. CAUTION
To ensure proper system function, the tyre pressure values must be stored ev-
Note ery 10,000 km or 1x a year.
■ In some situations, the system can evaluate the steering behaviour incorrect-
ly and therefore falsely display a break recommendation. Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotainment display
■ The system is designed primarily for use on motorways.
Fig. 294
Tyre pressure monitoring Button for storage / screen dis-
play example: a tire pressure
 Introduction change at the front left is shown
The tyre pressure monitoring function (following known as system) monitors

the tyre pressure while driving.
If the tyre inflation pressure changes, the warning light  lights up in the in-
strument cluster and an audible signal sounds » page 43.
The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed inflation
pressure and these pressure values are stored in the system. Procedure for storing the tyre pressure values
Always save the tyre pressure values in the system if one of the following › Inflate all the tyres to the specified pressure.
events occurs. › Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
▶ Change of tyre inflation pressure. › In the infotainment system, in menu  /  tap on function surface  Tap →
▶ Change one or more wheels. Vehicle status.
▶ Change in position of a wheel on the vehicle. › Use the function surfaces   to select menu item Tyre Pressure Loss Indica-
▶ The warning light  in the instrument cluster lights up. tor.
› Tap the function surface   » Fig. 294.
WARNING In addition, follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
A message on the screen informs about the storage of the tyre pressure val-
ues.
■ Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
bility. Tyre pressure should be checked regularly » page 280. Note
When the warning light  appears in the instrument cluster, the affected tyre
can be displayed on the infotainment system » Fig. 294.
Assist systems 249

Towing device and trailer Description
Hitch
 Introduction
The maximum trailer load is dependent on the engine and the vehicle equip-
ment. The valid specification for your vehicle can be found in the technical ve-
hicle documentation, (e.g. vehicle approval documentation, the COC docu-
ment) or at a ŠKODA partner.
Other data (e.g. shown on the nameplate of the hitch) on provides information
about the test values of the device . Fig. 295 Carrier for the towing device/tow bar/key versions
WARNING  Read and observe on page 250 first.
■ Before each time you make a journey when using the ball rod, check that
it is seated correctly and is secured in the mounting recess. The tow bar is detachable and is located in the storage compartment for the
■ When the knee-joint bar is not used and properly secured in the receiving spare/emergency wheel.
shaft, it is damaged or incomplete, this must not be used - there is a risk of Towing device carrier, tow bar and key versions (dependent on equipment)
an accident. » Fig. 295
■ Do not perform any modifications or changes to the towing device.
1 13-pin power socket
■ Keep the mounting recess of the towing device clean at all times. Such
2 Safety eye
dirt prevents the ball rod from being attached securely!
3 Mounting recess
Note 4 Cap
If the towing device is removed completely, it must be replaced with the origi- 5 Dust cap
nal reinforcement of the rear bumper which is part of the mount for the tow- 6 Ball rod
ing eye. 7 Operating lever
8 Lock cap
9 Trigger pin
10 Lock
11 Locking ball
12 Key – Version 1
13 Key – Version 2
250 Driving
Adjusting the ready position 2. Step - applies to both key versions
› Grip the tow bar below the protective cap.
› Push release pin C in the direction of arrow 3 to the stop, and simultane-
ously push operating lever D in the direction of arrow 4 to the stop
» Fig. 297.
Operating lever D remains locked in this position.
Check the setting of the standby position
Fig. 296 1. Step: Key version 1 / key version 2
Fig. 297
2. step: both key versions
Fig. 298 Ready position: Key Version 1 / key Version 2 / position of the
lever and the release bolt with two key versions
 Read and observe on page 250 first. Correctly adjusted standby position » Fig. 298
 Applies to key version 1 - the red marking on key A is pointing upwards.
The tow bar can only be fitted if it is in the ready position.  Applies to key version 2 - the eye of the key B is pointing upwards.
1. Step - applies to the key version 1  Operating lever C is locked in the lower position.
› Remove the cap from the lock  The trigger pin D can be moved.
› Insert key A into the lock so that the green marking is pointing upwards. In the ready position, the key cannot be removed or turned into a different po-
› Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 so that the red marking is pointing sition. The ball bar is thus set ready for installation.
upwards » Fig. 296.
1. Step - applies to the key version 2
› Remove the cap from the lock
› Insert key B into the lock so that the eye of the key is pointing downwards.
› Turn the key in the direction of arrow B 2 so that the conclusions release
shows up » Fig. 296.

Assembling the bar ball – Step 1 Assembling the bar ball – Step 2
Fig. 299 Insert ball rod / trigger bolt in the extended state Fig. 300 Lock lock: Key version 1 / key version 2

Fig. 301
Insert ball rod - applies to both key versions Place cap on the lock
› Remove the cover for the mounting recess 4 in a downwards direc-
tion» Fig. 295 on page 250.
› Adjust the ball rod to the ready position » page 251, Adjusting the ready posi-
tion.
› Grip the tow bar from underneath » Fig. 299 and insert into the mounting
recess in arrow direction 1 until you hear it click into place » .
The lever A automatically turns upwards in the direction of arrow 2 and the
release pin B pops out (both its red and green parts are visible) » .  Read and observe on page 250 first.
If lever A does not turn automatically, or if the release pin B does not pop
Applies to key version 1
out, remove the ball rod from the mounting recess by turning lever A down-
wards as far as it can go. Clean the contact surfaces on the ball rod and the
› Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 so that the green marking is pointing
mounting recess.
› Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 2 .
WARNING Applies to key version 2
■ Keep your hands outside the lever's range of motion when attaching the › Turn the key B in the direction of arrow 3 so that the conclusions release
ball rod – risk of finger injuries! points down » Fig. 300.
■ Never attempt to pull the operating lever violently upwards to turn the
key. Doing so would mean the ball rod is not attached correctly!
Applies to both key versions
› Fit and press cap C onto the lock in the direction of arrow 5 » Fig. 301.
› Check that the ball rod is securely attached » page 253, Check proper fitting. 
252 Driving
WARNING
After fitting the tow bar, always secure the lock and remove the key. The
tow bar must not be operated with the key inserted.
Check proper fitting
Fig. 302
Correctly secured ball rod
Fig. 304 Unlock lock: Key version 1 / key version 2
No trailer or other accessory is connected to the tow bar. We recommend

putting the protective cover onto the ball head before removing the tow bar.
 Read and observe on page 250 first. Applies to both key versions
Correctly secured ball rod » Fig. 302 › Remove the cover A from the lock in the direction of the arrow 1
» Fig. 303.
 The tow bar must sit securely in the receiving shaft. There must be no play
when “shaken” roughly. Applies to key version 1
 Operating lever A is as far up as possible. › Insert key B into the lock in the direction of arrow 2 so that the green
 The release pin B is completely exposed (both its red and green parts are marking is pointing upwards.
visible). › Turn key B in the direction of arrow 3 so that the red marking is pointing
 The key is removed and the cap C attached to the lock.
Applies to key version 2
Removing the bar ball – Step 1 › Insert key C into the lock in the direction of arrow 4 so that the eye of the
key is pointing downwards.
Fig. 303 › Turn key C in the direction of arrow 5 so that the eye of the key is pointing
Remove the cap from the lock upwards » Fig. 304.

Removing the bar ball – Step 2 Vertical load with mounted accessories
Fig. 305
Release ball bar When using the accessories (e.g. bicycle carrier), the maximum length and the
permissible total weight including load must be considered.
The maximum length of the mounted accessories (from the ball of the towing
device) may not exceed 70 cm.
The permissible total weight of the installed accessory, including its load, cor-
responds to the maximum trailer load on trailers.
If the maximum trailer load in trailer operation is more than 75 kg, then the
 Read and observe on page 250 first. permissible total weight of the mounted accessories including their load must
Removing not exceed 75 kg.
› Grasp the ball rod from below » Fig. 305. This value applies if the center of gravity is at a distance of no more than 30
› Push release pin A in the direction of arrow 1 to the stop, and simultane- cm from the towing device ball head.
ously push operating lever B in the direction of arrow 2 to the stop .
If the distance of the centre gravity of the load to the ball head of the tow-
The ball rod is released in this position and falls freely into the hand. If it does ing device is greater than 30 cm, then the max. permissible total weight of
not fall freely into the hand, use your other hand to push it upwards. the accessory, including its load, decreases (e.g. at a distance of 60 cm
from the ball head, the permissible weight decreases by half).
› Place the cap 4 » Fig. 295 on page 250 onto the mounting recess.
If lever B is held firmly and not pushed downwards to the stop, it will move CAUTION
back up after the ball rod is removed and will not latch into the ready position. Never exceed the permissible total weight of the accessories incl. load and
The knee-joint bar will then need to be brought into this position before the maximum length of the accessories – There is a risk of damage to the towing
next time it is installed» page 251, Adjusting the ready position. device.
The knee-joint bar must be cleaned before storing in the box with the vehicle Note
tool always. We recommend that you use accessories from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
WARNING
Never allow the ball rod to remain unsecured in the boot. This can cause
damage to the boot upon sudden braking, and could put the safety of the
occupants at risk.
CAUTION
■ Store the ball rod in the box in the ready position and with the key facing up-
wards - otherwise there is a risk of damage to the key!
■ Do not use excessive force when handling the operating lever (e.g. do not
climb on it)!
254 Driving
Using hitch Power supply of the trailer / accessory power system
In the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accessory), the
Trailer (accessory) connect and disconnect trailer (accessories) is supplied with power from the vehicle (with ignition
switched on and off).
Fig. 306 With the engine switched off, the vehicle battery is discharged by the connec-
Swivel out the 13-pin power ted consumers.
socket, safety eyelet
At low charge state of the vehicle battery, the power supply to the trailer (ac-
cessories) is interrupted.
WARNING
■ An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories)
may result in an accident or serious injury from electrical shock.
■ Do not make any adjustments to the electrical installation of the vehicle
Connect / disconnect and the trailer (accessories) - risk of an accident or serious injury from elec-
› Fit the ball rod. trical shock.
› Grip the 13-pin socket at point A and swing out in the direction of the arrow ■ After the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accesso-
» Fig. 306. ry) the trailer / accessory lights should be checked for function.
› Remove the protective cap 5 » Fig. 295 on page 250. ■ Never use the securing eye to tow - risk of accident!
› Place the trailer (the accessory) onto the ball head.
› Open the socket cap and insert the plug of the trailer (accessories) into the CAUTION
13-pin socket A » Fig. 306. (If the trailer / accessories have a 7-pin connec-
■ An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories) can
tor, use a corresponding adapter from the ŠKODA Original Accessories).
lead to the inoperability of the vehicle electronics.
› Suspend the breakaway cable of the trailer at the safety eyelet B (the ■ The total power consumption of all the connected loads to the trailer power
breakaway cable must sag in all trailer settings in view of the vehicle).
supply must not exceed 350 watts, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the
Uncoupling takes place in reverse order. electrical system of the vehicle.
Exterior mirrors
You should have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the Loading a trailer
traffic behind the trailer using the standard rear-view mirrors. Correct the tyre inflation pressure on the vehicle for “full load”» page 280.
Headlights Distribution of the cargo
The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer (accessory) is being towed Distribute the cargo in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as
and the headlights may dazzle other road users. Set the range of the headlights close to the trailer axle as possible. Secure the load from slipping.
» page 72, Operating the lights1).
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the
trailer is laden. Drive with particular caution if you cannot avoid driving with
this combination. 
1) Applies to vehicles with Full LED headlights.

WARNING
Sliding cargo can significantly adversely affect stability and driving safety -
risk of accident!
Trailer
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece- The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstances.
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
Permissible trailer load - Octavia
Permissible trailer weight, braked (kg)
Engine Transmission Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
with gradients up to 12%.
MG 1300 620
1.0 l/85 kW TSI
DSG 1300 630
MG 1500 630
1.4 l/110 kW TSI
DSG 1500 640
MG 1500 640
1.5 l/110 kW TSI
DSG 1500 640
MG 1100 610
1.6 l/81 kW MPI
AG 1100 630
1.8 l/132 kW TSI DSG 1600 670
DSG 1700 690
2.0 l/140 kW TSI
DSG 4x4 1700 730
MG 1500 670
1.6 ltr./85 kW TDI CR MG 4x4 1700 730
DSG 1500 680
MG 1600 660
2.0 ltr./105 kW TDI CR
DSG 1600 670
MG 1600 680
2.0 ltr./110 kW TDI CR DSG 1600 700
DSG 4x4 2000 730/750a)
2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1800 730
a) Applies to cars with the EU6AG emission standard. 
256 Driving
Permissible trailer load - Octavia RS
MG 1600 700
2.0 l/180 kW TSI
DSG 1600 720
DSG 1600 730
DSG 4x4 1800 750
Permissible trailer load - Octavia Combi
MG 1300 630
1.0 l/85 kW TSI
DSG 1300 640
MG 1500 640
1.4 l/110 kW TSI
DSG 1500 650
MG 1500 650
1.5 l/110 kW TSI
DSG 1500 650
MG 1100 620
1.6 l/81 kW MPI
AG 1100 640
1.8 l/132 kW TSI DSG 1600 680
DSG 1700 700
2.0 l/140 kW TSI
DSG 4x4 1700 740
MG 1500 680
1.6 ltr./85 kW TDI CR MG 4x4 1700 740
DSG 1500 690
MG 1600 670
DSG 1600 680
MG 1600 690
2.0 ltr./110 kW TDI CR DSG 1600 710
DSG 4x4 2000 740/750a)
2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1800 730
a) Applies to cars with the EU6AG emission standard. 

Permissible trailer load - Octavia Combi RS
MG 1600 710
2.0 l/180 kW TSI
DSG 1600 730
DSG 1600 740
DSG 4x4 1800 750
Permissible trailer load - Octavia Combi Scout
Engine Transmission Permissible trailer weight, unbraked (kg)
2.0 l/140 kW TSI DSG 4x4 1700 750
2.0 ltr./110 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 2000 750
2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1800 750
WARNING WARNING
The maximum vertical load and the maximum trailer load must not be ex- Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer.
ceeded - there is risk of accident!
CAUTION
Towing a trailer With frequent towing, the vehicle is excessively loaded so this must also be
checked between service intervals.
Driving speed
For safety reasons, do not drive with the trailer any faster than 100 km/h Anti-theft alarm system
(when the towing vehicle is a passenger car of category M1) or 80 km/h (when
the towing vehicle is a truck of category N1). The alarm is triggered if, with a vehicle with activated anti-theft alarm (herein-
after only warning system), the electrical connection to the trailer (accessory)
Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the
is interrupted.
trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by accel-
erating. Always switch off the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer (accessory) is
coupled or uncoupled » page 63.
Brakes
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply Conditions for including a trailer (accessory) in the anti-theft alarm system.
the brakes gently at first, then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting  The vehicle is factory-fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and a towing
from the trailer wheels locking. device.
On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a  The trailer (accessory) is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by
brake. means of the trailer socket.
 The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer (accessory) is functional. 
258 Driving
 The vehicle is locked and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
 The trailer (accessory) is not equipped with LED taillights.

General Maintenance ŠKODA Service Partner
Care and maintenance
All ŠKODA Service Partners operate according to the most recent guidelines
Service work, adjustments and technical alterations and instructions from ŠKODA AUTO . All service and repair work is therefore
carried out on time and at the appropriate quality. Adhering to these instruc-
 Introduction tions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a
good technical condition.
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO must be observed when
carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle. We therefore advise you to have all modifications, repairs and technical altera-
tions to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner.
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and
helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition. ŠKODA Original parts
WARNING  Read and observe on page 260 first.
■ Adjustments, repairs and technical changes to the vehicle are to be car-
ried out only by a specialist garage. Improperly conducted work (including We recommend the use of ŠKODA Original Parts for your vehicle, as these
work on the electronic components and their software) can cause faults - parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO. These parts correspond exactly to the
there is a risk of accidents and increased wear on parts! ŠKODA AUTO regulations and are identical to the parts used in series produc-
■ We advise you only to use ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Orig- tion.
inal Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle. Reli- ŠKODA AUTO is able to warrant the safety, suitability, and long life of these
ability, safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these. products.
■ ŠKODA AUTO cannot assume any liability for products which have not
been approved by ŠKODA even though these may be products with a type ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for
approval or have been approved by a nationally recognised testing labora- a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with the materials defect liability,
tory. unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement.
ŠKODA Original accessories

Vehicle operating under different weather conditions
If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle, you should remember the follow-
If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with the ing.
intended weather conditions, you should contact a ŠKODA partner. They will
advise you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure the full function- We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle.
ing of the vehicle or to prevent damage (e.g. coolant / battery replacement ŠKODA AUTO has selected such accessories to ensure that they are reliable,
etc.). safe and suitable for your particular vehicle. Although we constantly monitor
the market, we are not able to assess or vouch for other products, even
though in some instances such parts may have operational approval or may
have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory. 
260 General Maintenance

ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Acces- Airbags
sories for a period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with
the materials defect liability, unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agree-  Read and observe on page 260 first.
ment or any other agreements.
WARNING
Spoiler ■ Modifications, repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out
unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults, and can also se-
 Read and observe on page 260 first. riously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system – risk of accident and
fatal injury!
WARNING ■ A change to the vehicle's wheel suspension, including the use of non-ap-
If your vehicle is equipped with an original spoiler on the front bumper in proved wheels and tyre combinations, can alter the functioning of the air-
combination with the spoiler on the boot lid, the following instructions bag system - risk of accident and fatal injury!
must be observed - otherwise there is a risk of accidents and serious inju-
ries! WARNING
■ The vehicle must always be equipped with a spoiler on the front bumper
■ No changes may be made to parts of the airbag system, the front bumper
only in combination with the corresponding spoiler on the boot lid.
■ This kind of spoiler cannot be left on the front bumper either on its own,
and the body.
■ Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
in combination with another spoiler not on the luggage compartment lid or
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
in combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the luggage compartment lid.
■ We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Service Partner for any re-
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
■ Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might re-
pairs to or replacement, addition or removal of spoilers.
■ Improperly conducted work on the spoilers of your vehicle may result in
sult in the airbag being deployed.
■ If the airbag is triggered, the airbag system must be exchanged.
malfunction.
WARNING
Component protection The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front
 Read and observe on page 260 first. doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). The resulting dam-
Some electronic vehicle components (such as the instrument cluster) are fac- age can negatively affect the function of the airbag system - there is a risk
tory-equipped with component protection. This ensures the functional limita- of accidents and fatal injuries! The following guidelines must be observed.
tion of these components in a non-legitimate installation in another vehicle ■ Any work on the front doors and their door panels must be carried out by
(e.g. after a theft) or operation outside the vehicle. a specialist garage.
■ Never drive with removed inner door panels or openings in the panels.
Cleaning and care
 Introduction
Regular and thorough care retains the value of your vehicle. 
Care and maintenance 261

When using the care product, always observe the instructions on the packag- Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois
ing. We recommend that you use the preservative from the ŠKODA Original leather.
Accessories.
Automatic car washes
WARNING The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle in
■ Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according an automatic car wash system (e.g. closing the windows and the sliding/tilting
to the instructions. roof etc.).
■ Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts, such as a spoiler,
completely independent, e.g. children - there is a danger of poisoning! roof rack system, two-way radio aerial etc., it is best to consult the operator of
the car wash system beforehand.
CAUTION After an automatic wash with wax treatment, the blades of the wipers should
■ Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning be cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose, and then
products – risk of damaging the paintwork surface. degreased.
■ Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical solvents - there is a dan-
ger of damaging the material that is to be cleaned. Pressure washer
When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for
Note use of the equipment must be observed. This particularly applies to informa-
We recommend that the vehicle is cleaned and cared for by a ŠKODA Service tion with respect to the pressure and spray distance from the vehicle surface.
Partner.
WARNING
Washing the vehicle ■ When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the braking
system can affect the braking efficiency – risk of accident!
 Read and observe and on page 262 first. ■ Take care when cleaning the underbody or the inside of the wheel wells -
there is a risk of injury on sharp metal parts!
The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences
is frequent washing.
CAUTION
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, road salt and other aggressive de- ■ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight, do not exert pressure on the body
posits remain on the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their de- while washing. The temperature of the washing water should be max. 60 ° C -
structive effect can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive otherwise there is a risk of damaging the vehicle paint.
sun's rays, accentuate this caustic effect. ■ Before driving through a car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors - there is a risk
It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end of damage.
of the winter.
CAUTION
Washing by hand Washing the vehicle using pressure washers
Wash the vehicle from top to bottom, if necessary, wash using a soft sponge ■ Do not wash the foils using pressure washers - there is a risk of damage. 
or washing mitt and plenty of water with appropriate detergents. Wash out
the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
Use a different sponge for the wheels, door sills and lower vehicle areas.

■ Do not aim the water jet directly at the lock cylinders or the door or opening Vehicle compo- Facts of the
joints when washing the vehicle in the winter – there is a risk of freezing. Remedy
nent matter
■ During cleaning, always keep a sufficiently large spraying distance in particu-
Wiper / wiper
lar from the parking sensors, the reversing camera lens, the external decorative Soiling Glass cleaner, sponge or cloth
blades
and protective plastic parts (e.g. roof racks, spoilers, protective strips) and
other vehicle parts made of non-metallic materials, such as rubber hoses or in- Clear water, then coat with appropriate
Wheels Soiling
sulation materials – otherwise there is a risk of damage. conservation solution
a) A mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water.
Caring for the outside of the vehicle The jack is maintenance-free. If necessary, the moving parts of the jack should
 Read and observe and on page 262 first. be lubricated with a suitable lubricant.
The towing device is maintenance-free. Coat the ball head of the towing de-
Vehicle compo- Facts of the vice with a suitable grease whenever necessary.
Remedy
nent matter
Protection of hollow spaces
Clear water, cloth, (clean as soon as
Spilled fuel All the hollow spaces on your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are pro-
possible)
tected for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.
No water drop-
Use hard wax (min. twice a year), apply If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these
lets form on the
Paint wax to clean and dry body must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petrole-
paint
um cleaner.
Use polish, then preserve (if the polish
Matt paint does not contain any preservative in- Underbody protection
gredients) The underside of your vehicle is already permanently protected by the factory
Clear water, cloth / sponge provided against chemical and mechanical influences.
Plastic parts Soiling
for the intended cleaning agent We recommend having the protective coating underneath the vehicle and the
Chromed Clear water, cloth or cleaning agent chassis checked — preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of
and anodised Soiling provided for this purpose, then polish winter.
parts with a soft dry cloth
Product life of the films
Foils Soiling soft sponge and mild soap solutiona) Environmental influences (e.g. sunlight, humidity, air pollution, rockfall) affect
Windows Wash with clean water and dry using the life of the films. Films will age and become brittle – this is entirely normal:
Soiling
and door mirrors the intended cloth this is not a fault.
Headlights/lights Soiling soft sponge and mild soap solutiona) Sunlight may also affect the strength of the film colour.
Wash with clean water and dry with a When transporting a load on the roof rack (e.g. roof box or similar), there is an
Soiling
Reversing camera soft cloth increased risk of film damage (e.g. of chipping from the secured load).
Snow / ice Hand brush / de-icer
CAUTION
Door lock cylinder Snow / ice De-icer
■ Vehicle paint
■ Damaged areas should be repaired as soon as possible.
■ Do not treat painted parts with or hard waxes. 

■ Do not polish the paintwork in a dusty environment - risk of paint scratch- Removing snow and ice from the windscreens
es.
■ Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides.
■ Plastic parts
Fig. 307
■ Do not use paint care products.
Installation location of the ice
■ Chromed and anodised parts
scraper, removing the scraper
■ Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment - risk of surface
scratches.
■ Foils
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of foil
damage.
■ Do not clean with dirty cloths or sponges.
■ To remove ice and snow, do not use a scraper or other means.  Read and observe and on page 262 first.
■ Do not polish the foils
Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and
■ Do not use a pressure washer to clean the foils
mirrors. This can be on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
■ Rubber seals
■ Do not treat the door seals and window guides with any products - the pro- › Open the fuel filler flap and slide the scraper in the direction of arrow
tective lacquer layer could be affected. » Fig. 307.
■ Windows and external mirror glass
CAUTION
■ Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp objects - there is a risk
of damage to the filaments or glass antenna.
■ Move the scraper in one direction only, otherwise there is a risk of damage to
■ Do not use a cloth, which was used to polish the body - this could soil the the glass surface.
■ Do not remove snow / ice on the surface that is soiled (e.g. pea gravel, sand,
window and reduce visibility.
■ Headlights/lights road salt) - there is a risk of damaging the surface.
■ Remove snow / ice carefully, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the labels
■ Do not dry off the headlights/lights, do not use sharp objects - there is a
risk of damage to the protective coating and subsequent cracking of the that have been fitted by the factory.
headlight glass.
■ Reversing camera
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of
camera damage.
■ Do not remove snow / ice with warm / hot water.
■ To wash, never use a pressure washer or steam jet.
■ For cleaning, do not use abrasive cleaners.
■ Door lock cylinder
■ Make sure that as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinder
when washing the vehicle - there is a risk of freezing the lock cylinder!
■ Wheels
■ Heavy contamination of the wheels can affect the balance of the wheels -
this can result in vibrations and, under some circumstances, can cause pre-
mature wear of the steering wheel.

Caring for the interior CAUTION
■ Natural leather / Faux leather / Alcantara® suede / material
 Read and observe and on page 262 first. ■ In lengthy periods in bright sunlight, it might be sensible to cover these ma-
terials in order to avoid bleaching.
Vehicle compo- Facts of the ■ Fresh stains (e.g. from pens, lipstick, shoe polish etc.) should be removed as
Remedy
nent matter soon as possible.
Dust, surface ■ Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and
Vacuum cleaner
contamination that no water gets into the seams.
Water, slightly damp cotton / wool ■ Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush – risk of damage to the surface
Pollution (fresh) cloth, if necessary, mild soap solutiona), of the panelling.
then wipe with a soft cloth ■ Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, stain remover or similar agents
Natural leather / on Alcantara® suede seat upholstery.
Stubborn stains Specially prepared detergent
Faux leather / ■ Some clothing fabrics (e.g. dark denim) do not have sufficient colour fast-
Alcantara® / Treat the leather periodically with a ness - this may leave evident marks on upholstery. This is not a defect in the
Suede / Care (natural suitable leather protector and use a fabric.
Material leather) care cream with light blocker and im- ■ Sharp objects on garments (e.g. zips, rivets, sharp- edged belts) can dam-
pregnation after each cleaning. age the upholstery fabrics in the vehicle. Such damage cannot be subse-
Remove stubborn hairs using a “clean- quently recognised as a justified complaint.
Care (Alcantara® ing glove” ■ Plastic parts
suede / fabric) Remove pills from materials with a ■ Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dashboard – there is a risk of
brush damage to the dashboard.
Water, slightly damp cloth or sponge, ■ Windows
Plastic parts Soiling or cleaning agent provided for this pur- ■ Do not attach any stickers to the filaments or glass antenna - there is risk
pose of damage.
■ Covers of electrically heated seats
Wash with clean water and dry using
Windows Soiling ■ Do not clean with water or other liquids - there is a risk of damage to the
the intended cloth
heating system.
Covers of electri- ■ Do not dry by switching on the heating.
Soiling Specially provided cleaning agent
cally heated seats ■ Seat belts
Seat belts » Soiling soft cloth and mild soap solutiona) ■ Allow to dry before rolling up the seat belts.
a) A mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water.
Note
WARNING During use, the leather and Alcantara® and suede materials may show minor
■ Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could changes (e.g. folds, discolouration).
destroy the fabric.
■ Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the tempera-
ture inside the vehicle is high.

CAUTION
Inspecting and replenishing
■ Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of
Fuel fuel can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and
the exhaust system.
 Introduction ■ Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork –
risk of paint damage.
■ If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with
the intended weather conditions, please contact a ŠKODA partner. They will
tell you whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is offered in the re-
spective country or whether it is permissible to operate the vehicle with an-
other fuel.
Petrol and diesel refuelling
Fig. 308 Label with prescribed fuel / graphic designation of fuel types
The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 308.
The fuel capacity for vehicles with front wheel drive is about 50 litres, and for
vehicles with four-wheel drive about 55 litres, with about 6 litres as reserve.
Graphic name of the fuel types » Fig. 308
A Unleaded petrol
Fig. 309 Open fuel filler flap/unscrew tank cap/place the tank cap on
B Diesel the fuel filler flap 
C CNG (compressed natural gas)
D Percentage of organic
WARNING
Fuel vapours are explosive - can be fatal!

Fig. 310 Unleaded petrol
Fuel filler tube on vehicles with  Read and observe and on page 266 first.
diesel engines
The correct fuel for the vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 308 on page 266.
The vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol containing maximum
10% bioethanol (E10).
Unleaded petrol must correspond to the European Standard EN 228 (in Ger-
many DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 91
or DIN 51626-2 or E5 for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98).
Perform the refuelling under the following conditions. Specified petrol 95 / min. 92 and 93 RON/ROZ
 The vehicle is unlocked. We recommend using petrol 95 RON.
 The ignition is switched off.
Optionally, the petrol 92 or. 93 RON can be used (slight power loss, a slightly
 The auxiliary heating and ventilation is switched off. increased fuel consumption).
› Press the fuel filler flap in direction of arrow1 and fold in the direction of In an emergency petrol 91 RON can be used (slight power loss, slightly in-
arrow 2 » Fig. 309. creased fuel consumption) » .
› Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of arrow 3 .
› Remove the tank cap and place in the recess on top of the fuel filler flap in Unleaded petrol min. 95 RON / ROZ
the direction of arrow 4 . Use min. 95 ROZ petrol.
› Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler neck as far as it will go, and refuel. In an emergency petrol 91, 92 or 93 RON can be used (slight loss, a slightly
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first increased fuel consumption) » .
time. Not continue refuelling. Prescribed petrol 98/(95) RON / ROZ
› Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler neck and put it back in the We recommend using petrol 98 RON.
pump. Optionally, petrol 95 RON can be used (slight power loss, a slightly increased
› Place the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and turn it in the opposite direc- fuel consumption).
tion to the arrow until it securely engages 3 .
› Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place. In an emergency petrol 91, 92 or 93 RON can be used (slight loss, a slightly
increased fuel consumption) » .
Incorrect refuelling guard on vehicles with diesel engines
The fuel filler tube on vehicles with diesel engines has been fitted with an in- CAUTION
correct refuelling guard » Fig. 310. The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of en-
If the diesel pump nozzle does not sit directly in the fuel filler tube, move it to gine damage and damage to the exhaust system.
■ If gasoline is used which is lower than the prescribed octane number, then
and fro with slight pressure to insert it correctly.
continue driving at medium engine speeds and minimum engine load. Refuel
The diameter of the diesel pump nozzle can be identical to that of the petrol using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible. 
pump nozzle in some countries. When driving in these countries, the incorrect
fuelling protection should be removed by a specialist company.

■ Petrol with a lower Octane count than 91 should not even be used in an Operating under different weather conditions
emergency! Use only diesel in accordance with the current or expected weather condi-
■ If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned tions. Ask the petrol station personnel whether the diesel fuel offered corre-
standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is put in the tank by mistake, do not start the en- sponds to these conditions.
gine or switch on the ignition.
CAUTION
CAUTION The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of en-
Petrol additives (additives) gine damage and damage to the exhaust system.
■ The unleaded petrol in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all ■ If a different fuel other than diesel fuel, which complies to the above men-
the conditions for a smooth running engine. Therefore, we recommend that tioned standards (e.g. petrol) is put into the tank, do not start the engine or
you do not add any fuel additives to the petrol - there is a risk of engine dam- switch on the ignition!
age or damage to the exhaust system. ■ The biofuel RME must not be used!
■ The following additives and auxiliary products may not be used - there is a
risk of engine damage or damage to the exhaust system! CAUTION
■ Additives with metal components (metallic additives), in particular with Diesel fuel additives
manganese and iron content. ■ The diesel fuel in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all the
■ Fuels with metallic content (e.g. LRP - lead replacement petrol). conditions for a smooth running engine. Therefore, we recommend that you
do not add any fuel additives to the diesel - - there is a risk of engine damage
Note or damage to the exhaust system.
■ Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the
engine can be used without limitations. Refuel CNG (compressed natural gas)
■ The use of petrol with an octane rating higher than 95 RON in does not result
in either a noticeable increase in power nor lower fuel consumption in vehicles
for which unleaded petrol 95/min 92 or 93 RON is specified.
■ On vehicles using prescribed petrol of min. 95 RON, the use of petrol with a
higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and reduce fuel
consumption.
Diesel fuel
The correct fuel for the vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig. 311 Natural gas filler tubes
» Fig. 308 on page 266.
The vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel that complies with the Euro-  Read and observe and on page 266 first.
pean standard EN 590 (in Germany also DIN 51628, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590,
Refuel with natural gas under the following conditions.
in Russia GOST R 52368-2005/EN 590: 2004, in India IS 1460/Bharat IV or in
an emergency IS 1460/Bharat III).  The vehicle is unlocked.
 The engine and the ignition are switched off.
The diesel fuel may contain maximum 7% biodiesel (B7 - In Germany in ac-
 The auxiliary heating and ventilation is switched off » page 119. 
cordance with DIN 52638, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in France EN 590).

Natural gas refuelling may vary from station to station. If refuelling with natu- Note
ral gas at a station is unfamiliar to you, get someone to instruct you or allow During the filling process sounds are heard which are harmless. If you are un-
the fuelling operation to be carried out by the station staff. sure which service station staff to use, ask the petrol station staff.
Refuelling operation
› Open the fuel filler flap. CNG
› Remove cap A » Fig. 311in the direction of the arrow and insert connector
for the refuelling system into filler neck B .
The fuel tank is full when the compressor of the refuelling system automatical-
ly switches off.
› Check that sealing ring C » Fig. 311has remained inserted in filler neck B . If
the sealing ring has slipped on the connector, reinsert it into the filler neck.
› Insert cap A into the filler neck and close the fuel filler flap until it locks into
place.
The natural gas refuelling systems have an overfill protection relating to the
outdoor temperature. At very high outside temperatures, it may happen that Fig. 312 Position of the CNG label(s).
the gas tank may not be fully refuelled.
If the vehicle is parked directly after a refuelling operation, on restart the
pointer of the gas gauge may not show exactly the same level as immediately A G-TEC-vehicle may be operated with CNG and unleaded petrol.
after the filling process. This is not a leak in the system, but a reduction in Positioning of the CNG sticker in natural gas vehicles » Fig. 312.
pressure due to the cooling of the gas in the gas tank after refuelling.
Automatically switching over from natural gas mode to petrol mode
The maximum lifetime of the gas tank is 20 years.
The vehicle automatically switches from natural gas to petrol, for example, if
The capacity of the natural gas fuel tank is approximately 17.5 kg. the following situations occur.
▶ With an empty gas tank or not enough pressure in the tank.
WARNING ▶ After natural gas refueling (for protecting the petrol fuel system).
■ Natural gas is highly explosive and highly flammable. ▶ At very low surrounding temperatures.
■ When refuelling, never get into the vehicle. If you have to get into your
Never fully empty the petrol tank. After the warning light comes on  Refuel
vehicle in exceptional cases, touch a metal surface before you touch the fill-
petrol at the nearest petrol station.
ing coupling again. Otherwise, electrostatic discharging may occur - There
is a risk of fire! To ensure the correct functioning of the fuel system, every 6 months the fuel
tank should be run down until the warning light  comes on.
CAUTION Gas leak
LNG (Liquefied Natural Gas), LPG (Liquefied Petroleum Gas) and hythane (mix- If a gas leak is suspected (noticeable odour), proceed as follows.
ture of hydrogen and methane) must not be used - there is a risk of damaging ▶ Stop the vehicle.
the engine and the exhaust system. ▶ Switch off the ignition.
▶ Extinguish cigarettes, switch off spark-producing or incendiary items and re-
move them from the vehicle. 

▶ Open the doors and the boot lid to ventilate the vehicle sufficiently. CAUTION
▶ Do not continue to drive if the odour persists.
In the event of contact between the vehicle underbody and an obstacle or in
▶ Ifit is not possible to drive a vehicle with a gas leak out of an enclosed area the event of an accident, the gas container may become damaged. If this is the
(e.g. tunnel, underpass, garage, ferry etc.), call the emergency services imme- case, have the vehicle checked by a specialist garage immediately. If you smell
diately. gas,  stop driving! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a special-
Seek help from a specialist garage to correct the gas system fault. ist garage.
In a traffic accident
If a gas leak is suspected in a traffic accident, proceed as follows.
AdBlue® and its refilling
▶ Switch off the ignition.
▶ Extinguish cigarettes, switch off spark-producing or incendiary items and re-
 Introduction
move them from the vehicle.
▶ Have all the occupants get out. In order to reduce pollutant emissions from vehicles with diesel engines and
▶ Keep all persons away from the vehicle. We recommend standing at least 10 the SCR catalyst, a urea - AdBlue® solution is injected into the exhaust system.
metres from the vehicle. Only use AdBlue® that corresponds to ISO 22241-1 standard. Do not add addi-
▶ Inform the emergency services that it is a natural gas vehicle. tives to AdBlue®.
Regular gas system checks The AdBlue®-consumption depends on driving style, the operating tempera-
Regular gas system checks must be carried out in a specialist workshop on ture of the system and on the weather conditions.
natural gas-powered vehicles. The vehicle owner is responsible for ensuring The AdBlue®-tank filling is about 12 litres.
tests are conducted properly.
Every 2 years WARNING
▶ Check the filler cap. AdBlue® can cause skin, eye and respiratory irritation. If your eyes or skin
▶ Check the condition of fuel filler tubes and the sealing ring in the fuel filler come into contact with the AdBlue® fluid, immediately wash the affected
tubes, and clean the sealing ring if necessary. area with water. Seek medical assistance if required.
▶ Check the gas system for leaks and carry out an examination of gas contain-
ers. CAUTION
Every 20 years AdBlue® attacks the surface of some materials (e.g. as painted parts, plastics,
▶ Replace the gas tank. fabrics). Clean the areas affected with AdBlue® using a damp cloth and plenty
of cold water. Remove any dried AdBlue® with warm water and a sponge.
WARNING
Note
■ Do not underestimate the smell of gas in the car or when refuelling - risk
of fire, explosion and injury. ■ The AdBlue® solution freezes at a temperature of -11° C and lower. The sys-
■ The natural gas tanks in the vehicle must not be exposed to unwanted tem has an automatic heater to ensure the operability at low temperatures.
■ We recommend purchasing AdBlue® refill bottles from the ŠKODA original
heat sources.
parts. 

■ The working life of the AdBlue® solution is 4 years. If the tank contents are We recommend when refilling using refill bottles that you use refill bottles
not used within this period, then this is to be replaced by a specialist garage. from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
When topping up, do not use AdBlue® for which the shelf life has expired.
When adding AdBlue® take note of the minimum and maximum AdBlue®tank
■ AdBlue® is a registered trademark of the VDA. AdBlue® is also known as AUS
capacity shown in the display of the instrument cluster together with warning
32 (Aqueous Urea Solution) or DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid).
light  .
Check level Refill AdBlue® under the following conditions.

 The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
 The ignition is switched off.
The AdBlue® level is automatically monitored. Refilling
The driving distance that can be driven with the existing AdBlue®Tank capacity › Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow
1 and open it in the direc-
as well as indication of the minimum and maximum AdBlue®- Refill quantity, tion of arrow 2 » Fig. 313.
can be displayed using the driving data » page 52. › Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of arrow 3 .
If the available travel distance that can be completed with the remaining AdBl-
› Remove the tank cap and place in the recess on top of the fuel filler flap in
the direction of arrow 4 .
ue® tank capacity drops to about 2400 km, the warning  appears on the in-
strument cluster and a request for replenishment of AdBlue® appears.
› Refill AdBlue® in the neck A by means of a refill or a fuel nozzle refill (follow
the instructions on the container or the instructions of the petrol station op-
If the available travel distance that can be driven with the existing AdBlue® - erator).
tank capacity drops down to 0 km, then no motor start is possible. In this The AdBlue® - tank is full when no AdBlue® flows from the refill bottle or as
case, if possible, top up AdBlue® to the maximum fill level. soon as the correctly operated pump cuts out for the first time. Do not contin-
ue refilling AdBlue®.
AdBlue® Refill
› After refilling AdBlue®put the cap on the fuel filler neck and turn in the oppo-
site direction of the arrow 3 until it engages.
› Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place.
Before continuing your journey, switch on just the ignition for 30 s so that
the refilling can be recognized by the system. Only then start the engine.
CAUTION
When refilling AdBlue® Do not exceed the maximum refill quantity specified in
the instrument cluster - there is a risk of damage to the AdBlue®systems.
Fig. 313 Open fuel filler flap / unscrew tank cap / place the tank cap on
the fuel filler flap
AdBlue® You can even top up using a fuel nozzle at a petrol station or a refill
bottle, if necessary at a specialist garage.

Engine compartment WARNING
Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine run-
 Introduction ning
■ If it is necessary to work on the engine compartment with the engine run-
WARNING ning, then observe the rotating engine parts and electrical plants - it can
Never cover the engine with additional insulation material (e.g. with a cov- be fatal!
■ Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system.
er) – risk of fire!
■ Avoid short circuits in the electrical system, particularly on the vehicle's
battery.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, the following instructions must
CAUTION
be observed - risk of injury or fire. The engine compartment of your car is a
hazardous area! Refill only operating fluids of the correct specification - danger of damaging
the vehicle!
WARNING Note
Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment ■ Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the ŠKODA
■ Stop the engine and remove the ignition key, on vehicles with the KESSY Original Accessories or from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts ranges.
system, open the driver's door. ■ We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
■ Firmly apply the handbrake.
■ For vehicles with manual transmission the lever into the neutral position.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
■ Allow the engine to cool.
■ Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant flowing out of the
engine compartment – risk of scalding! Wait until the steam or coolant has
stopped escaping.
WARNING
Information for working in the engine room
■ Keep everyone away from the engine compartment.
■ Do not touch any hot engine parts – risk of burns!
■ Never touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan suddenly switch on approx.
10 minutes after switching off the ignition!
■ Do not smoke or use open flames in the vicinity of the engine.
■ Do not leave any items (e.g. cloths or tools) in the engine compartment.
This presents a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage.
■ Read and observe the information and warning instructions on the fluid
containers.

Open the bonnet and close › From around 20 cm, lightly push the bonnet lid closed until it securely engag-
es.
If the bonnet lid is not properly closed, the display of the instrument cluster
will show this.
WARNING
■ Never drive if the bonnet is open - could cause an accident!
■ Make sure that when closing the engine compartment lid, no body parts
are crushed - there is danger of injury!
CAUTION
When closing the bonnet “do not press down” - there is a risk of damaging the
bonnet.
Engine compartment overview
Fig. 314 Opening the bonnet
Open flap
› Make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are not folded away from the
windscreen - there is a risk of damage to the bonnet.
› Open the front door and pull the release lever below the dash panel in the
direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 314.
Fig. 315 Arrangement example in the engine compartment
› Press the release lever in the direction of arrow 2 and the bonnet will be un-
locked.
› Raise the bonnet in the direction of the arrow 3 .
› Remove the lid prop in the direction of arrow 4 from the holder. A Coolant expansion reservoir 275
› Secure the open flap inserting the end of the post into the opening in the di- B Engine oil dipstick 274
rection of arrow 5 .
C Engine oil filler opening 274
Close the bonnet lid D Brake fluid reservoir 276
› Lift the bonnet. E Vehicle battery 277
› Decouple the bonnet support and press into the holder designed to hold it. F Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 274

▶ Petrol engines: VW 504 00, VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA A3/ACEA B4 or
Windscreen washer fluid
API SN, (API SM);
▶ Diesel engines: VW 507 00, ACEA C3 or API CJ-4.
Fig. 316
Windscreen washer fluid reser- Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a diesel
voir particulate filter.
Check and refill
The windscreen washer fluid reservoir A is located in the engine compart-

ment » Fig. 316.
The capacity of the reservoir is 3 litres, or 4.7 litres in vehicles with the head-
light cleaning system (in some countries, the reservoir capacity is 4.7 litres for
both variants). Fig. 317 Dipstick variants
Use a suitable windscreen washer fluid in accordance with the current or ex-
Depending on the driving style and operating conditions, the engine uses some
pected weather conditions. We recommend that you use accessories from
oil (up to 0.5 l / 1 000 km). Consumption may be slightly higher than this dur-
ŠKODA Original Accessories.
ing the first 5 000 km.
CAUTION Have the oil change carried out by a specialist garage during the inspection.
■ Only use liquids that do not attack polycarbonates - otherwise there is a risk
Check the oil under the following conditions and refill.
of damage to the headlights.
■ Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when  The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
replenishing it with liquid otherwise the liquid transportation system can be-  The engine operating temperature is reached.
come contaminated, which can cause the windscreen washer system to mal-  The engine is turned off.
function.
Checking the level
› Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil trough.
Engine oil › Remove the dipstick and wipe with a clean cloth.
Specification
› Push the dipstick to the stop and pull out again.
› Read the oil level and push in the dipstick.
To find out which type of engine oil you can use for your vehicle, contact a The oil level must be in range A » Fig. 317. If the oil level is below the range
specialist garage. A , refill the oil.
If this oil is not available, other oils can also be refilled. To prevent engine dam- Refilling
age, a maximum of 0.5 l of engine oil with the following specifications may be › Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening C » Fig. 315 on page 273. 
used until the next oil change:

› Add oil of the correct specification in increments of 0.5 litres » page 274. WARNING (Continued)
› Check the oil level. ■ To protect against coolant splashes, cover the cap with a cloth when
› Screw the lid of the engine oil filler closed carefully. opening.
■ Coolant and coolant fumes are harmful - avoid contact with the coolant.
WARNING
If your eyes or skin come into contact with the coolant, immediately wash
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water and seek medi-
the engine compartment » page 272.
cal advice if required.
CAUTION
CAUTION
■ The oil level must never fall outside range A » Fig. 317 - otherwise there is a
Do not cover the radiator or fit any parts (e.g. auxiliary lights) in front of the air
risk of damaging the engine and the exhaust system.
intakes - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
■ If it is not possible to top up the engine oil or if the oil level is above range A ,
 stop driving! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist ga-
rage.
Checking and refilling
■ Do not add additives to the engine oil - risk of engine damage.
Fig. 318
Note Coolant expansion reservoir
■ An engine oil level which is too low is indicated in the instrument cluster by
the warning light  and a corresponding message » page 46. Nevertheless, we
recommend that you check the oil level regularly using the dipstick.
■ We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Coolant
 Introduction  Read and observe and on page 275 first.
Check the coolant under the following conditions and refill.

The coolant cools the engine and consists of water and coolant additive (with
additives that protect the cooling system against corrosion and prevents fur-  The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
ring).  The engine is not warm (if the engine is warm, the test results could be in-
accurate).
The coolant additive level in the coolant must between 40 and 60 %.
 The engine is turned off.
The correct mixing ratio of water and coolant additive should be checked if
Check the coolant level - the coolant level must be between the marks A
necessary by a specialist garage or corrected if necessary.
and B » Fig. 318. If the coolant level is below the mark B , refill the coolant.
WARNING Refilling
■ The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on The coolant expansion tank must always contain a small amount of coolant
the engine compartment » page 272. » .
■ Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the
engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized - risk of scalding or › Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and unscrew the cap
carefully. 
injury from being splashed with coolant!

› Always top up using the correct specification of fluids. Brake fluid
› Turn the cap until it clicks into place.
The specification of the coolant is shown on the coolant expansion reser- Fig. 319
voir» Fig. 318. Brake fluid reservoir
If no specified coolant is available, use only distilled or demineralised water and
have the mixing ratio of water and coolant additive corrected by a specialist
garage as soon as possible.
CAUTION
■ If the expansion tank is empty, do not top up with coolant. The system could
aerate - risk of damaging the engine!  Do not drive the vehicle! Switch off
the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage. Check the brake fluid under the following conditions.
■ Do not fill the coolant above the mark A » Fig. 318. When it heats up, the  The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
coolant could press out of the cooling system - there is a risk of damage to the  The engine is turned off.
engine parts.
■ If it is not possible to add coolant,  stop driving! Switch off the engine and Check brake fluid level - the brake fluid level must be between the markings
seek assistance from a specialist garage. “MIN” and “MAX”» Fig. 319.
■ A coolant additive which does not correspond to the correct specification
Specification - the brake fluid must comply with VW 501 14 standard (this
can reduce the anti-corrosion effect of the cooling system - there is a risk of standard meets the requirements of FMVSS 116 DOT4).
damage to the cooling system and the engine.
■ If water other than distilled (demineralised) water is used, then have the The brake fluid change is carried out during the inspection.
coolant replaced by a specialist garage - there is a risk of engine damage.
WARNING
■ A loss of coolant could be due to leaks in the cooling system - there is a risk
of engine damage. Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist ■ If the date of the brake fluid change is exceeded, steam bubbles could
garage. form in the brake system during heavy braking. This can impair the efficien-
cy of the brakes – risk of accident!
Note ■ The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
A coolant level which is too low is indicated in the instrument cluster by the the engine compartment » page 272.
warning light  and a corresponding message » page 46. We still recommend ■ There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the
inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time. fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the
“MIN” » Fig. 319 marking.  Stop driving – There is a risk of an accident!
Seek help from a specialist garage.
Note
A brake fluid level which is too low is indicated in the instrument cluster by the
warning light  and a corresponding message» page 41. We therefore recom-
mend that you check the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to
time.

Vehicle battery WARNING (Continued)
■ Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely inde-
 Introduction pendent, especially children.
■ Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
The vehicle battery represents a power source for the motor to start and for battery vent openings.
the supply of electrical consumers in the car.
WARNING
Automatic consumer shutdown - Discharge protection of the vehicle
battery When working on the car battery, there is the risk of explosion, fire, injury
The on-board power supply tries as follows to avoid draining the vehicle bat- or irritation! The following guidelines must be observed.
■ Avoid smoking, the use of open flames or light and any activities that
tery when it is heavily loaded.
▶ By increasing the engine idle speed. could cause sparks.
▶ By limiting the power of certain consumers. ■ A discharged vehicle battery can freeze slightly. Never charge up a fro-
▶ By switching off some loads(heated seats, heated rear window) for as long as zen or thawed vehicle battery. Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
■ Never use a damaged vehicle battery – risk of explosion!
necessary.
■ Do not connect the battery terminals with each other by bridging the two
Warning symbols on the vehicle battery poles of a short circuit.
Symbol Meaning
CAUTION
 Always wear eye protection.
Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork – risk
Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye pro- of damage to the paintwork.
 tection.
Note
Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the
We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a spe-
 vehicle battery.
■
cialist garage.
When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture ■ You should replace batteries older than 5 years.
 is produced.
 Keep children away from the vehicle battery.
WARNING
Battery acid is highly corrosive - risk of injury, irritation or poisoning! Corro-
sive vapours in the air irritate and damage the respiratory tract and the
eyes. The following guidelines must be observed.
■ Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling
the vehicle battery.
■ If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immedi-
ately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water.
Seek medical assistance if required.

Check condition Charging
Only charge the vehicle battery when the ignition and all consumers are
switched off.
Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer.
Charging
› For vehicles with START-STOP system or auxiliary heating, connect the 
terminal of the charger to the  pole of the battery, the  terminal of the
charger to the earth point of the engine » page 291.
Fig. 320 Vehicle battery: Open the cover / acid level indicator › For vehicles without START-STOP system or auxiliary heating, connect the
terminals of the charger to the corresponding battery poles ( to .  to
 Read and observe and on page 277 first. ).
The battery condition is checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of the
› Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the
device.
inspection service.
› After charging has been successful: Switch off the charger and remove the
Check the acid level mains cable from the power socket.
For car batteries with acid level indicator, use the colouration of the display to › Disconnect the terminals of the charger from the vehicle battery.
check the acid level. In vehicle batteries with the designation “AGM” there is A charging current of 0.1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity (or low-
no acid level examination. er) must be used until full charging is achieved.
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle battery may be provided with a cov-
WARNING
er, this can be opened in the direction of arrow » Fig. 320 - .
■ When charging the vehicle battery, hydrogen is released - risk of explo-
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. Therefore, carefully sion. An explosion can be caused from sparks or connection or releasing
knock on the display » Fig. 320 - . the cable plug while the ignition is on.
Black colour - electrolyte level is correct. ■ The so-called “quick charging” of the vehicle battery is dangerous and re-
quires a special charger and specialist knowledge. Therefore, have “Quick
Colourless or light yellow colour - electrolyte level too low, the battery must loading” carried out by a specialist garage.
be replaced.
Battery discharge Disconnect/reconnect and change
Frequent short journeys will not sufficiently recharge the car battery.
The battery capacity decreases at low temperatures.
If the vehicle is not used for longer than 3 to 4 weeks, disconnect the negative We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
terminal  or charge the battery constantly with a very low charging current. The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and the
same size as the original Battery. 

Connecting/disconnecting
Wheels
› To disconnect the battery, switch off the ignition and disconnect first the
negative terminal , and only after this the positive .
Wheels and tyres
› To connect the battery, first connect the positive terminal , and only after
this the negative terminal . Advice on tyre/wheel usage
After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, the following func- New tyres, during the first 500 km, new tyres do not offer optimum grip and
tions or devices are partially or completely inoperative. appropriate care should therefore be taken when driving.
Function / device Operating measure Always fit tyres with a greater profile depth on the front wheels.
Power windows » page 69 Wheels and bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. We recom-
Panorama sliding/tilting roof » page 70 mend that you use wheel rims and wheel bolts from ŠKODA Original Accesso-
Sun screen » page 71 ries.
Time settings » page 50 Always store wheels or tyresin a cool, dry and, where possible, dark place. The
tyres themselves should be stored standing.
CAUTION
■ Disconnect the vehicle battery only with the ignition turned off - there is a Tyre life
risk of damaging the electrical system of the vehicle. Tyres age and lose their original characteristics, even if they are not being
■ Before disconnecting the battery, close the electric tailgate, all the windows,
used. Do not use tyres that are older than 6 years.
the sliding / tilting roof and the electric sunshade - otherwise malfunctions of The manufacturing date is indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly on the in-
equipment elements may occur. side). E.g. DOT ... 10 18... means that the tyres were produced in the 10th week
■ Under no circumstances must the connection cables be connected incor- of the year 2018.
rectly – risk of fire.
Tyre damage
Note We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures,
After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, we recommend cuts, splits and bulges, etc.) on a regular basis.
having the vehicle checked by a specialist to ensure that the full functionality Remove any foreign objects in the tyre tread immediately (e.g. small stones).
of all electrical systems is guaranteed.
Foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Installation of new tyres
Only fit radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same
tread pattern on one axle on all 4 wheels.
When mounting new tires the tires have to be replaced axle by axle.
Unidirectional tyres
Some tires may be directional. The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked
by arrows on the wall of the tyre. 
Wheels 279
The specified running direction must be strictly adhered to, otherwise the fol- E Tyre diameter in inches
lowing tyre characteristics may be degraded. This information serves merely as information for the prescribed tyre
▶ Driving stability. pressure. This is not a list of shared tyre sizes for your vehicle. These are in
▶ Traction. the vehicle's technical documentation, as well as in the declaration of con-
▶ Tyre noise and tyre wear. formity (in so-called COC document).
F Tyre pressure value on the front axle
WARNING
G Tyre pressure value on the rear axle
Never use damaged tyres or tyres that are older than 6 years old – risk of
H Required tire pressure value for the emergency wheel
accident.
Check tyre pressures
CAUTION Check the tyre pressure (including that of the emergency or spare wheel) at
■ The tyres must be protected from contact with substances such as oil, least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey.
grease and fuel, which could damage them. If the tyres come into contact with Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce
these substances, then we recommend you have this checked out in a special- the higher pressure of warm tyres.
ist workshop.
■ Do not use alloy rims with a burnished or polished surface in winter condi- In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values must be saved
tions - there is a risk of wheel damage (e.g. from the road grit). each time the pressures are changed » page 249.
WARNING
Tyre pressure ■Do not drive with an incorrect tyre pressure - risk of accident.
■In the event of very fast pressure loss, e.g. in the event of sudden tyre
damage, an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop
without sudden steering movements and without any hard braking.
Note
The declaration of conformity (the so-called. COC document) can be obtained
from a ŠKODA Partner (only valid for some countries and some models).
Fig. 321 Label with a table of tyre sizes and tyre pressure value / inflate
tyres
The prescribed tyre inflation is on the sticker with pictograms A » Fig. 321 (for
some countries, the pictograms are replaced with a text).
Tyre pressure is always to match the load.
B Inflation pressure for half load
C Inflation pressure for environmentally friendly operation (slightly lower
fuel consumption and emissions)
D Inflation pressure for full load

Tyre wear and wheel change Spare wheel
Afull spare wheel corresponds to the wheel mounted on the vehicle with the
wheel dimensions, tyre dimension and tyre type.
A temporary spare wheel is provided with a warning label on the rim. Only use
this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage since it is
not intended for permanent use.
Instructions for using a temporary spare wheel
▶ Do not cover the warning sign.
▶ Be particularly observant when driving.
Inflate the spare wheel to the maximum prescribed inflation pressure

Fig. 322 Tyre wear indicator / wheel change
» page 280.
The tyre wear increases in the following circumstances. WARNING
▶ Incorrect tyre pressure.
▶ Driving style (e.g. fast cornering, rapid acceleration / deceleration). A temporary spare wheel can only be used for a short time in the event of a
▶ Incorrect balancing of wheels (have the wheels balanced after changing breakdown and with a correspondingly careful driving method.
tyres / repair or with “restlessness” on the steering).
▶ Wheel alignment error. Spare wheel
Wear indicators are located in the profile of the tyres which display the per- A warning label is displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel. Only use
missible minimum tread depth » Fig. 322 - . A tyre is to be regarded as worn this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage since it is
out when this indicator is flush with the tread. Markings on the walls of the not intended for permanent use.
tyres with the letters “TWI” or other symbols (e.g. ) indicate the position of
the wear indicators. The emergency wheel is significantly narrower than the wheels mounted
ex-factory.
The tread depth can be measured with a tread depth gauge on the ice scraper,
which is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Instructions for using an emergency wheel
▶ Do not cover the warning sign.
For uniform wear on all tyres, we recommend that you change the wheels ev- ▶ Be particularly observant when driving.
ery 10,000 km according to the schedule » Fig. 322 - .
WARNING
WARNING
■ Observe instructions on the warning sign of the emergency wheel.
■ Change when they are worn down to the wear indicators at the latest - ■ Do not drive with more than one spare wheel mounted!
risk of accident. ■ When driving with the temporary spare wheel at full throttle acceleration,
■ Improper wheel alignment affects the driving behaviour - there is an acci-
avoid sharp braking and fast cornering.
dent. ■ Do not use snow chains on the temporary spare wheel.
■ Unusual vibrations or “pulling” of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of
tyre damage. Reduce speed and stop! If no tyre damage is evident, seek the
assistance of a specialist garage.
Wheels 281
Tyre marking If using “winter” tyres, fit the summer tyres on again in good time as they pro-
vide better handling properties, a shorter braking distance, less tyre noise, and
reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at tem-
Explanation of tyre markings - e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 T
peratures above 7 °C.
195 Tyre width in mm
Speed symbol
65 Height/width ratio in % All-season or “winter” tyres (marked with M+S and a peak/snowflake symbol
R Code letter for the type of tyre – Radial ) of a lower speed category than stated in the technical vehicle documenta-
15 Diameter of wheel in inches tion can be used, provided the permissible maximum speed of these tyres is
91 load index not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is higher.
T Speed symbol The speed limit for all-season or “winter” tyres can be set in the infotainment
system in menu  /  →  → Tyres.
Load index - indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual
tyre If the vehicle has all-season or “winter” tires of a lower speed category than
the specified maximum speed of the vehicle (referring to tyres that have not
load index been delivered by the factory), then a warning label with the maximum value of
88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
the speed category provided for the fitted tyres must be fixed in the interior of
Load the vehicle in a constantly visible place in the driver’s field of vision. The warn-
560 580 600 615 630 650 670 690
(In kg) ing label (sticker) can be replaced by setting the maximum value of the speed
category specified for the mounted tyres in Infotainment (only applies to cer-
Speed symbol - indicates the maximum permissible speed for a vehicle fit- tain countries). This specification defines the maximum vehicle speed with
ted with tyres in the category concerned mounted all-season or “winter”tyres that may not be exceeded.
speed
S T U H V W Y
symbol Snow chains
Maximum
The snow chains improve driving in wintry road conditions.
speed 180 190 200 210 240 270 300
(in km/h) Before fitting the snow chains, remove the full wheel trims.
Snow chains must only be fitted on the front wheels and are applicable only to
WARNING
the following wheel / tyre combinations. 
Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity and speed
for the tyres fitted – risk of accident.
Operating in winter conditions
All-year (or “winter”) tyres

All-year or “winter” tyres (indicated by an M+S or a mountain peak/snowflake
symbol ) to improve the performance of the vehicle in winter conditions.
For the best possible handling, use all-season or “winter” tyres on all four
wheels with a minimum tread depth of 4 mm.

Octavia
Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size
6J x 15a) 43 mm 195/65 R15
6J x 15a) 47 mm 195/65 R15
6J x 16b) 48 mm 205/55 R16
6J x 16b) 50 mm 205/55 R16
6J x 17b) 45 mm 205/50 R17
6J x 17b) 48 mm 205/50 R17
a) Only fit snow chains with links and locks no larger than 13 mm.
b) Only fit snow chains with links and locks no larger than 12 mm.
Octavia Scout
6J x 16a) 50 mm 205/55 R16
6J x 17a) 45 mm 205/50 R17
6J x 16a) 48 mm 205/55 R16
6J x 16b) 48 mm 205/60 R16
6J x 17a) 48 mm 205/50 R17
6J x 17b) 48 mm 205/55 R17
b) Only fit snow chains with links and locks no larger than 9 mm.
Octavia RS
6J x 17a) 45 mm 205/50 R17
6J x 17a) 48 mm 205/50 R17
WARNING
Do not use chains on snow- and ice-free routes - the driving behaviour may
be affected and there is a risk of a puncture.
Wheels 283
Do-it-yourself Placement of reflective vest
Emergency equipment and self-help Fig. 324

Storage compartment for the
Emergency equipment reflective vest
Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle
The reflective vest can be stored in brackets under the front seats » Fig. 324.
Fire extinguisher
Fig. 325
Release the fire extinguisher
Fig. 323 Placing of the first-aid kit and the warning triangle: Ver-
sion 1/version 2
The following information applies for the first aid kit and warning triangle from
the ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Placing the first-aid kit
The first-aid box can be attached by a strap to the right-hand side of the boot
» Fig. 323. The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a holder underneath the driv-
er's seat.
Placing of the warning triangle - variant 1
The warning triangle can be inserted into the recess under the loading edge › To remove the fire extinguisher, release the safety catches on the two belts
in the direction of arrow » Fig. 325 and remove the fire extinguisher.
and secured with the fastener tape» Fig. 323 . Natural gas vehicles have the
warning triangle located under the floor mat in the luggage compartment. › To secure, place the fire extinguisher back in the mount and secure with the
belts.
Placing of the warning triangle - variant 2 The Owner´s Manual is fitted next to the fire extinguisher.
The first-aid box can be attached to the right-hand side of the boot using a
strap» Fig. 323. Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. After this date, the
correct function of the device is not guaranteed.
WARNING
Properly secure the first aid kit and the warning triangle, or there is a risk of WARNING
injury in the event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision. Always properly secure the fire extinguisher, there is a risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
284 Do-it-yourself
Vehicle tool kit WARNING
■ The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehi-
cle. Under no circumstances attempt to lift other vehicles or loads with this
– there is a risk of injury.
■ Always stow the tool safely in the box and make sure that it is attached
with the belt to the spare wheel - otherwise it could cause injury to the oc-
cupants if breaking suddenly or colliding with another vehicle.
CAUTION
Screw the jack back to its starting position prior to putting it back in its box -
Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the box.
Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the jack or the log folder.
Fig. 326 Vehicle tool kit
Changing a wheel
The box with the tool kit is located in the storage compartment for the spare
wheel and may be secured with tape, depending on specification. Preliminary work
Depending on the vehicle configuration, it may not contain all the compo- For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before
nents listed in the on-board tool kit. changing a wheel on the road.
1 Screwdriver › As far as possible, park the vehicle far away from the traffic flow - find a
2 Key for removing and installing the tail light place with a flat and firm surface.
3 Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts › Switch off the engine.
4 Towing eye › For vehicles with manual transmission, select 1st gear.
5 Clamps for removing the wheel trims
position.
6 Jack with sign › Firmly apply the handbrake.
7 Crank for the jack › Position the hazard warning system and the warning triangle at the prescri-
8 Wheel wrench bed distance.
9 Extraction pliers for the wheel bolt caps › All the occupants should get out of the vehicle. The passengers should not
10 Breakdown kit
stand on the road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for in-
stance) while the wheel is being changed.
› Uncouple any trailers.
Changing a wheel
› Take out the emergency or spare wheel » page 286.
› Remove the full wheel trim » page 286 or caps » page 287.
› Loosen the wheel bolts » page 287 » . 

› Jack up the vehicle» page 288 until the wheel that needs changing is clear of WARNING
the ground. A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads
› Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper, and this can result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on
etc.). the rim. Too low tightening torque, the wheels may fall off while driving -
› Remove the wheel carefully. risk of an accident. Therefore, drive cautiously and only at a moderate
› Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts. speed until the tightening torque has been checked.
› Lower the vehicle.
› Tighten the wheel bolts opposite each other using the wheel wrench (“alter-
nating crosswise”)» page 287. Removing/stowing the emergency or spare wheel
› Replace the wheel trim » page 286and the caps » page 287.
Fig. 327
When fitting a wheel with unidirectional tyres, ensure that the direction of ro-
Take out the wheel
tation is correct » page 279.
All bolts must be clean and must turn easily. If the screws are corroded and
difficult to move, then these must be replaced.
WARNING
■ Undo the wheel bolts just a little (about one turn) while the vehicle is not
jacked up. Otherwise, the wheel could come off and fall down – there is a
risk of injury. The wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and is fixed
■ Under no circumstances grease or oil the wheel bolts - risk of accident! in place with special bolt B » Fig. 327.
Take out the wheel
Subsequent steps › Lift up the floor in the luggage compartment.
After changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out. › Loosen the retaining belt and take out the box with the tool kit.
› Remove locking A in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 327.
› Stow the replaced wheel in the well under the floor covering of the luggage › Unscrew the screw B in direction of arrow 2 and remove the wheel.
compartment and secure with a locking screw.
› Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the band. Store wheel away
› Check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressure on the assembled wheel, › Place the wheel into the wheel well with the wheel rim pointing downward.
and, for vehicle with tyre pressure monitoring, save the tyre pressure values › Pull the fixing band through the opposite holes in the wheel rim.
in the system » page 249. › Screw in nut B in the opposite direction to arrow 2 » Fig. 327.
› Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench › Insert locking A in the opposite direction to which arrow 1 is pointing.
as soon as possible. The prescribed tightening torque is 120 Nm. › Replace the box with the tool kit into the wheel and secure it with the tape.
› Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment.
Replace the damaged tyre. It is not recommended to repair the tyre.
Full wheel trim
Removing the trim
› Hang the clamps for removing the full wheel trims at the edge of one of the
ventilation openings in the full wheel trim. 
286 Do-it-yourself
› Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off Anti-theft wheel bolts
the wheel trim.
Installing the trim Fig. 329
› Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening. Anti-theft wheel bolt and at-
› Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks tachment
correctly in place.
The back of the wheel trim supplied by the factory or from the ŠKODA Origi-
nal Accessories shows the position for the anti-theft wheel bolt. When using
the anti-theft wheel bolt, this is to be fitted in this point » .
WARNING
We recommend that you use hub caps from ŠKODA Original Accessories. The anti-theft wheel bolts protect the wheels from theft. The upper section
A sufficient air supply may not be able to be guaranteed with other wheel B » Fig. 329 must be used to loosen/tighten these.
trims to cool the braking system – Otherwise there is a risk of an accident. › Insert the upper section B on the anti-theft wheel bolt A until it stops.
› Insert the wrench on the upper section B until it stops and loosen/tighten
CAUTION the wheel bolt.
■ If the wheel trim is set outside the position marked for the anti-theft wheel › Removing the upper section.
bolt, there is a risk of damaging the wheel trim. The attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts must always be kept in the
■ Use only manual pressure and do not hit the full wheel trim – otherwise there
vehicle in case of a possible wheel change!
is a risk of damaging the trim.
For wheel trims supplied ex-factory or from ŠKODA Original Accessories, the
Note anti-theft wheel bolt should be installed in the position marked on the back of
We recommend that you use hub caps from ŠKODA Original Accessories. the wheel trim.
Note
Wheel bolts
We recommend that you retain the label with the code number. A replacement
upper section can be acquired from ŠKODA original parts based on this.
Fig. 328
Remove the cap
Loosening/tightening wheel bolts
Fig. 330
Loosening the wheel bolts 
› To remove the cap, insert the extraction pliers up to the stop on the cap and
pull this in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 328.
› To install, insert the cap up to the stop on the wheel bolt.

› Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop. Use the associated Use the jack from the tool kit to raise the vehicle. Position the jack at the jack-
upper section for the anti-theft wheel bolts » Fig. 329 on page 287. ing point closest to the wheel to be replaced.
› To loosen the screws, hold the wrench end and turn the screw about one The runner connectors are located on the lower sill variant 1 A or. Variant 2
turn in the direction of arrow » Fig. 330. B » Fig. 331.
› To tighten the screws, hold the wrench end and turn the screw against the
direction of the arrow » Fig. 330, until it is tight. › Insert the crank 7 into the mount on the jack 6 » page 285.
› Support the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground
WARNING and ensure that the jack is located in a vertical position at the jacking point
If it proves difficult to undo the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end of » Fig. 332 - .
the wrench with your foot. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and › Use the crank to raise the jack until its claw encloses the bar » Fig. 332 - .
make sure you keep your footing - risk of accident. › Raise the vehicle until the wheel is a little off the floor.
WARNING
Raising the vehicle Observe the following instructions, otherwise there is risk of injury.
■ Secure the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away.
■ Always ensure the base plate of the lifting jack cannot slip.
■ Provide a wide and stable base under the jack on loose surfaces (e.g.
such as gravel).
■ Create a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber floor mat) under the jack on a
smooth surface (e.g. cobblestones).
■ Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
■ Never position any body parts, such as arms or legs, under the vehicle,
while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack.
■ When the vehicle is raised, never start the engine.
Fig. 331 Jacking points for the jack: Version 1/version 2
CAUTION
It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly attached to the bar of the
lower beam – otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle.
Puncture repair kit
 Introduction
The following information applies to the factory-fitted puncture repair kit.

Use the puncture repair kit to seal tyre punctures with a diameter of up to
Fig. 332 Attach lifting jack about 4 mm.
Performing a repair with the breakdown kit not at all intended to replace a
Before the vehicle is raised, the safety instructions must be observed » . permanent repair on the tyre. Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist
garage. 
288 Do-it-yourself
Immediately replace the tyre that was repaired using the puncture repair kit, or 1 Sticker with speed designation “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph”
consult a specialist garage about repair options. 2 Valve remover
Do not remove foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. nails 3 Inflation hose with plug
etc.). 4 Air compressor (the layout of the controls may be different depending on
Do not use the puncture repair kit in the following instances. the type of air compressor delivered with the vehicle)
▶ The rim is damaged. 5 Tyre inflation hose
▶ The outdoor temperature is below the minimum temperature indicated in 6 Button for the tyre pressure reduction
the instruction manual of the tyre filling bottle with sealant. 7 Tyre inflation pressure indicator
▶ Tyre punctures of more than 4 mm.
8 12 volt cable connector
▶ There is damage to the tyre wall.
9 ON and OFF switch
▶ The expiration date (see inflation bottle) has passed.
10 Tyre inflation bottle with sealing agent
WARNING 11 Replacement valve core
■ If the sealant comes into contact with skin, wash the affected area imme-
Note
diately.
■ Observe the instructions provided in the puncture repair kit manufactur- The declaration of conformity is included with the air compressor or the log
er's instructions for use. folder.
Preparing to use the puncture repair kit

Description of puncture repair kit
For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before

performing a wheel repair the road.
› As far as possible, park the vehicle far away from the traffic flow - find a
place with a flat and firm surface.
› Switch off the engine.
› For vehicles with manual transmission, select 1st gear.
position.
› Position the hazard warning system and the warning triangle at the prescri-
bed distance.
› All the occupants should get out of the vehicle. The passengers should not
Fig. 333 Description of puncture repair kit stand on the road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for in-
stance) while the wheel is being repaired.
› Uncouple any trailers.
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compart-
ment.

Sealing and inflating tyres Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar is achieved, continue the journey
at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
WARNING
Sealing ■ If the tire does not inflate to at least 2.0 bar, the damage is too great. The
› Unscrew the valve cap from the damaged tyre. sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre.  Do not drive the vehicle!
› Insert the valve remover 2 » Fig. 333 on page 289 on the valve insert, so Seek help from a specialist garage.
that the valve insert fits into the slot of the valve remover. ■ The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is be-
› Unscrew the valve insert and lay it on a clean surface (e.g. cloth, paper etc.). ing inflated – risk of burning.
› Forcefully shake bottle 10 several times.
› Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflater bottle 10 . The film CAUTION
on the cap is pierced automatically. Switch off the air compressor at the latest after the running time according to
› Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully onto the instructions of the repair kit manufacturer has elapsed – otherwise there is
the tyre valve. the risk of compressor damage! Allow the air compressor to cool a few mi-
› Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing nutes before switching it on again.
agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre.
› Remove the filler plug from the tyre valve. Information for driving with repaired tyres
› Screw in the valve insert using the valve remover 2 .
Inflating
› Screw the air compressor tyre inflation hose 5 » Fig. 333 on page 289 firmly The inflation pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked after driving for 10
onto the tyre valve. minutes.
› For vehicles with manual transmission, set the lever in the neutral position.
› On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or less
position. › The tyre cannot be properly sealed with the breakdown kit.  Do not drive
› Start the engine. the vehicle! Seek help from a specialist garage.
› Plug the connector 8 into the 12 volt socket » page 98. If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or more
› Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 9 . › Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value » page 280.
› Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar is reached, turn off the air com- › Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum
pressor. Observe the maximum running time of the air compressor according speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
to the instructions of the repair kit manufacturer » .
› If an air pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar has not been reached, unscrew the tyre in- WARNING
flation hose 5 from the tyre valve. A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard
› Drive the vehicle approx. 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the seal- tyre. The following guidelines must be observed.
ing agent to “distribute” in the tyre. ■ Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
› Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose 5 back onto the tyre valve and repeat ■ Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
the inflation process.
› Stick the corresponding sticker 1 on the dashboard in the driver's field of
view.
290 Do-it-yourself
Jump-starting The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence.
› Attach clamp 1 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.
 Introduction › Attach clamp 2 to the positive terminal of the current-giving battery.
› Attach clamp 3 to the negative terminal of the current-giving battery.
WARNING › For vehicles with the START-STOP system, secure the clamp 4 to the
ground point of the engine A » Fig. 334.
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
■
the engine compartment » page 272.
› For vehicles without the START-STOP system, secure the clamp 4 to a solid
metal part that is firmly attached to the engine block or secure to the engine
■ When handling the vehicle battery, the following warnings must be ob-
block directly.
served » page 277.
■ A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be- Starting engine
low 0 °C. If the battery is frozen, do not carry out a jump start with the bat- › Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle.
tery of another vehicle – risk of explosion! › Start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with an acid level that is too low – risk › If the engine does not start within 10 s, then cancel the starting procedure
of explosion and caustic burns! and repeat after half a minute.
› Remove the jump start cables in the reverse order as attachment.
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle WARNING
■ Never clamp the jump-start cable to the negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery - danger of explosion.
■ The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each
other – risk of short circuit!
■ The jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery
must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehi-
cle – risk of short circuit!
■ Route the jumper cables so that they cannot be caught in rotating parts in
the engine compartment - danger of injuries and the risk of vehicle dam-
age.
Fig. 334 Jump-starting:  - discharged battery,  - power-supplying
battery/ground point of the engine for the START-STOP system
If it is not possible to start the engine due to a discharged vehicle battery, the
battery of another vehicle can be used to start the engine. Only use jump-start
cables which have an adequately large cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
The rated voltage of the two batteries must be 12V. The capacity (Ah) of the
current-giving battery must not be significantly less than the capacity of the
discharged battery in your vehicle.

Towing the vehicle Driver of the towed vehicle
› If possible, the vehicle should be towed with the engine running. Operate the
Information about the towing process brake booster and power steering only if the engine is running, otherwise the
brake pedal must be depressed more strongly and more power has to be di-
rected to the steering.
› If it is not possible to start the engine, switch on the ignition so that the
steering wheel is not locked and so that the turn signal lights, windscreen
wipers and windscreen washer system can be used.
› Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
› Always keep the tow rope taut during the towing procedure.
WARNING
■ Wound tow ropes must not be used for towing » Fig. 335- , the towing
Fig. 335 Braided tow rope / Spiral tow rope eye may unscrew out of the vehicle - risk of accident.
■ Ensure tow rope is not twisted - risk of accident.
For towing using a tow rope, use only a braided synthetic fibre rope » Fig. 335
- » .
CAUTION
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to thetowing eyes at the front ■ Do not tow-start the engine – risk of damaging the engine! The battery from
» page 292, towing eyes at the rear» page 293or to thetowing device of the another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid » page 291, Jump-starting.
trailer device » page 250. ■ In the case of off-road towing manoeuvres, for both vehicles there is the risk
Conditions for towing. that the fastening parts could be overloaded and damaged.
 Cars with automatic gearboxes must not be towed with the rear wheels Note
raised - there is a risk of gearbox damage!
We recommend that you use the tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
 If the gearbox has no oil, your vehicle must be towed with the front axle
raised clear of the ground or on a breakdown vehicle or trailer.
Front towing eye
 The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
 The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer
if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the tow-
ing distance is greater than 50 km.
Driver of the tow vehicle
› On vehicles with manual transmission, engage gear slowly when starting.
› On vehicles with automatic transmission, accelerate with particular care.
› Only then approach correctly when the rope is taut.
Fig. 336 Remove cap / install towing eye 
292 Do-it-yourself
Remove/insert cap
› To remove, press on the cap in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove this
in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 336.
› To insert, insert the cap in arrow range 1 and then press on the opposite
edge of the cap. The cap must engage firmly.
Removing/installing the towing eye
› To install, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of arrow 3
» Fig. 336 until the stop» .
› Tighten the towing eye using a wheel wrench or similar object. To do this, in-
sert the wheel wrench through the eye.
Fig. 338 Remove cap / install towing eye - Variant 2
› To remove, unscrew the towing against the direction of arrow 3 .
WARNING Remove/insert cap
The towing eye must always be tightened, otherwise the towing eye may › To remove, press on the cap in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove this
break during the towing. in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 337.
› To insert, insert the cap in arrow range 1 and then press on the opposite
edge of the cap. The cap must engage firmly.
Towing eye rear
Removing/installing the towing eye
› To install, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of the arrow
3 » Fig. 337» Fig. 338until it clicks into place» .
› Tighten the towing eye using a wheel wrench or similar object. To do this, in-
sert the wheel wrench through the eye.
› To remove, unscrew the towing against the direction of arrow 3 .
Vehicles with a tow hitch
For vehicles with factory-fitted towing device, at the back there is no mount
for a screw-in towing eye. Use the detachable ball rod for towing » page 250,
Hitch.
Fig. 337 Remove cap / install towing eye - Variant 1
WARNING
The towing eye must always be tightened, otherwise the towing eye may
break during the towing.

Remote control and removable light - changing the battery Remote control of the auxiliary heating
 Introduction
CAUTION
■ The replacement battery/batteries must comply with the original specifica-
tion.
■ Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the rechargeable batter-
ies.
Note
We recommend having the faulty battery/batteries replaced by a specialist ga- Fig. 340 Open the cover/remove the battery
rage.
Key with fold-out key bit
› Use a thin screwdriver to remove the cover A in the area B » Fig. 340.
› Open the cover in the direction of arrow 1 and push out in the direction of
arrow 2 .
› Use the screwdriver to remove and replace the battery in the area C .
› Insert the battery cover in the opposite direction to arrow 2 until it audibly
clicks into place.
Removable light
Fig. 341
Locking clip on the battery cov-
Fig. 339 Open the cover/remove the battery er
› Fold out the key bit.

› Press off the battery cover A » Fig. 339 with your thumb or by using a flat
screwdriver in region B .
› Open the battery in the direction of the arrow 1 .
› Remove the discharged battery in the direction of arrow 2.  Read and observe on page 294 first.
› Hold any button on the key for about 5 s.
› Insert the new battery. › Lever off the cover for the rechargeable batteries with a narrow and pointed
object from the area of the lock clips A » Fig. 341.
› Insert the battery cover A and press it down until it clicks audibly into place.
› Replace the batteries.
The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked › Insert the cover for the rechargeable batteries and press it down until it
with the key after replacing the battery » page 63. clicks into place. 
294 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION Locking the door without locking cylinders
If an incorrect battery type is used or a non-rechargeable battery, there is a
risk of damaging the light and the vehicle's electrical system.
Emergency unlocking / locking of doors
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
Fig. 343 Left door/right door:
› Open the corresponding door.

› In vehicles with the panel A , remove this panel » Fig. 343.
› Insert the key into the slot and turn in the direction of the arrow (sprung po-
sition).
Fig. 342 Handle on the driver's door: Open lock cover / lock cylinder
› Replace the cover A.
with key After closing, the door is locked.
In an emergency, the driver's door can be locked/unlocked via the lock cylinder Unlock the boot lid
using the key.
› Pull on the door handle and hold.
› Insert the key into the recess on the lower side of the cover and fold up the
cover in the direction of arrow » Fig. 342.
› Release the door handle.
› For vehicles withLHD,insert the key with the fold-out key bit with the but-
tons facing upwards » Fig. 342 into the lock cylinder and unlock/lock the ve-
hicle.
› For vehicles with RHD, insert the key with the fold-out key bit with the but-
tons facing downwards into the lock and unlock/lock the vehicle.
› Pull on the door handle and hold. Fig. 344 Unlatch lid: Version 1/version 2
› Replace the cover.
CAUTION The boot lid can be unlocked manually from inside.
Make sure you do not damage the paint when performing an emergency lock- › Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the recess or the opening in the
ing/unlocking. trim» Fig. 344 as far as the stop.
› Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.

Selector lever-emergency unlocking Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Fig. 346
Setting the service position for
the wiper arms
Fig. 345 Remove the cover/release the selector lever

› Open the stowage compartment in the front centre console.
› Grab hold of the cover A in the area of the arrows and carefully raise it for-
wards in the direction of the arrow 1 and then backwards » Fig. 345.
› Press on the yellow plastic part in the direction of arrow2 , simultaneously
press the lock button in the selector lever handle and put the lever in position
N.
If the selector lever is moved again to position P, it is once again blocked.
Fig. 347 Replace windscreen wiper blade
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
 Introduction
Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade, put the windscreen wiper arms
into the service position.
WARNING
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea- Setting the service position
sons. › Switch the ignition on and off again.
› Within 10 seconds, push the lever in the direction of arrow » Fig. 346 and
hold for approximately 2 seconds.
Removing the wiper blade
› Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 347.
› Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
› Hold the wiper arm and press the safety catch A in the direction of arrow
2.
› Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 3 . 
296 Do-it-yourself
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
Fuses and light bulbs
› Push the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction of the arrow 3
until it locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly
Fuses
attached.
› Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.  Introduction
› Turn on the ignition and press the lever into the direction of the arrow
» Fig. 346.
Fig. 349
Move the windscreen wiper arms into the home position. Blown fuse
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. A blown fuse is recognisa-

ble by the molten metal strip » Fig. 349 /.
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 272.
Fig. 348 Replace the rear window wiper blade
 Read and observe on page 296 first. CAUTION

■ Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage.
Removing the wiper blade ■ If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, then seek the assistance of
› Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 348. a specialist garage.
› Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction. ■ Do “not repair” the fuses and do not replace them with stronger ones - it can
› Hold the wiper arm and press the safety catch A in the direction of arrow cause a fire and could damage parts of the electrical system.
2.
› Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 3 . Note
■We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle.
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade ■There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse. Multiple fuses
› Push the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction of the arrow 3 may exist for a single power consuming device.
until it locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly
attached.
› Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.

Fuses in the dashboard - LHD  Read and observe and on page 297 first.
The fuse box is located behind the storage compartment on the front passen-
Fig. 350 ger side.
Storage compartment on the
driver's side Fold down the storage compartment and replace the fuse
› Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
› Insert a screwdriver under the side cover » Fig. 351.
› Unlock the cover in the direction of the arrow 1 .
› Push the cover out in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› Open the storage compartment.
› Insert a screwdriver from the side into the dash panel in the direction of ar-
 Read and observe and on page 297 first. row 3 .
› Use the screwdriver to unlock the brake rod A of the storage compartment
The fuse box is located behind the storage compartment on the driver's side. in the direction of arrow 4 .
Replacing fuses
› Remove the storage compartment in the direction of the arrow 5 .
› Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box in the engine com-
› Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers. partment » Fig. 353 on page 300.
› Open the storage box on the driver's side. › Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse.
› Hold the stacker laterally in the region A and open by pulling in the direction › Replace the clamp in the original position.
of arrow 1 (A greater force is required to open) » Fig. 350.
› Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box in the engine com- Fold back the storage compartment
partment » Fig. 353 on page 300. › Move the stop buffer B of the storage compartment behind the brackets
› Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse. C » Fig. 351.
› Replace the clamp in the original position. › Push in the storage compartment in the opposite direction of the arrow 5 .
› Close the compartment by pressing in arrow direction 2 until you hear it › Insert the brake rod and lock it against the arrow 4 with a screwdriver.
click. › Push in the side cover against the direction of the arrow 2 .
› Press the side cover fully against the direction of the arrow 1 .
Fuses in the dashboard - RHD › Close the storage compartment.
Fig. 351 Storage compartment on the front passenger side
298 Do-it-yourself
Fuse assignment in the dashboard No. Consumer
14 Air blower for air conditioning,heating
Fig. 352 15 Electric steering lock
Fuses
16 Phonebox, Wireless phone charging
17 Instrument cluster, emergency call
18 Reversing camera
19 KESSY system
20 Operating lever underneath the steering wheel
21 Adaptive Shock absorber
22 Towing hitch
23 Panoramic tilt / slide sunroof
24 Light - right
Central locking- front left door, window - left, exterior mirrors -
25
Heating, fold-in function, setting the mirror surface
26 Heated front seats
27 Interior lighting
No. Consumer 28 Towing hitch
1 Not assigned 29 SCR (AdBlue®)
2 Not assigned 30 Heated rear seats
3 Not assigned 31 Not assigned
4 Heated steering wheel 32 Parking aid (Park Assist)
5 Databus 33 Airbag switch for hazard warning lights
6 Sensor Alarm TCS, ESC, tyre pressure monitoring, air conditioning, reversing light
34 switch, mirror with automatic blackout, START-STOP, heated rear
Air conditioning, heating, recipient of the wireless remote control
7 seats, sport sound generator
for auxiliary heating, selector lever of the automatic transmission
Headlight range adjustment, diagnosis socket, sensor (camera) be-
Light switch, rain sensor, diagnosis connection, ambient lighting, 35
8 hind the windscreen, radar sensor
control unit for front headlights
36 Headlight right
9 All-wheel drive
37 Headlight left
10 Infotainment screen
38 Towing hitch
11 Light - left
Central - front right door, window lifter - right, right Mirrors - Heat-
12 Infotainment 39
ing, fold-in function, setting the mirror surface
13 Belt tensioner - driver's side
40 12-Volt power socket 

No. Consumer › Replace the clamp in the original position.
41 Belt tensioner - front passenger side
› Replace the cover, push the lock buttons of the cover together and lock.
42 Central - rear doors, headlamp washers, washer CAUTION
43 Music amplifier The cover of the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be used
correctly, otherwise water may penetrate into the fuse box – there is a danger
44 Towing hitch
of damage to the vehicle!
45 Electrically adjustable seats
46 230 volt power socket Fuse assignment in engine compartment
47 Rear window wiper
48 Assist system for blind spot monitoring Fig. 354
49 Engine starting, clutch pedal switch Fuses
50 Opening the boot lid
51 SCR (AdBlue®)
52 USB socket
53 Heated rear window
Fuses in the engine compartment
No. Consumer
1 ESC, ABS
2 ESC, ABS
3 Engine control system
Fig. 353 Fuse box cover: Removing the cover / Plastic clip for fuses Radiator fan, oil temperature sensor, air mass meter, fuel pressure
4 control valve, electric booster heater, oil pressure valve, exhaust
 Read and observe and on page 297 first. gas recirculation valve, glow plug, SCR (AdBlue®)
5 Ignition coil of CNG relay, fuel injectors, fuel metering valve
Replacing fuses
› Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers. 6 Brake sensor
› Simultaneously press the lock buttons of the cover together in the direction 7
Coolant pump, radiator shutters, oil pressure valve, gear oil valve,
of arrow 1 and remove the cover in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 353. crankcase ventilation heating
› Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box » Fig. 353. 8 Lambda probe
› Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse. 9 Ignition, exhaust flap 
300 Do-it-yourself
No. Consumer For this reason, we recommend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or
seeking other expert help in the event of any uncertainties.
10 Fuel pump, ignition
▶ Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb.
11 Electrical auxiliary heating system
▶ Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designa-
12 Electrical auxiliary heating system
tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
13 Windscreen heater - left
We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage
14 Windscreen heater - right after replacing a bulb in the low, high or fog beam.
15 Horn
16 Ignition, fuel pump, CNG relay WARNING
■ Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
17 ABS, ESC, motor control system, Relay for heated windscreen
engine compartment » page 272.
18 Databus, battery data module ■ Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not suffi-
19 Windscreen wipers ciently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficulty
20 Anti-theft alarm by other road users.
■ H7 and H8 bulbs are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb -
21 Automatic gearbox
risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety
22 Engine control system glasses when changing a bulb.
23 Starter
24 Electrical auxiliary heating system CAUTION
31 Vacuum pump for the brake system ■ Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest
32 Not assigned amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth,
napkin, or similar.
33 Oil pump for automatic gearbox ■ The cap of the filament bulb must always be seated correctly in the head-
34 Front differential light, otherwise this may allow water and debris to enter the headlight - risk of
35 Not assigned damage to the headlights.
36 Not assigned
Note
37 Aux. heating We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the vehi-
38 Not assigned cle.
Bulbs
 Introduction
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possi-
ble to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other
bulbs or LED lights must be replaced by a specialist garage.

Bulb arrangement in the halogen headlights › Insert the connector, with the bulb, into the headlight opposite to the direc-
tion of arrow 2 until you feel it lock into place.
Fig. 355
› Insert the protective capA » Fig. 355 on page 302 and turn it opposite to
the direction of the arrow.
Left headlight
Changing the bulb for the main beam
Arrangement for replacing bulbs » Fig. 355

A Low beam
B Main beam
Fig. 357 Changing the bulb for the main beam
Changing the bulb for the low beam
› Turn the protective cap B » Fig. 355 on page 302 in direction of the arrow.
› Disconnect the connector with the light bulb in the direction of arrow 1
» Fig. 357.
› Remove the connector to the bulb in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Remove the connector.
› Plug the connector into the new bulb so that the fixing lug A on the bulb
points downwards.
› Insert the connector, with the bulb, into the headlight opposite to the direc-
tion of arrow 2 until you feel it lock into place.
Fig. 356 Changing the bulb for the low beam › Insert the protective capB » Fig. 355 on page 302 and turn it opposite to
the direction of the arrow.
› Turn the protective cap A » Fig. 355 on page 302 in direction of the arrow.
› Disconnect the connector with the light bulb in the direction of arrow 1
» Fig. 356.
› Remove the connector to the bulb in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Remove the connector.
› Plug the connector into the new bulb so that the fixing lug A on the bulb
points upwards.
302 Do-it-yourself
Change bulb for fog lights switch - Variant 1 › Fit the connector.
Refit the headlight and grille
› Insert the fog light opposite to the direction of arrow 4 » Fig. 358, push op-
posite to the direction of arrow 3 and bolt into place.
› Insert the guard and push it gently until it locks into place.
Change bulb for fog lights switch - Variant 2
Fig. 358 Remove the fog lamp / bulb change - variant 1
Remove the protective grille and headlight

› Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel trims into opening A
» Fig. 358.
› By pulling the hook in direction of arrow 1 , remove the protective grille in Fig. 359 Remove the fog lamp / bulb change - variant 2
the direction of arrow 2 .
› Unscrew the screws B with the screwdriver from the tool kit.  Read and observe and on page 301 first.
› Carefully move the headlights in the direction of arrow 3 and remove in the Remove the cover and headlight
direction of arrow 4 .
› Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel trims into opening A
Replacing the light bulb » Fig. 359.
› Press the latch on the connector in the direction of arrow 5 . › Remove the cover by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow 1 .
› Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 6 . › Unscrew the screws B with the screwdriver from the tool kit.
› Turn the holder with the bulb to the stop in the direction of the arrow 7 . › Raise the headlights in the direction of arrow 2 and remove carefully in the
› Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow 8 . direction of arrow 3 .
› Insert a new holder with the bulb in the headlamp and turn it in the direction Replacing the light bulb
of arrow 7 as far as the stop.
› Press the latch on the connector in the direction of arrow 4 . 

› Turn the holder with the bulb to the stop in the direction of the arrow 6 .
› Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow 7 .
› Insert a new holder with the bulb in the headlamp and turn it in the direction
of arrow 6 as far as the stop.
› Fit the connector.
Refit the headlight and cover
› Replace the fog light by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow 3
» Fig. 359 and tighten.
› Insert the guard and push it gently until it locks into place. Fig. 361 Connector removal variants
Removing/installing tail light  Read and observe and on page 301 first.
Removing
› Open the boot lid.
› Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel trims into opening A 1)
» Fig. 360.
› Remove the cover by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow 1 .
› Unscrew the screws B with the key from the tool kit.
› Hold the light and carefully remove in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Remove connector C .
Remove the plug
The connector type varies according to the vehicle version » Fig. 361.
› For connectors with lateral safety tabs, push these in the direction of arrows
A or B and remove the connector carefully.
› For connectors with removable safety tabs C , pull these in the direction of
arrow 1 , press the safety tabs in the direction of arrow 2 and remove the
connector carefully.
Fitting
› Insert the connector into the light and lock it securely.
Fig. 360 Removing lamp › With a plug with removable safety tab, secure this in the opposite direction
to the arrow 1 » Fig. 361.
› Insert the lamp with pins D » Fig. 360 into the recesses E in the body.
› Carefully push the cover in » . 
1) The position of the opening may vary depending on the vehicle model.
304 Do-it-yourself
› Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover. The cover must engage Replacing the bulbs in the tail lamp assembly - Variant 2
securely.
› Shut the boot lid.
CAUTION
■ Ensure that the cable bundle does not become stuck between the body and
the lamp when it is being refitted – or there is a risk of damage to the electrical
installation and risk of water ingress.
■ If you are not sure whether the cable bundle has become pinched, we rec-
ommend that you have the light connection checked by a specialist garage.
■ Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when
removing and installing the tail lamp.
Fig. 363 Outer part of the lamp/Remove holder with bulb
Replacing the bulbs in the tail lamp assembly - Variant 1
› Turn the holder with the bulb A in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 363.
› Remove the socket with the bulb from the lamp housing in the direction of
arrow 2 .
› Push the faulty bulb into the holder, turn in anti -clockwise direction up to
the stop and remove.
› Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
stop.
› Reinsert the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn in the oppo-
site direction of the arrow 1 to the stop.
Fig. 362 Outer part of the lamp/holder with bulbs
› Unscrew the lamp holder » Fig. 362 with the screwdriver from the car tool
kit, and remove the lamp holder from the light assembly.
› Turn the respective light bulb counter-clockwise to the stop and remove it
from the bulb holder.
› Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
stop.
› Insert the bulb holder into the light and screw in tightly.

5 Maximum permissible front axle load
Technical data
6 Maximum permissible rear axle load
Technical data Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into
Basic vehicle data the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome. This num-
ber is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen
 Introduction (together with a VIN bar code), and on the type plate.
The VIN can also be displayed in the  /  →  → Events menu.
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece-
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual. Engine number
The listed performance values were determined without performance-reduc- The engine number is embossed in the engine block.
ing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system. Supplementary Information (applies to Russia)
The values given have been determined in accordance with the rules and con- The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the
ditions specified in statutory or technical regulations for determining opera- registration documents, field 17.
tional and technical data for motor vehicles. Maximum permissible towed weight
The values listed are for the basic model without any optional equipment. The listed maximum allowable trailer weight is only valid for altitudes up to
1000 m above sea level.
Vehicle data The engine output falls as altitude increases, as does the vehicle's climbing
power. Therefore, for every additional 1000 m in height (or part), the maxi-
Fig. 364 mum permissible towed weight must be reduced by 10%.
Type plate
The towed weight is made up of the actual weights of the loaded towing vehi-
cle and the loaded trailer.
WARNING
Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights – risk of acci-
dent and damage!
Type plate Operating weight

The type plate » Fig. 364 is located at the bottom of the B-pillar on the right- This specification is only a guide value and corresponds to the lowest possible
hand driver's side. operating weight without further weight-reducing equipment (e.g. spare
The type plate contains the following data. wheel etc.). This includes 75 kg driver's weight, the weight of the operating
1 Vehicle manufacturers fluids and the on-board tool kit and a fuel tank filled to min. 90%. 
2 Vehicle identification number (VIN)

3 Maximum permissible gross weight
4 Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer)
306 Technical data

Operating weight - Octavia Warning triangle – Octavia Combi
Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg) Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg)
MG 1246 MG 1268
1.0 l/85 kW TSI 1.0 l/85 kW TSI
DSG 1262/1268a) DSG 1284/1290a)
MG 1265 MG 1287
1.4 l/110 kW TSI 1.4 l/110 kW TSI
DSG 1289 DSG 1311
MG 1280 1.5 l/96 kW TSI G-TEC DSG -b)
1.5 l/110 kW TSI
DSG 1295 MG 1302
1.5 l/110 kW TSI
MG 1223 DSG 1317
1.6 l/81 kW MPI
AG 1263 MG 1245
1.6 l/81 kW MPI
DSG (EU5) 1343 AG 1285
1.8 l/132 kW TSI
DSG (EU6) 1345/1343b) DSG (EU5) 1365
1.8 l/132 kW TSI
DSG 1388 DSG (EU6) 1367/1365c)
2.0 l/140 kW TSI
DSG 4x4 1473 DSG 1410
2.0 l/140 kW TSI
MG 1348 DSG 4x4 1495
1.6 ltr./85 kW TDI CR MG 4x4 1463 MG 1370
DSG 1363 1.6 ltr./85 kW TDI CR MG 4x4 1485
MG 1335 DSG 1385
DSG 1355 MG 1357
MG 1373 DSG 1377
2.0 ltr./110 kW TDI CR DSG 1408 MG 1395
DSG 4x4 1468/1501a) 2.0 ltr./110 kW TDI CR DSG 1430
2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1463 DSG 4x4 1490/1523a)
a) Applies to cars with the EU6AG emission standard. 2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1485
b) Only valid for some countries. a) Applies to cars with the EU6AG emission standard.
b)
Operating weight - Octavia RS c)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
Only valid for some countries.
Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg)
Operating weight - Octavia Combi RS
MG 1410
2.0 l/180 kW TSI Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg)
DSG 1442/1448a)
MG 1432
DSG 1465 2.0 l/180 kW TSI
2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR DSG 1464a)/1470 
DSG 4x4 1550
a) Applies to cars with the EU6BG emission standard.
Technical data 307

Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg) Note
DSG 1487 ■ The emission and fuel consumption values have been determined in accord-
2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR ance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements
DSG 4x4 1572
for determining operational and technical data for motor vehicles.
a) Applies to cars with the EU6BG emission standard. ■ Depending on the range of equipment, style of driving, traffic situation,
Operating weight - Octavia Combi Scout weather influences and vehicle condition, consumption values may deviate
from the indicated values.
Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg)
2.0 l/140 kW TSI DSG 4x4 1566
2.0 ltr./110 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1561/1594a)
2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1559
a) Applies to cars with the EU6AG emission standard.
Payload
It is possible to calculate the approximate maximum payload from the differ-
ence between the permissible total weight and the operating weight.
The payload consists of the following weights.
▶ The weight of the passengers.
▶ The weight of all items of luggage and other loads.
▶ The weight of the roof load including the roof rack system.
▶ The weight of the equipment that is excluded from the operating weight.
▶ Trailer bearing load for trailer towing » page 250.
Measurement of fuel consumption and CO2 emissions according to

ECE Regulations and EU Directives
The data on fuel consumption and CO2 emissions were not available at the
time of going to press.
The valid specifications for your vehicle can be found in the technical vehicle
documentation (e.g. vehicle approval documentation, the COC document) or
at a ŠKODA partner.
308 Technical data

Dimensions - Octavia
Fig. 365 Vehicle dimensions
The vehicle dimensions given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The dimensions listed below are for the basic model without any optional equipment.
Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm)
» Fig. 365 Specification Octavia Octavia 4x4 Octavia RS
A Height 1461 1459 1448/1464a)
B Front track » page 311
C Width 1814 1814 1814
D Rear track » page 311
E Width including exterior mirror 2017 2017 2017
F Clearance 141 138 142
Basic dimension 2686 2680 2680
G Wheel base Vehicles with the 1.8 l./132 kW TSI and 2.0 l./140 kW TSI en-
2680 - -
gine
H Length 4670 4670 4689
a) Only valid for some countries.
Technical data 309

Dimensions - Octavia estate
Fig. 366 Vehicle dimensions
The vehicle dimensions given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The dimensions listed below are for the basic model without any optional equipment.
Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm)
OCTAVIA Estate Octavia Combi Octavia Combi
» Fig. 366 Specification Octavia Estate
4x4 RS Scout
Basic dimension 1465 1463 1452/1467a) 1531
A Height
G-TEC vehicles -b) - - -
B Front track » page 311
C Width 1814 1814 1814 1814
D Rear track » page 311
E Width including exterior mirror 2017 2017 2017 2017
F Clearance 141 139 142 171
Basic dimension 2686 2680 2680 2680
Vehicles with the 1.8 l./132 kW TSI and 2.0
G Wheel base 2680 - - -
l./140 kW TSI engine
G-TEC vehicles -b)
- - -
H Length 4667 4667 4689 4687
b) The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
310 Technical data

Track gauge front/rear
Engine Front track Rear track
1.0 l/85 kW TSI 1549 1540
1.4 l/110 kW TSI 1543 1534
1.5 l/96 kW TSI G-TEC -a) -a)
1.5 l/110 kW TSI 1543 1534
1.6 l/81 kW MPI 1549 1540
1.8 l/132 kW TSI 1543 1542
2.0 l/140 kW TSI 1543/1538b) 1542/1539b)
2.0 l/180 kW TSI 1535 1544
1.6 ltr./85 kW TDI CR 1549 1540/1548c)
2.0 ltr./105 kW TDI CR 1543 1534
2.0 ltr./110 kW TDI CR 1543/1538b) 1534/1539b)/1542c)
2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR 1543c)/1535d)/1538b) 1542c)/1544d)/1539b)
a) The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
b) Applies to Octavia Scout vehicles.
c) Applies to Octavia 4x4/Octavia Combi 4x4 vehicles.
d) Applies to Octavia RS/Octavia Combi RS vehicles.
Technical data 311

Overhang angle
Angle » Fig. 367
A Overhang angle, front
B Overhang angle, rear
The values shown indicate the maximum incline of an embankment, up which
the vehicle can drive at a slow speed without collision of the bumper or under-
body. The values listed represent the maximum axle load at the front and rear.
Fig. 367 Overhang angle: Octavia/Octavia Estate
Departure angle (°) - Octavia

Octavia Octavia 4x4 Octavia RS
» Fig. 367
A B A B A B
Base value 14.0 12.1 14.2 12.4 12.9/14.1a) 12.8/12.9a)
Vehicles with the 1.8 l./132 kW TSI and 2.0
14.1 12.5 - - - -
l./140 kW TSI engine
Departure angle (°) - Octavia Combi

Octavia Estate OCTAVIA Estate 4x4 Octavia Combi RS Octavia Combi Scout
» Fig. 367
A B A B A B A B
Base value 14.0 12.4 14.2 12.3 12.8/14.0 a)
12.5/12.7 a)
16.6 14.5
G-TEC vehicles -b) -b) - - - - - -
b) The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
312 Technical data

Vehicle-specific details per engine type
 Introduction
The values given have been determined in accordance with the rules and conditions specified in statutory or technical regulations for determining operational
and technical data for motor vehicles.
The exhaust gas standard is specified in the vehicle's technical documentation, as well as in the declaration of conformity (in so-called COC document). The
declaration of conformity (the so-called. COC document) can be obtained from a ŠKODA Partner (only valid for some countries and some models).
1.0 l/85 kW TSI engine

Output (kW at 1/min) 85/5000-5500
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/2000-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999
Body Octavia Octavia Estate
Transmission MG DSG MG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 205 205 199 198
with the mentioned gear engaged (5) (5/6a)) (5) (6)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.0 10.0/10.1a) 10.2 10.2/10.3a)

Output (kW at 1/min) 110/5000-6000
Top speed (km/h) 222 223 215 214
with the mentioned gear engaged (6) (6) (5) (6)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 8.2 8.2 8.3 8.3
1.5 l/96 kW TSI G-TEC engine

The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
Technical data 313

Output (kW at 1/min) 110/5000-6000
Top speed (km/h) 223 223 215 214
1.6 l/81 kW MPI engine

Output (kW at 1/min) 81/5800
Transmission MG AG MG AG
Top speed (km/h) 195 195 189 188

Output (kW at 1/min) 132/5100-6200
Transmission DSG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 233 226
with the mentioned gear engaged (7) (6)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 7.7 7.7
314 Technical data

Output (kW at 1/min) 140/4200-6000
Transmission DSG DSG 4x4 DSG DSG 4x4
Top speed (km/h) 236 232 230 226/217a)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 7.3 6.7 7.4 6.8/7.2a)
a) Applies to Octavia Combi Scout vehicles.

Output (kW at 1/min) 180/5000-6700 (180/5000-6200)a)
Body Octavia RS Octavia Combi RS
Top speed (km/h) 250 250 246 244
a) Applies to cars with the EU6BG emission standard.
1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR engine

Output (kW at 1/min) 85/3250-4000
Transmission MG MG 4x4 DSG MG MG 4x4 DSG
Top speed (km/h) 205 200 204 198 194 198
with the mentioned gear engaged (5) (6) (7) (5) (6) (7)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.2 11.6 10.4 10.4 11.9 10.5
Technical data 315

Output (kW at 1/min) 105/3500-4000
Top speed (km/h) 219 213 212 207

Output (kW at 1/min) 110/3500-4000
DSG 4x4
Transmission MG DSG DSG 4x4 MG DSG DSG 4x4
Scout
Top speed (km/h) 223 221 214 216 213 209/208a) 200
with the mentioned gear engaged (6) (7) (7) (6) (7) (6) (6)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 8.5 8.9 8.6/8.7a) 8.6 9.1 8.7/8.9a) 9.2/9.4a)

Output (kW at 1/min) 135/3500-4000
DSG DSG 4x4 DSG DSG 4x4 DSG 4x4
Transmission DSG 4x4 DSG 4x4
RS RS RS RS Scout
Top speed (km/h) 229 231 227 223 226 219 213
with the mentioned gear engaged (6) (6) (6) (6) (6) (6) (6)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 7.2 8.1 7.6 7.4 8.3 7.8 7.8
316 Technical data

Adjusting seats manually 84 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 211
Index
Advice on tyre/wheel usage 279 Anti-theft alarm system 63
aim Trailer 258
A
Favourite 182 Anti-theft wheel bolts 287
A2DP/AVRCP 162 Flagged destination 182 APN 135, 162
Abort route guidance 192 Online goals 182 Apple CarPlay 173
ABS 42, 211 own goal 184 applications
ACC 48 saved destination 182 Disclaimer 122
see Automatic Distance Control 234 search 179
Armrest
Accessories 260 Telephone contact 182
Front 86
Activation of online services 14 vCard 182
Rear 88
Active steering assist (DSR) 213 Air-conditioning system
Ashtray 100
Adaptive chassis (DCC) 49, 241 Air outlet vents 118
ASR 212
Adaptive cruise control Airbag 25
Assembling the
Set/change desired speed 237 Adjustments and impairments on the airbag
bar ball, Step 1 252
Warning light 41 system 261
bar ball, Step 2 252
Deactivation 27
Adaptive Cruise Control 48 Assist systems 210
Deployment 25
automatic stopping and starting 236 AT THE 144
Warning light 43
Malfunctions 238 Audio source 149
Operation 235 Airbag system 25
Air conditioning 114 Auto-Check-Control
Operation overview 236
Air Care 118 Vehicle condition 50
Overtaking 238
Air distribution control 117 Automatic consumer shutdown 277
Radar sensor 210
Setting the distance 237 Climatronic 115 Automatic Distance Control 234
Special driving conditions 237 Manual air conditioning 115 Settings in Infotainment 235
Start control 236 Air conditioning system 122 Automatic drive
Stop/resume control 236 Air distribution control 117 Selector lever 205
Trailer towing 238 Air outlet vents 118 Automatic driving light control 73
AdBlue 270 Alarm 63 Automatic gearbox
Check level 271 Trailer 258 Disengage selector lever 206
indicator light 47 All season tyres 282 Kickdown 207
refill 271 Alphanumeric keyboard 126 Launch control 207
Additional keyboard languages 134, 141 Malfunction 45
Alternative routes 139
additional window 179 Manual shifting on the multifunction steering
Ambient lighting 78
wheel 206
Additional windows Amundsen Selector lever-emergency unlocking 296
Manoeuvre 191 external module 124 Selector lever lock 206
Adjusting Infotainment description 123 Start and drive 207
Steering wheel 21 Android Auto 172
Index 317
Tiptronic 206 Switch on/off 142 Broadcasting 144
Warning light 45 Update 132, 135 Bulbs
Automatic switch-off of Infotainment 127 Updates 142 Replacing 301
Automatic transmission 205 Visibility 134, 142 Button in driver's door
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila- Bluetooth Player 150 Electric windows 68
tion) 119 Bluetooth® update 159
In infotainment 120 Bolero C
set to 119 external module 124 Call list
Auxiliary heating (heating and ventilation) Infotainment description 123 Call list 165
Radio remote control 120 Bonnet 273 CAR 198
Avoiding damage to your vehicle 209 Boot Car battery
Class N1 vehicles 110 Automatic consumer shutdown 277
B Stow roof rack 113 Check condition 278
ball bar Boot lid 64 Cover 278
ready position 251 Automatic locking 64 Disconnecting and reconnecting 278
Ball head Open/close 64, 65 Replacing 278
Check fitting 253 See boot lid 64 Winter operation 278
Ready position 251 Brake Assist (HBA) 213 Car care
Bass tones 133 Brake booster 203 Interior 265
Battery Brake fluid 276 Car computer
Changing batteries for the removable light 294 Check 276 see multifunction display 52
Changing in key 294 specification 276 Care and maintenance 260
Replace the battery in the remote control in Brake linings Care Connect 16
the auxiliary heating 294 Warning light 44 Cargo element 107
Belts 22 Brake pads Car park 181
Belt tensioners 24 new 203 CarStick 168
Blind spot monitoring assistant Brake pedal (automatic gearbox) CD 149
Activation / deactivation 221 Warning light 45 cellphone
Bluetooth Brakes Disclaimer 122
A2DP / AVRCP 134 Brake booster 203 Central locking 59
Name 134 Brake fluid 276 Problems 63
on / off 134 Braking and stabilisation systems 211
Central locking button 61
Paired external devices 134 Handbrake 203
Information on braking 203 Changing
Profiles 162
Run in 207 Batteries for the removable light 294
rSAP 160
Warning light 41 Battery 294
Set 142
Wheels 285
set to 134, 137 Brake system 211
Windscreen wiper blades 297
Set to 134 Breakdown call 163
Changing a wheel 285
318 Index
Changing gear Sticker 269 Crew Protect Assist 243
Selector lever 205 tank inspection 49 Cruise Control System 231
Tiptronic 206 Warning light 45 Cup holders 93
Charging a vehicle battery 278 Cockpit 35
Check Lighting 76 D
Brake fluid 276 Columbus DAB 144
Engine oil 274 external module 124 additional information 144
Fit ball head properly 253 infotainment Description 122 Radio Text and images presentation 144
Oil level 274 Comfort flashing 73 Set 136, 143
Checking COMING HOME 75 DAB Slideshow 144
Battery status 278 compartments 90 Data connection
Coolant 275 Compatible sources Amundsen 168
Children and safety 29 DVD video 155 CarStick 168
Child safety lock 62 Pictures 154 Internet 168
Child seat 29 Component protection 261 rSAP 169
Classification 31 Compressed natural gas Data Connection
Installation location 31, 32 see CNG 269 Columbus 168
ISOFIX 32 Computer SIM card 169
on the front passenger seat 30, 31 see multifunction display 52 Data roaming 135
TOP TETHER 33 Data transfer of external devices 129
Conditions for pairing 159
Cigarette lighter 100 Date 133, 141
Conference call 166
Cleaning the vehicle DAY LIGHT
Configuration wizard 129
Interior 265 see Daytime running lights 72
Connect external device to the Infotainment
Outside 263
hotspot 170 Daytime running lights 72
Washing 262
Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of the ex- DCC 49, 241
Climatronic 114
ternal device 170 De-icing the windscreen and rear window 78
air distribution control 117
Automatic operation 117 Convenience operation Deactivation
Operate in Infotainment 116 Tilting / sliding sunroof 70 Airbag 27
Operating elements 115 Coolant 275 default settings 198
Clock Checking 275 Delayed locking of the boot lid
Change display 127 Refilling 275 See boot lid 64
Temperature display 36 Delete destination 189
Clothes hook 96
Warning light 46 Demo mode 140, 190
CNG 269
CORNER Destination
Gas leaks 269
See Fog lights with CORNER function 75 Enter destination using the address 180
In an accident 269
Natural gas gauge 37 Correct routing of seat belt enter in map 181
Refuel 268 22 Favourite 189
Regular checks 269 Correct seating position 19, 21 final destinations 182
Index 319
Home address 183 Display of a low temperature 48 DVD-Video
Image with GPS 185 Display of the instrument cluster Select video source 154
Map point 181 Menus in the display of the instrument clus- DVD video
Memory 189 ter 54 Compatible sources 155
Types of destination search/destination en- Display POIs in the map 181 Supported file formats 155
try 179 Display when the light is switched off Dynamic Road Sign Display
Destination details 189 indicator light 47 Additional display 248
Destination management Distance warning 239 Operation 247
Destination details 189 Diverting calls 137 Dynamic route 197
Favourite 189
Door
Storage 189
Child safety lock 62
E
Diesel 268 Emergency locking 295 Economical driving 208
Diesel fuel 268 Emergency locking of the driver's door 295 Economy mode
Digital clock 50 Opening/ Closing 62 Warning light 48
Digital instrument cluster 38 Door alarm 49 Edit route 192
display 38 double hooks 104 EDR 8
Map 188 Drive EDS 212
operation 39 Driving through water 209 Electrical boot lid
pre-selection options 39
DriveGreen 208 set the top position of the lid 66
Setting the map display 139
Driver information system 49 Electrical power windows 69
Turn the map display on / off 178
Driving Electric boot lid
Digital service schedule 56
Emissions 308 Force limiter 64
Dipped beam 72
Fuel consumption 308 Manual operation 64
Dipstick 274 Maximum speed 313 Open/close 65
Directive 2014/53/EU 9 through water 209 Electric power windows 67
Disclaimer Driving mode 241 Malfunctions 69
applications 122 Adaptive chassis (DCC) 241 Electric tailgate
external devices 122 Comfort 242 Malfunctions 66
Mobile phones 122 Eco 241 Electric Windows
display Individual 242 Button in driver’s door’ 68
Petrol / diesel storage 37 Individual mode settings 243 Electronic Differential Lock (EDL, XDS) 212
Display Mode selection and Infotainment display 243
Electronic immobiliser 199
Coolant temperature 36 Normal 242
Gear changes 50 Offroad 242 Elevation 176
In the instrument cluster 49 Sports 242 emergency
Natural gas / petrol gauge 37 Driving Mode Selection 241 Jump-starting 291
Display information on sporty driving in Info- Starting the engine / stopping at the push of a
DSR 213
tainment 51 button 201
DVD 149
320 Index
Emergency Refilling 274 Finish route guidance 191
Changing a wheel 285 Specification 274 Fire extinguisher 284
Hazard warning light system 76 Warning light 46 First aid kit 284
Jump-starting 291 Engine revolutions counter 36 Flagged destination 182
Lever-release 296 Enter destination 180, 181 Flashing 73
Starting the engine / stopping the push of a EPC 43 Floor covering in the luggage compartment 105
button 200
equalizer 133 Flooring in the luggage compartment 105
Towing the using the tow hitch 293
ESC Floor mats 205
Towing the vehicle 292
ESC Sport 211 See Floor mats 205
Tyre repair 288
Operation 211 FM 144
Unlocking/locking the door 295
Unlocking / locking the door 295 Event Data Recorder 8 Set 136, 142
Emergency call 16, 163 External device data transfer 134, 141 Fog lights 75
Emergency equipment External devices Warning light 45
Fire extinguisher 284 Disclaimer 122 Fog lights/rear fog light 75
First aid kit 284 External module 124 Fog lights with CORNER function 75
Jack 285 CD / DVD 149 Foils 263
Reflective vest 284 SD card 150
Folding table 96
Vehicle tool kit 285 SIM card 162
Force limiter
Warning triangle 284 Video DVD 154
Electric boot lid 64
Emergency spare Sliding/tilting roof 70
F
Removing/stowing 286 Window 68
Emission control system 42 Factory settings 134, 142 Front assist
Emissions 308 Familiarize yourself with the vehicle 2 Warning light 48
Engine Fastening elements 102 Front Assist 239
Information messages 46 Fatigue detection Disable/enable 241
Run in 207 Fatigue detection system 248 Distance warning 239
Engine compartment 272 Fatigue detection system 248 Malfunctions 241
Brake fluid 276 Favourite 182, 189 Operation 239
Coolant 275 file formats Pedestrian recognition 240
Engine oil 274 media 151 Radar sensor 210
Overview 273 Requirements and Restrictions 151 Settings in Infotainment 239
Vehicle battery 277 File formats Warning and automatic braking 240
Windscreen washer fluid 274 DVD video 155 Front head restraints
Engine drag torque control (MSR) 212 Pictures 154 Adjust height 88
Engine number 306 Find Front seats 84
Engine oil 274 Car park 181 fuel
Check 274 Petrol station 181 Gasoline / Diesel gauge 37
Oil changing 274 Restaurant 181
Index 321
Fuel 266 Headrests 88 POI categories 184
Diesel 268 Heating 114, 115 POI categories (online) 177, 185
Natural gas / petrol gauge 37 Air distribution control 117 Routes (online) 193
refer to Fuel 266 Mirrors 82 Import contacts 137
Refuel CNG 268 Seats 89 Inertia reels 24
Refuelling 266 Steering wheel 89 Information about the towing process 292
Unleaded petrol 267 Windscreen and rear window 78 Information call 163
Warning light 44 High-beam assistant 47 Information system 49
Fuel consumption 308 High beam Gear recommendation 50
Fuel filter 48 Light Assist 74 Lap timer 55
Fuel options 140 Hill Descent Assist 214 Menus in the display of the instrument clus-
Fuel reserve Hill Start Assist 213 ter 54
Petrol/diesel 44 hitch 255 Multifunction display 52
Functional surfaces 125 Hitch 250 Service interval display 56
Fuses 297 Home address 139, 183 Stopwatch 55
in the engine compartment 300 HOME button 129 infotainment Description
in the switchboard 298, 299 Columbus 122
HOME main screen 129
Plastic clip 300 Infotainment description
Hook 104
Amundsen 123
G Horn 35
Bolero 123
Hotspot Swing 124
Gearbox
Connect 170
Information messages 45 Infotainment gesture control 127
Set 170
Gear change Infotainment language 134, 141
Gear recommendation 50 I Infotainment menus
Information on the selected gear 50 Grid display 128
I-PAD holder 100 Horizontal display 128
Gear changing
lever 204 Ignition lock 200 Infotainment Online 17
Genuine parts 260 Images Infotainment operation 125
Display 137 Infotainment screen 125
Glasses storage box 95
main menu 153
GPS 176 Infotainment operation using an application in
Operation 153
Graphical driving recommendations 191 the external device 129
safe removal of the data source 134
Select Image Source 153 Infotainment Overview 122
H Set to 137 Infotainment restart 127
Handbrake 203 Image viewer 153 Infotainment screen 133, 141
Warning light 40 Immobiliser 199 Areas 125
hand gestures 127 Important information 124
import
Hazard warning light system 76 keyboard 126
Destinations (online) 185
HBA 213 Objectives (vCard) 184
322 Index
Maintenance 124 Key Daytime running lights 72
Operation 125 Changing battery 294 Flash 73
Input screen Lock 59 Fog lights/rear fog light 75
Language characters 141 Switching the ignition on/off 200 Fog lights with CORNER function 75
Input screen with keyboard 126 Unlock 59 Hazard warning light system 76
Instrument cluster 36 keyboard 126 Headlight cleaning system 81
digital 38 key CAR 198 LED headlights 74
Vehicle condition 50 Light Assist 74
Warning lights 39 L Parking light 76
Replacing bulbs 301
interior light 77 L-band 136
Turn signal/main beam 73
Interior lights 77 Lamp failure 47
Light Assist 74
Ambient lighting 78 Lamps See Light Assist 74
Interior monitor 63 Warning light 47
Lighting
Intermediate target 189 Lane Assist 44, 244 Ambient lighting 78
Internet 168 Malfunctions 246 Entry space 76
Amundsen 168 Settings in Infotainment 245 Interior lighting 76
CarStick 168 Lane Departure Warning Luggage compartment 102
Columbus 168 Activation / deactivation 246 Lights
rSAP 169 Operation 245 Automatic driving light control 73
SIM card 169 Lane recommendation 191 Dipped beam 72
ISOFIX 32 Language characters 134 Driving abroad 76
Lap timer 55 Headlight range control 72
J
Last destinations 182 Parking lights 72
Jack 285 Latitude 176 Switching on and off 72
- fit 288 LEAVING HOME 75 Warning lights 39
Journey 53 LED headlights 74 List
Jukebox 151 Lever of available stations 145
Jump-starting 291 ACC 236 of telephone contacts 164
Cruise control 232 With folder / track list 148
K Operation of the information system 51 List of available hotspots 170
KESSY Speed limiter with ACC 234 List of paired external devices 162
deactivating 60 Speed limiter with CCS 233 List of traffic reports 196
Starting engine / Stopping 200 Turn signal/main beam 73 Load 308
Switching the ignition on/off 200 Windscreen wipers 80, 81 Location Services 15
Unlocking / locking 60 Liability for defects 6 Lock
key Light 72 Individual settings 61
Starting engine / Stopping 200 Cockpit 76 KESSY 60
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 75 Key 59
Index 323
Locking MirrorLink® 174 Main menu 178
Central locking button 61 radio 144 Manual scale 186
in case of emergency 295 Main menu Map alignment 187
Remote control 59 Media 147 Operation 178
Lock steering lock 199 Media Command 156 POI display 139
Long cargo channel 97 Navigation 178 Road Signs 188
Longitude 176 SmartLink 172 Traffic sign display 139
SMS 166 |Alignment 187
Luggage compartment 102
Compartment with cargo element 107 Video DVD 154 Maximum speed 313
Cover 105 Waypoint mode 194 MCB 213
Fastening elements 102 WLAN 169 Mechanical window lifter 67
Fastening the flooring 105 Make up mirror 79 open/close 67
Fixing nets 103 Manage favourites 143 media
Floor covering on both sides 105 Manage Favourites 137 Compatible sources 151
foldable hook 104 Manage memory 139 file formats 151
Folding double hooks 104 Management of online services 15 Requirements and Restrictions 151
Lighting 102 Management of online services ŠKODA Con- serve 147
Net on the luggage compartment cover 105 nect 142 USB 93, 150
Net partition 112 Media
Management of ŠKODA Connect Online Serv-
Removable light 109 Audio source 149
ices 135
Roll-up cover 106 Bluetooth Audio 150
Managing paired devices 162
Storage compartments under the floor cover- Browser 148
ing 108 Managing saved routes 193
CD / DVD 149
unlock manually 295 Manoeuvre Jukebox 151
Unlock the boot lid 295 Graphical driving recommendations 191 List 148
Variable loading floor 110 Navigation announcements 191 Main menu 147
Luggage compartment cover 105 Manual air conditioning Multimedia database 148
Roll-up cover 106 Air distribution control 117 Playback control 147
Luggage storage Controls 115 safe removal of the data source 134
Multi-function pocket 109 Manual gear changing Safe removal of the data source 141
See Gear changing 204 SD card 150
M Map Setting 137
Automatic scale 186 Set to 143
Main beam 73
Display 178 Voice control 130
Warning light 45
Display options 186 WLAN 151
main menu
Display options in the split screen 188 Media Command
Android car 173
Display POIs 181 Control 157
Apple carplay 174
Fast Map 186 Main menu 156
Images 153
in the digital instrument cluster 188 Supported formats 157
Lane recommendations 139
324 Index
Memory 53 Natural gas operation Map alignment 187
Memory Function for the seat 85 Warning light 45 Map display in the digital instrument cluster 188
Menus in the display of the instrument clus- Natural gas tank test 49 Map display options 186
ter 54 navigation Map scale 186
Apple CarPlay 55 additional window 179 Most common routes 191
audio menu item 54 Contacts 182 Navigation announcements 140, 191
Lap timer 55 destination search 179 Navigation data 177
Main menu 54 Favourites 182 Navigation data update 177
navigation menu item 54 Map orientation 187 Options for map display in the split screen 188
Operation 51 route list 193 Preferred type of route 139
phone Menu item 55 Start the route guidance 190 Route 189
Stopwatch 55 target import 184 Route calculation 190
wizard menu item 55 target memory 182 Route change 193
Mirror 79, 81 Update navigation data online 177 Route details 192
Working with the navigation 176 Route display 186
MirrorLink® 174
Navigation Route display in the split screen 188
MODE button
Abort route guidance 192 Route guidance 189
See driving mode 241
Advanced settings 140 Route information 192
Modes of the automatic transmission 205 Route options 139
Alternative routes 139
Modifications and technical alterations 260 Set to 139
Demo mode 140, 190
Most common routes 191 Status line 140
Destination address 180
MSR 212 Destination details 189 Top speeds 140
Multi-function pocket 109 Destination display 186 Traffic obstruction 197
Multicollision brake (MCB) 213 Destination in map 181 Trailer towing 190
Multifunctional steering wheel 51 Destination presentation in the split screen 188 Transit point 193
Multifunction display Dynamic route 139 Types of destination search/destination en-
Functions 52 Edit route 192 try 179
Information Overview 52 Final destinations 182 Update the navigation data 140
Memory 53 Finish route guidance 191 Version information 140
Foreword 176 Voice control 130
Multifunction pocket 104
Fuel options 140 Waypoint mode 194
multimedia
GPS 176 Navigation announcements 140, 191
see media 147
Graphical driving recommendations 191 navigation data 177
Multimedia database 148
Home address 183 Navigation data 177
Multimedia holder 94
Image with GPS 185 Navigation data update 177
Mute 128 Imported destinations 139 Net partition 112
MyŠKODA App application 11 Intermediate target 189 Nets 103, 105
Main menu 178
N Manage memory 139
N1 110 Map 139
Index 325
Network Online services Park
Data connection 135 Deleting the user 14 Rear traffic alert 218
Data roaming 135 Electronic Owner's Manual 14 Park assist
setting 135 Instruction video 14 Parking 227
set to 137 Private mode 15 Park Assist 225
Values of the downloaded data 135 Services Management 15 Automatic brake assist 229
New route 193 Switching user 14 Leaving a parallel parking space 228
NGVs ŠKODA Connect Portal website 13 Malfunctions 229
see CNG 269 Online Services 13 Operation 226
Notes 12 Activation in Infotainment 14 Parking 228
Care Connect 16 Search for parking space 226
O Infotainment Online 17 Switch to park mode 227
Location Services 15 Park assistant
Off-road mode
proactive service 16 Activation/deactivation 221
indicator light 48
Remote access to the vehicle 17 Parking 204
Offroad 213 Service package 13
Hill Descent Assist 214 Park Assist 225
Status Symbols of Online Services 15 Parking aid 215
Offroad mode ŠKODA Connect website 13
See Offroad 213 Rear View Camera 221
Online services ŠKODA Connect Parking aid 215
oil enable service 142
see Engine oil 274 Automatic emergency braking 218
Opening/closing Automatic system activation when moving for-
Oil changing contactless boot lid 66 ward 218
Engine oil 274 opening/closing contactless boot lid 66 Operation 216
On-board computer Operating the Infotainment menus 126 Settings in Infotainment 215
see multifunction display 52
Operating weight 306 Parking assistance
On-line Activation / deactivation 217
Operation
destination search 179
Images 153 Parking lights 72
Detail of the traffic report 197
Telephone 158 Parking sensors
Import POI categories 177, 185
route import 193 Original accessories 260 Display Infotainment screen 217
target import 182, 185 Overhang angle 312 Parking the vehicle
Update navigation data 177 Overview see Parking 204
Online Cockpit 35 Parking ticket holder 91
Destinationdetails 189 Engine compartment 273 ParkPilot 215
Find car park 181 Fuses 297 Particulate Filter 47
Find petrol station 181 Warning lights 39 Part replacement 260
List of traffic reports 196 Own POI categories 184, 185 Passive safety
Navigation data update 177 Before setting off 19
Online goals 182 P Driving safety 19
Pairing process 159
326 Index
Passive Safety 19 Requirements and restrictions 154 R
Pedals 205 Supported file formats 154
Floor mats 205 Pin code Rack 113
Personalisation set to 137 Radiator shutters 209
Configuration wizard 129 Playback radio
Personalization 57 Media 147 Broadcasting 144
Operating principle 57 Video DVD 154 main menu 144
Overview of some personalized functions 57 Pockets 96 Radio stations Logo 145, 146
Set 58 scan 144
Pockets in the luggage compartment 104
serve 144
Petrol 267 POI 184, 185
Radio
Petrol station 181 POIs 181
L-band 136
Petrol station logo 139 Pop-up window List of available stations 145
phone Map 188 Set 136, 142
connect to the infotainment 159 Power limit Traffic program (TP) 146
couple 159 Tilt / slide sunroof 70 Voice control 130
Phone Power steering 41 Radio equipment
Adjust text messages 137 Power windows Information on Directive 2014/53/EU 9
Bluetooth® update 159 Button in the front passenger door 68 Radio remote control
Clear calls 137 Button in the rear doors 68 Auxiliary heating (heating and ventilation) 120
Compatibility 159 Practical features Radio station 145
Diverting calls 137 Ashtray 100 Preset buttons 145
Import contacts 137 Cigarette lighter 100
Introductory information 158 Radio station logos 145, 146
Glasses storage box 95 Update 135
Manage Favourites 137 Parking ticket holder 91
Phone call 165 radio stations
Pockets 96
Premium 137 Select channels and search 144
Reflective vest 284
rSAP 160 Raising the vehicle 288
Seat backrest with long cargo channel 97
Settings call 137 Storage compartment 90 Rear fog light 75
set to 137 Storage compartment for umbrella 95 Warning light 42
User profile 137 Waste container 93 Rear headrests
Voice control 130 Adjusting the height 88
Preferred contacts 164
Phonebox 92 Removing/inserting 88
Preheating unit 43
Phone call 165 Rear seats 87
Principles of Infotainment operation 125
Phone compatibility 159 Rear traffic alert 218
Private mode 15
Phone Premium Rear Traffic Alert
Proactive passenger protection 243
SIM card 162 Malfunctions 221
Proactive passenger protection warning light 43
Pictures Operation 219
Proactive service 16
Compatible sources 154 Rear View Camera 221
File formats 154 Puncture repair kit 288
Rear view mirror 81
Index 327
Rear window - heating 78 Reset counter for distance driven (trip) 49 Headrests 88
Record waypoints 194 Restaurant 181 ISOFIX 32
Refill Rims 279 TOP TETHER 33
Windscreen washer fluid 274 Road Signs SAFE, SAFELOCK
refilling infotainment display 188 See SafeLock 61
AdBlue 270 Roller blind Save radio
Refilling see Luggage compartment cover 106 Save channel 145
Coolant 275 Roof Saving electrical energy 208
Engine oil 274 Weight 113 Saving fuel 208
Reflective vest 284 Roof rack 113 Scraper 264
Refuelling 266 route Screen
Fuel 266 new route 193 see Infotainment screen 124
Register online services Online Route Import 193 Screen display 125
settings 135, 142 route list 193 SD card 150
Registration of online services Route 189 Safe removal 141
Electronic Owner's Manual 14 Store route 192 search
Instruction video 14 Route calculation 190 aim 179
Regulation Trailer towing 190 Online goals 179
Headlight beam 72 Route details 192 Search
Remote access to the vehicle 17 Route information 192 Types of destination search/destination en-
Remote control route list 193 try 179
Changing battery 294 Route options 139 Seat belt
Synchronisation process 63 rSAP 160 height adjustment 22
Unlocking/locking 59 Data connection 169 Warning light 41, 45
Remote transfer of SIM data 160 Run-in Seat belts 22
Removable light 109 Engine 207 Belt tensioners 24
Changing batteries 294 fastening and unfastening 23
Running in
Removable through-loading bag 97 Inertia reels 24
Brake pads 203
Removing the Tyres 279 Seat electrical adjustment 84
bar ball, Step 1 253 Seats
bar ball, Step 2 254 S Electrical adjustment 84
Repairs and technical alterations 260 Folding front passenger seat 86
SafeLock 61
Replace Front 84
Safe removal of the data source 134, 141 Front armrest 86
Battery 294 Safety 19 Headrests 88
Replacing Airbag 25 Heating 89
Bulbs 301 Child safety 29 Manually adjusting 84
Fuses 297 Child seats 29 Memory Function of the electrically adjustable
Windscreen wiper blades 296 Correct seating position 19 seat 85
328 Index
Rear 87 system information 132 Update software 135
Rear armrest 88 ŠKODA Connect 142 User profile 164
Rear seat backrests 87 vehicle 198 Voice control 134
Setting 84 Video DVD 137 Volume 128
Storing in memory of remote control key 85 Settings WLAN 135
see Instrument cluster Additional keyboard languages 134, 141 Settings Call
see Instrument cluster 36 Advanced settings 140 Clear calls SettingsText messages 137
Selector lever 205 APN 135, 162 Set to
Selector lever control 205 Bluetooth 134, 137, 142 Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
Selector lever lock 45 Codecs 137 tion) 119
Configuration wizard 129 SIM card
service
DAB 136, 143 Change PIN code 162
media 147
Data connection 135 Data Connection 169
radio 144
External device data transfer 134, 141 Insert 162
Service 260
FM 136, 142 PIN code 162
Service interval display 56
Fuel options 140 Remove 162
Warning light 49
Information regarding the version of the navi- Sliding/tilting roof
Service interval 56 gation data 140 Activate operation 70
Service interval display 56 Manage favourites 164 Activating operation of the sunshade 71
Service intervals 56 Manage memory 139
SmartLink 171
Service schedule 56 Map 139
Android Auto 172
Setting Media 137, 143
Apple CarPlay 173
Headrests 88 Navigation 139
Introduction to the subject 171
Mirror 82 Navigation announcements 140
Main menu 172
Positions of the variable loading floor 110 Network 135
MirrorLink® 174
Seat belt height 22 Phone 137
SmartLink+
Seats 84 Pin code 137
Set 138, 143
Time 50 Radio 136, 142
ŠKODA OneApp application 175
settings Reset to factory settings 134
Restore factory settings 142 SMS
Bass tones 133
Route options 139 Main menu 166
equalizer 133
SmartLink+ 138, 143 New message 167
Images 137
Software updates 142 Received message 167
infotainment 133, 141
Sound 141 Snow chains 282
Infotainment language 134, 141
Infotainment screen 133, 141 System information 135, 142 sockets
Reset to factory settings 198 ŠKODA Connect 135 12-volt power socket in the luggage compart-
Software Update 132 Telephone 143 ment 98
sound 133 Time and date 133, 141 12-volt socket in the interior 98
sound system 133 Top speeds 140 Sockets
surround 133 Units 134, 141 230 V 99
Index 329
Software Update 132, 135 Starting the engine Switching off the ignition 200
Software updates 142 Jump-starting 291 Switching on the ignition 200
SOS button 16 Start the route guidance 190 Switching the lights on and off 72
sound 133 Status bar 125 Switch off
Sound 141 status line Alarm 63
sound system 133 Navigation 140 switch on / offTraffic
Spare wheel 281 Status line 178 dynamic route 197
Removing/stowing 286 Telephone 158 system information 132
Speed limitations 191 Status Symbols of Online Services 15 System information 135, 142
Speed limiter 45, 232 Steering lock (KESSY system) 41
Speed regulating system Steering wheel T
Warning light 45 Buttons 51 Tablet holder 100
Speed symbol 282 Heating 89 Tailgate 64
Proper posture 20 target memory 182
Spoiler 261
Setting 21
Sports information 51 TCS 42
Stop engine 200
Sporty driving Technical data 306
Stopping
information 51 telephone
see Parking 204
Spurhalteassistent 244 conditions for pairing 159
Stopwatch 55
SSID 135 Telephone
Storage 90 Additional telephone 160
Stabilisation system 211
Storage compartments Bluetooth Profiles 162
Stability Control (ESC) 42, 211
see Practical features 90 Breakdown call 163
Standby 127
Stored destinations Call list 165
START-STOP 201 Final destinations 182 Conference call 166
Jump-starting 291 target memory 182 Connection types 160
manually activate/ deactivate system 202
Store destination 189 Dialling the telephone number 163
Operation 201
Storing Emergency call 163
Warning light 48
seats 85 Enter telephone number 163
START-STOP system 201
Storing skis 97 Functions 163
Start engine 200 Import contacts 143
Sunblind for the tilt / slide sunroof 71
Immobiliser 199 Information service 163
Jump-starting 291 Sun visors 79
Main menu 158
starter button Supported sources
Main telephone 160
Starting engine / Stopping 200 media 151
Manage favourites 143
Starter button surround 133
Operation 158
Lock / unlock the steering lock 199 Swing Pairing process 159
Problems with the engine start 201 Infotainment description 124 Preferred contacts 164
Switching the ignition on/off 200 Switch rSAP 160
Car battery 278
330 Index
Set 143 Towing the vehicle 292 Transport
SIM card 160 Traction control (ASR) 212 Luggage compartment 102
Telephone 158 Traction control (TCS) 42 Roof rack 113
Telephone book 164 traffic Towing device and trailer 250
Text messages (SMS) 166 Detail of the traffic report 197 Transporting children 29
User profile 143 Triangle 284
Traffic
Voicemail 163 TSA 213
List of traffic reports 196
Telephone book 164 Turning off Infotainment 127
Traffic Information (TMC) 197
Telephone connection types 160 Turning on Infotainment 127
Traffic jam 197
Telephone functions 163 Turn signal 73
Traffic obstruction 197
Telephone number 163 Turn signal system
Traffic program (TP) 146
Telephone Premium Warning light 44
Traffic reports (TMC) 196
rSAP 160 Tutorial videos 11
Traffic sign recognition 246
Text messages 166 Type plate 306
Traffic Sign Recognition
Through-loading bag 97 Tyre
dysfunction 248
Tilt / slide sunroof Information messages 248 Wear indicator 281
Operation 70 Settings in Infotainment 247 Tyre load capacity 282
Sunblind 71
Traffic signs Tyre pressure 280
Time 50, 133, 141 see Traffic sign recognition 246 Warning light 43
Time and date display in the Infotainment Trailer Tyre pressure monitor
screen 127 Connect and disconnect 255 refer to the tyre pressure monitoring 249
Tiptronic 206 Load 256 Tyre pressure monitoring 249
TMC loading 255 Warning light 43
Detail of the traffic report 197 Towing a trailer 258 Tyre Pressure Monitoring
dynamic route 197 Trailer Assist 229 Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotain-
List of traffic reports 196 Trailer manoeuvring assistant 229 ment display 249
Tools 285 Activation / deactivation 230 Tyre repair 288
Top speeds 140 Automatic brake intervention 231 Tyres 279
TOP TETHER 33 Manoeuvring 230 damage 279
Touch screen 124 Operating principle 230 Explanation of the label 282
Towing 292, 293 Trailer stabilisation system (TSA) 213 new 279
Towing a trailer 258 Trailer towing 250 Tyre pressure 280
Towing device navigation 190 Tyre size 282
Accessories 254 Transit point 193
Description 250 transmitter U
Vertical load 250 See main menu 144 Units 134, 141
Towing eye 292
Towing protection 63
Index 331
Unlatch Vehicle care 261 Voicemail 163
KESSY 60 Exterior 264 Volume 128
Key 59 Outside 263 Volume setting 128
Unlock Vehicle cleaning 261
Individual settings 61 Exterior 264 W
Unlocking Windscreens 264 Waiter
Central locking button 61 Vehicle condition Voice control 131
In case of emergency 295 Auto-Check-Control 50 Warning lights 39
Remote control 59 Vehicle dimensions 309, 310 Warning symbols
Unlocking and locking 59 Vehicle height 309, 310 see Warning lights 39
Unlock steering lock 199 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 306 Warning triangle 284
Update navigation data 177 Vehicle length 309, 310 Warning when speeding 53
Update the navigation data 140 vehicle systems 198 Warranty 6
USB 93, 150 Vehicle tool kit 285 Washing the vehicle 262
Safe removal 141 Vehicle width 309, 310 Waste container 93
Useful equipment Vest 284 Water in the fuel filter 48
230-volt socket 99 Video DVD
Clothes hook 96 Waypoint mode 194
Main menu 154 Main menu 194
Cup holders 93 Playback 154
Multimedia holder 94 Record waypoints 194
Set to 137 Set waypoint manually 194
Removable through-loading bag 97
Video DVD menu 155 Waypoint tour memory 195
Useful Features Menu 155
12-volt power socket in the luggage compart- Waypoint tour memory 195
video player 154 Weather conditions 260
ment 98
VIN Weights 306, 308
12-volt socket in the interior 98
Vehicle Identification Number 306 Wheel bolts
Useful links 2
Virtual pedal Anti-theft wheel bolts 287
User account
see operating contactless boot lid 66 Caps 287
Configuration wizard 129
Visibility 78 Loosening and tightening 287
User profile 137, 143
Visors 79 Wheels 279
V Voice control 130 Changing 285
Commands 131 Full trim 286
Variable loading floor 110 Correction of a voice command input 131 Load Index 282
vCard 182, 184 Help 131 Snow chains 282
Vehicle - Settings 198 Not recognising a voice command 131 Speed symbol 282
Vehicle battery on / off 130 Tyre age 279
charging 278 Operation principle 131 Tyre damage 279
Safety instructions 277 Settings 134 Tyre pressure 280
Warning light 45 Stop / restore command 131 Tyre storage 279
332 Index
Unidirectional tires 279 WLAN 151, 169
Winter tyres 282 Client 170
Window convenience operation 69 Connect 170
Window operation 67 Connect to hotspot 170
Windows Set hotspot 170
operating 67 Switch hotspot on/off 169
WPS 135, 170
Windscreen - heating 78
WLAN client
Windscreen washer fluid
set to 135
Refill 274
Warning light 47 WLAN Client 170
Windscreen washing systems 79 WPS 135, 170
Windscreen wipers and washers 79
X
Activation 80
Replacing the windscreen wiper blade 297 XDS 212
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 296
Service position of the windscreen wiper Other Characters
arms 296 ŠKODA Connect
Winter operation 282 register 142
All season tyres 282 Register 135
Car battery 278 see Online Services 13
Diesel fuel 268 services Manager 142
Snow chains 282 Services Manager 135
Winter tyres 282 Set 135
Winter tyres 282 set to 142
Wiper and Washers ŠKODA Connect Online Services
Automatic rear window wipers 81 Enable services 135
Wipers and washer Register 135
Warning light for windscreen washer fluid lev- ŠKODA OneApp application 175
el 47
Wipers and washers
Activate 81
Refill fluid 274
Wiping interval 80
Wireless Internet Hotspot
set to 135
Wizard for blind spot monitoring 218
Driving situations and warnings 220
Operation 220
Index 333
334 Index
Index 335
Reprinting, duplicating, translating and any other use, either in whole or in part, Subject to change.
is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2018
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Octavia anglicky 07.2018
5E0012720AP

5E0012720AP

Skoda Octavia 5E5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Skoda Octavia 5E5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Skoda Octavia 5E5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OWNER´S MANUAL

Vehicle and Infotainment

Date of vehicle handovera)  

Stamp and signature of the vendor

Signature of the customer

Has the vehicle an extended warranty? Yes  No 

6 Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for new cars

Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for new cars 7

8 Accident data recorder (Event Data Recorder)

Your vehicle has various radio systems.

Radio equipment - Information on Directive 2014/53/EU 9

10 About the Owner's Manual

Application MyŠKODA App

12 About the Owner's Manual

The Infotainment must be connected to the Internet for the “Infotainment

Fig. 10 Emergency call button

Main menu and overview of services

Fig. 12 ŠKODA Connect application

Fig. 14 Correct seated position for the driver/correct steering wheel

 Read and observe on page 20 first.

WARNING Correct routing of seat belt

Inertia reel and belt tensioners

Fig. 19 Airbag installation points

Airbag installation points » Fig. 19

Transporting children safely 29

Transporting children safely 31

Use of child safety seats with the  system

Attachment points of the   system WARNING

Transporting children safely 33

Engine revolutions counter

The display only works if the ignition is switched on. 

Fuel gauge - Petrol/ Diesel Fig. 32

The display only works if the ignition is switched on.

Instruments and warning lights 37

Fig. 34 Digital instrument cluster

1 Bar with warning lights » page 39

Set the pre-selection option

Instruments and warning lights 39

 Read and observe on page 40 first. Fault in the power steering

Instruments and warning lights 41

 lights up – there is an ESC or TCS fault.  lights up – there is an ABS fault.

 Safety systems Change of tyre pressure values

Instruments and warning lights 43

 Read and observe on page 40 first.  Trailer turn signal lights

Instruments and warning lights 45

 Coolant  Engine oil level

Coolant level too low Engine oil level too low

Instruments and warning lights 47

 illuminates – the conditions for the engagement of Offroad mode are

 lights up – information regarding a service appointment that is due

Display information on sporty driving in Infotainment

Operation using the multifunctional steering wheel

Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel

range / with natural gas / petrol.

Symbols in the display Time measurement

Overview of some personalized functions

 Read and observe on page 57 first.

Setting the personalization

› In Infotainment in the menu  /  tap on function surface  → Personalisa-

Unlocking and locking Fig. 49